JP2022121637A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase the interest of a game.SOLUTION: In a game machine having display means capable of displaying multiple types of images, one of the multiple types of images is a set of performance symbols capable of notifying a player of a win or a loss. Before starting movement in a variation direction, the set of performance symbols move in directions in which multiple performance symbols out of the set of performance symbols move and which are different from the variation direction, respectively. After that, a first performance to move in the variation direction can be executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 66

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, display effects using character images, patterns, and the like can be performed.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of production patterns capable of informing a win or a loss,
Before the set of performance symbols starts moving in the variable direction, a plurality of performance symbols out of the set of performance symbols move in directions different from each other and in directions different from the fluctuation direction, After that, it is possible to execute the first effect that moves in the fluctuation direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application example 2]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 1,
In the first production,
One or more of the plurality of production patterns may move in a direction opposite to the direction of fluctuation,
One or more of the plurality of production patterns may move in a direction perpendicular to the fluctuation direction,
One or more of the plurality of production patterns may move in a direction oblique to the direction of fluctuation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Application Example 3]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 1 or Application Example 2,
In the first production, the set of production patterns are separated from each other,
After the first production, a second production is executed in which the set of production patterns is returned to the state before being separated and the fluctuation is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4; It is explanatory drawing of jackpot classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-work-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior determination processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is the 1st flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is the second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. 4 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing; It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a prior determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of basic production|presentation pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of chance up production|presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing in the middle of fluctuation production. 4 is a flowchart of display control processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a movement mode of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display effect of a sub-display screen 64; It is a figure for demonstrating the same number decorative design row production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the same number decorative design row production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the same number decorative design row production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design number change production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design number change production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative design number change production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the number-of-decorative-symbols-images change production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the number-of-decorative-symbols image change production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the number-of-decorative-designs-images change production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation|variation direction change production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation|variation direction change production|presentation B. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a variation direction change effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a first movable accessory-linked effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a first movable accessory-linked effect B; It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st movable accessory interlocking production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design movement fluctuation production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design movement fluctuation production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design movement fluctuation production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a frame-out variation effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a frame-out variation effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a frame-out variation effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design mode change production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design mode change production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design mode change production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-designs arrangement|sequence change production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-designs arrangement|sequence change production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative-designs arrangement|sequence change production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect C; It is a diagram for explaining a winning game type notification effect A. It is a diagram for explaining a winning game type notification effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a winning game type notification effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating a pattern arrangement|sequence. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific symbol stop production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific symbol stop production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for explaining the winning mode symbol display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning mode symbol display production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit mode symbol display effect|action C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design mode change production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design mode change production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design mode change production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a number-of-games display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a number-of-games display effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a number-of-games display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an enlarged pattern display effect A; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an enlarged pattern display effect B; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating a reduced-size pattern display effect. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending image simultaneous change effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending image simultaneous change effect B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pending image simultaneous change effect C; It is a figure for demonstrating the special design reservation display production|presentation A. It is a figure for demonstrating the special design reservation display production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the special design reservation display production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pseudo-continuous effect A during a specific change; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pseudo-continuous effect B during a specific change; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a pseudo-continuous performance C during a specific change; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation means image display effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation means image display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation means image display effect C; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a numerical image display effect A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a numerical image display effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a numerical image display effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an expectation level suggesting effect A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an expectation level suggesting effect B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an expectation level suggesting effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a screen split effect A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a split-screen effect B and a split-screen effect C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a screen cracking effect D; FIG.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Also, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on the player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have it. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62, effect button 63, sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), sword member 65, frame lamp 66, speaker 67, A frame movable body 69 is provided. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. On the right and left sides of the handle 60, movable frame bodies 69 (also referred to as movable frame accessories 69), which are movable so-called gimmicks, are provided. The frame movable body 69 is configured such that two members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60 are movable in the left-right direction. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible plate-like member, and is configured such that the main surface moves toward or away from the handle 60 . The movable frame body 69 normally rests at a retracted position (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and moves (extends) from the retracted position toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other. ) and stop at a position where the handle 60 is touched. The movable frame body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60 when it is in the advanced position.

A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is arranged inside the effect button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate vertically and horizontally according to the effect. The sword member 65 is an operation part in the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be capable of executing a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in pairs with the game board 2 interposed therebetween. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2 . The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. As shown in FIG. The sub display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, is arranged above the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and a fixed winning device (navel) 19. , a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, and a big winning opening open A starting port 17, a general winning port 27 (ordinary winning port 27), an out port 16, and indicators 40 are provided.

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper part of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 . Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display) and a reserved image display in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. and a suspended digested image display area (the suspended display area) in which the suspended digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called pending icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called the pending image 9C, the pending icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C. The pending icon 9C may also be simply called a pending icon.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A middle effect pattern (middle decoration pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area does not have to be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is also referred to as "variation effect of effect symbol", "variation effect of decorative symbol", or simply "variation effect" and "variation display". In this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special symbols start to stop until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a big win performance performed in parallel with a big win game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance symbol variation performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production pattern (the production pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) that is currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and the display of the suspended digested image 9C allows the first special figure pending or the first 2 It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that the special figure reservation is digested ("digestion of special figure suspension" described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a vertically long rod-shaped member can move in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a, and is displayed on the display screen 7a. can rest in any advanced position in front of the The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have substantially the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and covers part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom at the advanced position.

Above the image display device 7, a second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled with "OARO" can move in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and is displayed by moving (advancing) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed below the image display device 7 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which game balls flow in and an exit part from which game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part.

A fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start opening (first start winning opening, first ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination and the like.

A normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 triggers a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers acquisition of a normal symbol random number (hit random number), hit determination, and the like.

Here, the "lottery of special symbols" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is determined in advance. It is a process of determining whether or not a big hit is made by comparing with the value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, the ``lottery for normal symbols'' means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for judging normal symbols is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined ``hit''. By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 and , a V region 39 , a non-V region 70 , and a V opening/closing member 71 . The first big prize winning opening 30 is provided with an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first grand prize winning solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first prize winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the first big winning device 31 through which game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 can pass. . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to release the game ball. A first state (rotating state) in which the ball is distributed to the V area 39 is entered, and a second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is positioned at the origin and distributed to the non-V area 70 is entered when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it becomes a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the V region 39 is a variable probability operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a variable probability operating port. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31 . The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning port 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning port (second special winning port) 35 It has The second big prize winning opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The large winning opening opening start opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes. However, the gaming machine 1 does not have to include the big winning opening opening start opening 17 .

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the game area 3 . The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30 .

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning to the first start hole 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim to pass through the gate 28 and to win the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the second big winning hole 35 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of the operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern display device 44 displays the number of memory of the normal pattern display device 42 operation reservation (normal pattern reservation). The variable display of the first special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 as a trigger. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". In addition, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state, so that a lottery (lottery per special symbol) based on winning the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is displayed. , jackpot lottery) results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize winning port 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), you can say ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. If the game is lost, a lost pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variable time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not stopped (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously in the aspect of the variable display.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21 , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is digested when variable display of special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" refers to judging the jackpot random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation and executing variable display of special symbols for showing the judgment result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even when a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern in a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern with both LEDs lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: unlit). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED lights up is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not stopped (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously in the aspect of the variable display.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as a normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means to determine the normal pattern random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation, and execute the variable display of the normal pattern to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Game Machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the game machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large winning opening opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the The two major winning opening sensors 35a, the V area sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The large winning opening opening start opening sensor 17 a is provided inside the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 and detects a game ball entering the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 . The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The normal winning hole sensor 29 a detects a game ball that has passed through the normal winning hole 29 . The electric tooth solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric tooth 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general design reservation. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 for storing programs and the like for controlling the production as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 for executing the programs stored. and a CPU 92 . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols are stored. etc. (including production patterns) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . and so on. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. . The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates the light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 , the second movable accessory 15 and the frame movable accessory 69 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) for determining the motion mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69, and operates according to the motion pattern data. It controls the operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

A performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108 . The production button detection switch 63a detects that the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. FIG. A vibration motor is attached to the effect button detection switch 63a, and is driven in accordance with a signal from the relay board 108, so that the effect button 63 can be vibrated. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. A sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been detected is also connected to the relay board 108 .

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) contains a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a big winning opening pattern judgment table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern judgment table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands to be output from the main control section to the sub-control section are set in the main control main process (described later). A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later). A ceiling flag, a V flag, a variable probability flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a variable probability counter, and a time saving counter. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reservation information) such as a general pattern random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth general pattern reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also contains a win type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14 and 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer and the like are provided. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is maintained as it is without being cleared even when the game machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the commands, flags, counters, status information, and pending information described above do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by RAM clear of the gaming machine 1 . When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flags. Also, as the initial state of the counters, "500" is set in the ceiling counter and "0" is set in the other counters.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later). A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and a variable production start command, a command before the end of fluctuation, a variable production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where counters used in sub-control main processing (described later) are set, and include a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , Ceiling production counter, overnight production counter, probability variable production counter, time saving production counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight performance counter is maintained without being cleared even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the above commands, counters other than the late-night effect counter, and advance determination information do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The overnight effect counter is reset by turning off and on the power of the game machine 1, and 0 is set as an initial state. Information stored in the sub-RAM 94 is reset by RAM clear of the gaming machine 1 . When reset, 500 is set in the ceiling effect counter and 0 is set in the other counters as the initial state of the counter.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. there is The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "fluctuation pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at the timing described later. is configured as The “jackpot random number” is a random number used in a lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot type determination) for the type of the winning jackpot, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is variably displayed remains, and it depends on which design the variably displayed production pattern is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a. The “fluctuation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "fluctuation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random value group obtained based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passage through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "read-ahead effect random number" and a "chance-up random number" at timings described later. The “read-ahead effect random number” is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8 (A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and the jackpot random value is a number other than "0 to 164 (165 to 65535 )” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 649", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random value is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" is determined to be "losing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a reach random number (any of 0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". This table is referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random value is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure pending by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random number value (one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8 (C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 ~ 255)” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 254", it is determined to be "hit", and if the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , is determined as “losing”.

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This table is referenced to In FIG. 8 (D), when the "non-time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the "time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second". is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired, "jack type" and "special symbol It is a table referred to in order to determine the type. In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop design (special figure stop design) is determined as "jackpot design 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 2 The stop symbol (special figure stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (real 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. For the specific contents of "16RV planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passage planned jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the time saving state. Variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). . In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined to be "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, it is determined to be "with reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of retained balls is "1 ~ 2" and the variation pattern random number is "0 to 60", the variation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, and it is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5, variation pattern random value is "0 to 10", the variation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Also, when reach is achieved, it is also determined whether the reach is normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1-3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12 (A), when the "non-time saving state", the open pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "open pattern 11", and when the "time saving state", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 12" is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of open pattern 11 and open pattern 12 . In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the power tube 22 is opened three times with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21 ”, and when the special figure stop design data is “14H”, “15H”, “22H”, the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop design data is “13H”, open It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of open pattern 21, open pattern 22, and open pattern 23. FIG. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of times of opening is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and the first big winning opening 30 is opened once for 0.1 seconds at the 15th round (short opening). . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning port 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the opening of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is, if there is a predetermined number of game ball wins (regular winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined as "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol data When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop design data is "14H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 33", and the special figure stop design data is It is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34" when "15H" or "22H". FIG. 14B shows the contents of open pattern 31, open pattern 32, open pattern 33, and open pattern . In the opening pattern 31, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is reached. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R's, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with an opening time of maximum 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. .

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are “big wins” and “losses” as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "losing". When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. there is Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly classified into two types, namely, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The ``V passage scheduled jackpot'' operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 and the V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the big winning game. It's a big hit. Here, special figure stop symbol data 11H~14H, 21H jackpots correspond to "V passage scheduled jackpot (probability variable jackpot)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. ), or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a big win that activates the V opening/closing member 71 . Here, the jackpots with the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. Passage of a game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

The "V passage expected jackpot" includes "16RV expected passage jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot". The "16RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd big prize-winning mouth 35 for maximum 29.5 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 15R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big prize winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is short opening (Fig. It is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above description, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). In addition, as will be described later, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are performed after the jackpot game is completed. It's becoming That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is It becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is highly certain. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy high base state). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state after the jackpot is not certain. It becomes difficult to determine whether it will be a time saving state (low probability high base state) or a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). In addition, after the time-saving game is finished, the game state becomes a low probability base state (normal state) in "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state in "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" appears to be in a normal high probability low base state. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state is A high probability low base state and a high probability becomes a latent state (variable latent probability state), and it is difficult for the player to distinguish this variable latent probability state. That is, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" Low probability time saving state (low probability high base state) and “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” high-precision time-saving state (high-precision high-base state) after the jackpot game, and “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” time-saving end The later low-probability-low base state and the high-probability-low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 45/128 (about 64.8%) for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) is performed by winning a game ball in the first start port 20, and the jackpot is performed by winning a game ball in the second start port 21. The lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability variation state)", and the probability variation A non-controlled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbols. A high probability state is realized by performing a big hit determination. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, when in the time saving state, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state. The variation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning of the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally performs the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not perform it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as the probability fluctuation control of normal symbols, normal symbol hit determination table T3 ( Using FIG. 8 (C)), hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (Fig. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 . game control microcomputer 81, the probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting the winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, among the probability variation control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22 By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more likely to be opened than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a short-time state and a high-base state if the passage to the V area 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game is in the high-probability-high base state is, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot". "16RV scheduled passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are such that, in the high probability high base state, after the jackpot game, the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. ends with "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is a high-probability-high base state (latent probability variable) in which variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game. state), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is normal probability state (non-high probability state (i.e., low-probability state) and time-saving state and high-base state. This game state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes the low-probability base state is the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” among the jackpot types shown in FIG. In this jackpot, in the low-probability base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. The game ends when the game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low-base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low base state may be referred to as "normal game state" or "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply referred to as non-time-saving state)". In addition, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) may be referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)". Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may be referred to as a "specific game state".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start opening 21 than the first start opening 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than the second start opening 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to win the game ball to the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success/failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the success/failure preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. As for the initial value of the flag, the ceiling flag is "1", ie, "ON", and the initial value of the other flags is "0", ie, "OFF". The initial value of status is "1". The initial value of the counter is "500" for the ceiling counter and "0" for the other counters. Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , Normal random number) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 msec intervals). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the starting opening sensor detection process (step S103), normal operation process (step S104), special operation process (step S105), V area sensor detection process (step S106), reserved ball The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the normal symbol reserved ball number is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the normal symbol reserved ball number (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the normal symbol random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-H value), and stores the acquired random number value in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Among the fourth storage areas, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reservation balls is the number of second special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: Label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 reservation ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" ( step S211). The number of special figure 1 reserved balls is the number of the first special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the obtained random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). If the variable probability flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big-hit prior determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of whether or not a big hit is made by using a big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and a big hit random number value. Here, since it is a high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the jackpot determination tables T1. Refer to it and determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". In addition, in this embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "losing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for pre-determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) to get Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random value is any of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later, but as another embodiment, different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs fluctuation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the variation pattern random number as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And get the reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, Reach presence or absence pre-determined results obtained from the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that can be selected depending on the difference in the number of held balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, it is pre-determined that there is a reach, and if the variation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1 to 2". ”, and the variation pattern “P68”, which is selected when the number of held balls is “3 to 4”. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, prior determination is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of winning), and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determining process described above, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot prior determination (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213) do. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the normal probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164 ”), it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". Incidentally, for the jackpot preliminary determination, a jackpot determination table for prior determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. After that, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the description is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fluctuating (step S502). When the normal pattern is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of pending balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is temporarily set to "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls of the normal design becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. At S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, normal pattern random number value ( random number). Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether it is a time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the normal symbol random number is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as "losing". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal design as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined as "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined as "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variable display (step S509), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric tube 22 is selected with reference to the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. to select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-saving state. After the selection of the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this processing.

In the above step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 6), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the operating time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display device 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which has a "special action status" of "1", Call them "2", "3", and "4". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (step S1401). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes big hit determination processing (step S1402) and variation pattern selection processing (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left) are on the left side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1402) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on variation time).

In step S1401, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" ( step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random number group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If not stored, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. Along with clearing the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop design data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON/OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of the predetermined standby time, and sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation is a jackpot (V passage scheduled jackpot) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It has become easier to be elected to

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (step S1402) and special figure 1 jackpot determination processing (step S1408) are the same in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the high probability state table of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) is referred to and the big hit is determined (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a big hit random number value as a judgment value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to refer to. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the big hit determination tables T1 judge.

In step S1501, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big hit determination ( step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), it is possible to determine whether the jackpot determine whether or not

When the result of the big hit determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the big hit flag (step S1506) and determines the big hit type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , the process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) are similar in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is a special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the process skips to step S1605 because the jackpot type is always the V passage schedule jackpot. When the jackpot is the special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop design data that has been done.

If the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a variation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V-passing schedule jackpot of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ” ~ “P3” part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is “P21” ~ “P23” part) is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random number, in special figure 1, either "P1" to "P3" as the variation pattern, in special figure 2, either "P21" to "P23" is selected.

If the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). to select a variation pattern (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”) of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ) are referenced. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is a ready-to-win random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time-saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach based on the table for the non-time-saving state (reach determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13" part) Determine presence/absence.

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of reach with loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-saving state reach, out of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P14", the part of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the number of the current special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P24" ~ "P31" is selected as the variation pattern. Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in both special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are being selected more often. As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected by referring to the reach-less loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, the part corresponding to reach-less loss (in special figure 1, the variation pattern is "P15" ~ The part of "P16", the part of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the number of the current special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P15" or "P16". In the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P32" or "P33". Also here, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the part of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is the above-described steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, for the time saving state The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is "P41" ~ "P43" part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is "P61" ~ "P63" part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random number, in special figure 1, either "P41" to "P43" as the variation pattern, in special figure 2, either "P61" to "P63" is selected. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ("P44 ” to “P46”) are referred to. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and finishes this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process ( FIG. 16 : step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of time saving, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1808), and terminates this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) is performed again, and the jackpot determination and the like for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special action status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set to the variable probability counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the variable probability counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). When the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time-saving state. Here, "100" is set to the time-saving counter at the time of transition to the time-saving state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command includes information about the current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON, ceiling counter value, probability variable state, probability variable counter value, time saving state, time saving counter value, etc.) include.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until b time saving (play time) is reached, and counts the number of special symbol variations executed when the ceiling flag is ON (during a low probability state). . Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, "500" is set to the ceiling counter as the prescribed number of revolutions. As a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2012). That is, it is determined whether or not the specified number of rotations has passed until reaching b time saving (play time). If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time saving flag is switched to ON (step S2013), and "700" is set to the time saving counter as the number of times of saving time (the number of times given). Then, the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this processing ends. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2106). That is, during execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned OFF in a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the jackpot game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30. In the V opening/closing member operation process, , the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when a predetermined game ball wins. The details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize gate is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big prize gate that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big winning slot (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning hole (the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the type of big win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84 . In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes won into the big prize gate in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or that the time has come to close the big prize gate. (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not established (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled It has the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" for the player, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" , it can be made to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V area 39 . Incidentally, the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" has the same length as these. After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing is finished.

In the above-described step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation processing (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (current round) is the open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71 . The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7" and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning hole 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 .

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in either case of "short opening" or "long opening", the first ball wins. This is for the purpose of executing a short release (here, 0.1 seconds) at times. In the short opening of the V opening and closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 It is configured to pass through the V region 70 . In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is opened and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and the V opening/closing member 71 is being opened. and 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including the time when the jackpot game is not executed) as the V invalid period in which the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, "determine that the game ball detection by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. The period until the game ball entering the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a is considered. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned on when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to be turned ON. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (see FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being set to a high probability state by turning on the V flag based on passing through the V due to a fraudulent act. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first big winning hole 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time is that, in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in the case of "long opening", when the second ball wins, the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) ) is executed. In addition, here, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the big winning opening: 29.5 seconds + interval closing time: 2 seconds), generally, the winning of the second ball is The time from hour to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 has a relatively long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 will move through the V area 39. configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period during opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period together with closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, two seconds) has elapsed since the big winning opening was closed. make a judgment.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and several seconds (here, one second) after the closure of the V opening/closing member 71, the V invalid period. set and finish this process.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 can be exemplified by, for example, that a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 in the case of short-circuit opening. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and this processing ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the process ends while the V opening/closing member 71 is kept open and the V effective period continues.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set to the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "non-high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "100" to the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game becomes "high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability and high base). This high-probability/high-base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the ceiling flag, and sets the ceiling counter to "500" as the prescribed number of rotations until b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after the jackpot game, when the variable probability flag is OFF, when the game hits 500 times, it enters b time saving (play time). In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specifying command includes information about the set game state (time saving flag, time saving counter, probability variable flag, probability variable counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds. be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Processing of pending pitches]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a pending ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding 1 to it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number value may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the variation effect (step S4305). The process during fluctuation production is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the fluctuation production to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display production, the details of which will be described later. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc. , to the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a reservation ball number command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the normal figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), change production start processing is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the decoration pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data set at the time of judging the winning of the jackpot included in the opening command in a sub RAM 94.例文帳に追加Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). "Round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning hole or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). "Ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data included in the ending command to the sub-RAM94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processes, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, information on the game state included in the game state designation command (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability variation flag, probability variation counter, ceiling flag , ceiling counter, etc.) are stored in the sub-RAM 94 . Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time reduction effect counter, probability variable effect counter, and ceiling effect counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 are updated. For example, the number of remaining fluctuations (number of games) during time reduction is set in a time reduction performance counter, the number of remaining fluctuations in probability variation is set in the probability variation performance counter, and the remaining variation frequency until reaching the ceiling is set in the ceiling performance counter. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information on the number of time reductions, the number of probability variations, and the number of ceilings. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes sub RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type advance judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation The pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the advance determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information, prefetch effect pattern information is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39 (A) shows that as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figures 2 pending, the jackpot determination information "losing" and the variation pattern information "P72" "P73" are the first to third A state in which the data is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area is shown. Figure 39 (B), there is a prize of special figure 2 from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, in each of the 1st to 4th storage areas corresponding to the 1st to 4th special figures 2 reserved, and the area corresponding to the variation, "Pattern A ” is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the change has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the 4, the pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "loss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not it is a “big hit” or “losing with reach” can be determined by, for example, the result of prior determination of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). The effect control microcomputer 91 terminates this process when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach" (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, And, look-ahead effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether to perform or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, if the pre-determination result is "big hit" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "56-67", the pre-reading effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-judgment result is "losing with reach" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", as a pre-reading effect When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-read effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area A look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), "Pattern A" is not only set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received advance determination command, but also in the first to third storage areas and the corresponding area. Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variable effects corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it is executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, pattern information indicating a pattern as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the pattern information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs basic production pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic production pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable production (for example, the display of the background image on the image display device 7 and its switching, the display of a predetermined character and its operation, the output of the melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The performance control microcomputer 91 refers to a basic performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine a basic performance pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of core performance patterns for normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP3 performance, There are multiple types of basic production patterns that perform a loss production without reach. The type of basic effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. In addition, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach-less loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up effect pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. A performance control microcomputer 91 acquires a counter value of a chance-up random number, refers to the acquired random number and a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in a sub ROM 93, and determines a chance-up performance pattern.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, of the chance-up production pattern determination table T53, only the portion for determining the variable production pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows the chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 has a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO" "2-SP1" "2-SP2" "2-SP3" "3-NO" "3-SP1" "3-SP2" "3-SP3" " 4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3" and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs count effect pattern determination processing (step S5016). Here, the count effect pattern determination process is the number of remaining fluctuations at the time of probability change (number of games), the number of remaining fluctuations during time saving, the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the number of fluctuations from when the power is turned on, and the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game This is a process for displaying the number of times of change and the like on the display screen 7a. The performance control microcomputer 91 displays the probability variation remaining number of times on the display screen 7a based on the value of the probability variation performance counter at the time of probability variation. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the probability variable remaining number of times based on the value of the time saving effect counter during time saving.

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute various effects based on the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the overnight effect counter. The ceiling performance counter stores the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, and the overnight performance counter stores the number of fluctuations from when the power is turned on. The effect control microcomputer 91 can set the number of fluctuations from power-on by, for example, incrementing an overnight effect counter each time a variable effect end command is received from the main control board 80 . The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH2 (eg, TH2=200) or less when the value of the effect counter is TH1 (eg, TH1=10). When the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is greater than TH2, no chance image is displayed. As a result, the player who sees the chance image can recognize that the gaming machine 1 has inherited the number of games from the previous day and that the RAM clear has not been performed. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the overnight production counter is TH3 (for example, TH3=50). Moreover, the effect control microcomputer 91 may turn off the display representing the value of the ceiling effect counter and the chance image again when the value of the overnight effect counter is TH4 (eg, TH4=100). Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 may display again the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the overnight production counter is TH5 (for example, TH5=200). The effect control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling effect counter as described above based on the value of the overnight effect counter, or may determine based on the value of the ceiling effect counter. good too. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH6 (eg, TH6=100), and the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH7 (eg, TH7=70). When , the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter may be turned off, and when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (eg, TH8=50), the value of the ceiling effect counter may be displayed again.

After the count effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 may refer to the random number and stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to determine the combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 is realized ( step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variable effect image. It is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and terminates this process. A variable time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation effect]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the processing during the fluctuation effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable production is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variable effect timer is zero. If the variable effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 to inform the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect. , the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc., in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of variation.

If it is not the timing to set the pre-fluctuation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-variation end command containing the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-fluctuation end command that does not include look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the prefetch effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, the pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

8. Movement of Movable Body and Display Effect of Sub-Display Screen 64 Using FIGS. 69) and the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like. do In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the sub-display screen 64 during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation when power is turned on, or the like.

46A and 46B are explanatory diagrams illustrating movement modes of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. The first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, the upper end of which is positioned near the upper end of the image display device 7 and the lower end thereof is positioned near the lower end of the image display device 7 . The upper end and lower end of the first movable accessory 14 are difficult to see, and the vicinity of the central portion is visible in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). At the retracted position, the first movable accessory 14 may be partially stored and the remaining part may be visible, or the whole may be stored and difficult to be seen. As shown in FIG. 46 , the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 . It is configured to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen 7a. In addition, it can stand still at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable accessory 14 can be set arbitrarily. Also, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stand still at that position (second mode). At least a part of the first movable accessory 14 may have a decorative portion, or may have transparency.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion labeled "OARO" and is configured to be vertically movable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to be visually recognized. The second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the center of the display screen 7a from the state shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 48 (second mode). . In this second mode, the decorative portion stops in front of the image display device 7 (front surface) so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retreat) upward from the advanced position shown in FIG. 48 to move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still there.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the frame movable accessory 69. As shown in FIG. The movable frame accessory 69 is composed of a pair of flat plate-like members arranged on both left and right sides of the handle 60, and each is configured to be movable in the left and right direction. The two members are formed of flexible members, and are configured so that one major surface of each member moves toward or away from the handle 60 . As shown in FIG. 1, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 are normally stationary at retracted positions (home positions) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60 (first mode). . As shown in FIG. 49, the two members of the movable frame accessory 69 move (advance) from the retracted position toward the direction of approaching the handle 60, i.e., move closer to each other. It can rest at the touching position (second aspect). The movable frame accessory 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60 when it is in the advanced position. The frame movable accessory 69 can move in the direction in which the two members are separated from each other so as to change from the second mode to the first mode.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory view showing an example of the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U can each independently display an image. Moreover, it is possible to perform an effect linked with the image on the display screen 7a.

9. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, based on the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 or the like. In some cases, the pending display (holding icon) is omitted in the display effect example.

51 to 53, the same number decorative symbol row effects A to C will be described below. This same-number decorative pattern row production is executed during the variable production of decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the same number decorative pattern row effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screen 64.

[Same number decorative pattern row production A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the same number decorative symbol row effect A. FIG. The same-number decorative pattern row performance is a performance in which a plurality of decorative patterns representing the same number are included in one pattern row in which a plurality of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a are arranged along the varying direction. FIG. 51 (A) ~ (F) shows an example of the first variation of the special figure variation, and FIG. 51 (G) ~ (L) shows an example of the second variation following the first variation. When the same number decorative symbol row performance is executed in the first variation of the special figure variation, the same number decorative symbol row performance is always executed in the next second variation.

In the same number decorative pattern row production A, first, as shown in FIG. 51(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are vertical lines that indicate that each pattern is difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during the low-speed fluctuation display, a plurality of number patterns are arranged vertically in each pattern arrangement and displayed visually in the display screen 7a, such as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 51(B). It frames in from the upper end, moves downward, and frames out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are decelerated in order from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display. Multiple number patterns arranged vertically become visible. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display, making the number pattern difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in order. In both cases, "3" is stopped and displayed, indicating a ready-to-reach state. In this case, only one numerical pattern is displayed in the symbol row that is stopped and displayed, and the display of the other numerical symbols that are continuous in the vertical direction disappears. It should be noted that, during the stop display, the display of other number patterns may be displayed as they are without disappearing. The middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(D), the same number decorative symbol row effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C all change to those representing the same number. Here, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is being displayed with low speed fluctuation, the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C all change from "123456789" to "333333333" which is the ready-to-win pattern. switch to As a result, the player can be surprised that the middle decorative pattern 8C will always win no matter which number pattern the middle decorative pattern 8C stops at. When the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C are switched, they are not switched all at once. may switch.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(E), the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C return to the original state "123456789". That is, in a plurality of number patterns representing the same number included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the represented numbers change to become mutually different numbers. After that, as shown in FIG. 51(F), the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are determined and stopped in a losing mode (here, "323"). do. Alternatively, the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C are all stopped and displayed in the state of "3", and the winning mode of "333" is determined and stopped.

After FIG. 51(F), in the next variation (second variation), first, FIGS. 51(A) and 51(B) are executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 51(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in order. In this case, "4" is stopped and displayed, indicating a ready-to-reach state. As in FIG. 51(C) of the first variation, here, only one numeric pattern is displayed in the stopped-displayed pattern row, and other vertically continuous numeric patterns disappear. It should be noted that, during the stop display, the display of other number patterns may be displayed as they are without disappearing. The middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(H), the same number decorative symbol row effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C all change to those representing the same number. Here, when the medium decorative pattern 8C is being displayed with low speed fluctuation, the number patterns included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C all change from "123456789" to "444444444" which is the ready-to-win pattern. switch to As a result, the player can be surprised that the middle decorative pattern 8C will always win no matter which number pattern the middle decorative pattern 8C stops at. When the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C are switched, they are not switched all at once. may switch.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(I), an effect is performed in which the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C return to the original state "123456789". That is, in a plurality of number patterns representing the same number included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the represented numbers change to become mutually different numbers. This can disappoint the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 51(J), the same number decorative symbol row effect is executed again. Here, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is being displayed with low speed fluctuation, the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C are all changed from "123456789" to "3" different from the ready-to-win pattern "333333333". switch all at once. This allows the player to expect that something might happen, while being disappointed that the game will always fail if things continue as they are.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(K), when the low-speed fluctuation display of the middle decorative pattern 8C is maintained, the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C are all from "333333333" to the ready-to-win pattern " 4” is changed all at once to the state “444444444”. As a result, the player can be pleased that the middle decorative pattern 8C will always win no matter which number pattern the middle decorative pattern 8C stops at, and also make the player uneasy about switching to another number pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(L), all the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in a state of "4", and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern are displayed. The pattern 8R is determined and stopped in a winning mode (here, "444"). As a result, the player can safely rest assured that all the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C are stop-displayed in the state of "4" and that the jackpot has been won.

[Same number decorative pattern row production B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the same number decorative symbol row effect B. FIG. The same-number decorative pattern row performance is a performance in which a plurality of decorative patterns representing the same number are included in one pattern row in which a plurality of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a are arranged along the varying direction. Figure 52 (A) ~ (F) shows an example of the first variation of the special figure variation, Figure 52 (G) ~ (L) shows an example of the second variation next to the first variation. When the same number decorative symbol row performance is executed in the first variation of the special figure variation, the same number decorative symbol row performance is always executed in the next second variation.

In the same-number decorative pattern row production B, first, as shown in FIG. 52(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during the low-speed variable display, a plurality of number patterns are arranged vertically in each pattern arrangement and displayed visually, such as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 52(B). It frames in from the upper end, moves downward, and frames out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are decelerated and changed from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. A plurality of lined up numerical patterns becomes visible. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display, making the number pattern difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the same number decorative symbol row effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the number patterns included in each pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are all changed to those representing the same number. Here, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with low speed variation, the number patterns contained in the respective pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are all "3" from "123456789". It switches all at once to the state "333333333". As a result, the player can be surprised that the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern and the game is definitely ready. When the number patterns included in each pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are switched, they are not switched all at once. The whole may be switched by framing out in order.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(D), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a state where all of the number patterns included in the respective pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are "3". The symbol 8R is in the ready-to-win mode (here, "3↓3"). Here, in each of the statically displayed symbol rows, three numerical symbols are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and display of other numerical symbols consecutive above and below disappears. That is, here, the ready-to-win symbols are stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages. It should be noted that, during the stop display, the display of the number patterns other than the three number patterns in each pattern row may be displayed as they are without disappearing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(E), an effect is performed in which the number patterns included in the symbol rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R which are stopped and displayed return to the original state "123456789". That is, in a plurality of number patterns representing the same number included in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the numbers displayed change to become different numbers. Since only three number patterns are stopped and displayed here, some of the number patterns in the original state ("456" of the left decorative pattern 8L and "789" of the right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are three losing modes (here, the upper row "417", The determination stops at the middle row "528" and the lower row "639").

After FIG. 52(F), FIG. 52(A) is first executed in the next variation (second variation). After that, as shown in FIG. 52(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are decelerated and changed from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Multiple number patterns arranged vertically become visible. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display, making the number pattern difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(H), the same number decorative symbol row effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the number patterns included in the respective pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are all changed to those representing the same number. Here, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are being displayed with low speed fluctuation, the number patterns contained in the respective pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are all from "123456789" to "4". It switches all at once to the state "444444444". As a result, the player can be surprised that the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the same pattern and the game is definitely ready. When the number patterns included in the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R pattern rows are switched, they are not switched all at once. The whole may be switched by framing out in order.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a state where all the number patterns included in the respective pattern rows are "4". The symbol 8R is in the ready-to-win mode (here, "4↓4"). Here, in each of the statically displayed symbol rows, three numerical symbols are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and display of other numerical symbols consecutive above and below disappears. That is, here, the ready-to-win symbols are stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages. It should be noted that, during the stop display, the display of the number patterns other than the three number patterns in each pattern row may be displayed as they are without disappearing. The middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in each pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(J), the same number decorative symbol row effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is executed in which some of the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C are changed to those representing the same number. Here, when the medium decorative pattern 8C is being displayed with low speed fluctuation, the number patterns included in the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C change from "123456789" to "124456789", and the ready-to-win pattern "4" becomes two. state. As a result, the player can see that the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are ready-to-win in three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages, and two of the middle decorative patterns 8C are numbers corresponding to the big hit. Since the symbol is "4", the player can be excited by feeling that the player is likely to win a big prize.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(K), the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R is "414" in the upper stage and "424" in the middle stage. , lower row "444") and stop. Since the lower row of the upper, middle and lower rows contains the jackpot pattern, the jackpot is reported as shown in FIG. 52(L).

[Same number decorative pattern row production C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the same number decorative symbol row effect C. FIG. The same-number decorative pattern row performance is a performance in which a plurality of decorative patterns representing the same number are included in one pattern row in which a plurality of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a are arranged along the varying direction. Figure 53 (A) ~ (F) shows an example of the first variation of the special figure variation, Figure 53 (G) ~ (L) shows an example of the second variation following the first variation. When the same number decorative symbol row performance is executed in the first variation of the special figure variation, the same number decorative symbol row performance is always executed in the next second variation.

In the same number decorative pattern row presentation C, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, a plurality of number patterns are displayed in a vertical line in the pattern arrangement so that they can be visually recognized, as shown in the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 53(C). , and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 53(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are decelerated and changed from high speed fluctuation display to low speed fluctuation display, and then stop display. Here, in each of the statically displayed symbol rows, three numerical symbols are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and display of other numerical symbols consecutive above and below disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages (here, the upper stage is "4↓7", the middle stage is "5↓8", and the lower stage is "6↓9"). ”). At the time of stop display, the display of the other number patterns than the three number patterns in each of the pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed as they are without disappearing. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display, making the number pattern difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the same number decorative symbol row effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is executed in which at least some of the number patterns included in the symbol rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed are changed to those representing the same number. Here, in each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed, the number patterns corresponding to the upper and middle stages are switched to "3" and the color changes. Thus, the player can be surprised because the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are switched to the ready-to-win mode in the upper stage and the middle stage from the state where none of the upper stage, the middle stage and the lower stage are in the ready-to-reach mode. When the number patterns included in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are switched, they are switched once all at once. However, the switching may be performed randomly instead of all at once. Also, instead of ending after switching once, the status may be determined after switching multiple times and after a predetermined time has elapsed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically in the pattern row can be visually recognized.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(D), the same number decorative symbol row effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C all change to those representing the same number. Here, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with low speed fluctuation, the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C are all switched from ``123456789'' to ``333333333'' in which all are ``3''. As a result, the player can be surprised that a big win is guaranteed in the upper and middle stages of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. When the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C are switched, they are not switched all at once. may switch.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(E), the number patterns contained in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and the middle decorative pattern 8C that is displayed in low speed fluctuation are in the original state. An effect of returning to "123456789" is performed. That is, in a plurality of number patterns representing the same number included in each of the left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and middle decorative pattern 8C pattern rows, the represented numbers change to become mutually different numbers. In the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed, only three number patterns are stopped and displayed. "789" of the symbol 8R) is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are three losing modes (here, the upper row "417", 528 in the middle row and 639 in the lower row).

After FIG. 53(F), in the next variation (second variation), first, FIGS. 53(A) and 53(B) are executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 53(G), the middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically in the pattern row become visible.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are three losing modes (here, the upper row "487", It stops (temporarily stops) at the middle row "598" and the lower row "619").

After that, as shown in FIGS. 53(I) to (K), the same number decorative pattern row presentation is executed. Specifically, an effect is executed in which at least some of the number patterns included in the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are stopped and displayed, are changed to those representing the same number. be done. Here, at least some of the number designs included in each of the left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, and right decorative design 8R design rows are randomly switched to "3" and the color changes. The number pattern once switched to "3" also randomly returns to the original number pattern.

At the time when a predetermined time has passed since the same number decorative pattern row production started (here, FIG. 53 (K)), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower stages. If any one of them is stopped in the jackpot mode, as shown in FIG. 53(L), one set that is stopped in the jackpot mode is selected and displayed, and the display of the other two sets disappears.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the same number decorative pattern row production will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying a symbol row in which a plurality of decorative symbols are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction) on the display screen 7a. , In this effect, a plurality of decorative symbols representing the same number are included in one symbol row (for example, FIG. 51 (D) (H) (J) (K), FIG. 52 (C) (D) (H) (I) (J), Fig. 53 (C) (D) (I) (J) (K) According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel production. , It is possible to improve interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the above effect, the plurality of decorative symbols included in the symbol row arranged along the variation direction (vertical direction) all represent the same number (for example, 51(D)(H)(J)(K), FIG. 52(C)(D)(H)(I), FIG. 53(D)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the above effect, a plurality of symbol rows are displayed, and each of the plurality of symbol rows includes a plurality of decorative symbols representing the same number ( For example, FIGS. 52(C)(D)(H)(I), FIGS. 53(C)(D)(I)(J)(K)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the above effect, the number represented by the decorative symbol changes from a state in which the symbol row does not include a plurality of decorative symbols representing the same number. 51 (C) (D) (G) (H) (I) (J), FIGS. 52 (B) (C) (D) (G) (H)(I), FIG. 53(B)(D)(H)(I)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, after the effect, in the plurality of decorative symbols representing the same number, the represented numbers change to become different numbers (for example, FIG. 51 (D)(E)(H)(I), FIG. 52(D)(E), FIG. 53(D)(E)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the production is executed during the variable production of decorative symbols, and the production is executed in the next variable production after the production is executed. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the same number decorative pattern row production will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The configurations of the same number decorative pattern row effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, Figures 52 (A) to (F) of the same number decorative symbol row performance B may be executed in the next variation after Figures 51 (A) to (F) of the same number decorative symbol row performance A are executed. .

[Modification 2]
In the same number decorative pattern row presentations A to C, the numbers represented by a plurality of number patterns included in one pattern row are switched to the same number all at once. However, a plurality of number patterns included in one pattern row may be switched to the same number by covering the same number with an image representing the same number. Alternatively, an image representing the same number may appear from the back side by cracking a plurality of number patterns included in one pattern row.

[Modification 3]
In the same number decorative pattern row effects A to C, the number patterns representing the same number contained in one pattern row are the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. It is assumed that the numbers constitute a jackpot when they are aligned. However, the same number itself is a decorative number, and may be a decorative number that does not give a big win when matched. That is, the number patterns representing the same number included in one pattern row represent the same number as a decoration, and may separately display a number for constructing a big win when the numbers are aligned.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
The display means is capable of executing an effect of displaying a pattern row in which a plurality of the decorative patterns are arranged along the variation direction,
In the production, a plurality of the decorative patterns representing the same number are included in one pattern row,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the production, the plurality of decorative patterns included in the pattern row all represent the same number,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the production, a plurality of the pattern rows are displayed, and each of the plurality of the pattern rows includes a plurality of the decorative symbols representing the same number.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the effect, the number represented in the decorative pattern changes from a state in which the pattern row does not include a plurality of decorative patterns showing the same number, and the plurality of decorative patterns show the same number.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4,
After the effect, in the plurality of decorative patterns representing the same number, the represented number changes to become a different number from each other,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-5,
The production is executed at the time of the variable production of the decorative pattern, and the production is executed even in the next variable production after the production is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern number change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. FIG. This decorative pattern number change effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern number change effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Decorative pattern number change effect A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol number change effect A. FIG. In the decorative pattern number change effect, when a plurality of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a are arranged along the fluctuating direction and move along the fluctuating direction, at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns is displayed. It is an effect in which the numbers displayed in the pattern move while changing.

In the decorative pattern number change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, a plurality of number patterns are displayed in a vertically arranged manner in the pattern arrangement (pattern row) like the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. In, move downward, and out of the frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 54(B), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerates from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and in the pattern row, a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically are displayed. become visible. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain high-speed fluctuation display, making it difficult to visually recognize the number patterns.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the right decorative symbol 8R decelerates from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row. In the left decorative pattern 8L, a number pattern of "2" expressed in a special manner is framed in a state in which the low-speed fluctuation display is maintained. Here, the number pattern of the special mode (special number pattern) is represented by a relatively small number image of "2" in the center of the rectangular image. When the whole number image of "2" is displayed on the display screen 7a after the special number pattern is framed in, the performance of changing the number of the "2" part to another number at high speed is started. Here, the numbers of the numeric image change randomly at high speed, but the numbers of the numeric image may change at high speed in the order of "123456789". Also, the color of the special number pattern changes as the number of the number image changes. Here, a color is determined for each type of number, and the color changes as the type of number changes. Note that the color may change randomly regardless of the number change. Also, when the special number pattern is moving, the color may be displayed in the same color without changing, and when it stops near the center of the display screen 7a, the color may change to another color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(D), following the left decorative design 8L, the right decorative design 8R is a number design of "5" represented in a special manner while maintaining the low-speed fluctuation display. frame in. Here, similarly to the case of the left decorative design 8L in FIG. 54(D), a relatively small number image of "5" is shown in the center of the rectangular image (special number design). When the whole number image of "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a after the special number pattern is framed in, the performance of changing the number of the "5" part to another number at high speed is started. Here, the numbers of the numeric image change randomly at high speed, but the numbers of the numeric image may change at high speed in the order of "123456789". In the left decorative pattern 8L, the special number pattern continues to move downward while the numbers of the number image change randomly at high speed. The special number patterns of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change in color as the number of the number image changes. Here, a color is determined for each type of number, and the color changes as the type of number changes. Note that the color may change randomly regardless of the number change. Also, when the special number pattern is moving, the color may be displayed in the same color without changing, and when it stops near the center of the display screen 7a, the color may change to another color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(E), in the left decorative pattern 8L, while the low-speed fluctuation display is maintained, the special number pattern in which the numbers of the number image change at random at high speed moves downward. When it reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the movement is stopped, and as shown in FIG. 54(F), random change of the numbers ends and one number is displayed still. Here, the stop display is performed with "3" displayed. Also, here, in the symbol row that is stopped and displayed, only one number symbol "3" is displayed, and the display of the other number symbols continuing vertically disappears. It should be noted that, during the stop display, the display of other number patterns may be displayed as they are without disappearing. In the right decorative pattern 8R, the special number pattern continues to move downward while the number of the number image changes randomly at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row.

As shown in FIG. 54(F), similarly to the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R is a special numeric pattern in which the numbers of the numeric image change randomly at high speed while the low-speed fluctuation display is maintained. moves downward and reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the movement is stopped, and as shown in FIG. Here, "3" is stopped and displayed to enter the ready-to-reach state. In the medium decorative pattern 8C, a number pattern of "1" expressed in a special manner is framed in a state in which the low-speed fluctuation display is maintained. Here, similarly to the case of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, a relatively small number image of "1" is shown in the center of the rectangular image (special number pattern). When the whole number image of "1" is displayed on the display screen 7a after the special number pattern is framed in, an effect is started in which the number of the "1" part changes to another number at high speed. Here, the numbers of the numeric image change randomly at high speed, but the numbers of the numeric image may change at high speed in the order of "123456789". The special number pattern changes color as the number of the number image changes. Here, a color is determined for each type of number, and the color changes as the type of number changes. Note that the color may change randomly regardless of the number change. Also, when the special number pattern is moving, the color may be displayed in the same color without changing, and when it stops near the center of the display screen 7a, the color may change to another color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(H), in the medium decorative pattern 8C, while the low-speed fluctuation display is maintained, the special number pattern in which the number of the number image changes randomly at high speed moves downward. When the player reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the random change of the numbers ends and one number is displayed while the movement is maintained. Here, in the case of a ready-to-win game, the number change is stopped while the ready-to-win symbol "3" is always displayed. Then, an effect is executed in which the special number pattern "3" stops at the center position or passes through as it is.

As shown in FIG. 54(I), the special number pattern "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward through the position between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R which are stopped and displayed. Then, the frame goes out as it is, and as shown in FIG. 54(J), another number pattern (here, "6") is stopped and displayed between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R instead. Thereby, the failure is reported. On the other hand, when the special number symbol "3" stops at the center position, a big win is reported.

FIGS. 54(K) and 54(L) are different rendering examples from FIGS. 54(H) to (J). In FIG. 54(K), when the special number pattern of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the random change of the number ends while the movement is maintained. However, when the special number pattern of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the movement may be stopped without fail, and one number may be stopped and displayed after the random change of the number is finished. In this case, the stop-displayed number is not always "3", but may be "3" or otherwise. In FIGS. 54(K) and 54(L), the random change of numbers is stopped at "9", and the failure of "393" is reported.

[Decorative pattern number change effect B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol number change effect B. FIG. In the decorative pattern number change effect, when a plurality of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a are arranged along the fluctuating direction and move along the fluctuating direction, at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns is displayed. It is an effect in which the numbers displayed in the pattern move while changing.

In the decorative pattern number change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numerical patterns are displayed in a vertically arranged manner in the pattern arrangement (pattern row), as shown in the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 55(C). In, move downward, and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 55(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are decelerated in order from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display, and then stopped. Here, both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed as "3" and are in a ready-to-win state. In this case, only one numerical pattern is displayed in the symbol row that is stopped and displayed, and the display of the other numerical symbols that are continuous in the vertical direction disappears. It should be noted that, during the stop display, the display of other number patterns may be displayed as they are without disappearing. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display, making the number pattern difficult to see. When the ready-to-win state is reached, an effect of displaying a special mode number pattern (special number pattern) to be described later is executed with a predetermined probability.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number patterns can be visually recognized in the pattern row. After that, as shown in FIG. 55(D), in the medium decorative pattern 8C, a number pattern expressed in a special manner is framed while the low-speed variable display is maintained. Here, the number pattern of the special mode (special number pattern) is represented by a relatively small number image in the center of the rectangular image. The number represented by the number image starts to change into various numbers at high speed. Here, the numbers of the numeric image change randomly at high speed, but the numbers of the numeric image may change at high speed in the order of "123456789". The special number pattern changes color as the number of the number image changes. Here, a color is determined for each type of number, and the color changes as the type of number changes. Note that the color may change randomly regardless of the number change. Also, when the special number pattern is moving, the color may be displayed in the same color without changing, and when it stops near the center of the display screen 7a, the color may change to another color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(E), in the middle decorative pattern 8C, an effect is executed in which all the number patterns newly framed from the upper end of the display screen 7a are special number patterns. All of the special numeral patterns that newly enter the frame come into the frame while the numerals of the numeral images change at random. As for the special number pattern that newly enters the frame, the number of the number image changes and the color changes.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(F), in the middle decorative pattern 8C, all the number patterns included in the pattern row become special number patterns, and the special number patterns are changed while the numbers of the number image change at high speed and at random. Frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(G), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a state where the low-speed fluctuation display is maintained, and the random change of the numbers represented by the number images of all the displayed special number patterns is completed. A number is displayed. Here, all reach symbols "3" are displayed. Here, all the special number symbols change to "3", which is the reach symbol, in the case of reach. Then, one of the special number patterns "3" is stopped at the central position, or all the special number patterns "3" pass as they are. The middle decorative pattern 8C continues the low-speed variable display in a state where all the special number patterns are "3". When all the special number symbols become "3" (when the numbers stop changing), the colors also stop changing. As described above, when the color is determined for each type of number, the color stops changing because the type of number does not change. Note that the color change also stops when the color changes randomly regardless of the number change. Also, if the same color is displayed without changing the color while the type of numbers is changing, the color changes to another color as the type of numbers stops changing. The timing at which the random change stops all at once in all the special number patterns is arbitrary. As a result, the player strongly desires that the special number symbol "3" is stopped and displayed.

FIGS. 55(H) to (J) are examples in which the special number symbol "3" passes through as it is after FIG. 55(G) and is lost. As shown in FIG. 55(H), in the middle decorative pattern 8C, while the low-speed fluctuation display is maintained, the normal number patterns that are not the special number patterns are framed in order, and the special number pattern "3" is stopped. Frame out in sequence without stopping in position. Then, as shown in FIG. 55(I), all special numeral symbols "3" are framed out. As a result, the player is disappointed, thinking that his or her expectation for a big win will be greatly reduced. After that, as shown in FIG. 54(J), the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped at "1". Thereby, the failure is reported. On the other hand, when the special number symbol "3" stops at the center position, a big win is reported.

FIG. 55(K) is an example in which after FIG. 55(G), a special number symbol "3" is stopped and displayed at the center position to announce a big win. In the middle decorative pattern 8C, one of the special number patterns "3" is stopped and displayed between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and a big hit is announced.

FIG. 55(L) is an example in which, after FIGS. 55(H) to (I), a normal number symbol "3" is stop-displayed and a big win is announced. After disappointing all the "3" in the special number pattern out of the frame. After that, the normal number pattern "3" which has entered the frame is stop-displayed between the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R to announce a big win.

[Decorative pattern number change effect C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol number change effect C. FIG. In the decorative pattern number change effect, when a plurality of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a are arranged along the fluctuating direction and move along the fluctuating direction, at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns is displayed. It is an effect in which the numbers displayed in the pattern move while changing.

In the decorative pattern number change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, a plurality of number patterns are displayed in a vertically arranged manner in the pattern array (pattern row), such as the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 56(C). In, move downward, and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are decelerated in order from high speed fluctuation display to low speed fluctuation display, and then stop display. Here, both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stop-displayed as "3" and are in a ready-to-win state. In this case, only one numerical pattern is displayed in the symbol row that is stopped and displayed, and the display of the other numerical symbols that are continuous in the vertical direction disappears. It should be noted that, during the stop display, the display of other number patterns may be displayed as they are without disappearing. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display, making the number pattern difficult to see. When the ready-to-win state is reached, an effect of displaying a special mode number pattern (special number pattern) to be described later is executed with a predetermined probability.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C decelerates and changes from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number patterns can be visually recognized in the pattern row. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(D), in the middle decorative pattern 8C, a number pattern expressed in a special manner is framed while the low-speed variable display is maintained. Here, the number pattern of the special mode (special number pattern) is represented by a relatively small number image in the center of the rectangular image. The number represented by the number image starts to change into various numbers at high speed. Here the digits in the digit image are changing very quickly, either randomly or in sequence, so that multiple digits are displayed in a superimposed state. The special number pattern changes color. Here, the color does not change and is displayed in the same color until the special number pattern moves and reaches the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a, and when it reaches the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a, the color changes to another color. . No, the color may change randomly regardless of the position of the special digit image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(E), in the medium decorative pattern 8C, while the low-speed fluctuation display is maintained, the special number pattern in which the number of the number image changes randomly at high speed moves downward. When the player reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the random change of the numbers ends and one number is displayed while the movement is maintained. Also, the color changes. Here, in the case of a ready-to-win game, the number change is stopped while the ready-to-win symbol "3" is always displayed. Then, an effect in which the special number symbol "3" passes is executed.

After the special number pattern "3" is out of the frame, the middle decorative pattern 8C starts a high-speed variable display as shown in FIG. 56(F). After that, as shown in FIG. 56(H), a battle effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(I), when the player wins in the battle effect, the middle decorative pattern 8C appears in a state of being stopped at "3" as shown in FIG. 56(J), and a big win is announced. be. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56(K), when the player is defeated in the battle effect, the middle decorative pattern 8C appears in a state of being stopped at "6" as shown in FIG. be.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern number change effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, it is possible to execute an effect in which a plurality of decorative symbols are arranged in the varying direction and move along the varying direction. The decorative pattern moves while the number represented in at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns changes (for example, FIGS. 54 (C) to (I), FIGS. 55 (D) to (H) , FIGS. 56(D)-(F)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, in the above effect, the plurality of decorative symbols move while the number represented by at least one of the plurality of decorative symbols changes. After that, the numbers stop changing (for example, FIGS. 54(C)-(I), FIGS. 55(D)-(H), and FIGS. 56(D)-(F)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, in the above effect, the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed while the number represented by at least one of the plurality of decorative symbols changes. 54(C)-(I), FIGS. 55(D)-(H), and FIGS. 56(D)-(F)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, in the above effect, the plurality of decorative symbols are framed out while the decorative symbols whose numbers have stopped changing remain unchanged. (eg, FIGS. 54(G) to (I), FIGS. 55(G) to (H), and FIGS. 56(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, in the above effect, the plurality of decorative symbols change the color of the number represented by at least one of the plurality of decorative symbols. (For example, FIGS. 54(C)-(I), FIGS. 55(D)-(H), and FIGS. 56(D)-(F)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the above effects are executed when the decorative symbols are in the ready-to-win state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern number change effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
The configurations of the decorative pattern number change effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, the effects of the decorative pattern number change effects A to C may be randomly executed, or a plurality of the effects of the decorative pattern number change effects A to C may be executed during one variation.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern number change performances A to C, the number of the special number pattern is changed to another number to change the number type. However, the numbers of the special number pattern may be other types of numbers by changing the form.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern number change performances A to C, the numbers represented by the special number patterns are the numbers constituting a big hit when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned. However, the changing numbers may be numbers that do not result in a big win when combined. In other words, it may be configured such that the number pattern in which the number changes always passes through without being stopped and displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
In a state in which the plurality of decorative patterns are arranged in the varying direction, it is possible to execute an effect of moving along the varying direction,
In the production, the plurality of decorative patterns move while the number represented by at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the production, the plurality of decorative patterns move while the number represented by at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns changes, and then the number stops changing.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
In the production, the plurality of decorative patterns are framed in the display means while the number represented by at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
In the production, the plurality of decorative patterns are framed out while the decorative patterns in which the number stops changing maintain the state in which the number stops changing.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
In the production, the plurality of decorative patterns change the color of the numbers represented in at least one of the plurality of decorative patterns.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
The effect is executed when the decorative pattern is in a reach state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

57 to 59, the decorative pattern number image number change effects A to C will be described below. This number-of-decorative-symbols-images change effect is executed during a variation effect of the decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative symbol number image number change effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image display device is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7 or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Decorative pattern number image number change effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-decorative-symbol-images change effect A. FIG. The number-of-decorative-symbols-images change effect is a effect in which the number of the number images represented (included) in one decorative symbol changes. FIGS. 57A to 57G show a first example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect A, and FIGS. 57H to 57L show a second example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect A. shows an example.

In the first example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" (ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, a plurality of number patterns are displayed in a vertical line in the pattern arrangement (pattern row) so that they can be visually recognized, as in the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 57(B). In, move downward, and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 57(B), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R decelerates from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and in the pattern row, a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically are displayed. become visible. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain high-speed fluctuation display, making it difficult to visually recognize the number patterns.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(C), the right decorative symbol 8R decelerates from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, making it difficult to visually recognize the number pattern. In this state, the effect of changing the number of decorative design numeral images is performed. When this effect is performed, the expectation of winning is higher than when it is not performed. In the left decorative pattern 8L, all displayed numeric patterns change (to special numeric patterns) while the low-speed variable display is maintained. Specifically, in each number pattern, the number of number images represented by one number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. For example, when the number image represented by the number pattern is "7", seven number images of "7" are displayed in one number pattern. In FIG. 57(C), the numeral symbol "7" has seven numeral images of "7" (composed of one upper row, three middle rows, and three lower rows), and the numeral symbol "8" has Eight number images of "8" (composed of two upper rows, three middle rows, and three lower rows) are displayed, and nine number images of "9" (three upper rows, middle row) are displayed in the number pattern of "9". 3, and 3 in the lower row). The colors of the multiple number images represented by one number pattern may be different from each other, or all may be the same color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(D), the left decorative pattern 8L has a plurality of special number patterns composed of the same number of number images as the number represented by the left decorative pattern 8L while maintaining the low-speed fluctuation display. After moving downward, it is stopped and displayed with the special number pattern as it is. Here, in the statically displayed pattern row (left decorative pattern 8L), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed above and below. number pattern) disappears. That is, here, only the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages (here, the upper stage is "5↓↓", the middle stage is "6↓↓", and the lower stage is "7↓↓"). . At the time of stop display, the display of the number patterns other than the three number patterns in the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed as they are without disappearing.

Following the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R changes the mode of all the displayed numeric patterns (to special numeric patterns) while maintaining the low-speed variable display. Specifically, in each number pattern, the number of number images represented by one number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. In FIG. 57(D), the number symbol "1" represents one number image "1", the number symbol "2" represents two number images "2", and the number symbol "3". , three numeric images of "3" are displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(E), the right decorative pattern 8R has a plurality of special number patterns composed of the same number of number images as the number represented by the right decorative pattern 8R while maintaining the low-speed fluctuation display. After moving downward, it is stopped and displayed in the state of a special number pattern. Here, in the stopped symbol row (right decorative symbol 8R), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other continuous numerical symbols (special number pattern) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages (here, the upper stage is "5↓5", the middle stage is "6↓6", and the lower stage is "7↓7"). ”). At the time of stop display, the display of the other number patterns than the three number patterns in each of the pattern rows of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed as they are without disappearing.

Following the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C changes the mode of all the displayed number patterns (to special number patterns) while maintaining the low-speed variable display. Specifically, in each number pattern, the number of number images represented by one number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. In FIG. 57(E), the number pattern of "5" represents five number images of "5", the number pattern of "6" represents six number images of "6", and the number image of "6" is represented by "7". In the number pattern of , seven number images of "7" are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C has a plurality of special number patterns each composed of the same number of number images as the number itself, while maintaining the low-speed fluctuation display. After moving downward, it is stopped and displayed in the state of a special number pattern. Here, in the statically displayed pattern row (middle decorative pattern 8C), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed above and below. number pattern) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages (here, the upper stage "555", the middle stage "666", and the lower stage "767"). ). That is, it becomes a winning pattern in all stages. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(G), one winning pattern "666" out of the three winning patterns changes its original form (usually to a number pattern), and the remaining two winning patterns "555" and " 777” disappears.

In the second example of the decorative symbol number image number change effect A, FIG. 57(H) is executed after FIG. 57(A) and FIG. 57(B) are executed. In FIG. 57(H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as it is without changing to a special number pattern after maintaining the low-speed variable display. Here, in the statically displayed pattern row (left decorative pattern 8L), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed above and below. number pattern) disappears. That is, here, only the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages (here, the upper stage is "5↓↓", the middle stage is "6↓↓", and the lower stage is "7↓↓"). . At the time of stop display, the display of the number patterns other than the three number patterns in the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed as they are without disappearing. The right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, making it difficult to visually recognize the number pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(I), an effect of changing the number of decorative design numeral images is performed. When this effect is performed, the expectation of winning is higher than when it is not performed. After the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in each number pattern, the number of number images represented by one number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. For example, when the number image represented by the number pattern is "7", seven number images of "7" are displayed in one number pattern. In FIG. 57(I), the numeral symbol "5" has five numeral images of "5" (composed of one upper row, two middle rows, and two lower rows), and the numeral symbol "6" has Six number images of "6" (composed of two upper rows, two middle rows, and two lower rows) are represented, and seven number images of "7" (one upper row, middle row) are represented in the number pattern of "7". 3, and 3 in the lower row). The colors of the multiple number images represented by one number pattern may be different from each other, or all may be the same color. The right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as it is without changing to a special number pattern after maintaining the low-speed variable display. Here, in the stopped symbol row (right decorative symbol 8R), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other continuous numerical symbols (special number pattern) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages (here, the upper stage is "5↓5", the middle stage is "6↓6", and the lower stage is "7↓7"). ”). The middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(J), after the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in each number pattern, the number of number images represented by one number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. In FIG. 57(J), the numeral symbol "5" has five numeral images of "5" (composed of one upper row, two middle rows, and two lower rows), and the numeral symbol "6" has Six number images of "6" (composed of two upper rows, two middle rows, and two lower rows) are represented, and seven number images of "7" (one upper row, middle row) are represented in the number pattern of "7". 3, and 3 in the lower row). After maintaining the low-speed variable display, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as it is without changing to the special number pattern. Here, in the statically displayed pattern row (middle decorative pattern 8C), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed above and below. number pattern) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages (here, the upper stage "575", the middle stage "686", and the lower stage "797"). ).

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(K), after the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in each number pattern, the number of number images represented by one number pattern changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. In FIG. 57(K), the numeral symbol "7" has seven numeral images of "7" (composed of one upper row, three middle rows, and three lower rows), and the numeral symbol "8" has Eight number images of "8" (composed of two upper rows, three middle rows, and three lower rows) are displayed, and nine number images of "9" (three upper rows, middle row) are displayed in the number pattern of "9". 3, and 3 in the lower row). After that, as shown in FIG. 57(L), one winning pattern "686" out of the three losing patterns changes its original form (usually to a number pattern), and the remaining two winning patterns "575" and " 797” disappears.

[Decorative pattern number image number change effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-decorative-symbol-images change effect B. FIG. The number-of-decorative-symbols-images change effect is a effect in which the number of the number images represented (included) in one decorative symbol changes. 58(A) to (F) show the first example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect B, and FIGS. 58(G) to (J) show the second example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect B. Examples are shown, and FIGS. 58(K) and 58(L) show a modification of the decoration design number image number change effect B. FIG.

In the first example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" (ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during the low-speed variable display, a plurality of number patterns are displayed in a vertical line in the pattern array (pattern row) so that they can be visually recognized, as in the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 58(C). In, move downward, and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is decelerated and changed from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display, and is stopped and displayed as it is without changing the mode. Here, in the statically displayed pattern row (left decorative pattern 8L), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed above and below. number pattern) disappears. That is, here, only the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages (here, the upper stage is "5↓↓", the middle stage is "6↓↓", and the lower stage is "7↓↓"). . At the time of stop display, the display of the number patterns other than the three number patterns in the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed as they are without disappearing. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain high-speed fluctuation display, making it difficult to visually recognize the number patterns.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(C), a decoration pattern number image number changing effect is performed. When this effect is performed, the expectation of winning is higher than when it is not performed. Here, it is performed in the middle stage of the symbol that is stopped and displayed. After the left decorative pattern 8L is stop-displayed, one of the stop-displayed number patterns changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the number patterns in the middle row, the number of number images represented by the number patterns changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. In the number pattern of "6" in the middle row, six number images of "6" (composed of two upper rows, two middle rows, and two lower rows) are represented. The colors of the multiple number images represented by one number pattern may be different from each other, or all may be the same color. The numeral patterns representing "5" in the upper row and "7" in the lower row do not change in form. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, making it difficult to visually recognize the number pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(D), the right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated and changed from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and is stopped and displayed as it is without changing the mode. Here, in the stopped symbol row (right decorative symbol 8R), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other continuous numerical symbols (special number pattern) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages (here, the upper stage is "5↓5", the middle stage is "6↓6", and the lower stage is "7↓7"). ”). It should be noted that, during the stop display, the display of the number patterns other than the three number patterns in the pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed as they are without disappearing. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(E), after the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed, one of the stopped and displayed numeric patterns changes (to a special numeric pattern). Specifically, in the number patterns in the middle row, the number of number images represented by the number patterns changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. In the number pattern of "6" in the middle row, six number images of "6" (composed of two upper rows, two middle rows, and two lower rows) are represented. The numeral patterns representing "5" in the upper row and "7" in the lower row do not change in form. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and is stopped and displayed as it is without changing the mode. Here, in the statically displayed pattern row (middle decorative pattern 8C), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed above and below. number pattern) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages (here, the upper stage "525", the middle stage "636", and the lower stage "747"). ). At the time of stop display, the display of the number patterns other than the three number patterns in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed as they are without disappearing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(F), after the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, one of the stopped and displayed numeric patterns changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the number patterns in the middle row, the number of number images represented by the number patterns changes. Here, the number of number images represented in one number pattern is the same as the number represented in the number pattern. In the number pattern of "3" in the middle row, three number images of "3" (composed of one upper row and two lower rows) are represented. The numeral patterns representing "2" in the upper row and "4" in the lower row do not change in form. As a result, the upper row "525", the middle row "636", and the lower row "747" all fail and are fixed and stopped.

In the second example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect B, FIG. 58(G) is executed after FIG. 58(A) and FIG. 58(B) are executed. In FIG. 58(G), an effect of changing the number of decorative design numeral images is performed. When this effect is performed, the expectation of winning is higher than when it is not performed. Here, the processing is performed on the upper, middle and lower stages of the stopped symbols. After the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the upper, middle, and lower number patterns, the number of number images represented by the number patterns changes. Here, the number of number images represented by one number pattern is two. Each of the upper, middle, and lower "567" of the left decorative pattern 8L represents two number images in one number pattern. This suggests that there is a high probability of success in the upper, middle, and lower stages. The colors of the multiple number images represented by one number pattern may be different from each other, or all may be the same color. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, making it difficult to visually recognize the number pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(H), the right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated and changed from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and is stopped and displayed as it is without changing the mode. Here, in the stopped symbol row (right decorative symbol 8R), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other continuous numerical symbols (special number pattern) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages (here, the upper stage is "5↓5", the middle stage is "6↓6", and the lower stage is "7↓7"). ”). It should be noted that, during the stop display, the display of the number patterns other than the three number patterns in the pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed as they are without disappearing. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(I), after the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the upper, middle, and lower number patterns, the number of number images represented by the number patterns changes. Here, the number of number images represented by one number pattern is two. Each of the upper, middle, and lower "567" of the right decorative pattern 8R represents two number images in one number pattern. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and is stopped and displayed as it is without changing the mode. Here, in the statically displayed pattern row (middle decorative pattern 8C), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed above and below. number pattern) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages (here, the upper stage "525", the middle stage "636", and the lower stage "747"). ). At the time of stop display, the display of the number patterns other than the three number patterns in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed as they are without disappearing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(J), after the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the upper, middle, and lower number patterns, the number of number images represented by the number patterns changes. Here, the number of number images represented by one number pattern is two. Each of the upper, middle, and lower "234" of the middle decorative pattern 8C represents two number images in one number pattern. As a result, the upper row "525", the middle row "636", and the lower row "747" all fail and are fixed and stopped.

FIG. 58(K) shows a modification of the number-of-decorative-designs-images change effect B. FIG. The aspect of the decorative pattern number image number change effect is not limited to FIGS. 58(A) to (J). As a mode of the special number design, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(K), two number images may be displayed in one number design, and the sizes of the two number images may be different from each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 58(L), two numeric images may be represented in one numeric pattern, the sizes of the two numeric images may be different from each other, and the two numeric images may be displayed overlapping each other.

[Decorative pattern number image number change effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-decorative-symbol-images change effect C. FIG. The decorative pattern number image number change effect is a effect in which the number of number images represented (included) in one decorative pattern changes. 59(A) to (F) show the first example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect C, and FIGS. 59(G) to (K) show the second example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect C. An example is shown, and FIG. 59(L) shows a modification of the decorative design number image number change effect C.

In the first example of the decorative pattern number image number change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 59(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high speed variation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during the low-speed variable display, a plurality of number patterns are displayed in a vertical line in the pattern array (pattern row) so that they can be visually recognized, as in the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 59(C). In, move downward, and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is decelerated and changed from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display, and is stopped and displayed as it is without changing the mode. Here, in the statically displayed pattern row (left decorative pattern 8L), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed above and below. number pattern) disappears. That is, here, only the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages (here, the upper stage is "5↓↓", the middle stage is "6↓↓", and the lower stage is "7↓↓"). . At the time of stop display, the display of the number patterns other than the three number patterns in the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed as they are without disappearing. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain high-speed fluctuation display, making it difficult to visually recognize the number patterns.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(C), a number-of-decorative-symbols-images change effect is performed. When this effect is performed, the expectation of winning becomes higher than when it is not performed. Here, the processing is performed on the upper, middle and lower stages of the stopped symbols. After the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the upper, middle, and lower number patterns, the number of number images represented in the number patterns and the numbers themselves change. Here, the number of number images represented by one number pattern is two. In addition, two types of numbers that are different from each other (in this case, consecutive numbers) are represented. The number "5" in the upper row of the left decorative pattern 8L becomes a number pattern including two number images "5" and "4". The number "6" in the middle row of the left decorative pattern 8L becomes a number pattern including two number images "6" and "5". In the lower row of the left decorative pattern 8L, the number "7" becomes a number pattern including two number images "7" and "8". This suggests that there is a high probability of winning in the upper, middle, and lower stages. The colors of the multiple number images represented by one number pattern may be different from each other, or all may be the same color. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains high-speed fluctuation display, making the number pattern difficult to see.

After that, the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and is stopped and displayed as it is without changing the mode. Here, in the stopped symbol row (right decorative symbol 8R), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other continuous numerical symbols (special number pattern) disappears. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(D), after the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed, the mode of all the number patterns stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the upper, middle, and lower number patterns, the number of number images represented by the number patterns and the numbers themselves change. Here, the number of number images represented by one number pattern is two. In addition, two types of numbers that are different from each other (in this case, consecutive numbers) are represented. The number "5" in the upper row of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes a number pattern including two number images "5" and "4". The number "6" in the middle row of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes a number pattern including two number images "6" and "5". In the lower row of the right decorative pattern 8R, the number "7" becomes a number pattern including two number images "7" and "8". As a result, "5↓5" and "4↓4" reach in the upper row, "5↓5" and "6↓6" in the middle row, and "7↓7" and "8↓8" in the lower row. It is suggested that the reach is high and the expectation that it will be a hit is high. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and is stopped and displayed as it is without changing the mode. Here, in the statically displayed pattern row (middle decorative pattern 8C), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed above and below. number pattern) disappears. That is, here, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages. In the upper row, it becomes "545" and "444", which includes the jackpot symbols. In the middle row, it becomes "555" and "656", which includes a jackpot pattern. In the lower row, both "767" and "868" are lost symbols.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(F), winning symbols in the upper row and the middle row are displayed. Specifically, "444" in the upper row and "555" in the middle row are displayed, and then only one of them is displayed to notify the type of jackpot.

In the second example of the decorative symbol number image number change effect C, FIG. 59(G) is executed after FIGS. 59(A) and 59(B) are executed. In FIG. 59(G), an effect of changing the number of decorative design numeral images is performed. When this effect is performed, the expectation of winning is higher than when it is not performed. Here, it is performed in the middle stage of the symbols that are stopped and displayed. After the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed, the form of the number pattern in the middle row that is stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the middle number pattern, the number of number images represented in the number pattern and the number itself change. Here, the number of number images represented by one number pattern is two. In addition, two types of numbers that are different from each other (in this case, consecutive numbers) are represented. The number "6" in the middle row of the left decorative pattern 8L becomes a number pattern including two number images "6" and "5". Further, the numbers images of "6" and "5" in the middle are moved (rotated) in a circular motion, and their positions are changed. The colors of the multiple number images represented by one number pattern may be different from each other, or all may be the same color. This suggests that the expectation of winning is high. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, making it difficult to visually recognize the number pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(H), the right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated and changed from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and is stopped and displayed as it is without changing the mode. Here, in the stopped symbol row (right decorative symbol 8R), three numerical symbols (special numerical symbols) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other continuous numerical symbols (special number pattern) disappears. The middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of number patterns arranged vertically can be visually recognized in the pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(I), after the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed, the form of the number pattern in the middle row that is stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the middle number pattern, the number of number images represented in the number pattern and the number itself change. Here, the number of number images represented by one number pattern is two. In addition, two types of numbers that are different from each other (in this case, consecutive numbers) are represented. The number "6" in the middle row of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes a number pattern including two number images "6" and "5". Further, the numbers images of "6" and "5" in the middle are moved (rotated) in a circular motion, and their positions are changed. On the other hand, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the number itself represented by the number pattern further changes in the middle special number pattern. Here, "6" and "5" are switched to "6" and "7". The middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changed from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and is stopped and displayed as it is without changing the mode. Here, in the statically displayed pattern row (middle decorative pattern 8C), three number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction), and other consecutive number patterns (special number patterns) are displayed above and below. number pattern) disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(J), after the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, the mode of the number pattern in the middle stage that is stopped and displayed changes (to a special number pattern). Specifically, in the middle number pattern, the number of number images represented in the number pattern and the number itself change. Here, the number of number images represented by one number pattern is two. In addition, two types of numbers that are different from each other (in this case, consecutive numbers) are represented. What was "3" in the middle stage of the middle decorative design 8C becomes a number design including two number images "2" and "3". Furthermore, the numbers images of "2" and "3" in the middle are moved (rotated) in a circular motion, and their positions are changed. On the other hand, in the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, the number itself represented by the number design further changes in the middle special number design. In the middle row of the left decorative pattern 8L, "6" and "7" are switched to "7" and "8". In the middle row of the right decorative pattern 8R, "5" and "6" are switched to "6" and "7". As a result, "525" is a losing symbol in the upper stage, "8 or 7, 2 or 3, 7 or 6" is a losing symbol in the middle stage, and "747" is a losing symbol in the lower stage. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(K), "836" in the middle row is stopped and displayed in a normal manner, and other symbols disappear.

FIG. 59(L) shows a modification of the decorative pattern number image number change effect C. FIG. The aspect of the decorative pattern number image number change effect is not limited to FIGS. 59(C) to (J). As a mode of the special number pattern, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(L), one number pattern may represent three number images, and the three number images may represent different types of numbers.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of changing the number of decorative pattern number images will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, an effect can be executed in which the number of number images represented by one decorative symbol changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, in the above effect, the number of number images represented by one decorative symbol before and after the decorative symbol stops moving changes (for example, FIGS. 57(H) to (K), FIGS. 58(B) to (L), and FIGS. 59(B) to (K)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, in the above effect, when a plurality of number images are represented in one decorative pattern, the numbers represented by the plurality of number images are the same ( For example, FIGS. 57(C)-(K) and FIGS. 58(C)-(L)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, in the above effect, when a plurality of number images are displayed in one decorative pattern, the plurality of number images may have different colors. good. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, in the above effect, a symbol row in which a plurality of decorative symbols are arranged along the changing direction is displayed, and all the decorative symbols included in the symbol row are displayed. , the number of numeric images represented in one decorative pattern changes (for example, FIG. 57, FIGS. 58(G)-(L), and FIGS. 59(C)-(E)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, in the above effect, the number of number images represented by one decorative pattern changes in all the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a. (FIGS. 57(F)(K), 58(J)-(L)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern number image number change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative design number image number changing effects A to C, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed in the upper, middle and lower stages. However, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R may be configured such that only one stage is stopped and displayed. Further, in the decorative design number image number changing effects A to C, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are all executed with the decorative design number image number changing effects. However, there may be a pattern row which is executed in at least one of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R and the decorative pattern number image number change effect is not executed. In this case, for example, it may be configured such that the degree of expectation for winning increases as the number of symbol rows for which the decorative symbol number image number change effect is executed increases.

[Modification 2]
In the decoration pattern number image number change effect B, in FIG. 58(C), one number pattern (middle row) of the number patterns stopped and displayed is changed (to a special number pattern). However, the aspect of two or more number patterns among the number patterns that are stopped and displayed may be changed (to a special number pattern). Also, the number pattern that changes to the special number pattern is not limited to the middle row, and may be at least one of the upper row and the lower row.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern number image number change effects A to C, the colors of a plurality of number images represented by one number pattern may be different from each other, or all may be the same color. Also, at least one of the plurality of number images represented by one number pattern may represent a decorative number instead of a number that constitutes a big win when the numbers are aligned.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
capable of executing an effect in which the number of numeric images represented in one of the decorative patterns changes;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
In the effect, the number of numeric images represented by one decorative pattern changes before and after the decorative pattern stops moving.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-2,
In the production, when a plurality of numeric images are represented in one of the decorative patterns, the numerical values represented by the plurality of numeric images are the same.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-3,
In the production, when a plurality of numeric images are displayed in one of the decorative patterns, the plurality of numeric images have different colors.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
In the production, a pattern row in which a plurality of the decorative patterns are arranged along the direction of variation is displayed, and in all the decorative patterns included in the pattern row, the number of number images represented by one decorative pattern is Change,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-5,
In the production, in all the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen, the number of numeric images represented in one decorative pattern changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The fluctuation direction change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The variation direction change effects A to C are executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the first movable accessory interlocking effects A to C, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Variation direction change effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the variation direction change effect A. FIG. In the variation direction change effect A, when the specific image YK is displayed during the variation effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R changes, and the specific image YK is recognized. When it becomes impossible, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is restored. It should be noted that the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the normal mode is the direction D1, and they are linearly moved and displayed.

In the variable production, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and a special pattern is displayed by the variable display of the set of patterns. Represents the variable display (special figure fluctuation) of, and notifies the special figure lottery result by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents become difficult to see. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved linearly in the direction D1 from when they enter the frame to when they go out of the frame. It is assumed that the result of the special lottery that triggered this variable production was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are changing at high speed, the specific image YK is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, along with this, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change in the direction of change while maintaining their display. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is gradually shifted from the direction D1 to the direction D2, the middle decorative pattern 8C is gradually shifted from the direction D1 to the direction D3, and the right decorative pattern 8R is gradually shifted from the direction D1 to the direction D4. changes. Here, the directions D2 to D4 are all directions crossing the direction D1. Also, during and after the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. It is assumed that the moving direction and the frame-out direction from the display screen 7a are always the same, and are linearly moved and displayed. In addition to this change in direction of fluctuation, the size of each decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R also gradually changed. It shall be difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been fluctuating at high speed decelerate and undergo deceleration fluctuation. Due to the deceleration fluctuation display, the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed in the size of the decorative patterns in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is possible to visually recognize that the enlarged pattern 8Cb and the right enlarged pattern 8Rb are changed. Here, the variation speed is decelerated after the variation direction of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed, but the variation direction may be changed after the variation speed is decelerated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), the specific image YK rotates while maintaining its display and display position in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, along with this, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the size of each decorative pattern to be variably displayed are changed again. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the direction of fluctuation gradually changes from the direction D2 to the direction D2A, and each decorative pattern to be variably displayed gradually changes from the left enlarged pattern 8Lb to the left reduced pattern 8Ls. In the middle decorative pattern C, the direction of fluctuation gradually changes from the direction D3 to the direction D3A, and each decorative pattern to be variably displayed gradually changes from the medium enlarged pattern 8Cb to the medium reduced pattern 8Cs. In the right decorative pattern R, the direction of fluctuation gradually changes from the direction D4 to the direction D4A, and each decorative pattern to be variably displayed changes gradually from the right enlarged pattern 8Rb to the right reduced pattern 8Rs. In addition, during and after the change direction of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. It is assumed that the frame-in direction and the frame-out direction from the display screen 7a are always the same, and are linearly moved and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), the specific image YK becomes invisible (hidden here). returns to its original size. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the direction of fluctuation gradually returns from the direction D2A to the direction D1, and each decorative pattern that is variably displayed returns gradually from the left reduced pattern 8Ls to the left decorative pattern 8L in the normal mode. In the middle decorative pattern C, the direction of fluctuation gradually returns from the direction D3A to the direction D1, and each decorative pattern that is variably displayed returns gradually from the medium reduced pattern 8Cs to the medium decorative pattern 8C of the normal mode. In the right decorative pattern R, the direction of fluctuation gradually returns from the direction D4A to the direction D1, and each decorative pattern that is variably displayed returns gradually from the right reduced pattern 8Rs to the normal mode right decorative pattern 8R. Further, during and after the change in which all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed back to the direction D1 shown in FIG. It is assumed that the direction of frame-in on the screen 7a and the frame-out direction of the display screen 7a are always the same, and are linearly moved and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that have changed in deceleration are stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative pattern 8L→right decorative pattern 8R→middle decorative pattern 8C in a failing manner. be. After that, the game is fixed and stopped, and the next variable effect is executed.

The above is the display example of the variation direction change effect A and the flow of execution. In the variable direction change performance A, when the specific image YK is displayed during the variable performance, the variable directions of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the direction D1 to the directions D2 to D4, respectively, and displayed in a variable manner. The size of each decorative pattern also changes. After that, along with the rotation of the specific image YK, the direction of movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the size of each decorative pattern to be variably displayed also change again. Furthermore, after that, when the specific image YK becomes difficult to see, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R all return to the direction D1, and the size of each decorative pattern that is variably displayed also returns to its original size. . Therefore, by executing the variation direction change effect A, it is possible to execute an unprecedented novel effect, and thus it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Variation direction change effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the variation direction change effect B. FIG. In the variation direction change effect B, first, during the variation effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate, the direction of variation of the left decorative pattern 8L changes, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L that is variably displayed changes the size of the image. It becomes the expansion pattern 8Lr with the expanded width. After that, the variation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L returns to its original direction, and the expanded pattern 8Lr displayed in a variable manner returns to the left decorative pattern 8L. It should be noted that the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the normal mode is the direction D1, and they are linearly moved and displayed.

In the variable production, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and a special pattern is displayed by the variable display of the set of patterns. Represents the variable display (special figure fluctuation) of, and notifies the special figure lottery result by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 61(A), the variable effect is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents become difficult to see. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved linearly in the direction D1 from when they enter the frame to when they go out of the frame. In addition, it is assumed that the result of the special lottery that triggered this variable production was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the left decorative pattern 8L that has been fluctuating at high speed decelerates and undergoes deceleration fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(C), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating, the direction of fluctuation of the left decorative pattern 8L gradually changes from the direction D1 to the direction D5, and is variably displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L changes to the expansion pattern 8Lr. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L changes in the direction of fluctuation and also changes in the size of the decorative pattern. During and after the variation direction of the decorative pattern 8L shown in FIG. It is assumed that the direction of frame-out from the screen 7a is always the same, and that the images are moved and displayed linearly. It is also assumed that the direction D5 is in a direction that intersects with the direction D1. At this time, the direction of variation of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R does not change, and the size of the decorative pattern does not change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(D), the movement direction of the left decorative pattern 8L gradually returns to the direction D1. In addition, along with this, the expanded pattern 8Lr that has been variably displayed gradually returns to the left decorative pattern 8L in the normal mode. That is, as for the left decorative pattern 8L, the direction of fluctuation is restored and the size of the decorative pattern is also restored. In addition, during and after the movement direction of the decorative pattern 8L shown in FIG. , the frame-out direction from the display screen 7a is always the same, and the image is linearly moved and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), the left decorative symbol 8L which has been decelerating and fluctuating is stopped and displayed. After that, the other decorative symbols are also stopped in a losing mode, and the next variable performance is executed.

The above is the display example of the variation direction change effect B and the flow of execution. In the variation direction change performance B, during the variation performance, first, the variation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L gradually changes from the direction D1 to the direction D5, and furthermore, the size of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern 8L also gradually changes. After that, the variation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L returns to the direction D1, and the size of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern 8L also returns to its original size. Therefore, by executing the variation direction change effect B, it is possible to execute a novel effect that has never existed before, so that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Variation direction change effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the variation direction change effect A. FIG. In the variable direction change effect B, first, during the variable effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate, after the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are decelerated, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C change their changing directions, Further, the left decorative pattern 8L that is variably displayed becomes a reduced pattern 8Ls in which the size of the image is reduced. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are changed again in the direction of fluctuation, and the reduced pattern 8Ls variably displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L becomes an enlarged pattern 8Lr with an enlarged image size. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C return to the original direction, and the expanded pattern 8Lr that is variably displayed returns to the left decorative pattern 8L. It should be noted that the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the normal mode is the direction D1, and they are linearly moved and displayed.

In the variable production, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and a special pattern is displayed by the variable display of the set of patterns. Represents the variable display (special figure fluctuation) of, and notifies the special figure lottery result by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied at high speed, and the contents of each are difficult to see. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change in the direction D1, and are linearly moved and displayed. It is assumed that the result of the special lottery that triggered this variable production was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that have been fluctuating at high speed decelerate and undergo deceleration fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the direction of variation of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C gradually changes from the direction D1 to the direction D6, and the left decorative pattern 8L that is variably displayed is reduced. The pattern gradually changes to 8Ls. Here, the direction D6 shall be a direction crossing the direction D1. That is, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern changes, and the size of the decorative pattern also changes. During and after the variation direction of the left decorative design 8L shown in FIG. It is assumed that the frame-in direction and the frame-out direction are always the same, and are linearly moved and displayed. At this time, the direction of movement of the right decorative pattern 8R does not change, and the size of the decorative pattern does not change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(D), the movement direction of the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C changes again from the direction D6 to the direction D7, and the reduced design 8Ls variably displayed in the left decorative design 8L. , changes to the expansion pattern 8Lb. Note that the direction D7 is different from both the direction D1 and the direction D6. That is, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern changes again to a direction different from both the direction D1 and the direction D6, and the size of the decorative pattern also changes again. It should be noted that during and after the variation direction of the left decorative design 8L shown in FIG. It is assumed that the frame-in direction and the frame-out direction from the display screen 7a are always the same, and are linearly moved and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), the movement directions of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are restored. In other words, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern has returned to its original direction. In addition, during and after the movement direction of the left decorative design 8L shown in FIG. It is assumed that the direction of frame-in on the display screen 7a and the frame-out direction of the display screen 7a are always the same, and are linearly moved and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), the left decorative pattern 8L (expanded pattern 8Lb) and the right decorative pattern 8R which have been decelerating and fluctuating are stopped and displayed. After that, the expansion pattern 8Lb stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L returns to the size of the left decorative pattern 8L in the normal mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C stops in the losing mode, and the next variable performance is executed. The timing at which the expanded pattern 8Lb returns to the normal size of the left decorative pattern 8L may be changed arbitrarily.

The above is the display example of the variation direction change effect C and the flow of execution. In the variation direction change effect C, during the variation effect, the variation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C changes by 3 degrees (direction D1 → direction D6 → direction D7 → direction D1), and the left decorative pattern is variably displayed. The size of 8L is also changed three times (normal pattern left decorative pattern 8L→reduced pattern 8Ls→inflated pattern 8Lb→normal pattern left decorative pattern 8L). Therefore, by executing the variation direction change effect C, it is possible to execute an unprecedented novel effect, and thus it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 60 to 62, there is a first effect in which the decorative pattern fluctuates in the direction D1, and the decorative pattern fluctuates from the direction D1 to any of the directions D2 to D6. A second effect that changes can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 61 and 62, in the second effect, the size of the decorative symbols changes from the size of the decorative symbols in the first effect, and the expansion symbol 8Lr, or It was configured to be a reduced pattern 8Ls. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 60 to 62, after the second effect, a third effect is executed in which the variation direction of the decorative symbols returns from any of the directions D2 to D5 and D7 to the direction D1. It was a possible configuration. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, after the second effect and before the third effect, the variation direction of the decorative symbols changes from the direction D6 to the direction D7. 4 effects can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, in the fourth effect, the size of the decorative pattern changes from the size of the decorative pattern in the second effect (here, the reduced pattern 8Ls expands). It is configured to change to the pattern 8Lb). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, in the third effect, the size of the decorative symbol changes from the size of the decorative symbol in the second effect (here, the size of the expanded symbol 8Lb returns to the normal size). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the second effect, the direction of variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changes from direction D1 to directions D2 to D4, which are different directions. It is configured. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
4 shows a modification of the present embodiment.
[Modification 1]
In the variable direction change effect A, the directions D2 to D4 are configured to be different from each other. On the other hand, directions D2 to D4 may all be the same direction.

[Modification 2]
In the variation direction change effect A, when the specific image YK is displayed, the variation direction of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is changed. On the other hand, for example, when the movable accessory moves, or when the display area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R becomes a specific area on the display screen 7a, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is changed. may

[Modification 3]
In the fluctuation direction change effects A to C, when the fluctuation direction of any one of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changes, the fluctuation speed of the decorative pattern whose fluctuation direction changes may be changed arbitrarily. For example, in the fluctuation direction change effect A, after the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R change from the high speed fluctuation display to the deceleration fluctuation display, the fluctuation directions of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R change from the direction D1 to the directions D2, D3, It may be changed to D4.

[Modification 4]
In the variation direction change performance C, when the variation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L returns from the direction D7 to the direction D1, the size of the decorative pattern returns to its original size after the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the timing at which the decorative pattern returns to its original size may be changed arbitrarily.

[Modification 5]
In the fluctuation direction change effects B and C, at least one row of the three rows of decorative symbols has a configuration in which the fluctuation direction does not change. On the other hand, the direction of variation of the decorative symbols in all rows may be changed. Also, in this case, the sizes of the decorative patterns in all rows may be changed, or the size of at least one row of decorative patterns may not be changed.

[Modification 6]
In the variation direction change performance A, the variation directions of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are changed, but the sizes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are not changed. On the other hand, the sizes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also be changed. Also, in this case, the sizes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be changed to different sizes.

[Modification 7]
In the variable direction change effects A to C, the decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R always have the same direction of frame-in on the display screen 7a and frame-out direction from the display screen 7a, It was displayed moving linearly. On the other hand, for example, the direction of change at the time of frame-in may be the direction D1, the direction of change may change in the area on the display screen 7a, and the direction of change at the time of the frame-out may be the direction D2.

[Modification 8]
In the fluctuation direction change effects A to C, the described effects may be appropriately combined.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern fluctuates in a first direction;
a second effect in which the direction of variation of the decorative pattern changes from the first direction to a second direction that intersects with the first direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
In the second production, the size of the decorative pattern changes from the size of the decorative pattern in the first production.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
After the second effect, a third effect can be executed in which the direction of variation of the decorative pattern returns from the second direction to the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect 3,
After the second effect and before the third effect, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern changes from the second direction to the first direction and the second direction. It is possible to execute a fourth effect that changes in a different third direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect 4,
In the fourth effect, the size of the decorative pattern changes from the size of the decorative pattern in the second effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect 3,
In the third effect, the size of the decorative pattern changes from the size of the decorative pattern in the second effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A4-7]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
In the second effect, the variation direction of the decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern is from the first direction to a fourth direction different from both the first direction and the second direction. Change,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The first movable accessory interlocking effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. FIG. The first movable accessory interlocking productions A to C are executed during the variable production. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the first movable accessory interlocking effects A to C, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[First movable accessory interlocking production A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the first movable accessory-linked effect A. FIG. The first movable accessory interlocking effect A is an effect in which the display positions of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are also moved in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 during the variable effect. It should be noted that the display positions of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are moved while maintaining the display. Also, the first movable accessory 14 is assumed to be movable between the position P1 and the position P2.

In the variable production, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and a special pattern is displayed by the variable display of the set of patterns. Represents the variable display (special figure fluctuation) of, and notifies the special figure lottery result by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied at high speed, and the contents of each are difficult to see. Here, it is assumed that the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at position P1. Also, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at a position P4 on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed, the first movable accessory 14 moves linearly from position P1 to position P2. In conjunction with this movement, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C maintain their display state from position P4 to position P5 on the display screen 7a (image orientation, size, color, etc. do not change). , moving in a straight line at a constant speed. It is assumed that the positional relationship between the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C does not change compared to before the movement. Also, it is assumed that the orientation and size of the images of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C do not change compared to before the movement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are fluctuating at high speed, the first movable accessory 14 moves again from position P2 to position P3. In conjunction with this movement, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C maintain their display state from position P5 to position P4 on the display screen 7a (image direction, size, color, etc. do not change). , moving in a straight line at a constant speed. It is assumed that the positional relationship between the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C does not change compared to before the movement. Also, it is assumed that the orientation and size of the images of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C do not change compared to before the movement.

The above is the display example of the first movable accessory-linked effect A and the execution flow. In the first movable role interlocking effect A, first, in conjunction with the movement of the first movable role 14 from position P1 to position P2, the positions where the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed are also at position P4. to position P5. Furthermore, in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from the position P2 to the position P3, the positions where the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed return from the position P5 to the position P4. Therefore, by executing the first movable accessory-linked production A, it is possible to execute novel production that has never existed before, so that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[First movable accessory interlocking production B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the first movable accessory interlocking effect B. FIG. The first movable accessory interlocking effect B is an effect in which the display positions of the holding icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are also moved in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 during the variable effect. It should be noted that the display positions of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are moved while maintaining the display. Also, the first movable accessory 14 is assumed to be movable between positions P1, P2, and P3.

In the variable production, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and a special pattern is displayed by the variable display of the set of patterns. Represents the variable display (special figure fluctuation) of, and notifies the special figure lottery result by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents become difficult to see. Here, it is assumed that the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at position P1. Also, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at a position P4 on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), the first movable accessory 14 moves from position P1 to position P2 while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In conjunction with this movement, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C maintain their display state from position P4 to position P5 on the display screen 7a (image orientation, size, color, etc. do not change). , moving in a straight line at a constant speed. It is assumed that the positional relationship between the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C does not change compared to before the movement. Also, it is assumed that the orientation and size of the images of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C do not change compared to before the movement.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 64(C) and (D), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are fluctuating at high speed, the first movable accessory 14 moves again from position P2 to position P3. In conjunction with this movement, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C first maintained their display state from position P5 in the direction D1 on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 64(C) ( It moves linearly at a constant speed and reaches position P6 without changing the orientation, size, color, etc. of the image. After that, as shown in FIG. 64(D), the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C that have reached the position P6 maintain their display state in a direction D2 different from the direction D1 (image orientation and size , color, etc.), it moves linearly at a constant speed and returns to position P5. It is assumed that the positional relationship between the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C does not change compared to before the movement. Also, it is assumed that the orientation and size of the images of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C do not change compared to before the movement.

The above is the display example of the first movable accessory-linked effect B and the flow of execution. In the first movable role interlocking production B, first, in conjunction with the movement of the first movable role 14 from position P1 to position P2, the positions where the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed are also at position P4. to position P5. Furthermore, in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from position P2 to position P3, the position where the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed changes from position P5 to position P4 via position P6. return. Therefore, by executing the first movable accessory interlocking effect B, it is possible to execute an unprecedented novel effect, and thus it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[First movable accessory interlocking production C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the first movable accessory-linked effect C. FIG. The first movable role interlocking effect B is, during the variable effect, interlocking with the movement of the first movable role 14, the holding icon 9A and the change icon 9C, the effect mode image EG, the number of times of change image KG, and the decoration pattern 8L. , 8C, and 8R are also moved. The display positions of the pending icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the effect mode image EG, the number of times of variation image KG, and the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are to be moved while maintaining the display. and

In the variable production, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and a special pattern is displayed by the variable display of the set of patterns. Represents the variable display (special figure fluctuation) of, and notifies the special figure lottery result by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each moved and displayed in the direction H1, and when the deceleration fluctuates, two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are arranged vertically and displayed moving. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from top to bottom of the display screen 7a.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can select an arbitrary effect mode from a plurality of effect modes including the "premier mode", and displays the effect mode image EG representing the currently selected effect mode on the display screen 7a. shall be displayed. In addition, when the "premier mode" is selected, the display screen 7a also displays a variation frequency image KG representing the number of variation performances executed after the selection.

First, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the variable effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed at high speed at the position P11 on the display screen, and their contents become difficult to see. Here, it is assumed that the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at position P1. Further, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed at position P4 on the display screen, the change count image KG is displayed at position P7, and the effect mode image EG is displayed at position P9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the first movable accessory 14 moves from position P1 to position P2 while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In conjunction with this movement, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C move from the position P4 to the position P5, the variation number image KG moves from the position P7 to the position P8, and the effect mode image EG moves from the position P9 to the position P10. The patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move linearly at a constant speed from position P11 to position P12 while maintaining the display state on the display screen 7a (without changing the image orientation, size, color, etc.). Further, in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R also abruptly changes from the direction H1 to the direction H2. It is assumed that the positional relationship between the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C does not change compared to before the movement. Also, the directions and sizes of the pending icon 9A, the change icon 9C, the change count image KG, the effect mode image EG, and the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R do not change compared to before the movement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving at high speed at position P12 on the display screen 7a, the first movable accessory 14 moves again from position P2 to position P1. do. In conjunction with this movement, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C move from the position P5 to the position P4, the variation number image KG moves from the position P8 to the position P7, and the production mode image EG moves from the position P10 to the position P9. The patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move linearly at a constant speed from the position P12 to the position P11 while maintaining the display state on the display screen 7a (without changing the image orientation, size, color, etc.). Further, in conjunction with the re-movement of the first movable accessory 14, the changing directions of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R also suddenly return from the direction H2 to the direction H1. It is assumed that the positional relationship between the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C does not change compared to before the movement. Also, the directions and sizes of the pending icon 9A, the change icon 9C, the change count image KG, the effect mode image EG, and the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R do not change compared to before the movement.

The above is the display example of the first movable accessory-linked effect C and the execution flow. In the first movable role interlocking effect C, first, in conjunction with the movement of the first movable role 14, the pending icon 9A, the change icon 9C, the effect mode image EG, and the change count image KG are displayed on the display screen 7a. Moves linearly while maintaining the display on the top. Therefore, by executing the first movable accessory interlocking production B, it is possible to execute novel production that has never existed before, and thus it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 63 to 65, the display positions of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C on the display screen 7a change in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14. It is possible to execute the first effect to perform. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from the position P1 to the position P2, the holding icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. A first effect of moving from position P4 to position P5 on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, the holding icon 9A, In addition, the variable icon 9C has a configuration capable of executing a second effect of returning from the position P5 to the position P4 on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, in the second effect, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C move from the position P5 on the display screen 7a in the direction indicated by the arrow D1, After passing through the position P6, it moves in the first direction, passes through the sixth position, moves in the direction of the arrow D2 different from the arrow D1, and returns to the position P5. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, in the first effect, the display positions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a are changed in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14. It has a variable configuration. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, in the first effect, the display position of the effect mode image EG on the display screen 7a changes in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14. It has become. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, in the first effect, the display position of the change count image KG on the display screen 7a changes in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14. It has become. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
4 shows a modification of the present embodiment.
[Modification 1]
In the first movable accessory-linked effect B, like the first movable accessory-linked effect C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the effect mode image EG, and the variation frequency image KG may also be moved.

[Modification 2]
In the first movable role interlocking production C, the first movable role 14 moves from the first movement (movement from FIG. 65 (A) to FIG. 65 (B)) to the second movement (from FIG. 65 (B) 65(C)), the variation direction of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has been changed from the direction H1 to the direction H2. On the other hand, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may vary in different directions, or may not change their varying directions.

[Modification 3]
In the first movable role interlocking productions A to C, as the first movable role 14 moves, the image displayed on the entire display screen 7a moves to be displayed in a specific area on the display screen 7a. good too.

[Modification 4]
In the first movable accessory interlocking productions A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R were fluctuating at high speed. On the other hand, while at least one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is being displayed in deceleration fluctuation display or during stop display, the first movable accessory interlocking effects A to C may be executed. Also, the first movable accessory-linked productions A to C may be executed when the variable production is not being executed.

[Modification 5]
In the first movable accessory interlocking effects A to C, the display positions of the pending icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the effect mode image EG, the number of times of change image KG, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are maintained. It was running in a state where On the other hand, the display positions of these images may be moved without maintaining the display.

[Modification 6]
In the first movable accessory-linked effects A to C, the holding icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are configured so that their positional relationship does not change when the display position on the display screen 7a moves. On the other hand, the positional relationship may be changed respectively. That is, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C may move in different directions.

[Modification 7]
In the first movable accessory-linked productions A to C, the display positions of the holding icon 9A, the variation icon 9C, the production mode image EG, the number of variations image KG, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are linearly moved. was configured to be On the other hand, for example, it may move while meandering.

[Modification 8]
In the first movable accessory-linked effects A to C, the holding icon 9A, the change icon 9C, the effect mode image EG, the change number image KG, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed in size and orientation before and after movement. It was designed not to change. On the other hand, along with the movement of the display position, the image size and orientation may also be changed.

[Modification 9]
In the first movable accessory-linked effects A to C, the pending icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the effect mode image EG, the number of times of change image KG, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed during movement of the display position on the display screen 7a. , was configured so that the size, orientation, and color of each image did not change. On the other hand, for example, the display position may be moved while changing the size, orientation, and color of each image. Also, in this case, the display position may be changed gradually, or may be changed abruptly, like the movement of the display position.

[Modification 10]
In the first movable accessory-linked effects A to C, the holding icon 9A, the variable icon 9C, the effect mode image EG, the number of times of change image KG, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. It was running at a constant speed. On the other hand, you may move with acceleration.

[Modification 11]
In the first movable accessory-linked effects A to C, the described effects may be combined as appropriate.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a movable body,
One of the plurality of types of images is a pending image representing the pending special figure fluctuation,
Capable of executing a first effect in which the display position of the pending image changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable body,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
the movable body is movable between a first position, a second position, and a third position;
In the first effect, the holding image moves from the fourth position to the fifth position on the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position. death,
After the first effect, the holding image moves from the fifth position to the fourth position on the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body from the second position to the third position. A second production that returns to
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2,
In the second effect, the reserved image moves from the fifth position of the display means in a first direction, passes through a sixth position, and moves in a second direction different from the first direction. and returning to the fourth position;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
In the first effect, the display position of the decorative pattern changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a mode image representing the rendering mode currently being executed;
In the first effect, the display position of the mode image changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a count image representing the current game count;
In the first effect, the display position of the number image changes in conjunction with the movement of the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

66 to 68, the effect symbol movement variation effects A to C will be described below. 66 to 68, various movable accessories, various decorative members, and various background images arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing. FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A, FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B, and FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C. It is a diagram.

In this production pattern movement fluctuation production, when the production pattern fluctuation production (variation display) is started, the production patterns move in a predetermined direction to spread apart from each other. It moves toward the variable direction, and returns to the state before separating again during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern, that is, the state before spreading. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the effect symbol movement variation effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

Here, the performance symbols, reserved icons, etc. will be briefly explained first, and then the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A, the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B, and the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C will be explained in order.

[Production pattern]
First, the production pattern will be briefly explained. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, there are three vertical rectangular areas as variable display areas of three performance symbols (also referred to as "variation areas of performance symbols") (that is, the display screen 7a is arranged in three rows). area) is provided. The left effect pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of each variable display area (symbol: number). A variable effect (variable display) of "1" to number "9") is started. Specifically, a variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr toward the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, and A variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side of the middle variation display area 8Cr toward the lower side of the middle variation display area 8Cr, and the right performance symbol 8R is displayed. A variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started in a display mode in which reels are rotated from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display region 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the middle fluctuation display region 8Cr, and the vertical distance dimension of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display region 8Lr, The horizontal distance dimension of the middle fluctuation display region 8Cr and the horizontal distance dimension of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr are the same horizontal distance dimension.

On the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, there is a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left reference vertical line"). The intersecting point is the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "middle side reference vertical line") intersects the middle fluctuation display area. The center of the display area (middle fluctuation display area center) coincides with the center where a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a intersect. ), and the point at which a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the right variation display area 8Rr (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right reference vertical line") intersects is defined as the center of the right variation display area. At the center of each variable display area, each performance pattern is displayed temporarily and stopped, and when each performance pattern is stopped and displayed in line with the patterns of the same number, the player is notified of the win and each performance is displayed. When the symbols are not aligned with the symbols of the same number and are stopped and displayed, the player is notified that the symbols are lost.

In addition, in the center of the left fluctuation display area, the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the center of the right fluctuation display area, the performance symbols are not temporarily stopped or stopped, and the blank symbols that do not constitute a winning combination (preceding performance symbols and subsequent It is placed between the production pattern to be done) may be temporarily stopped or stopped. The blank pattern is configured as a three-dimensional image of vertically long, horizontally short rhombuses in navy blue. In this embodiment, blank patterns are omitted in FIGS.

In this embodiment, the production pattern below the production pattern that temporarily stops (stop display) in the center of the variable display area is described as "preceding production pattern", and the production pattern that temporarily stops (stop display) in the center of the fluctuation display area. The upper production pattern is described as "subsequent production pattern". In addition, the effect pattern below the blank pattern that temporarily stops (stop display) in the center of the dynamic display area is described as "preceding effect pattern", and the effect above the blank pattern that temporarily stops (stop display) in the center of the variable display area The design is described as "subsequent performance design".

In addition, in this embodiment, there is a case where the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started in which each effect symbol is stopped and displayed only in the center of the left variation display area, the center of the middle variation display area, and the center of the right variation display area. In addition, in the present embodiment, a blank pattern is displayed above each of the performance symbols stopped in the center of the left fluctuation display area, the center of the middle fluctuation display region, and the center of the right fluctuation display region, and the subsequent performance symbols are stopped and displayed, and the left fluctuation is displayed. At the center of the display area, at the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and at the center of the right fluctuation display area, a blank pattern is displayed below each of the production patterns stopped and displayed, and the preceding production pattern is stop-displayed. may occur. Of course, one, two, or all of the center of the left variation display area, the center of the middle variation display area, and the center of the right variation display area are displayed with blank symbols. sometimes

In the variable production (variable display) of the production pattern, all are numbers, which are numbers "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number ``7'' → number ``8'' → number ``9'' → number ``1'' → number ``2'' → . . . There is a blank pattern between the pattern of . Note that the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9", except the number "7", all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. In this way, each production pattern is mainly designed in one of bright red, bright green, and bright blue. Further, since the number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) each have a color, for example, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are aligned with the same number pattern, and are temporarily stopped and displayed. is formed, and then the effect is developed, the more the number of times the player experiences the effect that is developed via the reach, the more the color of the temporarily stopped number pattern and the effect that is developed. , the player himself/herself can obtain an opportunity to discover the relationship (regularity) between . As a result, the number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) each have a color, which contributes to the enhancement of interest.

In addition, the sizes of the numbers (numbers "1" to "9") are approximately the same as the vertical distance of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr (middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr). The distance dimension is one-third, and the horizontal distance dimension is about half the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr (middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr). It is normal size. The numbers "1" to "9" are specially created special typefaces (individually created It is formed by a special typeface).

Usually, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the effect pattern (blank pattern is stopped and displayed in the center of the left change display area, the center of the middle change display area, and the center of the right change display area) ) from the center of each variable display area to the bottom (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "normal variation direction") all at once (simultaneously) while gradually increasing the speed from low speed to an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent production pattern that is changing at high speed. The performance pattern is decelerated immediately before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the reflected light reflected by the performance pattern rotates clockwise along the outline of the performance pattern at the stop position, and then rotates clockwise. When the reflected light stops and disappears, it becomes a state of stationary display.

On the other hand, in the production symbol movement fluctuation production A, the production symbol movement fluctuation production B, and the production symbol movement fluctuation production C, the above-described normal production pattern fluctuation production (variation display) is started. , The center of the left fluctuation display area, the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the center of the right fluctuation display area. While gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, the display mode does not change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and fluctuates at high speed, and the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are separated from each other. After that, it starts to move in the direction of normal fluctuation in this spread form, and while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, it changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. .

Normally, when the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design is started, the performance design (blank design) is stopped and displayed in the center of the left variation display area, the center of the middle variation display area, and the center of the right variation display area. ) is changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state all at once (simultaneously) in the direction of normal fluctuation, while gradually increasing the speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. However, when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R move toward the normal fluctuation direction, first the left production pattern 8L moves a predetermined distance (for example, 5 mm), and then the middle production pattern 8C moves. Moved by a predetermined distance (eg 5 mm), finally the right effect pattern 8R moved by a predetermined distance (eg 5 mm), gradually increased speed from low speed, changed from opaque state to translucent state, and fluctuated at high speed. It is good also as a display mode to carry out.

Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all, as described above, number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5". ” → number “6” → number “7” → number “8” → number “9” → number “1” → number “2” → … ). However, only for the left effect pattern 8L, the order is reversed, number "9" → number "8" → number "7" → number "6" → number "5" → number "4" → number "3" → number " 2” → number “1” → number “9” → number “8” → . Even in this case, there is a blank design between the design of the number and the design of the number.

[Hold icon, etc.]
Next, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B will be explained. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position (on the white rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . A first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation in the area to the left of the variable display position, and a second reserved display area is provided as the second special figure reservation in the area to the right of the variable display position. It is In the first reservation display area, four reservation icons 9A can be displayed linearly in a row, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9A can be stocked. The first pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first pending icon 9A, the second pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is the third pending icon. 9A, and the farthest pending icon 9A from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9A. In the second pending display area, four pending icons 9B can be displayed linearly in a line, and up to four pending icons 9B can be stocked. The first pending icon 9B closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first pending icon 9B, the second pending icon 9B to the variable icon 9C is called the second pending icon 9B, and the third pending icon 9B to the variable icon 9C is the third pending icon. 9B, and the farthest pending icon 9B from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9B. In the present embodiment, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B can suggest winning expectation by color, and the winning expectation increases in the order of white→blue→green→red→yellow (gold). . Therefore, the player has a high interest in the variable icon 9C and the suspended icons 9A and 9B.

The variable display position, variable icon 9C, and reserved icons 9A and 9B are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C, right production pattern 8R, various effect images, and various other Visibility is not obstructed by images. This is because the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B may change to another color during the variable performance (variation display) of the performance symbols, making it easier for the player to see the color change.

[Production pattern movement fluctuation production A]
Next, the production symbol movement fluctuation production A will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a game ball is launched so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A, and a game by left hitting is performed, and the flowing game ball enters the first start port 20, and the white first reservation is foreseen. The icon 9A is determined and displayed. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. When the variable performance (variation display) of the performance design is started, the left performance design 8L, the middle performance design 8C, and the right performance design 8R are gradually increased in speed from a low speed toward the normal fluctuation direction, and the opaque state is translucent. state, and the display mode changes at high speed. During this fluctuation, the game ball enters the first starting hole 20, and is determined and displayed as the white first reservation icon 9A by prefetching. As a result, only one pending icon 9A is stocked. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60 , the game ball has not entered the first start hole 20 .

After that, first, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the center of the left fluctuation display area with a bright green number "1", and the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the center of the right fluctuation display area with a bright green number "3". 66(A), the middle production pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the center of the middle fluctuation display area with the number "2" having a bright blue color, and then, as shown in FIG. , the medium effect pattern 8C is stop-displayed at the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the right effect pattern 8R is stop-displayed at the center of the right fluctuation display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern in a state of being aligned in the horizontal direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. No, it is stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the white first reservation icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. When the variable performance (variation display) of the performance design is started, a set of performance design of the left performance design 8L, the middle performance design 8C, and the right performance design 8R is before starting to move in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). In addition, the left effect symbol 8L (the number "1" having bright green) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction. The medium effect pattern 8C (the number "2" having a bright blue color), which was stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, started moving horizontally toward the left side, which is the direction (the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), normally fluctuates. It is a direction different from the direction (that is, downward), and it starts moving upward, which is the direction opposite to the normal fluctuation direction, and the right production pattern 8R (bright green) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area number "3") starts to move in the normal direction of fluctuation (that is, downward). Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R start to move all at once (simultaneously). However, the left effect pattern 8L starts to move, the middle effect pattern 8C starts to move while the left effect pattern 8L is moving or after the movement is completed, and the middle effect pattern 8C is moving or after the movement is completed, the right effect The symbol 8R may start moving. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the stock pending icon 9A does not exist at all.

When the left effect pattern 8L starts moving horizontally toward the left side, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) and is perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), the left The left part of the production pattern 8L (about half of the left production pattern 8L) protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the right part (left The movement is stopped while maintaining the mode in which the (approximately 1/2 portion of the performance pattern 8L) is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the left effect pattern 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left effect pattern 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through and the intersection of ) is arranged on the vertical line (actually on the left side of the display screen 7a) moved leftward from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. status is maintained. Hereinafter, the vertical line moved leftward from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variation display area in the left variation display area 8Lr may be referred to as the "left vertical line".

When the middle production pattern 8C is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) and starts moving upward, which is the direction opposite to the normal fluctuation direction, a part of the upper side of the middle production pattern 8C (middle production About one-third of the upper side of the pattern 8C) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the remaining part of the middle effect pattern 8C (about two-thirds of the middle effect pattern 8C) Part) The movement stops while the displayed mode is maintained. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the middle effect pattern 8C (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the middle effect pattern 8C, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line crosses) is on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area in the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). The state in which 8C is arranged remains to be maintained.

When the right performance symbol 8R starts to move toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), the lower part of the right performance symbol 8R (about 1/3 part from the lower side of the right performance symbol 8R) is displayed on the display screen 7a. It jumps out from the lower side and becomes difficult to see, and the movement is stopped while maintaining the mode in which the remaining part of the right performance pattern 8R (approximately two thirds of the right performance pattern 8R) is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the right production pattern 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the right production pattern 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through and the crossing point of the right variation display region 8Rr remains in the state where the right effect pattern 8R is arranged on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variation display region.

When the left performance pattern 8L moves to the left side, the middle performance pattern 8C moves upward, and the right performance pattern 8R moves downward to start the variable performance (variation display) of the performance symbols, the left performance is started. The pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are changed to be spread apart from each other. When the pattern spreads apart from each other, the color of these production patterns changes to another color, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation. Other colors include purple and yellow (gold), and when the color of these production patterns changes from their own color to purple, the chances of winning are higher, and yellow (gold) instead of purple. When it changes, the expectation of winning is higher than when it changes to purple. The probability of winning in purple is the same as the expectation of winning with the red pending icon (red fluctuation icon), and the probability of winning in yellow (gold) is the same as the pending icon (yellow ( Gold) has the same expected hit rate as the fluctuation icon). In addition, when it changes to another color, when the movement of these production designs is completed, the color of the production design returns to the original color of each own production design. Here, the colors of these production patterns are in a state of being moved while maintaining the colors of their own production patterns, and they have not changed to other colors at all.

The horizontal movement of the left effect pattern 8L to the left, the vertical movement of the middle effect pattern 8C to the upper side, and the vertical movement to the right side of the right effect pattern 8R are started all at once (simultaneously), and all at once (simultaneously). The movement is stopped, and this state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second).

After a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIGS. 66(C) and (D), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R move toward the normal fluctuation direction. All at once (simultaneously), the speed is gradually increased from the low speed, and the display mode changes from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed.

As the left production pattern 8L moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, the left production pattern 8L jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see. appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and goes in the normal fluctuation direction. This subsequent left effect pattern 8L is also the left side portion of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (approximately 1/2 portion of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L), similar to the left effect pattern 8L of the number "1" having bright green. ) also pops out from the left side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the right portion (about half of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L), which is the remaining portion of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, is displayed. It has been maintained as it is. That is, on the left vertical line (actually on the left side of the display screen 7a) moved to the left from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the left effect symbol 8L and the subsequent left effect symbol are displayed. The state in which 8L is arranged remains to be maintained.

In addition, as the middle effect pattern 8C moves in the normal fluctuation direction, the following middle effect pattern 8C, the bright green number "3", also appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves in the normal fluctuation direction. That is, the state in which the medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C are arranged on the medium side reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr is maintained.

Further, as the right performance symbol 8R moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, the following right performance symbol 8R, the number "4" having bright blue color, also appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves toward the normal fluctuation direction. That is, the state in which the right performance symbol 8R and the subsequent right performance symbol 8R are arranged on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variation display region in the right variation display region 8Rr is maintained.

In addition, the number "2" having a bright blue color which is the left production pattern 8L following the left production pattern 8L, the number "3" having a bright green color which is the medium production pattern 8C following the medium production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R. The number "4" having a bright blue color, which is the subsequent right effect symbol 8R, appears all at once (simultaneously) from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and is directed toward the normal fluctuation direction.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(E), on the left vertical line (actually on the left side of the display screen 7a) moved to the left from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The left effect pattern 8L which is arranged and is in the variable effect (variable display) moves to the right side and is placed again on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area. In other words, when the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design is started, the left performance design 8L, the middle performance design 8C, and the right performance design 8R are spaced apart from each other and spread, and then normal fluctuation is maintained in this spread mode. When it starts to move toward a direction and gradually increases its speed from a low speed, it changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. and then return to the original pre-expansion mode.

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L is arranged on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area, the middle production pattern 8C is arranged on the middle side reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the right production pattern 8R is arranged on the right It is arranged on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the variable display area, and the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R move toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) in each variable display area. It becomes a mode. At this time, the game ball enters the first starting hole 20, and is determined and displayed as the white first reservation icon 9A by prefetching. As a result, only one pending icon 9A is stocked.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R decelerate just before they stop and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in bright green, and the number "9" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the middle effect pattern 8C is displayed in bright red. 7", a temporary stop display is performed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. A right effect pattern 8R is stop-displayed in the center of the display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are aligned in the same pattern in a state of being aligned in the horizontal direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. No, it is stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design is started, a set of performance symbols of the left performance design 8L, the middle performance design 8C, and the right performance design 8R are before starting to move in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). In addition, the left effect symbol 8L (the number "4" having a bright blue color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction. The medium effect pattern 8C (the number "7" having a bright red color), which was stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, started moving horizontally toward the left side, which is the direction (the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), normally fluctuates. It is a direction different from the direction (that is, downward), and it starts moving upward, which is the direction opposite to the normal fluctuation direction, and the right production pattern 8R (bright green) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area number "9") starts to move horizontally toward the right, which is a direction different from the normal movement direction (that is, downward) and perpendicular to the normal movement direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal movement direction). . Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R start to move all at once (simultaneously). However, the left effect pattern 8L starts to move, the middle effect pattern 8C starts to move while the left effect pattern 8L is moving or after the movement is completed, and the middle effect pattern 8C is moving or after the movement is completed, the right effect The symbol 8R may start moving. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the stock pending icon 9A does not exist at all.

When the left effect pattern 8L is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) and starts moving horizontally toward the left side, which is a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction orthogonal to the normal fluctuation direction), the above-mentioned As described above, the left part of the left effect pattern 8L (approximately 1/2 part of the left effect pattern 8L) protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the remaining part of the left effect pattern 8L The movement is stopped while maintaining a mode in which a certain right portion (approximately 1/2 portion of the left effect pattern 8L) is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the left effect pattern 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left effect pattern 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) ) is located on the left vertical line (actually on the left side of the display screen 7a) moved leftward from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The status quo has been maintained.

When the middle production pattern 8C is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) and starts moving upward, which is the direction opposite to the normal fluctuation direction, as described above, the upper side of the middle production pattern 8C A part (about one-third from the upper side of the middle effect pattern 8C) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the remaining part of the middle effect pattern 8C (about the middle effect pattern 8C) 2/3 part) The movement stops while the displayed mode is maintained. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the middle production pattern 8C (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the middle production pattern 8C, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line crosses) is on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area in the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). The state in which 8C is arranged remains to be maintained.

When the right effect pattern 8R starts to move horizontally toward the right side, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) and is perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), the right The right part of the production pattern 8R (about half of the right production pattern 8R) protrudes from the right side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the left part (right The movement is stopped while maintaining the mode in which the (approximately 1/2 portion of the production pattern 8R) is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the right production pattern 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the right production pattern 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point at which the horizontal line passing through and the intersection of ) is arranged on the vertical line (actually on the right side of the display screen 7a) moved to the right from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display area in the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. status is maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line moved to the right from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variation display area in the right variation display area 8Rr may be referred to as a "right vertical line".

When the left performance pattern 8L moves to the left side, the middle performance pattern 8C moves to the upper side, and the right performance pattern 8R moves to the right side, the variation performance (variation display) of the performance pattern is started, and the left performance pattern is started. 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are separated from each other and have changed to spread out.

The horizontal movement of the left production pattern 8L to the left, the vertical movement of the middle production pattern 8C to the upper side, and the horizontal movement of the right production pattern 8R to the right are started all at once (simultaneously), and moved all at once (simultaneously). It stops, and this state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second).

After a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIGS. 66(H) and (I), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R move toward the normal fluctuation direction. All at once (simultaneously), the speed is gradually increased from the low speed, and the display mode changes from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed.

As the left effect pattern 8L moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, the left effect pattern 8L jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see. appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and goes in the normal fluctuation direction. This subsequent left effect pattern 8L is also the left side portion of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (approximately 1/2 portion of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L), similar to the left effect pattern 8L of the number "4" having bright blue color. ) also pops out from the left side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the right portion (about half of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L), which is the remaining portion of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, is displayed. It has been maintained as it is. That is, on the left vertical line (actually on the left side of the display screen 7a) moved to the left from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the left effect symbol 8L and the subsequent left effect symbol are displayed. The state in which 8L is arranged remains to be maintained.

In addition, as the medium effect pattern 8C moves in the normal fluctuation direction, the following medium effect pattern 8C, the bright blue number "8", also appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves in the normal fluctuation direction. That is, the state in which the medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C are arranged on the medium side reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr is maintained.

As the right performance symbol 8R moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, the right performance symbol 8R jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see. appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and goes in the normal fluctuation direction. This subsequent right production pattern 8R is also the right part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (about half of the subsequent right production pattern 8L), similar to the right production pattern 8R of the number "9" having bright green. ) also pops out from the right side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the left side portion (about 1/2 portion of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R) which is the remaining portion of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R is displayed. It has been maintained as it is. That is, on the right vertical line (actually on the right side of the display screen 7a) moved to the right from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variation display area in the right variation display area 8Rr, the right effect symbol 8R and the subsequent right effect symbol are displayed. The state in which 8R is arranged remains to be maintained.

In addition, the number "5" having bright green which is the left production pattern 8L following the left production pattern 8L, the number "8" having bright blue which is the middle production pattern 8C following the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R. The number "1" having a bright green color, which is the subsequent right effect symbol 8R, appears all at once (simultaneously) from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and is directed toward the normal fluctuation direction.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(J), on the left vertical line (actually on the left side of the display screen 7a) moved to the left from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The left effect pattern 8L, which is placed and is in the variable effect (variable display), moves to the right and is placed again on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left variable display area, and the right variable display is performed in the right variable display area 8Rr. The right production pattern 8R, which is placed on the right vertical line (actually on the right side of the display screen 7a) moved to the right from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the area and is in the variable production (variable display), moves to the left. It is placed again on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display area. In other words, when the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design is started, the left performance design 8L, the middle performance design 8C, and the right performance design 8R are spaced apart from each other and spread, and then normal fluctuation is maintained in this spread mode. When it starts to move toward a direction and gradually increases its speed from a low speed, it changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and becomes a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. and then return to the original pre-expansion mode.

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L is arranged on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area, the middle production pattern 8C is arranged on the middle side reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the right production pattern 8R is arranged on the right It is arranged on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the variable display area, and the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R move toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) in each variable display area. form.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R decelerate just before they stop and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in bright blue, and the number "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the middle effect pattern 8C is displayed in bright green. 1” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. A right effect pattern 8R is stop-displayed in the center of the display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are arranged in a line in the horizontal direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. No, it is stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, when the player operates the handle 60 to enter the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the first holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect of the effect symbol (variable effect) display) is started, and when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, while the left production pattern 8L and the middle production are determined. When the pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are stop-displayed together with the same pattern, the win is confirmed, the opening of the big win is started, and then the big win game in which profits are given to the player is started. .

[Production pattern movement fluctuation production B]
Next, the effect symbol movement variation effect B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a game ball is launched so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A, and a game by left hitting is performed, and the flowing game ball enters the first start port 20, and the white first reservation is foreseen. The icon 9A is determined and displayed. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. When the variable performance (variation display) of the performance design is started, the left performance design 8L, the middle performance design 8C, and the right performance design 8R are gradually increased in speed from a low speed toward the normal fluctuation direction, and the opaque state is translucent. state, and the display mode changes at high speed. During this fluctuation, the game ball enters the first starting hole 20, and is determined and displayed as the white first reservation icon 9A by prefetching. As a result, only one pending icon 9A is stocked. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60 , the game ball has not entered the first start hole 20 .

After that, first, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the center of the left fluctuation display area with the number "9" having bright green, and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the center of the right fluctuation display area with the number "4" having bright blue. A blank symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. In this state, the number "8" having a bright blue color, which is the preceding left effect symbol 8L, is arranged below the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the following left effect symbol 8L is displayed. A number "1" having a certain bright green color is arranged above the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area. The lower part of the preceding left effect pattern 8L (about 1/2 part of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the preceding left effect pattern 8L is in a state of being difficult to see. The state in which the remaining upper part (about half of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) is displayed is maintained, and the upper part of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (subsequent left Approximately half of the production pattern 8L) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part (subsequent left production pattern 8L) which is the remaining part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L (approximately half of the area) is still maintained.

In addition, the number "3" having bright green which is the preceding right production pattern 8R is arranged below the right production pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuating display area, and the following right production pattern 8R which is bright. A number "5" having green is arranged above the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area. The lower part of the preceding right production pattern 8R (about 1/2 part of the preceding right production pattern 8R) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the preceding right production pattern 8R is projected. The mode in which the upper part (about half of the preceding right production pattern 8R), which is the remaining part, is displayed is maintained, and the upper part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (subsequent right Approximately one-half of the production pattern 8R) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part that is the remaining part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (subsequent right production pattern 8R) (approximately half of the area) is still maintained.

In addition, the number "5" having a bright green color that is the preceding medium effect pattern 8C is arranged below the blank pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the bright blue color that is the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is arranged. The number "6" is arranged above the blank pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. Both the preceding middle effect pattern 8C and the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C are maintained in a state of being displayed in a state where the whole can be visually recognized without jumping out from the lower side or the upper side of the display screen 7a. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the left effect symbol 8L is stop-displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, the blank symbol is displayed in the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the right effect symbol 8R is stopped in the center of the right fluctuation display area. As a result, the left production pattern 8L, the blank pattern, and the right production pattern 8R are not arranged in the same pattern in a state of being aligned in the horizontal direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line, A stop display is displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the white first reservation icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design is started, the preceding left performance design 8L, the left performance design 8L, the subsequent left performance design 8L, the preceding middle performance design 8C, (here, the middle performance design 8C is the middle It is not arranged in the center of the variable display area, and a blank pattern is arranged.), a set of production patterns of the following middle production pattern 8C, the preceding right production pattern 8R, the right production pattern 8R, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R. Before starting to move in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the left effect pattern 8L (the number "9" having a bright green color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area Start moving horizontally toward the left side, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), and at the center of the left fluctuation display area Left production pattern 8L (number "9" with bright green color) preceded by left production pattern 8L (number "9" with bright green color) that is stopped and displayed is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward). Then, it starts to move diagonally downward (diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees) toward the lower left side, which is the direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction, and the left production pattern 8L (having a bright green color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area The left production pattern 8L (the number "1" having bright green) following the number "9") is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and is the upper left side that is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. Start moving diagonally upward (upper left diagonal 45 degrees) toward .

In addition, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, in the medium change display area 8Cr, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (the number "5" having a bright green color) moves in the normal change direction (that is, downward). Start moving toward, and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (number “6” with bright blue) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, lower side), and to the upper side, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction Start moving towards it.

Further, when the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, the right performance symbol R (the number "4" having a bright blue color), which has been stopped and displayed in the center of the right variation display area, is displayed in the right variation display area 8Rr. Start moving horizontally toward the right, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and is perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), and at the center of the right fluctuation display area The right production pattern 8R (number "4" with bright blue color) preceding the stopped right production pattern 8R (number "3" with bright green color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward). Then, it starts to move diagonally downward (diagonal to the lower right at 45 degrees) toward the lower right side, which is the direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction, and the right production pattern 8R (bright blue) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area The right production pattern 8R (number "5" with bright green) following the number "4") is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction It starts to move diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper right) toward the upper right side.

Here, the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, the subsequent left production pattern 8L, the preceding medium production pattern 8C, the subsequent medium production pattern 8C, the preceding right production pattern 8R, the right production pattern 8R, the subsequent The right performance symbols 8R start to move all at once (simultaneously). However, the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, and the subsequent left production pattern 8L start to move, and during the movement of the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, and the subsequent left production pattern 8L, or After the movement is completed, the preceding medium production pattern 8C and the subsequent medium production pattern 8C start to move, and during the movement of the preceding medium production pattern 8C and the subsequent medium production pattern 8C, or after the movement is completed, the preceding right production The symbol 8R, the right performance symbol 8R, and the subsequent right performance symbol 8R may start moving. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the stock pending icon 9A does not exist at all.

The left production pattern 8L (the number "9" having bright green) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and is the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction). When the left side of the left effect pattern 8L approaches the vicinity of the left side of the display screen 7a, the left side of the left effect pattern 8L does not jump out from the left side, and the entire left effect pattern 8L can be easily visually recognized (the entire left effect pattern 8L ) is maintained while the movement is stopped. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the left effect pattern 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left effect pattern 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through and the intersection of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr and the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area is moved horizontally to the left by a predetermined distance (for example, 30 mm). The state in which the left effect pattern 8L is arranged on the vertical line is maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line near the left side of the display screen 7a horizontally shifted leftward by a predetermined distance (for example, 30 mm) from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr is referred to as a "left vertical line". may be described as

The preceding left production pattern 8L (the number "8" having a bright blue color) is in a different direction from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and is diagonally downward toward the lower left side, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction ( 45 degrees), the left side of the preceding left effect pattern 8L approaches the vicinity of the left side of the display screen 7a and protrudes from the left side so that it does not become difficult to see, but the lower side of the preceding left effect pattern 8L A part (about two-thirds of the preceding left production pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the upper part (preceding left production pattern 8L) which is the remaining part of the preceding left production pattern 8L Approximately one-third of the left effect pattern 8L) is displayed, and the movement is stopped. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding left production pattern 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding left production pattern 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the left vertical line.

The subsequent left effect pattern 8L (the number "1" having bright green) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is diagonally upward toward the upper left side, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction ( 45 degrees to the upper left), the left side of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L approaches the vicinity of the left side of the display screen 7a and protrudes from the left side so that it does not become difficult to see, but the upper part of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L. (About two-thirds of the subsequent left production pattern 8L) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part (subsequent left production pattern 8L) that is the remaining part Approximately one-third of the left effect pattern 8L) is displayed, and the movement is stopped. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the left vertical line.

Thus, on the left vertical line, the following left performance pattern 8L, the left performance pattern 8L, and the preceding left performance pattern 8L are arranged in a row in the order of the vertical direction, which is maintained.

When the leading medium effect pattern 8C (number "5" having bright green and number "6" having bright blue) starts moving toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), the lower part of the leading medium effect pattern 8C (About a quarter of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C) pops out from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the upper part (the preceding middle part), which is the remaining part of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C The movement is stopped while maintaining the mode in which about three-fourths of the production pattern 8C) is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the preceding medium effect symbol 8C is on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). The state of being placed in is maintained.

When the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (the number "6" having a bright blue color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and starts moving upward, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction, The upper part of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C (about 1/4 part of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the rest of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C. The movement stops while maintaining the mode in which the lower part (about three quarters of the subsequent medium effect symbol 8C) is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the subsequent middle effect symbol 8C remains arranged on the middle side reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). there is

In this way, on the middle side reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a), the following medium effect pattern 8C and the preceding medium effect pattern 8C are arranged in the order of the vertical direction. The state of being placed in is maintained.

Right production pattern 8R (number "4" with bright blue color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and the right side which is a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction) , the right side of the right production pattern 8R approaches the vicinity of the right side of the display screen 7a, but the entire right production pattern 8R can be easily visually recognized without jumping out from the right side (the entire right production pattern 8R ) is maintained while the movement is stopped. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the right production pattern 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the right production pattern 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through and the crossing point of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr is shifted horizontally to the right by a predetermined distance (for example, 30 mm) from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr. The state in which the right effect pattern 8R is arranged on the vertical line is maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line near the left side of the display screen 7a horizontally moved to the right by a predetermined distance (for example, 30 mm) from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variation display area in the right variation display area 8Rr is referred to as a "right vertical line". may be described as

The preceding right production pattern 8R (number "3" with bright green) is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and is diagonally downward toward the lower right side, which is the direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right), the right side of the preceding right effect pattern 8R approaches the vicinity of the right side of the display screen 7a and protrudes from the right side so that it does not become difficult to see, but the preceding right effect pattern 8R The lower part (about two-thirds of the right production pattern 8R) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the upper part (right production), which is the remaining part of the preceding right production pattern 8R The movement is stopped while maintaining the state in which the symbol 8R is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding right production pattern 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of a virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding right production pattern 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape The point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the right vertical line.

The subsequent right production pattern 8R (number "6" with bright blue color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is diagonally upward ( 45 degrees to the upper right), the right side of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R approaches the vicinity of the right side of the display screen 7a and protrudes from the right side so that it does not become difficult to see, but the upper part of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R. (About two-thirds of the right production pattern 8R) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part (the right production pattern 8R) that is the remaining part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R 1/3 portion) is displayed, and the movement is stopped. In the state where the movement is stopped, the following right effect pattern 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the following right effect pattern 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape The point where a horizontal line passing through and intersects ) remains positioned on the right vertical line.

Thus, on the right vertical line, the following right performance pattern 8R, the right performance pattern 8R, and the preceding right performance pattern 8R are arranged in a row in the order of the vertical direction, which is maintained.

The left performance pattern 8L moves to the left, the preceding left performance pattern 8L moves to the lower left diagonal 45 degrees, the subsequent left performance pattern 8L moves to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, and the preceding middle performance pattern 8C moves downward. The following middle production pattern 8C moves upward, the right production pattern 8R moves to the right, the preceding right production pattern 8R moves diagonally to the lower right at 45 degrees, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R moves diagonally to the upper right. By moving to 45 degrees, when the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design is started, the preceding left performance design 8L, the left performance design 8L, the subsequent left performance design 8L, the preceding middle performance design 8C, the succeeding The middle production pattern 8C, the preceding right production pattern 8R, the right production pattern 8R, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R are separated from each other and are changed to spread. When the pattern spreads apart from each other, the color of these production patterns changes to another color, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation. Other colors include purple and yellow (gold), and when the color of these production patterns changes from their own color to purple, the chances of winning are higher, and yellow (gold) instead of purple. Expectations for winning are higher when it changes than when it changes to purple. The probability of winning in purple is the same as the expectation of winning with the red pending icon (red fluctuation icon), and the probability of winning in yellow (gold) is the same as the pending icon (yellow ( Gold) has the same expected hit rate as the fluctuation icon). In addition, when it changes to another color, when the movement of these production designs is completed, the color of the production design returns to the original color of each own production design. Here, the colors of these production patterns are in a state of being moved while maintaining the colors of their own production patterns, and they have not changed to other colors at all.

Horizontal movement to the left of the left production pattern 8L, movement of the preceding left production pattern 8L to the lower left diagonal 45 degrees, movement of the subsequent left production pattern 8L to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, lower side of the preceding middle production pattern 8C Vertical movement to, vertical movement to the upper side of the subsequent middle production pattern 8C, horizontal movement to the right side of the right production pattern 8R, movement of the preceding right production pattern 8R to the lower right diagonal 45 degrees, subsequent right production The movement of the pattern 8R to the upper right at an angle of 45 degrees is started all at once (simultaneously) and stopped all at once (simultaneously), and this state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). In addition, although not shown, the blank design also moves in a predetermined direction so as to be arranged between the preceding performance design and the subsequent performance design. At this time, when the color of the production pattern changes from its own color to another color, the blank pattern having navy blue changes from navy blue to another color in which the color of the production pattern changes from its own color. or you can keep it dark blue.

After a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIGS. 67(C) and (D), the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, the subsequent left production pattern 8L, the preceding Medium production pattern 8C, subsequent medium production pattern 8C, preceding right production pattern 8R, right production pattern 8R, and subsequent right production pattern 8R all at once (simultaneously) in the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) from low speed While gradually increasing the speed, the display mode changes from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed.

As the left effect pattern 8L (the number "9" having bright green color) moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, the preceding left effect pattern 8L (the number "8" having bright blue color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and is visually recognized. As it becomes difficult, the subsequent left effect symbol 8L (number "1" having bright green color) enters the display screen 7a and can be visually recognized as a whole. Then, by the time the left production pattern 8L (number "9" having bright green color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the production pattern ( Hereinafter, it may be described as "the second succeeding left effect pattern".) A number "2" having a bright blue color appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves in the normal fluctuation direction. This second succeeding left effect symbol 8L also includes the preceding left effect symbol 8L of the number "8" having bright blue color, the left effect symbol 8L of the number "9" having bright green color, and the number "1" having bright green color. Similar to the subsequent left performance pattern 8L, the left side of the second subsequent left performance pattern 8L approaches the vicinity of the left side of the display screen 7a, but the mode in which it does not protrude from the left side and becomes difficult to see is maintained. That is, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, and the second subsequent left effect pattern 8L are left from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. It remains positioned on the left vertical line moved to the left.

In addition, as the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (the number "5" having bright green) moves in the normal fluctuation direction, it jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the following medium effect pattern 8C (bright blue The number "6" with ) is also usually moving in the direction of fluctuation. Then, by the time the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C (number "6" having bright blue color) reaches the lower side of the display screen 7a, the following left effect pattern 8L (number "6" having bright blue color) further follows. A bright red number "7", which is a production pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "second succeeding middle production pattern"), appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves in the normal fluctuation direction. This second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is also the medium fluctuation display area, similar to the preceding medium effect pattern 8C of the number "5" having bright green and the left effect pattern 8L following the number "6" having bright blue. It is arranged on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area in 8Cr (in other words, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). That is, the preceding middle effect pattern 8C, the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C, and the second subsequent middle effect pattern 8C are on the middle side reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area in the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr (that is, the display screen 7a on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the )).

In addition, as the right production pattern 8R (the number "4" having bright blue color) moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, the preceding right production pattern 8R (the number "3" having bright green color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the subsequent right effect pattern 8R (number "5" having bright green color) enters the display screen 7a and can be visually recognized as a whole. By the time the right production pattern 8R (the number "4" having bright blue color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the production pattern ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "second succeeding right effect pattern".) A number "6" having a bright blue color appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves in the normal fluctuation direction. This second succeeding right production pattern 8R also includes the preceding right production pattern 8R of number "3" having bright green, the right production pattern 8R of number "4" having bright blue, and the number "5" having bright green. Similar to the subsequent right performance pattern 8R, the right side of the second subsequent right performance pattern 8R approaches the vicinity of the right side of the display screen 7a, but the mode in which it does not protrude from the right side and becomes difficult to see is maintained. That is, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, the right effect pattern 8R, the subsequent right effect pattern 8R, and the second subsequent right effect pattern 8R are to the right of the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display area in the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. It remains positioned on the right vertical line moved to the right.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(E), it is arranged on the left vertical line moved leftward from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, and is in the middle of the fluctuation effect (variation display). The left effect pattern 8L (previous left effect pattern 8L, subsequent left effect pattern 8L) moves to the right and is placed again on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. The right production pattern 8R (preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent right production pattern) placed on the right vertical line moved to the right from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display area in the fluctuation production (variation display) 8R) is moved to the left and placed again on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variation display area. That is, when the variable production (variable display) of the production design is started, the left production design 8L (preceding left production design 8L, the subsequent left production design 8L), the middle production design 8C (the preceding medium production design 8C, the subsequent Medium production pattern 8C) and right production pattern 8R (preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent right production pattern 8R) are spread apart from each other, and then move toward the normal fluctuation direction in this spread state. When the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a high-speed fluctuating display mode, during the fluctuation, the state before separating again, that is, toward the mode before spreading. It starts to move and then returns to the original form before it spreads.

As a result, the left production pattern 8L (preceding left production pattern 8L, subsequent left production pattern 8L) is arranged on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the middle production pattern 8C (preceding middle production pattern 8C, Subsequent middle production pattern 8C) is arranged on the middle side reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and right production pattern 8R (preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent right production pattern 8R) is placed in the center of the right fluctuation display area. It is arranged on the right side reference vertical line passing through, left production pattern 8L (preceding left production pattern 8L, subsequent left production pattern 8L), medium production pattern 8C (preceding medium production pattern 8C, subsequent medium production pattern 8C) ), the right effect pattern 8R (previous right effect pattern 8R, subsequent right effect pattern 8R) moves toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) in each fluctuation display area.

During this fluctuation, the player operates the handle 60 to enter the game ball into the first starting hole 20, and is determined and displayed as the green first reservation icon 9A by prefetching. As a result, only one pending icon 9A is stocked.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R decelerate just before they stop and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. 3", a temporary stop display is made in the center of the left fluctuation display area, a blank pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and finally a blank pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the middle fluctuation display area.

In this state, the number "2" having a bright blue color, which is the preceding left effect symbol 8L, is arranged below the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the following left effect symbol 8L is displayed. A number "4" having a certain bright blue color is arranged above the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area. The lower part of the preceding left effect pattern 8L (approximately half of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the preceding left effect pattern 8L is projected. The mode in which the remaining upper part (approximately half of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) is displayed is maintained, and the upper part of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (subsequent left A portion of about half of the production pattern 8L) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and a lower part (subsequent left production pattern 8L) which is the remaining part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L (approximately half of the area) is still maintained.

In addition, the number "1" having bright green color which is the preceding right production pattern 8R is arranged below the blank pattern which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the bright blue color which is the subsequent right production pattern 8R is arranged. The number "2" is arranged above the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area. Both the preceding right effect pattern 8R and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R do not protrude from the lower side or the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the state of being displayed in a state where the whole can be visually recognized is maintained. ing.

In addition, the number "7" having a bright red color, which is the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, is arranged below the blank pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the bright blue color, which is the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, is arranged. The number "8" is arranged above the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. Both the preceding middle effect pattern 8C and the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C are maintained in a state of being displayed in a state where the whole can be visually recognized without jumping out from the lower side or the upper side of the display screen 7a. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(F), the left effect symbol 8L is stopped in the center of the left fluctuation display area, the blank symbol is displayed in the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the blank symbol is stopped in the center of the right fluctuation display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are arranged in a line in the horizontal direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. No, it is stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the white first reservation icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design is started, the preceding left performance design 8L, the left performance design 8L, the subsequent left performance design 8L, the preceding middle performance design 8C, (here, the middle performance design 8C is the middle A blank pattern is placed instead of being placed in the center of the variable display area.), the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, (here, the right effect pattern 8R is not placed in the center of the right variable display area. , blank symbols are arranged.), and a set of subsequent right performance symbols 8R are displayed in the left variation display area 8Lr before starting to move in the normal variation direction (fluctuation direction). The left effect symbol 8L (the number "3" having bright green) that is stopped and displayed in the center of the area is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (normal fluctuation direction direction perpendicular to ), and the preceding left effect pattern 8L (the number "3" having bright green color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area ( The number "2" with bright blue color moves diagonally downward (diagonally to the left at 45 degrees) toward the lower left side, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. The left production pattern 8L (number "3" with bright green color) that was stopped in the center of the left fluctuation display area, followed by the left production pattern 8L (number "4" with bright blue color) is in the normal fluctuation direction ( In other words, it starts to move diagonally upward (upper left diagonally at 45 degrees) toward the upper left side, which is a direction different from the downward direction, and which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction.

Further, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (the number "7" having a bright red color) in the medium change display area 8Cr moves in the normal change direction (that is, downward). Start moving toward, and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (number “8” with bright blue) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, lower side), and to the upper side, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction Start moving towards it.

In addition, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the leading right effect pattern R (the number "1" having bright green color) in the right variable display area 8Rr is the normal change direction (that is, the lower side). is a different direction, and starts to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right) toward the lower right side, which is the direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R (the number "2 ”) is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and starts to move diagonally upward (upper right diagonal 45 degrees) toward the upper right side, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction.

Here, the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, the subsequent left production pattern 8L, the preceding medium production pattern 8C, the subsequent medium production pattern 8C, the preceding right production pattern 8R, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R are , are starting to move all at once (simultaneously). However, the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, and the subsequent left production pattern 8L start to move, and during the movement of the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, and the subsequent left production pattern 8L, or After the movement is completed, the preceding medium production pattern 8C and the subsequent medium production pattern 8C start to move, and during the movement of the preceding medium production pattern 8C and the subsequent medium production pattern 8C, or after the movement is completed, the preceding right production The symbol 8R and the subsequent right effect symbol 8R may start moving. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the stock pending icon 9A does not exist at all.

Left production pattern 8L (number "3" with bright green) is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and the left side which is a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction) When the left side of the left effect pattern 8L approaches the vicinity of the left side of the display screen 7a, the left side of the left effect pattern 8L does not jump out from the left side, and the entire left effect pattern 8L can be easily visually recognized (the entire left effect pattern 8L ) is maintained while the movement is stopped. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the left effect pattern 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left effect pattern 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through and the intersection of ) is maintained to be placed on the left vertical line.

The preceding left production pattern 8L (the number "2" having a bright blue color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and is diagonally downward toward the lower left side, which is the direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction ( 45 degrees), the left side of the preceding left effect pattern 8L approaches the vicinity of the left side of the display screen 7a and protrudes from the left side so that it does not become difficult to see, but the lower side of the preceding left effect pattern 8L A part (about two-thirds of the preceding left production pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the upper part (preceding left production pattern 8L) which is the remaining part of the preceding left production pattern 8L Approximately one-third of the left effect pattern 8L) is displayed, and the movement is stopped. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding left production pattern 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding left production pattern 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the left vertical line.

The subsequent left effect pattern 8L (number "4" with bright blue color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is diagonally upward ( 45 degrees to the upper left), the left side of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L approaches the vicinity of the left side of the display screen 7a and protrudes from the left side so that it does not become difficult to see, but the upper part of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L. (About two-thirds of the subsequent left production pattern 8L) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part (subsequent left production pattern 8L) that is the remaining part Approximately one-third of the left effect pattern 8L) is displayed, and the movement is stopped. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the left vertical line.

Thus, on the left vertical line, the following left performance pattern 8L, the left performance pattern 8L, and the preceding left performance pattern 8L are arranged in a row in the order of the vertical direction, which is maintained.

When the preceding middle production pattern 8C (the number "7" having bright red) starts moving toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), the lower part of the preceding middle production pattern 8C (about 4 of the middle production pattern 8C 1/1 part) jumps out from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the upper part (about 3/4 part of the middle production pattern 8C) which is the remaining part of the preceding medium production pattern 8C The movement is stopped while maintaining the manner in which is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the preceding medium effect symbol 8C is arranged on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. The state that was set is maintained.

When the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (the number "8" having a bright blue color) starts moving upward in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction, The upper part of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C (about 1/4 part of the middle effect pattern 8C) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the remaining part of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C The movement is stopped while maintaining a state in which a certain upper part (about three quarters of the middle effect pattern 8C) is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the following medium effect pattern 8C is kept arranged on the middle side reference vertical line, that is, the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a.

In this way, on the middle side reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a), the following medium effect pattern 8C and the preceding medium effect pattern 8C are arranged in the order of the vertical direction. The state of being placed in is maintained.

The preceding right production pattern 8R (the number "1" having bright green) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is diagonally downward toward the lower right side, which is the direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right), the right side of the preceding right effect pattern 8R approaches the vicinity of the right side of the display screen 7a and protrudes from the right side so that it does not become difficult to see, but the preceding right effect pattern 8R The lower part (about a quarter of the preceding right production pattern 8R) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the upper part (which is the remaining part of the preceding right production pattern 8R) The movement is stopped while maintaining the state in which the preceding right effect pattern 8R) is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding right production pattern 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of a virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding right production pattern 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape The point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the right vertical line.

The subsequent left effect pattern 8L (number "2" with bright blue color) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is diagonally upward toward the upper right side, which is a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction ( 45 degrees to the upper right), the right side of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R approaches the vicinity of the right side of the display screen 7a and protrudes from the right side so that it does not become difficult to see, but the upper part of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R. (About a quarter of the subsequent right production pattern 8R) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part (subsequent right production pattern 8R) that is the remaining part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R The movement is stopped while maintaining the state in which the right effect pattern 8R (approximately three-fourths portion) is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the following right effect pattern 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the following right effect pattern 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape The point where a horizontal line passing through and intersects ) remains positioned on the right vertical line.

Thus, on the right vertical line, the following right performance pattern 8R, the right performance pattern 8R, and the preceding right performance pattern 8R are arranged in a row in the order of the vertical direction, which is maintained. It should be noted that the upper side of the preceding medium production pattern 8C (number "7" having bright red) and the upper side of the preceding right production pattern 8R (number "1" having bright green) are arranged on the same horizontal line. In line, the lower side of the subsequent middle production pattern 8C (number "8" having bright blue color) and the lower side of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (number "2" having bright blue color) are on the same horizontal line. arranged and lined up.

The left performance pattern 8L moves to the left, the preceding left performance pattern 8L moves to the lower left diagonal 45 degrees, the subsequent left performance pattern 8L moves to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, and the preceding middle performance pattern 8C moves downward. By moving, the subsequent medium production pattern 8C moves upward, the preceding right production pattern 8R moves to the lower right diagonal 45 degrees, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R moves to the upper right diagonal 45 degrees, the production pattern When the variable production (variable display) is started, the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, the subsequent left production pattern 8L, the preceding medium production pattern 8C, the subsequent medium production pattern 8C, the preceding right production The pattern 8R and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R are changed to spread apart from each other. When the pattern spreads apart from each other, the color of these production patterns changes to another color, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation. As mentioned above, there are purple and yellow (gold) as other colors, and when the color of these production patterns changes from their own color to purple, the expectation of winning is higher, and it is not purple. The degree of expectation for winning is higher when it changes to yellow (gold) than when it changes to purple. The probability of winning in purple is the same as the expectation of winning with the red pending icon (red fluctuation icon), and the probability of winning in yellow (gold) is the same as the pending icon (yellow ( Gold) has the same expected hit rate as the fluctuation icon). In addition, when it changes to another color, when the movement of these production designs is completed, the color of the production design returns to the original color of each own production design. Here, the colors of these production patterns are in a state of being moved while maintaining the colors of their own production patterns, and they have not changed to other colors at all.

Horizontal movement to the left of the left production pattern 8L, movement of the preceding left production pattern 8L to the lower left diagonal 45 degrees, movement of the subsequent left production pattern 8L to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, lower side of the preceding middle production pattern 8C Vertical movement to, vertical movement to the upper side of the subsequent middle production pattern 8C, horizontal movement to the right side of the right production pattern 8R, movement of the preceding right production pattern 8R to the lower right diagonal 45 degrees, subsequent right production The movement of the pattern 8R to the upper right at an angle of 45 degrees is started all at once (simultaneously) and stopped all at once (simultaneously), and this state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). In addition, although not shown, the blank design also moves in a predetermined direction so as to be arranged between the preceding performance design and the subsequent performance design. At this time, when the color of the production pattern changes from its own color to another color, the blank pattern having navy blue changes from navy blue to another color in which the color of the production pattern changes from its own color. or you can keep it dark blue.

When a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIGS. 67(H) and (I), the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, the subsequent left production pattern 8L, the preceding The medium production pattern 8C, the subsequent medium production pattern 8C, the preceding right production pattern 8R, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R all at once (simultaneously) gradually increase the speed from low speed toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward). While changing from an opaque state to a translucent state, the display mode changes at high speed.

As the left effect pattern 8L (the number "3" having bright green color) moves in the normal change direction, the preceding left effect pattern 8L (the number "2" having bright blue color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and is visually recognized. As it becomes difficult, the subsequent left effect symbol 8L (the number "4" having a bright blue color) enters the display screen 7a and can be visually recognized as a whole. Then, by the time the left effect symbol 8L (the number "3" having bright green color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the second succeeding left effect symbol 8L, the number "5" having bright blue color, appears on the display screen 7a. Appears from the upper side and usually moves in the direction of fluctuation. The second succeeding left effect symbol 8L also includes the preceding left effect symbol 8L of number "2" having bright blue color, the left effect symbol 8L of number "3" having bright green color, and the number "4" having bright blue color. As with the subsequent left performance pattern 8L, the left side of the second subsequent left performance pattern 8L approaches the vicinity of the left side of the display screen 7a, but the mode in which it does not protrude from the left side and becomes difficult to see is maintained. That is, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, and the second subsequent left effect pattern 8L are left from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. It remains positioned on the left vertical line moved to the left.

In addition, as the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (the number "7" having bright red) moves in the normal fluctuation direction, it jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the following medium effect pattern 8C (bright blue The number "8" with ) is also usually moving in the direction of fluctuation. Then, until the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (the number "8" having a bright blue color) reaches the lower side of the display screen 7a, the number "9" having a bright green color, which is the second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, is displayed. Appears from the upper side of the screen 7a and usually moves in the direction of change. This second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is also the medium fluctuation display area, similar to the preceding medium effect pattern 8C of the number "7" having bright red and the left effect pattern 8L following the number "8" having bright blue. It is arranged on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area in 8Cr (in other words, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). That is, the preceding middle effect pattern 8C, the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C, and the second subsequent middle effect pattern 8C are on the middle side reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area in the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr (that is, the display screen 7a on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the )).

In addition, as the preceding right production pattern 8R (the number "1" having bright green) moves in the normal fluctuation direction, it jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R (bright blue The number "2" with ) is also usually moving in the direction of fluctuation. Then, until the subsequent right performance symbol 8R (the number "2" having bright blue color) reaches the lower side of the display screen 7a, the number "3" having bright green color, which is the second subsequent right performance symbol 8R, is displayed. Appears from the upper side of the screen 7a and goes in the normal change direction. This second succeeding right effect pattern 8R is also the same as the preceding right effect pattern 8R of number "1" having bright green color and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R of number "2" having bright blue color. It is arranged on the right vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display area in 8Rr. That is, the preceding right effect symbol 8R, the subsequent right effect symbol 8R, and the second succeeding right effect symbol 8R are moved to the right from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display area in the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. The state of being arranged on the vertical line is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(J), it is arranged on the left vertical line moved leftward from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, and is in the middle of the fluctuation effect (variation display). The left effect pattern 8L (previous left effect pattern 8L, subsequent left effect pattern 8L) moves to the right and is placed again on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. The right production pattern 8R (preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent right production pattern) placed on the right vertical line moved to the right from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display area in the fluctuation production (variation display) 8R) is moved to the left and placed again on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variation display area. That is, when the variable production (variable display) of the production design is started, the left production design 8L (preceding left production design 8L, the subsequent left production design 8L), the middle production design 8C (the preceding medium production design 8C, the subsequent Medium production pattern 8C) and right production pattern 8R (previous right production pattern 8R, subsequent right production pattern 8R) are spread apart from each other, and then move toward the normal fluctuation direction while maintaining this spread mode. When the display state changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a high-speed fluctuating display mode, during the fluctuation, it returns to the state before separating again, that is, toward the state before spreading. It starts moving and then returns to the original form before spreading.

As a result, the left production pattern 8L (preceding left production pattern 8L, subsequent left production pattern 8L) is arranged on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the middle production pattern 8C (preceding middle production pattern 8C, Subsequent middle production pattern 8C) is arranged on the middle side reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and right production pattern 8R (preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent right production pattern 8R) is placed in the center of the right fluctuation display area. It is arranged on the right side reference vertical line passing through, left production pattern 8L (preceding left production pattern 8L, subsequent left production pattern 8L), medium production pattern 8C (preceding medium production pattern 8C, subsequent medium production pattern 8C) ), the right effect pattern 8R (previous right effect pattern 8R, subsequent right effect pattern 8R) moves toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) in each fluctuation display area.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R decelerate just before they stop and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in bright blue. A number "1" is temporarily stopped in the center of the medium fluctuation display area.

In this state, the number "7" having a bright red color, which is the preceding left effect symbol 8L, is arranged below the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the following left effect symbol 8L is displayed. A number "9" having a certain bright green color is arranged above the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area. The lower part of the preceding left effect pattern 8L (approximately half of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the preceding left effect pattern 8L is projected. The mode in which the remaining upper part (approximately half of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) is displayed is maintained, and the upper part of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (subsequent left A portion of about half of the production pattern 8L) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and a lower part (subsequent left production pattern 8L) which is the remaining part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L (approximately half of the area) is still maintained.

In addition, the number "5" having bright green which is the preceding right production pattern 8R is arranged below the right production pattern 8R which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuating display area, and is the subsequent right production pattern 8R which is bright. A number "7" having a red color is arranged above the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area. The lower part of the preceding right production pattern 8R (about 1/2 part of the preceding right production pattern 8R) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the preceding right production pattern 8R is projected. The mode in which the upper part (about half of the preceding right production pattern 8R), which is the remaining part, is displayed is maintained, and the upper part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (subsequent right Approximately one-half of the production pattern 8R) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part that is the remaining part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (subsequent right production pattern 8R) (approximately half of the area) is still maintained.

In addition, the number "9" having a bright green color, which is the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, is arranged below the medium effect pattern 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and is the following medium effect pattern 8C, which is bright. A number "2" having a blue color is arranged above the medium effect symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. The lower part of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C (about half of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the preceding middle effect pattern 8C The mode in which the remaining upper portion (about half of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C) is displayed is maintained, and the upper portion of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (subsequent medium About half of the production pattern 8C) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part (subsequent middle production pattern 8C) which is the remaining part of the subsequent middle production pattern 8C (approximately half of the area) is still maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(K), the left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the right effect symbol 8R is stopped in the center of the right fluctuation display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are arranged in a line in the horizontal direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. No, it is stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, when the player operates the handle 60 to enter the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the first holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect of the effect symbol (variable effect) display) is started, and when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, while the left production pattern 8L and the middle production are determined. When the pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are stop-displayed together with the same pattern, the win is confirmed, the opening of the big win is started, and then the big win game in which profits are given to the player is started. .

[Production pattern movement fluctuation production C]
Next, the production symbol movement fluctuation production C will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a game ball is launched so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A, and a game by left hitting is performed, and the flowing game ball enters the first start port 20, and the white first reservation is foreseen. The icon 9A is determined and displayed. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and takes the white variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started. When the variable performance (variation display) of the performance design is started, the left performance design 8L, the middle performance design 8C, and the right performance design 8R are gradually increased in speed from a low speed toward the normal fluctuation direction, and the opaque state is translucent. state, and the display mode changes at high speed. During this fluctuation, the game ball enters the first starting hole 20, and is determined and displayed as the white first reservation icon 9A by prefetching. As a result, only one pending icon 9A is stocked. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60 , the game ball has not entered the first start hole 20 .

After that, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the center of the left fluctuation display area with the number "9" having bright green, and the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the center of the right fluctuation display area with the number "4" having bright blue. A blank symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. In this state, the number "8" having a bright blue color, which is the preceding left effect symbol 8L, is arranged below the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the following left effect symbol 8L is displayed. A number "1" having a certain bright green color is arranged above the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area. The lower part of the preceding left effect pattern 8L (approximately half of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the preceding left effect pattern 8L is projected. The mode in which the remaining upper part (approximately half of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) is displayed is maintained, and the upper part of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (subsequent left A portion of about half of the production pattern 8L) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and a lower part (subsequent left production pattern 8L) which is the remaining part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L (approximately half of the area) is still maintained.

In addition, the number "3" having bright green which is the preceding right production pattern 8R is arranged below the right production pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuating display area, and the following right production pattern 8R which is bright. A number "5" having green is arranged above the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area. The lower part of the preceding right production pattern 8R (about 1/2 part of the preceding right production pattern 8R) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the preceding right production pattern 8R is projected. The mode in which the upper part (about half of the preceding right production pattern 8R), which is the remaining part, is displayed is maintained, and the upper part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (subsequent right Approximately one-half of the production pattern 8R) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part that is the remaining part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (subsequent right production pattern 8R) (approximately half of the area) is still maintained.

In addition, the number "5" having a bright green color that is the preceding medium effect pattern 8C is arranged below the blank pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the bright blue color that is the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is arranged. The number "6" is arranged above the blank pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. Both the preceding middle effect pattern 8C and the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C are maintained in a state of being displayed in a state where the whole can be visually recognized without jumping out from the lower side or the upper side of the display screen 7a. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the left effect symbol 8L is stop-displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, the blank symbol is displayed in the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the right effect symbol 8R is stopped in the center of the right fluctuation display area. As a result, the left production pattern 8L, the blank pattern, and the right production pattern 8R are not arranged in the same pattern in a state of being aligned in the horizontal direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line, A stop display is displayed, and the loss is confirmed. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the white first reserved icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design is started, the preceding left performance design 8L, the left performance design 8L, the subsequent left performance design 8L, the preceding middle performance design 8C, (here, the middle performance design 8C is the middle It is not arranged in the center of the variable display area, and a blank pattern is arranged.), a set of production patterns of the following medium production pattern 8C, the preceding right production pattern 8R, the right production pattern 8R, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R. Before starting to move in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the left effect pattern 8L (the number "9" having a bright green color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area Enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger (the size of the production pattern expanded in the first stage is about 1.5 times larger than the size of the production pattern before being expanded in the first stage) , the same below), and starts moving horizontally to the left, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction). , the left effect symbol 8L (number "8" with bright blue color) preceded by the left effect symbol 8L (number "9" with bright green color) that has been stop-displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area is enlarged to the first stage. , and begins to move diagonally downward (diagonally to the left at 45 degrees) toward the lower left side, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction, and changes to the left The left production pattern 8L (number "1" with bright green) that follows the left production pattern 8L (number "9" with bright green) stopped and displayed in the center of the display area is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger. Then, it starts to move diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward the upper left side, which is a direction different from the normal change direction (that is, the lower side) and is diagonal to the normal change direction.

In addition, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (number "5" having bright green color) is enlarged to the first stage in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. Then, it starts to move in the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (the number "6" having a bright blue color) is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, and the normal fluctuation direction (that is, (lower side), and starts to move upward, which is the direction opposite to the normal fluctuation direction.

Further, when the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, the right performance symbol R (the number "4" having a bright blue color), which has been stopped and displayed in the center of the right variation display area, is displayed in the right variation display area 8Rr. Expanded in the first stage, it becomes larger, and it is horizontal to the right, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction). , and the right performance symbol 8R (number "3" with bright green) preceded by the right performance symbol 8R (number "4" with bright blue) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area is the first It is enlarged in stages and becomes larger, diagonally downward toward the lower right (diagonal to the lower right at 45 degrees), which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. The right production pattern 8R (number "5" with bright green) following the right production pattern 8R (number "4" with bright blue) that has started to move and has been stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area is the first stage. , and starts moving diagonally upward (upper right diagonal 45 degrees) toward the upper right side, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. .

Here, the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, the subsequent left production pattern 8L, the preceding medium production pattern 8C, the subsequent medium production pattern 8C, the preceding right production pattern 8R, the right production pattern 8R, the subsequent The right performance symbols 8R are all at once (simultaneously) enlarged to the first stage and start to move. However, the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, and the subsequent left production pattern 8L are enlarged to the first stage and start to move, and the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, and the subsequent left During the movement of the production pattern 8L or after the movement is completed, the preceding medium production pattern 8C and the subsequent medium production pattern 8C are enlarged to the first stage and start to move, and the preceding medium production pattern 8C and the subsequent medium production pattern 8C are enlarged. During the movement of the middle effect pattern 8C, or after the completion of the movement, even if the leading right effect pattern 8R, the right effect pattern 8R, and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R are enlarged to the first stage and start to move. good. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the stock pending icon 9A does not exist at all.

In addition, when each performance pattern is expanded to the first stage and becomes large, a lightning bolt of a predetermined color runs on each performance pattern, and the color of the lightning suggests the degree of expectation for the variation. As for the predetermined colors, the expectation of winning increases in the order of white, blue, and purple. Here it is a white lightning bolt. same as below. The hit expectation of the white lightning bolt is the same as the white hold icon (white fluctuation icon), and the blue lightning hit expectation is the same as the blue hold icon (blue fluctuation icon). The hit expectation is the same, and the hit expectation of the purple lightning bolt is the same hit expectation as the red hold icon (red fluctuation icon).

The left production pattern 8L (number "9" with bright green color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction ( When it starts moving horizontally toward the left side, which is the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction, the left side part of the left effect pattern 8L (about 1/3 part from the left side to the right side of the left effect pattern 8L) is displayed on the display screen. Move while maintaining the mode in which the left side of 7a protrudes and becomes difficult to see, and the right part (about two-thirds of the left effect pattern 8L), which is the remaining part of the left effect pattern 8L, is displayed. Stop. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the left effect pattern 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left effect pattern 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through and the intersection of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr and the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area is moved horizontally to the left by a predetermined distance (for example, 40 mm). The state in which the left effect pattern 8L is arranged on the vertical line is maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line near the left side of the display screen 7a horizontally shifted leftward by a predetermined distance (for example, 40 mm) from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr will be referred to as a "first left vertical line." It may be described as "line".

The preceding left production pattern 8L (the number "8" having a bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and diagonally with the normal fluctuation direction When starting to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower left) toward the lower left side, which is the direction, the left part of the preceding left production pattern 8L (about 1/3 from the left side to the right side of the preceding left production pattern 8L) part) protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part of the preceding left production pattern 8L (about three-fourths from the lower side to the upper side of the preceding left production pattern 8L) portion) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the movement stops while maintaining the state in which the upper right portion, which is the remaining portion of the preceding left effect pattern 8L, is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding left production pattern 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding left production pattern 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) A point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the first left vertical line.

The subsequent left production pattern 8L (the number "1" having bright green) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. When starting to move diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward the upper left side, which is the direction, the left part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L (about 1/3 from the left side to the right side of the subsequent left production pattern 8L) part) protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the upper part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L (about three-fourths from the upper side to the lower side of the subsequent left production pattern 8L) ) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and stops moving while maintaining the state in which the lower right portion, which is the remaining portion of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) A point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the first left vertical line.

In this way, on the first left vertical line, the following left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, and the preceding left effect pattern 8L are arranged in a row in the order of the vertical direction. there is

When the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (the number "5" having bright green) is expanded to the first stage and becomes larger and starts moving toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), the preceding medium effect pattern 8C The upper part (about one-half of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the upper part (preceding The movement is stopped while maintaining the mode in which the (approximately 1/2 portion of the medium effect pattern 8C) is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the preceding medium effect symbol 8C is on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). The state of being placed in is maintained.

The subsequent middle effect pattern 8C (number "6" with bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and opposite to the normal fluctuation direction When it starts to move upward, which is the direction, the upper part of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C (about 1/2 part of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a and is difficult to see. At the same time, the movement is stopped while maintaining the mode in which the lower part (approximately half of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C), which is the remaining part of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C, is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the subsequent middle effect symbol 8C remains arranged on the middle side reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). there is

In this way, on the middle side reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a), the following medium effect pattern 8C and the preceding medium effect pattern 8C are arranged in the order of the vertical direction. The state of being placed in is maintained.

The right production pattern 8R (the number "4" having a bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction ( When it starts to move horizontally toward the right side, which is the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), the right part of the right production pattern 8R (about 1/3 part from the right side to the left side of the right production pattern 8R) is displayed on the display screen. It jumps out from the right side of 7a and becomes difficult to see, and moves while maintaining the mode in which the left part (about two-thirds part of the right production pattern 8R), which is the remaining part of the right production pattern 8R, is displayed. Stop. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the right production pattern 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the right production pattern 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through and the crossing point of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr is shifted horizontally to the right by a predetermined distance (for example, 40 mm) from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display region 8Rr. The state in which the right effect pattern 8R is arranged on the vertical line is maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line near the left side of the display screen 7a horizontally moved to the right by a predetermined distance (for example, 40 mm) from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variation display area in the right variation display area 8Rr will be referred to as a "first right vertical line." It may be described as "line".

The preceding right production pattern 8R (the number "3" having bright green) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and diagonally with the normal fluctuation direction When starting to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right) toward the lower right side, which is the direction, the right part of the preceding right production pattern 8R (about 3 minutes from the right side of the preceding right production pattern 8R to the left) 1) jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part of the preceding right production pattern 8R (from the lower side to the upper side of the preceding right production pattern 8R is about 4 minutes 3) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the movement is stopped while maintaining the state in which the upper left part, which is the remaining part of the preceding right performance pattern 8R, is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding right production pattern 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of a virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding right production pattern 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape A point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the first right vertical line.

The subsequent right production pattern 8R (the number "6" with bright blue color) is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. When starting to move diagonally upward (upper right diagonal 45 degrees) toward the upper right side, which is the direction, the right part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (about 1/3 from the right side to the left side of the subsequent right production pattern 8R) part) protrudes from the right side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the upper part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (about 3/4 part from the upper side to the lower side of the subsequent right production pattern 8R) ) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and stops moving while maintaining the state in which the lower left portion, which is the remaining portion of the subsequent right performance pattern 8R, is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the following right effect pattern 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the following right effect pattern 8R, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape The point where a horizontal line passing through and intersects ) remains positioned on the first right vertical line.

In this way, on the first right vertical line, the following right performance pattern 8R, the right performance pattern 8R, and the preceding right performance pattern 8R are arranged in a row in the order of the vertical direction. there is

The left performance pattern 8L is enlarged at the first stage, becomes larger and moves to the left side, the preceding left performance pattern 8L is enlarged at the first stage, becomes larger and moves diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees, and the subsequent left performance symbol is enlarged. 8L is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger and moves to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, the preceding middle effect pattern 8C is enlarged to the first stage and moves to the lower side, and the following middle effect pattern 8C is moved. The right performance pattern 8R is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger and moves to the upper side, and the preceding right performance pattern 8R is enlarged in the first stage and moves to the right side. Then, it moves diagonally to the lower right at 45 degrees, and the subsequent right performance pattern 8R is enlarged to the first stage and moves to the diagonally upper right at 45 degrees, thereby starting the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols. Then, the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, the subsequent left production pattern 8L, the preceding medium production pattern 8C, the subsequent medium production pattern 8C, the preceding right production pattern 8R, the right production pattern 8R, the subsequent The right production pattern 8R has changed to a mode in which it is spread apart from each other.

Enlargement of the left production pattern 8L to the first stage and horizontal movement to the left, expansion of the preceding left production pattern 8L to the first stage and movement to the lower left at an angle of 45 degrees, subsequent first stage of the left production pattern 8L and move to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, expand the preceding medium production pattern 8C to the first stage and vertically move downward, expand the subsequent medium production design 8C to the first stage and move upward Vertical movement, expansion of the right production pattern 8R to the first step, horizontal movement to the right, expansion of the preceding right production pattern 8R to the first step, movement to the lower right diagonal 45 degrees, subsequent right production pattern The expansion of 8R to the first stage and the movement to the upper right diagonal 45 degrees are started all at once (simultaneously), and then stopped all at once (simultaneously), and this state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). be. Although not shown, the blank pattern is also enlarged to the first stage and moved in a predetermined direction so as to be arranged between the preceding and succeeding performance symbols.

In addition, the left production pattern 8L is expanded to the first stage and horizontally moved to the left, the preceding left production pattern 8L is expanded to the first stage and moved diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees, and the subsequent left production pattern 8L is moved to the first stage. Even in the expansion to one step and the movement to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, and the subsequent left effect pattern 8L straddle the left fluctuation display area 8Lr and the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. It is not. In addition, in the expansion of the preceding medium production pattern 8C to the first stage and vertical movement downward, and the expansion of the subsequent medium production design 8C to the first stage and vertical movement upward, the preceding medium production design 8C, the subsequent medium effect symbol 8C does not straddle the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr to the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, nor does it straddle the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr to the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. In addition, the right production pattern 8R is expanded to the first stage and horizontally moved to the right side, the preceding right production pattern 8R is expanded to the first stage and moved diagonally to the lower right by 45 degrees, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R is moved. Even in the expansion to the first stage and the movement to the upper right oblique 45 degrees, the preceding right production pattern 8R, the right production pattern 8R, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R straddle the right fluctuation display area 8Rr and the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. not in a state.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIGS. 68(C) and (D), the preceding left effect symbol 8L, which is enlarged to the first stage, is displayed as it is. Left production pattern 8L, subsequent left production pattern 8L, preceding medium production pattern 8C, subsequent medium production pattern 8C, preceding right production pattern 8R, right production pattern 8R, subsequent right production pattern 8R are normal fluctuation directions (that is The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed all at once (simultaneously) from a low speed toward the lower side), resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed.

As the left production pattern 8L (the number "9" having a bright green color) enlarged in the first stage moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, the preceding left production pattern 8L (the number "8" having a bright blue color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (the number "1" having bright green color) enters the display screen 7a and the right part of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L is visually recognized. be able to. Then, by the time the left production pattern 8L (the number "9" having bright green) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the production pattern ( Hereinafter, it may be described as "second succeeding left effect pattern".) The bright blue number "2" appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a in a state enlarged by the first stage, Ordinarily moves in the direction of fluctuation. This second succeeding left effect symbol 8L also includes the preceding left effect symbol 8L of the number "8" having bright blue color, the left effect symbol 8L of the number "9" having bright green color, and the number "1" having bright green color. Similarly to the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, the left part of the second subsequent left effect pattern 8L (about one-third of the left effect pattern 8L from the left side to the right side) protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a. The difficult-to-recognize aspect is maintained. That is, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, and the second subsequent left effect pattern 8L are left from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. It remains positioned on the first left vertical line moved to the left.

In addition, as the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (the number "5" having bright green) moves in the normal fluctuation direction, it jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the following medium effect pattern 8C (bright blue The number "6" with ) is also usually moving in the direction of fluctuation. Then, by the time the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C (number "6" having bright blue color) reaches the lower side of the display screen 7a, the following left effect pattern 8L (number "6" having bright blue color) further follows. A bright red number "7", which is a production pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "second succeeding middle production pattern"), appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves in the normal fluctuation direction. This second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is also the medium fluctuation display area, similar to the preceding medium effect pattern 8C of the number "5" having bright green and the left effect pattern 8L following the number "6" having bright blue. It is arranged on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in 8Cr (in other words, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). That is, the preceding middle effect pattern 8C, the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C, and the second subsequent middle effect pattern 8C are on the middle side reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area in the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr (that is, the display screen 7a on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the )).

In addition, as the right production pattern 8R (the number "4" having bright blue color) moves toward the normal fluctuation direction, the preceding right production pattern 8R (the number "3" having bright green color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the following right performance symbol 8R (the number "5" having bright green color) enters the display screen 7a and the left part of the following right performance symbol 8R can be visually recognized. By the time the right production pattern 8R (the number "4" having bright blue color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the production pattern ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "second succeeding right effect pattern".) A number "6" having a bright blue color appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves in the normal fluctuation direction. This second succeeding right production pattern 8R also includes the preceding right production pattern 8R of number "3" having bright green, the right production pattern 8R of number "4" having bright blue, and the number "5" having bright green. Similarly to the subsequent right effect pattern 8R, the right side portion of the second subsequent right effect pattern 8R (about one-third portion from the right side to the left side of the right direction pattern 8R) jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a. The visibility difficult aspect is maintained. That is, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, the right effect pattern 8R, the subsequent right effect pattern 8R, and the second subsequent right effect pattern 8R are to the right of the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display area in the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. It remains positioned on the first right vertical line moved to the right.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(E), it is arranged on the first left vertical line moved to the left from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr to provide a fluctuation effect (variation display). The middle left production pattern 8L (preceding left production pattern 8L, subsequent left production pattern 8L) is changed from the size expanded in the first stage to the original size (left production pattern 8L shown in FIG. 68 (A) (The size of the preceding left effect pattern 8L and the subsequent left effect pattern 8L)) and moves to the right side to be placed again on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the right fluctuation display area. Right production pattern 8R (preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent The right production pattern 8R) is changed from the size expanded to the first stage to the original size (the right production pattern 8R shown in FIG. 68 (A) (preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent right production pattern 8R) size), move to the left, and are placed again on the right reference vertical line that passes through the center of the right fluctuation display area, and are placed on the middle reference vertical line and are in the middle production pattern during fluctuation production (variation display) 8C (preceding middle production pattern 8C, subsequent middle production pattern 8C) is changed from the size expanded in the first stage to the original size (middle production pattern 8C shown in FIG. 68 (A) (preceding middle production Return to the size of the pattern 8C and the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C)). That is, when the variable production (variable display) of the production design is started, the left production design 8L (preceding left production design 8L, the subsequent left production design 8L), the middle production design 8C (the preceding medium production design 8C, the subsequent Medium production pattern 8C) and right production pattern 8R (preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent right production pattern 8R) are each expanded to the first stage, become larger, move in a predetermined direction, and spread apart from each other. After that, it starts to move in the direction of normal fluctuation in this spread form, and gradually increases its speed from a low speed to change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and becomes a display form that fluctuates at high speed. , it returns from the size expanded in the first stage to the original size and starts to move toward the state before being separated again, ie, the state before spreading, and then returns to the original state before spreading.

As a result, the left production pattern 8L (preceding left production pattern 8L, subsequent left production pattern 8L) is arranged on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the middle production pattern 8C (preceding middle production pattern 8C, Subsequent middle production pattern 8C) is arranged on the middle side reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and right production pattern 8R (preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent right production pattern 8R) is placed in the center of the right fluctuation display area. It is arranged on the right side reference vertical line passing through, left production pattern 8L (preceding left production pattern 8L, subsequent left production pattern 8L), medium production pattern 8C (preceding medium production pattern 8C, subsequent medium production pattern 8C) ), the right effect pattern 8R (previous right effect pattern 8R, subsequent right effect pattern 8R) moves toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) in each fluctuation display area.

During this fluctuation, the player operates the handle 60 to enter the game ball into the first starting hole 20, and is determined and displayed as the green first reservation icon 9A by prefetching. As a result, only one pending icon 9A is stocked.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R decelerate just before they stop and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. 3", a temporary stop display is made in the center of the left fluctuation display area, a blank pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and finally a blank pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the middle fluctuation display area.

In this state, the number "2" having a bright blue color, which is the preceding left effect symbol 8L, is arranged below the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the following left effect symbol 8L is displayed. A number "4" having a certain bright blue color is arranged above the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area. The lower part of the preceding left effect pattern 8L (approximately half of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the preceding left effect pattern 8L is projected. The mode in which the remaining upper part (approximately half of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) is displayed is maintained, and the upper part of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (subsequent left A portion of about half of the production pattern 8L) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and a lower part (subsequent left production pattern 8L) which is the remaining part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L (approximately half of the area) is still maintained.

In addition, the number "1" having bright green color which is the preceding right production pattern 8R is arranged below the blank pattern which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the bright blue color which is the subsequent right production pattern 8R is arranged. The number "2" is arranged above the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area. Both the preceding right effect pattern 8R and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R do not protrude from the lower side or the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the state of being displayed in a state where the whole can be visually recognized is maintained. ing.

In addition, the number "7" having a bright red color, which is the preceding medium effect pattern 8C, is arranged below the blank pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the bright blue color, which is the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, is arranged. The number "8" is arranged above the blank symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. Both the preceding middle effect pattern 8C and the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C are maintained in a state of being displayed in a state where the whole can be visually recognized without jumping out from the lower side or the upper side of the display screen 7a. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, the blank symbol is displayed in the center of the middle variation display area, and the blank symbol is stopped in the center of the right variation display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are arranged in a line in the horizontal direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. No, it is stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the green first reserved icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the green variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design is started, the preceding left performance design 8L, the left performance design 8L, the subsequent left performance design 8L, the preceding middle performance design 8C, (here, the middle performance design 8C is the middle A blank pattern is placed instead of being placed in the center of the variable display area.), the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, (here, the right effect pattern 8R is not placed in the center of the right variable display area. , blank symbols are arranged.), and a set of subsequent right performance symbols 8R are displayed in the left variation display area 8Lr before starting to move in the normal variation direction (fluctuation direction). The left effect symbol 8L (the number "3" having bright green color) stopped and displayed in the center of the area is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), It starts to move horizontally toward the left side, which is the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), and is stopped in the center of the left fluctuation display area. 3") preceding left production pattern 8L (number "2" with bright blue color) is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), normal fluctuation The left effect symbol 8L (the number "3" having bright green color) which started to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower left) toward the lower left side, which is the direction diagonal to the direction, was stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area. The subsequent left production pattern 8L (number "4" with bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and diagonally with the normal fluctuation direction It starts to move diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward the upper left side, which is the direction of .

Further, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (the number "7" having bright red color) is enlarged to the first stage in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. Then, it starts moving in the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (the number "8" having a bright blue color) is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, and the normal fluctuation direction (that is, (lower side), and starts to move upward, which is the direction opposite to the normal fluctuation direction.

Further, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the preceding right effect pattern R (the number "1" having bright green color) is enlarged to the first stage in the right variable display area 8Rr. Then, it starts to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right) toward the lower right, which is a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. The production pattern 8R (the number "2" having bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. It starts to move diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper right) toward the upper right side.

Here, the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, the subsequent left production pattern 8L, the preceding medium production pattern 8C, the subsequent medium production pattern 8C, the preceding right production pattern 8R, the right production pattern 8R, the subsequent The right performance symbols 8R are all at once (simultaneously) enlarged to the first stage and start to move. However, the leading left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, and the subsequent left effect pattern 8L are enlarged to the first stage and start to move, and the preceding left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, and the subsequent left In the middle of the movement of the production pattern 8L or after the completion of the movement, the preceding medium production pattern 8C and the subsequent medium production pattern 8C are enlarged to the first stage and start to move, and the preceding medium production pattern 8C and the subsequent medium production pattern 8C are enlarged. During the movement of the middle effect pattern 8C, or after the completion of the movement, even if the leading right effect pattern 8R, the right effect pattern 8R, and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R are enlarged to the first stage and start to move. good. When the green first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the green variable icon 9C, the stock pending icon 9A does not exist at all.

In addition, when each production pattern is expanded to the first stage and becomes large, as described above, a lightning bolt of a predetermined color runs through each production pattern, and the color of the lightning indicates the degree of expectation for the variation. there is As for the predetermined colors, the expectation of winning increases in the order of white, blue, and purple. Here it is a white lightning bolt. same as below. The hit expectation of the white lightning bolt is the same as the white hold icon (white fluctuation icon), and the blue lightning hit expectation is the same as the blue hold icon (blue fluctuation icon). The hit expectation is the same, and the hit expectation of the purple lightning bolt is the same hit expectation as the red hold icon (red fluctuation icon).

The left production pattern 8L (the number "3" having bright green) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction ( When it starts moving horizontally toward the left side, which is the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction, the left side part of the left effect pattern 8L (about 1/3 part from the left side to the right side of the left effect pattern 8L) is displayed on the display screen. Move while maintaining the mode in which the left side of 7a protrudes and becomes difficult to see, and the right part (about two-thirds of the left effect pattern 8L), which is the remaining part of the left effect pattern 8L, is displayed. Stop. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the left effect pattern 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left effect pattern 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through and the intersection of ) remains positioned on the first left vertical line.

The preceding left production pattern 8L (the number "2" having a bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and diagonally with the normal fluctuation direction When starting to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower left) toward the lower left side, which is the direction, the left part of the preceding left production pattern 8L (about 1/3 from the left side to the right side of the preceding left production pattern 8L) part) protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part of the preceding left production pattern 8L (about three-fourths from the lower side to the upper side of the preceding left production pattern 8L) portion) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the movement stops while maintaining the state in which the upper right portion, which is the remaining portion of the preceding left effect pattern 8L, is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding left production pattern 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding left production pattern 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) A point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the first left vertical line.

The subsequent left production pattern 8L (the number "4" with bright blue color) is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. When starting to move diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward the upper left side, which is the direction, the left part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L (about 1/3 from the left side to the right side of the subsequent left production pattern 8L) part) protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the upper part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L (about three-fourths from the upper side to the lower side of the subsequent left production pattern 8L) ) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and stops moving while maintaining the state in which the lower right portion, which is the remaining portion of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) A point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the first left vertical line.

In this way, on the first left vertical line, the following left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, and the preceding left effect pattern 8L are arranged in a row in the order of the vertical direction. there is

When the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (the number "7" having bright red color) is expanded to the first stage and becomes larger and starts moving toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), the preceding medium effect pattern 8C The lower part (about half of the middle effect pattern 8C) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the upper part (middle effect), which is the remaining part of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C The movement stops while maintaining the state in which the half of the pattern 8C) is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the preceding medium effect symbol 8C is arranged on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. The state that was set is maintained.

The subsequent middle effect symbol 8C (the number "8" with bright blue color) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and opposite to the normal fluctuation direction When it starts to move upward, which is the direction, the upper part of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C (about 1/2 part of the middle effect pattern 8C) jumps out from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see. , the movement is stopped while maintaining the state in which the upper part (about 1/2 part of the middle effect pattern 8C), which is the remaining part of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C, is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the following medium effect pattern 8C is kept arranged on the middle side reference vertical line, that is, the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a.

In this way, on the middle side reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a), the following medium effect pattern 8C and the preceding medium effect pattern 8C are arranged in the order of the vertical direction. The state of being placed in is maintained.

The preceding right production pattern 8R (the number "1" having bright green) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. When starting to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right) toward the lower right side, which is the direction, the right part of the preceding right production pattern 8R (about 3 minutes from the right side of the preceding right production pattern 8R to the left) 1) jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part of the preceding right production pattern 8R (from the lower side to the upper side of the preceding right production pattern 8R is about 4 minutes 3) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the movement is stopped while maintaining the state in which the upper left part, which is the remaining part of the preceding right performance pattern 8R, is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding right production pattern 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of a virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding right production pattern 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape A point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the first right vertical line.

The subsequent right production pattern 8R (number "2" with bright blue color) is enlarged to the first stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. When starting to move diagonally upward (upper right diagonal 45 degrees) toward the upper right side, which is the direction, the right part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (about 1/3 from the right side to the left side of the subsequent right production pattern 8R) part) protrudes from the right side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the upper part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L (about three quarters of the following right production pattern 8R from the upper side to the lower side) ) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the movement stops while maintaining the state in which the lower left portion, which is the remaining portion of the subsequent right effect pattern 8R, is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent right production pattern 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) A point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the first right vertical line.

Thus, on the first right vertical line, the following right performance pattern 8R and the preceding right performance pattern 8R are arranged in a row in the order of the vertical direction, which is maintained. It should be noted that the upper side of the preceding medium production pattern 8C (number "7" having bright red) and the upper side of the preceding right production pattern 8R (number "1" having bright green) are arranged on the same horizontal line. In line, the lower side of the subsequent middle production pattern 8C (number "8" having bright blue color) and the lower side of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (number "2" having bright blue color) are on the same horizontal line. arranged and lined up.

The left performance pattern 8L is enlarged in the first stage, becomes larger and moves to the left side, the preceding left performance pattern 8L is enlarged in the first stage, becomes larger and moves diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees, and the subsequent left performance symbol is enlarged. 8L is expanded to the first stage and becomes larger and moves to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, the preceding middle production pattern 8C is expanded to the first stage and becomes larger and moves to the lower side, and the subsequent middle production pattern 8C is The preceding right performance pattern 8R is enlarged in the first stage and moved to the upper right direction, and the subsequent right performance pattern 8R is enlarged in the first stage and moved diagonally to the lower right at 45 degrees. When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern is started by being enlarged in stages and moved to the upper right diagonal at 45 degrees, the preceding left performance pattern 8L, the left performance pattern 8L, and the subsequent left performance pattern. 8L, the preceding middle effect pattern 8C, the following middle effect pattern 8C, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R are changed to spread apart from each other.

Enlargement of the left production pattern 8L to the first stage and horizontal movement to the left, expansion of the preceding left production pattern 8L to the first stage and movement to the lower left at an angle of 45 degrees, subsequent first stage of the left production pattern 8L and move to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, expand the preceding medium production pattern 8C to the first stage and vertically move downward, expand the subsequent medium production design 8C to the first stage and move upward Vertical movement, expansion of the preceding right production pattern 8R to the first stage and movement to the lower right diagonal 45 degrees, subsequent expansion of the right production pattern 8R to the first stage and movement to the upper right diagonal 45 degrees are performed all at once. (simultaneously) and stop moving all at once (simultaneously), and this state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second).

In addition, the left production pattern 8L is expanded to the first stage and horizontally moved to the left, the preceding left production pattern 8L is expanded to the first stage and moved diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees, and the subsequent left production pattern 8L is moved to the first stage. Even in the expansion to one step and the movement to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, and the subsequent left effect pattern 8L straddle the left fluctuation display area 8Lr and the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr. It is not. Also, in the expansion of the preceding middle production pattern 8C to the first stage and vertical movement downward, and the expansion of the subsequent middle production pattern 8C to the first stage and vertical movement upward, the preceding middle production design 8C, the subsequent medium effect symbol 8C does not straddle the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr to the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, nor does it straddle the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr to the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Also, in the expansion of the preceding right production pattern 8R to the first stage and the movement to the lower right diagonal 45 degrees, the subsequent expansion of the right production pattern 8R to the first stage and the movement to the upper right diagonal 45 degrees, the preceding The right effect symbol 8R and the subsequent right effect symbol 8R do not straddle the right variation display area 8Rr and the middle variation display area 8Cr.

After a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed, the left fluctuation display area 8Lr is expanded to the first stage as shown in FIG. The enlarged left production pattern 8L (the number "3" having bright green color) is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage (the size of the production pattern enlarged in the second stage is It is about 1.5 times larger than the size of the production pattern to be expanded in the first stage.Therefore, the size of the production pattern to be expanded in the second stage is the same as the size of the production design to be expanded in the first stage. It is about 2.25 times larger than the size of a certain original production pattern.The same applies hereinafter.), a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction ( The leading left production design of the left production design 8L (the number "3" having bright green color) that starts to move horizontally toward the left side that is the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction) and is enlarged in the first stage. 8L (the number "2" with bright blue color) is further expanded from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and diagonally to the normal fluctuation direction. It starts to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower left) toward the lower left side, which is the direction, and the subsequent left effect of the left effect pattern 8L (the number "3" having bright green) that is enlarged and enlarged in the first stage. The pattern 8L (number "4" with bright blue color) is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction. It starts to move diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward the upper left side, which is the direction of .

When each production pattern is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, the white lightning bolt changes to a purple lightning bolt, and the purple lightning bolt runs through each production pattern. As described above, the color of lightning increases in the order of white->blue->purple. Here, while the green variable icon 9C is intentionally used, it is actually a purple lightning bolt that suggests the same degree of winning expectation as the red pending icon (red variable icon). same as below.

Further, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the previous medium effect pattern 8C (number "7" having bright red color) enlarged to the first stage in the middle variable display area 8Cr. is further expanded from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, starts moving toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is expanded to the first stage and becomes larger The subsequent medium production pattern 8C (bright The number "6" with blue color) is further expanded from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and opposite to the normal fluctuation direction. Start moving upwards.

Further, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the preceding right effect pattern 8R (number "1" having bright green color) enlarged to the first stage in the right variable display area 8Rr. is further expanded from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, starts moving toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is expanded to the first stage and becomes larger The subsequent medium production pattern 8C (bright The number "6" with blue color) is further expanded from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) and opposite to the normal fluctuation direction. Start moving upwards.

Here, the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, the subsequent left production pattern 8L, the preceding middle production pattern 8C, the subsequent middle production pattern 8C, the preceding right The production pattern 8R, the right production pattern 8R, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R all at once (at the same time) are further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, and start to move. However, the leading left performance symbol 8L, the left performance symbol 8L, and the subsequent left performance symbol 8L, which were enlarged by the first stage and enlarged, are further enlarged by the first stage to the second stage and start to move. , further expanded from the first stage to the second stage and enlarged to the first stage during the movement of the preceding left performance symbol 8L, the left performance symbol 8L, and the subsequent left performance symbol 8L, or after the movement is completed. The preceding medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C, which have been enlarged by the expansion, are further expanded from the first stage to the second stage, become larger, start to move, and are further expanded from the first stage to the second stage. During the movement of the preceding middle production pattern 8C and the subsequent middle production pattern 8C, or after the completion of the movement, the preceding right production pattern 8R enlarged by being enlarged to the first stage, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R may be further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and may start moving.

The left production pattern 8L (the number "3" having bright green color) is further expanded from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is in the normal fluctuation direction. When it starts to move horizontally toward the left side in the vertical direction (the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), the left side of the left effect pattern 8L (about two-thirds of the left side of the left effect pattern 8L from the left side to the right side) part) protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the right part (about one-third of the left production pattern 8L), which is the remaining part of the left production pattern 8L, is displayed. Stop moving while maintaining. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the left effect pattern 8L (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the left effect pattern 8L, and the center of the left side and the center of the right side of this rectangular shape) The point where the horizontal line passing through and the intersection of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr and the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area moves further to the left side of the display screen 7a horizontally moved leftward by a predetermined distance (for example, 50 mm). The state in which the left effect pattern 8L is arranged on the vertical line is maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line closer to the left side of the display screen 7a horizontally moved leftward by a predetermined distance (for example, 50 mm) from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr is referred to as a "second left side It may be described as "vertical line". The second left vertical line is located to the left of the first left vertical line and is located closer to the left side of the display screen 7a than the first left vertical line.

The preceding left production pattern 8L (the number "2" having a bright blue color) is further expanded from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward). When starting to move obliquely downward (diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees) toward the lower left side, which is a direction oblique to the fluctuation direction, the movement stops in a state in which the preceding left effect symbol 8L disappears from the display screen 7a. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding left production pattern 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding left production pattern 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) A point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the second left vertical line.

The subsequent left effect pattern 8L (the number "4" with bright blue color) is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), normally When it starts to move diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper left) toward the upper left side, which is a direction diagonal to the fluctuation direction, it stops moving in a state where the subsequent left effect symbol 8L disappears from the display screen 7a. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) A point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the second left vertical line.

In this way, on the second left vertical line, the following left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, and the preceding left effect pattern 8L are arranged in a row in the order of the vertical direction. there is

When the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (the number "7" having bright red) is further expanded from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, and starts moving toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), the preceding The upper part of the middle production pattern 8C (about three-fourths part from the lower side to the upper side of the preceding middle production pattern 8C) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see. The movement is stopped while maintaining the state in which the upper part (about one-fourth part of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C), which is the remaining part of the effect pattern 8C, is displayed. In the state where the movement is stopped, the preceding medium effect symbol 8C is on the medium reference vertical line passing through the center of the medium fluctuation display area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). The state of being placed in is maintained.

The subsequent middle effect pattern 8C (number "8" with bright blue color) is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward). When starting to move upward, which is the direction opposite to the direction of fluctuation, the upper part of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C (about three quarters of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C from the upper side to the lower side) is displayed. A mode in which the lower part (about 1/4 part of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C) which is the remaining part of the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C is displayed while it is projected from the upper side of the screen 7a and becomes difficult to see. stop moving while maintaining In the state where the movement is stopped, the subsequent middle effect symbol 8C remains arranged on the middle side reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). there is

In this way, on the middle side reference vertical line (that is, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a), the following medium effect pattern 8C and the preceding medium effect pattern 8C are arranged in the order of the vertical direction. The state of being placed in is maintained.

The preceding right production pattern 8R (the number "3" having bright green) is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), normally When starting to move diagonally downward (45 degrees diagonally to the lower right) toward the lower right side, which is the direction diagonal to the fluctuation direction, the right part of the preceding right production pattern 8R (from the right side to the left side of the preceding right production pattern 8R) Approximately two-thirds of the portion) jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part of the preceding right production pattern 8R (from the lower side to the upper side of the preceding right production pattern 8R) (approximately three-fourths of the total area) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the state in which a part of the upper left part, which is the remaining part of the preceding right effect pattern 8R, is displayed is maintained. stop moving. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the preceding right production pattern 8R (a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of a virtual rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the preceding right production pattern 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape The point where the horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects is the point of the display screen 7a horizontally moved to the right by a predetermined distance (for example, 50 mm) from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display area in the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. The state in which the right effect pattern 8R is arranged on the vertical line closer to the right side is maintained. Hereinafter, a vertical line closer to the right side of the display screen 7a horizontally moved to the right by a predetermined distance (for example, 50 mm) from the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right variation display area in the right variation display area 8Rr is referred to as a "second right side". It may be described as "vertical line". The second right vertical line is arranged to the right of the first right vertical line, and is arranged closer to the right side of the display screen 7a than the first right vertical line.

The subsequent right production pattern 8R (the number "2" with bright blue color) is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, and is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward). When the movement is started diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper right) toward the upper right side, which is the direction diagonal to the fluctuation direction, the right part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (about 2/3 part) jumps out from the right side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the upper part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (from the upper side to the lower side of the subsequent right production pattern 8R is about 4 3) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the movement is stopped while maintaining the state in which a part of the lower left part, which is the remaining part of the subsequent right effect symbol 8R, is displayed. do. In the state where the movement is stopped, the center of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the imaginary rectangular shape surrounding the outer periphery of the subsequent right production pattern 8R, and the center of the left side of this rectangular shape) The point at which a horizontal line passing through the center of the right side intersects) remains positioned on the second right vertical line.

In this way, on the second right vertical line, the following right performance pattern 8R and the preceding right performance pattern 8R are arranged in a row in the order of the vertical direction. It should be noted that the upper side of the preceding medium production pattern 8C (number "7" having bright red) and the upper side of the preceding right production pattern 8R (number "1" having bright green) are arranged on the same horizontal line. In line, the lower side of the subsequent middle production pattern 8C (number "8" having bright blue color) and the lower side of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (number "2" having bright blue color) are on the same horizontal line. arranged and lined up.

The left performance symbol 8L is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and moved to the left side, and the preceding left performance symbol 8L is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and enlarged and left obliquely 45. The subsequent left performance pattern 8L is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger and moves to the upper left oblique 45 degrees, and the preceding middle performance pattern 8C moves from the first stage to the second stage. It is further enlarged and becomes larger and moves downward, the succeeding middle effect pattern 8C is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger and moves upward, and the preceding right effect pattern 8R is the first stage. is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, becomes larger, and moves at an oblique lower right angle of 45 degrees. Thus, when the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design is started, the preceding left performance design 8L, the left performance design 8L, the subsequent left performance design 8L, the preceding middle performance design 8C, and the subsequent middle performance design 8C. , the preceding right performance symbol 8R and the succeeding right performance symbol 8R are enlarged in the first stage, and are further separated from each other.

Expansion of the left production pattern 8L from the first step to the second step and horizontal movement to the left, expansion of the preceding left production pattern 8L from the first step to the second step and movement to the lower left diagonal 45 degrees, subsequent Expansion of the left effect pattern 8L from the first step to the second step and movement to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, expansion of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C from the first step to the second step and vertical movement downward, subsequent Expansion of the middle production pattern 8C from the first stage to the second stage and vertical movement upward, expansion of the preceding right production pattern 8R from the first stage to the second stage and movement to the lower right diagonal 45 degrees, The enlarging of the subsequent right production pattern 8R from the first step to the second step and the movement to the upper right diagonal 45 degrees are started all at once (simultaneously), and the movement is stopped all at once (simultaneously), and this state is predetermined. It is maintained for a period of time (eg 1 second). Although not shown, the blank pattern is also expanded from the first step to the second step and moved in a predetermined direction so as to be arranged between the preceding effect pattern and the subsequent effect pattern.

In addition, expansion of the left production pattern 8L from the first step to the second step and horizontal movement to the left, expansion of the preceding left production pattern 8L from the first step to the second step, and movement to the lower left at an angle of 45 degrees, Even in the enlargement of the subsequent left production pattern 8L from the first stage to the second stage and the movement to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, the preceding left production pattern 8L, the left production pattern 8L, and the subsequent left production pattern 8L are shifted to the left. The display area 8Lr is not in a state of straddling the medium-variation display area 8Cr. Also, the preceding right production pattern 8R is expanded from the first stage to the second stage and moved to the lower right diagonal 45 degrees, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R is expanded from the first stage to the second stage and upper right diagonal 45 degrees. Also in the movement to degree, the preceding right effect symbol 8R and the succeeding right effect symbol 8R do not straddle the right fluctuation display area 8Rr and the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. On the other hand, expansion from the first stage to the second stage of the preceding middle production pattern 8C and vertical movement downward, expansion of the subsequent middle production pattern 8C from the first stage to the second stage and upward In the vertical movement of , the preceding medium effect pattern 8C and the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C are in a state of straddling the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr to the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, and the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr to the right fluctuation display. It is in a state of straddling the region 8Rr.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIGS. Left production pattern 8L, left production pattern 8L, subsequent left production pattern 8L, preceding medium production pattern 8C, subsequent medium production pattern 8C, preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent right production pattern 8R are normal fluctuation directions (that is The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed all at once (simultaneously) from a low speed toward the lower side), resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed.

As the left production pattern 8L (the number "3" having bright green color) which has been further expanded from the first stage to the second stage and has become large goes in the normal fluctuation direction, the subsequent left production pattern 8L (having bright blue color) The number "4") enters the display screen 7a again and the right part of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L can be visually recognized, and the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (the number "4" having bright blue color) is further followed by the effect. The bright green number "5", which is a symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "second succeeding left effect symbol"), is displayed in a state in which it is further enlarged and enlarged from the first stage to the second stage. Appears from the upper side of the screen 7a and usually moves in the direction of change. The second succeeding left effect symbol 8L also includes the preceding left effect symbol 8L of number "2" having bright blue color, the left effect symbol 8L of number "3" having bright green color, and the number "4" having bright blue color. Similarly to the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, the left side portion of the second subsequent left effect pattern 8L (about two-thirds portion from the left side to the right side of the left effect pattern 8L) protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a. The difficult-to-recognize mode is maintained. That is, the preceding left effect pattern 8L, the left effect pattern 8L, the subsequent left effect pattern 8L, and the second subsequent left effect pattern 8L are left from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. It remains positioned on the second left vertical line moved to the left.

In addition, the preceding medium effect pattern 8C (number "7" having bright red color), which has been further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, moves in the normal fluctuation direction and jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and is visually recognized. It becomes a difficult state, and as the subsequent middle production pattern 8C (the number "8" having a bright blue color), which is further expanded from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, goes in the normal fluctuation direction, the subsequent By the time the middle production pattern 8C (number "8" having bright blue color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, the subsequent middle production pattern 8C (number "8" having bright blue color) further follows A bright green numeral "9", which is a production pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "second succeeding middle production pattern"), appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves in the normal fluctuation direction. This second subsequent medium effect pattern 8C is also the medium fluctuation display area, similar to the preceding medium effect pattern 8C of the number "7" having bright red and the left effect pattern 8L following the number "8" having bright blue. It is arranged on the middle reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area in 8Cr (in other words, on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). That is, the preceding middle effect pattern 8C, the subsequent middle effect pattern 8C, and the second subsequent middle effect pattern 8C are on the middle side reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area in the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr (that is, the display screen 7a on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the )).

In addition, the leading right effect pattern 8R (number "1" having bright green color), which has been further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage, moves in the normal fluctuation direction, jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is visually recognized. As the subsequent right production pattern 8R (the number "2" having a bright blue color), which became a difficult state and was further expanded from the first stage to the second stage and became larger, toward the normal fluctuation direction, the subsequent By the time the right production pattern 8R (number "2" with bright blue color) jumps out to the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, the subsequent right production pattern 8R (number "2" with bright blue color) further follows. A bright green number "3", which is a production pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "second succeeding right production pattern"), appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a and moves in the normal fluctuation direction. This second subsequent right production pattern 8R is also the second subsequent right production pattern 8R of the preceding right production pattern 8R of the number "1" having bright green and the subsequent right production pattern 8R of the number "2" having bright blue. The right part of the left performance pattern 8L (approximately two-thirds part from the right side to the left side of the right performance pattern 8R) protrudes from the right side of the display screen 7a and remains in an unrecognizable mode. That is, the preceding right effect pattern 8R, the subsequent right effect pattern 8R, and the second succeeding right effect pattern 8R are the rightward reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display area in the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. 2 It remains to be placed on the right vertical line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(K), it is arranged on the second left vertical line moved leftward from the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr to provide a fluctuation effect (variation display). The middle left production pattern 8L (preceding left production pattern 8L, subsequent left production pattern 8L) is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage to the original size (Fig. 68 (A), ( F) Return to the left effect symbol 8L (the size of the preceding left effect symbol 8L and the subsequent left effect symbol 8L), move to the right, and place it again on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area. , and the right performance pattern 8R ( The preceding right production pattern 8R, the subsequent right production pattern 8R) are changed from the size further expanded from the first stage to the second stage to the original size (the right production shown in FIGS. 68A and 68F) It returns to the pattern 8R (the size of the preceding right effect pattern 8R and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R), moves to the left side, and is placed again on the right reference vertical line passing through the center of the right fluctuation display area, and is on the middle side. Medium production pattern 8C (preceding medium production pattern 8C, subsequent medium production pattern 8C) arranged on the reference vertical line and in the variable production (variable display) has a size further expanded from the first stage to the second stage. returns to the original size (the size of the middle effect pattern 8C (previous middle effect pattern 8C, subsequent middle effect pattern 8C) shown in FIGS. 68(A) and (F)). In other words, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, and the left performance symbols 8L (previous left performance symbols 8L, subsequent left performance symbols 8L) which are enlarged in the first stage and moved in a predetermined direction, Medium production pattern 8C (preceding medium production pattern 8C, subsequent medium production pattern 8C), right production pattern 8R (preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent right production pattern 8R) further from the first stage to the second stage It expands and becomes bigger, moves in a predetermined direction, separates from each other, and spreads further, and then starts to move in the normal fluctuation direction in this spread state, gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to an opaque state. When the display mode changes to a semi-transparent state and changes at high speed, it returns from the size expanded in the second stage to the original size during the change and returns to the state before separating again, that is, to the state before spreading. It starts moving toward it and then returns to its original form before spreading.

As a result, the left production pattern 8L (preceding left production pattern 8L, subsequent left production pattern 8L) is arranged on the left reference vertical line passing through the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the middle production pattern 8C (preceding middle production pattern 8C, Subsequent middle production pattern 8C) is arranged on the middle side reference vertical line passing through the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and right production pattern 8R (preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent right production pattern 8R) is placed in the center of the right fluctuation display area. It is arranged on the right side reference vertical line passing through, left production pattern 8L (preceding left production pattern 8L, subsequent left production pattern 8L), medium production pattern 8C (preceding medium production pattern 8C, subsequent medium production pattern 8C) ), the right effect pattern 8R (previous right effect pattern 8R, subsequent right effect pattern 8R) moves toward the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward) in each fluctuation display area.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R decelerate just before they stop and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in bright blue. A number "1" is temporarily stopped in the center of the medium fluctuation display area.

In this state, the number "7" having a bright red color, which is the preceding left effect symbol 8L, is arranged below the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, and the following left effect symbol 8L is displayed. A number "9" having a certain bright green color is arranged above the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area. The lower part of the preceding left effect pattern 8L (approximately half of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the preceding left effect pattern 8L is projected. The mode in which the remaining upper part (approximately half of the preceding left effect pattern 8L) is displayed is maintained, and the upper part of the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (subsequent left A portion of about half of the production pattern 8L) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and a lower part (subsequent left production pattern 8L) which is the remaining part of the subsequent left production pattern 8L (approximately half of the area) is still maintained.

In addition, the number "5" having a bright green color which is the preceding right performance symbol 8R is arranged below the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right fluctuation display area, and the right performance symbol 8R succeeds the right performance symbol 8R. A figure "7" having a bright red color as a symbol is arranged above the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right variable display area. The lower part of the preceding right production pattern 8R (about a half of the preceding right production pattern 8R) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the preceding right production pattern 8R is projected. The mode in which the remaining upper part (about half of the preceding right production pattern 8R) is displayed is maintained, and the upper part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (subsequent right Approximately half of the production pattern 8R) protrudes from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part that is the remaining part of the subsequent right production pattern 8R (subsequent right production pattern 8R) (approximately half of the area) is still maintained.

In addition, the number "9" having a bright green color, which is the preceding middle effect pattern 8C, is arranged below the middle effect pattern 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, and the middle effect following the middle effect pattern 8C. A figure "2" having a bright blue color as a symbol is arranged above the intermediate effect symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the intermediate fluctuation display area. The lower part of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C (about half of the preceding middle effect pattern 8C) protrudes from the lower side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the preceding middle effect pattern 8C The mode in which the remaining upper part (about half of the preceding medium effect pattern 8C) is displayed is maintained, and the upper part of the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (subsequent medium About half of the production pattern 8C) jumps out from the upper side of the display screen 7a and becomes difficult to see, and the lower part (subsequent middle production pattern 8C) which is the remaining part of the subsequent middle production pattern 8C (approximately half of the area) is still maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(L), the left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the center of the left fluctuation display area, the middle effect symbol 8L is displayed in the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and the right effect symbol 8R is stopped in the center of the right fluctuation display area. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are arranged in a line in the horizontal direction with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. No, it is stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. Along with this, the green variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, when the player operates the handle 60 to enter the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the first holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect of the effect symbol (variable effect) display) is started, and when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, while the left effect pattern 8L and the middle effect are determined. When the pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are stop-displayed together with the same pattern, the win is confirmed, the opening of the big win is started, and then the big win game in which profits are given to the player is started. .

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the production pattern movement fluctuation production will be shown.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and one of the plurality of types of images is a left effect symbol 8L capable of informing a win or a loss. (Including the preceding left production pattern 8L and the subsequent left production pattern 8L.), medium production pattern 8C (including the preceding medium production pattern 8C and the subsequent medium production pattern 8C.), right production pattern 8R (preceding right Production pattern 8R, including the subsequent right production pattern 8R) is a set of production patterns such as a set of production patterns, before starting to move in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), a set of production A first performance is executed in which a plurality of performance symbols out of the symbols move in directions different from each other and in directions different from the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), and then move in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). (B) ~ (D), (G) ~ (I) in production pattern movement fluctuation production A, Figure 67 (B) ~ (D) in production design movement fluctuation production B , (G) to (I), and in the case of the effect pattern movement variation effect C, FIG. 68 (B) to (D), (G) to (J)). According to this configuration, before the set of production patterns starts moving in the normal fluctuation direction (variation direction), the plurality of production patterns in the set of production patterns are in different directions from each other, and each of them normally fluctuates. It can move in a direction different from the direction (fluctuation direction). To improve amusement by lowering player's motivation by easily making variable performance (variable display) of performance patterns monotonous in a conventional mode in which a set of performance patterns simply moves in one direction. was difficult. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left production pattern 8L (including the preceding left production pattern 8L and the subsequent left production pattern 8L), the medium production pattern 8C (the preceding medium production pattern 8C, the subsequent A set of production patterns such as the middle production pattern 8C (including the middle production pattern 8C) and the right production pattern 8R (including the preceding right production pattern 8R and the subsequent right production pattern 8R) are usually moved in the fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction) Before starting, a plurality of production patterns out of a set of production patterns move in directions different from each other, and in directions different from the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). Since the performance symbols do not move in one direction, the variable performance (variation display) of the performance symbols is unlikely to become monotonous, which contributes to the improvement of the player's motivation. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first production in the production symbol movement fluctuation production A of FIG. 66, the production symbol movement fluctuation production B of FIG. 67, and the production symbol movement fluctuation production C of FIG. One or more of the performance symbols may move in the direction opposite to the direction of variation. Specifically, the middle effect symbol 8C (the number "2" having a bright blue color) in the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect A in FIG. 66(G), the medium effect symbol 8C (number "7" having bright red color) in the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect A shown in FIG. . In addition, the subsequent middle effect symbol 8C (the number "6" having a bright blue color) in the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect B shown in FIG. , The subsequent middle effect symbol 8C (the number "8" having a bright blue color) in the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect B in FIG. there is In addition, the subsequent middle effect symbol 8C (the number "6" having a bright blue color) in the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect C in FIG. , The subsequent middle effect symbol 8C (the number "8" having a bright blue color) in the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect C in FIG. there is According to this configuration, since there are one or more production patterns that move in the direction opposite to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), unlike the conventional art, all the production patterns do not move in one direction, and the production is performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the fluctuation performance (variation display) of the pattern to become monotonous. In addition, since there are one or more performance patterns moving in the direction opposite to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), the performance patterns can be separated to change to a mode in which a set of performance patterns spreads.

In addition, in the first production in the production symbol movement fluctuation production A of FIG. 66, the production symbol movement fluctuation production B of FIG. 67, and the production symbol movement fluctuation production C of FIG. may move in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction) (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction). Specifically, the left effect symbol 8L (the number "1" having a bright green color) in the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect A in FIG. perpendicular direction), and the left effect pattern 8L (the number "4" having a bright blue color) in the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect A of FIG. It moves horizontally to the left, which is the vertical direction (the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), and the right production pattern 8R (the number "9" with bright green) moves in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction) and the vertical direction (normal It moves horizontally to the right, which is the direction perpendicular to the direction of fluctuation). In addition, the left production pattern 8L (the number "9" having a bright green color) in the production pattern movement fluctuation production B in FIG. ), and the right effect symbol 8R (the number "4" with bright blue color) moves to the right, which is the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction) and the vertical direction (the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction). Moving horizontally, the left production pattern 8L (number "3" having bright green) in production pattern movement fluctuation production B in FIG. orthogonal direction) to the left. In addition, the left production pattern 8L (the number "9" having a bright green color) in the production pattern movement fluctuation production C of FIG. ), and the right effect symbol 8R (the number "4" with bright blue color) moves to the right, which is the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction) and the vertical direction (the direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction). Moving horizontally, the left production pattern 8L (number "3" having bright green) in production pattern movement fluctuation production C in FIG. orthogonal direction) to the left. According to this configuration, there are one or more production patterns that move in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction) (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), so that all the production patterns are the same, unlike the conventional one. The movement in the direction is eliminated, and the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern can be made difficult to become monotonous. In addition, since there are one or more production patterns that move in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction) (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), the production patterns are spaced apart and a set of production patterns spreads. can change.

In addition, in the first effect in the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect B of FIG. 67 and the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect C of FIG. may move in the direction of Specifically, the preceding left production pattern 8L (the number "8" having a bright blue color) in the production pattern movement fluctuation production B in FIG. It moves diagonally 45 degrees, and the subsequent left production pattern 8L (the number "1" having bright green) moves diagonally to the upper left at 45 degrees, which is the direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), and the preceding right production The pattern 8R (number "3" with bright green) moves to the lower right diagonal 45 degrees, which is the direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (variation direction), and the subsequent right production pattern 8R (number "5" with bright green ”) moves to the upper right diagonal 45 degrees, which is the direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), and the preceding left production pattern 8L (bright blue number "2") moves in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction) and diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees, and the subsequent left production pattern 8L (number "4" with bright blue color) moves in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). direction) and diagonally to the upper left at 45 degrees, and the preceding right production pattern 8R (the number "1" having a bright green color) moves in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction) and the diagonal direction to the lower right, which is the diagonal direction. 45 degrees, and the subsequent right effect symbol 8R (the number "2" having bright blue color) is moved to the upper right diagonal direction of 45 degrees, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). In addition, the leading left production pattern 8L (the number "8" having a bright blue color) in the production pattern moving fluctuation production C of FIG. , the subsequent left production pattern 8L (the number "1" having bright green) moves to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, which is the direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), and the preceding right production pattern 8R ( The number "3" having bright green) moves to the lower right diagonal 45 degrees, which is the direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), and the subsequent right production pattern 8R (number "5" having bright green) , and moves to the upper right diagonal 45 degrees, which is the direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), and the preceding left production pattern 8L (the number "2" having a bright blue color) in the production pattern movement fluctuation production C of FIG. 68 (G) ) moves diagonally to the lower left at 45 degrees, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), and the subsequent left effect pattern 8L (the number “4” having a bright blue color) moves in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction) and It moves to the upper left diagonal 45 degrees, which is a diagonal direction, and the preceding right production pattern 8R (the number "1" having bright green) is in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction) and the diagonal direction 45 degrees to the lower right diagonal. After moving, the subsequent right effect symbol 8R (the number "2" having a bright blue color) moves in the upper right diagonal direction of 45 degrees, which is diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). According to this configuration, there are one or more production patterns that move in a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction) (a direction perpendicular to the normal fluctuation direction), so that all the production patterns are the same, unlike the conventional one. The movement in the direction is eliminated, and the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern can be made difficult to become monotonous. In addition, since there are one or more performance patterns moving in the direction of normal fluctuation (fluctuation direction) and in an oblique direction, the performance patterns can be separated to change to a mode in which a set of performance patterns spreads.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first production in the production symbol movement fluctuation production A of FIG. 66, the production symbol movement fluctuation production B of FIG. 67, and the production symbol movement fluctuation production C of FIG. are separated from each other, and after the first production, it is possible to execute a second production in which a set of production patterns is returned to the form before being separated and the fluctuation is stopped (production pattern movement Figure 66 (D) ~ (F), (I) ~ (K) in the variable performance A, Figure 67 (D) ~ (F), (I) ~ (K) in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B, performance symbol movement 68(D)-(F), (J)-(L)). According to this configuration, the set of production patterns is separated from each other, so that the set of production patterns is spread, and then the form before the set of production patterns is separated from each other, that is, before spreading. Since it is possible to return to the mode and stop the fluctuation, when it is stopped and displayed, it will be a familiar form like the conventional one, that is, the form before it spreads. It is possible to make it easier to inform the player of the win or loss.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the production symbol movement fluctuation production will be shown.
[Modification 1]
66 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect B of FIG. 67, and the effect symbol movement change effect C of FIG. It was based on what was done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 210 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
66 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect B of FIG. 67, and the effect symbol movement change effect C of FIG. Three vertical rectangular areas (that is, areas obtained by dividing the display screen 7a into three equal rows) are provided as variable display areas for one production pattern (also referred to as "variation areas for production patterns"). The left effect symbol 8L of the image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of each variable display area (symbol: number " 1” to number “9”), a variable effect (variable display) has been started. However, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, there are three horizontally long rectangular areas as variable display areas of three performance symbols (also referred to as "variation areas of performance symbols") (that is, the display screen 7a is arranged in three rows). A three-dimensional area) is provided, and the pattern (number "1" to number "9 ”), and the medium effect pattern of the stereoscopic image is displayed so that the reel rotates from the right side to the left side of the medium fluctuation display area (number “1” to number "9") start the variable effect (variable display), and the pattern (number "1 ” to number “9”) to start the variable performance (variable display), the preceding performance design arranged to the left of the performance design, and the performance displayed stopped in the center of the upper variation display area Design, subsequent top performance design placed to the right of the top performance design, preceding middle performance design placed to the left of the middle performance design, middle performance design stop-displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, middle performance Subsequent medium design pattern placed to the right of the design, leading right design design placed to the left of the right design design, right design design stopped in the center of the right fluctuation display area, right side of the right design design 66 for a set of performance symbols capable of informing success or loss, composed of the subsequent right performance symbols arranged in the The production symbol movement variation production C of FIG. 68 may be applied. Even with this configuration, the same effect as the above-described effects of the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance A of FIG. 66, the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B of FIG. 67, and the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C of FIG. 68 can be obtained. can.

[Modification 3]
66 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect B of FIG. 67, and the effect symbol movement change effect C of FIG. , including the subsequent left production pattern 8L.), medium production pattern 8C (preceding medium production pattern 8C, including the subsequent medium production pattern 8C.), right production pattern 8R (preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent right including the production pattern 8R), etc., before starting to move in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction), a plurality of production patterns in the set of production patterns are in different directions from each other, and Each moved in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). In this movement, the specific image may be arranged in front of the background image and behind the set of performance symbols, and a part of the specific image may be covered with the set of performance symbols. The specific image may be a specific character that indicates the expected degree of winning, or a premium image that rarely appears. In this way, the player can obtain a special opportunity to visually recognize the specific image during the variation exercise (variation display) of the production pattern without developing into super reach (SP reach). The variable performance (variable display) of the game is less likely to become monotonous, and can contribute to improving the player's motivation.

[Modification 4]
68 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when each performance symbol is expanded to the first stage and becomes larger, each performance symbol is further expanded from the first stage to the second stage. When I grew up, Inatsu of a predetermined color was running in each production design. The color of the lightning bolt is white → blue → purple, and the degree of expectation for winning increases in the order. However, instead of lightning, when each production pattern is expanded to the first stage and becomes larger, when each production pattern is further expanded from the first stage to the second stage and becomes larger, the original color of each production pattern to another color. The other colors are the same as the color of the lightning bolt, and the expectation of winning increases in the order of white → blue → purple. Even with this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of winning expectation to the player.

[Modification 5]
66(B) in the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the right effect symbol 8R (the number "3" having a bright green color), which has been stopped and displayed in the center of the right change display area, normally fluctuates. It started to move in the direction (that is, downward). However, in the same way as the medium effect symbol 8C (the number "2" having a bright blue color) that was stopped and displayed in the center of the medium fluctuation display area, the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side) is different from the normal fluctuation direction. You may make it start moving toward the upper side which is the opposite direction. Further, in the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect B of FIG. 67(B) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right effect symbol 8R (the number "4" having a bright blue color) that has been stop-displayed in the center of the right change display area. The right production pattern 8R (the number "5" with bright green) is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, the lower side), and diagonally upward (upper right 45 degrees diagonally). However, as with the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (the number "6" having a bright blue color), it is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is directed upward, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction. to start moving. In addition, in the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect C of FIG. 68(B) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right effect symbol 8R (the number "4" having a bright blue color) stopped and displayed in the center of the right change display area is followed by The right production pattern 8R (number "5" with bright green) is enlarged in the first stage and becomes larger, in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and in a direction diagonal to the normal fluctuation direction It started to move diagonally upward (45 degrees diagonally to the upper right) toward the upper right side. However, as with the subsequent medium effect pattern 8C (the number "6" having a bright blue color), it is in a direction different from the normal fluctuation direction (that is, downward), and is directed upward, which is the opposite direction to the normal fluctuation direction. You may make it start moving by pressing. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change to a mode in which a set of performance symbols spreads out by separating the performance symbols.

[Modification 6]
68 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the size of each effect symbol in the left variation display area 8Lr, the middle variation display area 8Cr, and the right variation display area 8Rr is enlarged step by step. was getting bigger. However, the left production pattern 8L (preceding left production pattern 8L, subsequent left production pattern 8L) in the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, and the right production pattern 8L in the right fluctuation display area 8Rr (preceding right production pattern 8R, subsequent Right production pattern 8R) is maintained without being enlarged at all in size, while only medium production pattern 8C (preceding medium production pattern 8C, subsequent medium production pattern 8C) in medium fluctuation display area 8Cr is large. You may make it large by being expanded in steps. By doing so, the variations of the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols are increased, so that the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is difficult to become monotonous, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the player's motivation.

[Modification 7]
68 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect symbol movement variation effect C is further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage. However, the second stage may be further expanded to the third stage. The size of the production pattern to be enlarged in the third stage is approximately 1.5 times the size of the production pattern to be enlarged in the second stage. As a result, the size of the effect pattern enlarged in the third stage is approximately 3.375 times the size of the original effect pattern. Also, the degree of expectation for winning may be increased by enlarging the production pattern in the order of the first stage→the second stage→the third stage. At this time, the color of the performance design enlarged in the first stage is changed from the original color to white, the color of the performance design further enlarged from the first stage to the second stage is changed from white to blue, and the second stage is performed. The color of the production pattern further enlarged from the stage to the third stage is changed from blue to purple. The expectation of winning increases in the order of white → blue → purple. Even with this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of winning expectation to the player.

[Modification 8]
66 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, the left performance symbols 8L, the middle performance symbols 8C, and the right performance symbols 8R are mutually displayed. It has changed to a form that spreads apart. When the pattern spreads apart from each other, the colors of these production patterns change to other colors, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation. 67 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, the preceding left performance symbol 8L, the left performance symbol 8L, the following The left production pattern 8L, the preceding medium production pattern 8C, the subsequent medium production pattern 8C, the preceding right production pattern 8R, and the subsequent right production pattern 8R are changed to spread apart from each other. In the production symbol movement fluctuation production A of FIG. 66 and the production symbol movement fluctuation production B of FIG. It was meant to suggest a degree of expectation. Other colors include purple and yellow (gold), and when the color of these production patterns changes from their own color to purple, the chances of winning are higher, and yellow (gold) instead of purple. Expectations for winning were higher when it changed than when it changed to purple. The probability of winning in purple is the same as the expectation of winning with the red pending icon (red fluctuation icon), and the probability of winning in yellow (gold) is the same as the pending icon (yellow ( It was the same expectation as the variable icon of Golden). However, as other colors, red, yellow (gold), red winning expectation is equivalent to red holding icon (red fluctuation icon), yellow (gold) winning expectation may be a winning expectation equivalent to the yellow (golden) reserved icon (yellow (golden) fluctuation icon).

[Modification 9]
67 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, and in the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance B of FIG. 68 and the performance symbol movement fluctuation performance C of FIG. It moves diagonally 45 degrees, the subsequent left production pattern 8L moves in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction) and the upper left oblique direction 45 degrees, and the preceding right production pattern 8R moves in the normal fluctuation direction (fluctuation direction). It moved in the oblique direction of 45 degrees to the lower right, and the subsequent right effect pattern 8R moved in the normal variation direction (fluctuation direction) and to the upper right of 45 degrees, which is the oblique direction. However, instead of 45 degrees to the lower left, 45 degrees to the upper left, 45 degrees to the lower right, and 45 degrees to the upper right, the angles may be 30 degrees to the lower left, 30 degrees to the upper left, 30 degrees to the lower right, and 30 degrees to the upper right. , 60 degrees to the lower left, 60 degrees to the upper left, 60 degrees to the lower right, and 60 degrees to the upper right. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change to a mode in which a set of performance symbols spreads out by separating the performance symbols.

[Modification 10]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect symbol movement fluctuation effect A of FIG. 66, the effect symbol movement change effect B of FIG. 67, and the effect symbol movement change effect C of FIG. Alternatively, other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of production patterns that can notify a win or a loss,
Before the set of performance symbols starts moving in the variable direction, a plurality of performance symbols out of the set of performance symbols move in directions different from each other and in directions different from the respective fluctuation directions, After that, it is possible to execute the first effect that moves in the fluctuation direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1,
In the first production,
One or more of the plurality of production patterns may move in a direction opposite to the direction of fluctuation,
One or more of the plurality of production patterns may move in a direction perpendicular to the fluctuation direction,
One or more of the plurality of production patterns may move in a direction oblique to the direction of fluctuation,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 or aspect A6-2,
In the first production, the set of production patterns are separated from each other,
After the first production, a second production is executed in which the set of production patterns is returned to the state before being separated and the fluctuation is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The frame-out variation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. This frame-out fluctuation production is executed when the production pattern starts the fluctuation production. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the frame-out variation effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Frame-out variation effect A]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the frame-out variation effect A. FIG. The frame-out variation effect is an effect in which at least a part of the effect pattern displayed on the display screen 7a is framed out from the display screen 7a, and then the variable display is started. 69(A) to (F) show a first example of the frame-out variation effect A, and FIGS. 69(G) to (L) show a second example of the frame-out variation effect A. FIG.

In the first example of the frame-out variable effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the fixed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is a "8" pattern. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69B and 69C, a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out effect is a effect in which at least part of the effect pattern is framed out from the display screen.
In FIG. 69(B), the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) has started to move leftward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1. Also, the right effect symbol 8R ("8" symbol) has started to move rightward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.
In FIG. 69(C), the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of the frame. Also, the right effect symbol 8R (“8” symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the right side of the "8" pattern is out of the frame.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(D) to (F), a variable display start effect is executed. The variable display start effect is a effect for starting variable display of effect symbols.

In FIG. 69(D), the production pattern 8L (“1” pattern), the production pattern 8C (“2” pattern), and the production pattern 8R (“8” pattern) are in the changing direction HD (downward direction of the display screen 7a). have started to move to At this time, the effect symbol 8L (“1” symbol) and the effect symbol 8R (“8” symbol) are moving in the fluctuation direction HD while being framed out of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 69(E), the production pattern 8L ("1" pattern), the production pattern 8C ("2" pattern), and the production pattern 8R ("8" pattern) are in the changing direction HD (downward direction of the display screen 7a). has been moved further to As a result, left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (“1” pattern, “2” pattern, and “8” pattern) are framed out from below the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 69(F), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

In the first example of the frame-out variation effect A, in the frame-out effect, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R (“1” pattern, “8” pattern) are framed out in the direction intersecting with the fluctuation direction HD.

In the second example of the frame-out variable effect A, as in the first example, first, as shown in FIG. 69(G), the fixed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is a "8" pattern. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(H) to (K), a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out effect is a effect in which at least part of the effect pattern is framed out from the display screen.
In FIG. 69(H), the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) has started to move leftward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1. Also, the right effect symbol 8R ("8" symbol) has started to move rightward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2. Further, the medium effect symbol 8C (“2” symbol) has started to move upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG3.
In FIG. 69(I), the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of the frame. Also, the right effect symbol 8R ("8" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the right side of the "8" pattern is out of the frame. Furthermore, the medium effect symbol 8C ("2" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG3, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-fifth of the upper side of the "2" pattern is out of the frame.

In FIG. 69(J), a color change effect is being executed. The color change effect is a effect of changing the display color of at least a part of the effect pattern. The color change effect is performed when the expectation of a big win is relatively high. Here, the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R (“1” pattern, “2” pattern, and “8” pattern) are changed from white to red (indicated by hatching).
In FIG. 69(K), the color restoration effect is executed. The color restoration effect is a effect of returning the display color of the effect pattern changed by the color change effect to the original display color. Here, the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R ("1" pattern, "2" pattern, "8" pattern) are changed from red to white.

The color change effect and the color return effect are executed in the middle of the frame-out effect. Also, the background image of the display screen 7a is changed with the color change effect and the color return effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(L), a variable display start effect is executed. The variable display start effect is a effect for starting variable display of effect symbols. Here, the production pattern 8L (“1” pattern), the production pattern 8C (“2” pattern), and the production pattern 8R (“8” pattern) move in the fluctuation direction HD (downward direction of the display screen 7a). have started. At this time, the effect symbol 8L (“1” symbol) and the effect symbol 8R (“8” symbol) are moving in the fluctuation direction HD while being framed out of the display screen 7a. Again, the background image continues to change. After that, left, middle and right performance patterns 8L, 8C and 8R (“1” pattern, “2” pattern and “8” pattern) are framed out from the bottom of the display screen 7a. Then, similarly to FIG. 69(F), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate at high speed.

In the second example of the frame-out variation effect A, in the frame-out effect, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R (“1” pattern, “8” pattern) are framed out in a direction intersecting with the fluctuation direction HD. there is Also, the medium effect symbol 8C (“2” symbol) is framed out in the direction opposite to the fluctuation direction HD.

[Frame-out variation effect B]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the frame-out variation effect B. FIG. The frame-out variation effect is an effect in which at least a part of the effect pattern displayed on the display screen 7a is framed out from the display screen 7a, and then the variable display is started. 70(A) to (F) show a first example of the frame-out variation effect B, and FIGS. 70(G) to (L) show a second example of the frame-out variation effect B. FIG.

In the first example of the frame-out variable effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 70(A), the fixed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is a "8" pattern. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70B and 70C, a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out effect is a effect in which at least part of the effect pattern is framed out from the display screen.
In FIG. 70(B), the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) has started to move leftward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1. Also, the right effect symbol 8R (“8” symbol) has started to move rightward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.
In FIG. 70(C), the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of the frame. Also, the right effect symbol 8R (“8” symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the right side of the "8" pattern is out of the frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), a large area frame-out effect is executed. The large area frame-out effect is an effect in which the frame-out area of the area of the effect pattern is larger than the frame-out effect. Here, the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and most of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of the frame. Also, the right effect symbol 8R ("8" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and most of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the right side of the "8" pattern is out of the frame.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(E) and (F), a variable display start effect is executed. The variable display start effect is a effect for starting variable display of effect symbols.
In FIG. 70(E), the production pattern 8L (“1” pattern), the production pattern 8C (“2” pattern), and the production pattern 8R (“8” pattern) are in the changing direction HD (downward direction of the display screen 7a). have started to move to At this time, the effect symbol 8L (“1” symbol) and the effect symbol 8R (“8” symbol) are moving in the fluctuation direction HD while being framed out of the display screen 7a.

Then, the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R ("1" pattern, "2" pattern and "8" pattern) are framed out from the bottom of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70(F). Then, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start high-speed fluctuation. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

In the first example of the frame-out variation effect B, in the frame-out effect and the large area frame-out effect, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R ("1" pattern, "8" pattern) are in a direction intersecting the variable direction HD. Framed out to.

In the second example of the frame-out variation effect B, as in the first example, first, as shown in FIG. 70(G), the fixed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is a "8" pattern. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(H) and (I), a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out effect is a effect in which at least part of the effect pattern is framed out from the display screen.
In FIG. 70(H), the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) has started to move leftward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1. Also, the right effect symbol 8R (“8” symbol) has started to move rightward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2. Furthermore, the medium effect symbol 8C (“2” symbol) has started to move upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG3.
In FIG. 70(I), the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of the frame. Also, the right effect symbol 8R (“8” symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the right side of the "8" pattern is out of the frame. Furthermore, the medium effect symbol 8C ("2" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG3, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-fifth of the upper side of the "2" pattern is out of the frame.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(J) and (K), a large area frame-out effect is executed. The large area frame-out effect is an effect in which the frame-out area of the area of the effect pattern is larger than the frame-out effect. Here, the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and most of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of the frame. Also, the right effect symbol 8R ("8" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and most of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the right side of the "8" pattern is out of the frame. Furthermore, the medium effect symbol 8C (“2” symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG3, and most of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the upper side of the "2" symbol is out of the frame.

In FIG. 70(J), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is a effect of changing the display color of at least a part of the effect pattern. The color change effect is performed when the expectation of a big win is relatively high. Here, the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R (“1” pattern, “2” pattern, and “8” pattern) are changed from white to red (indicated by hatching).
In FIG. 70(K), the color restoration effect is executed. The color restoration effect is a effect of returning the display color of the effect pattern changed by the color change effect to the original display color. Here, the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R ("1" pattern, "2" pattern, "8" pattern) are changed from red to white.

The color change effect and the color return effect are executed during the large area frame-out effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(L), a variable display start effect is executed. The variable display start effect is a effect for starting variable display of effect symbols. Here, the production pattern 8L (“1” pattern), the production pattern 8C (“2” pattern), and the production pattern 8R (“8” pattern) move in the fluctuation direction HD (downward direction of the display screen 7a). have started. At this time, the effect symbol 8L (“1” symbol) and the effect symbol 8R (“8” symbol) are moving in the fluctuation direction HD while being framed out of the display screen 7a. After that, left, middle and right performance patterns 8L, 8C and 8R (“1” pattern, “2” pattern and “8” pattern) are framed out from the bottom of the display screen 7a. Then, similarly to FIG. 70(F), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate at high speed.

In the second example of the frame-out variation effect B, in the frame-out effect, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R (“1” pattern, “8” pattern) are framed out in a direction intersecting with the fluctuation direction HD. there is Also, the medium effect symbol 8C (“2” symbol) is framed out in the direction opposite to the fluctuation direction HD.

[Frame-out variation effect C]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the frame-out variation effect C. FIG. The frame-out variation effect is an effect in which at least a part of the effect pattern displayed on the display screen 7a is framed out from the display screen 7a, and then the variable display is started. 71(A) to (F) show a first example of the frame-out variation effect C, and FIGS. 71(G) to (L) show a second example of the frame-out variation effect C. FIG.

In the first example of the frame-out variable effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 71(A), the fixed stop effect is executed and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is a "8" pattern. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 71B and 71C, a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out effect is a effect in which at least part of the effect pattern is framed out from the display screen.
In FIG. 71(B), the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) has started to move leftward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1. Also, the right effect symbol 8R (“8” symbol) has started to move rightward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2.
In FIG. 71(C), the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of the frame. Also, the right effect symbol 8R (“8” symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the right side of the "8" pattern is out of the frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a large area frame-out effect is executed. The large area frame-out effect is an effect in which the frame-out area of the area of the effect pattern is larger than the frame-out effect. Here, the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and most of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of the frame. Also, the right effect symbol 8R ("8" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and most of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the right side of the "8" pattern is out of the frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(E), a position return effect is executed. The position return effect is a effect of returning the effect symbol in the frame-out state to the original stop position. Here, the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) is moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1 and returned to the original stop position. Also, the right performance symbol 8R ("8" symbol) is moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2 and returned to the original stop position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), a variable display start effect is executed. The variable display start effect is a effect for starting variable display of effect symbols. The performance symbols are variably displayed in the variable area within the display screen 7a. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is variably displayed in the variable area 8LR, the middle effect symbol 8C is variably displayed in the variable area 8CR, and the right effect symbol 8R is variably displayed in the variable area 8RR.

In the second example of the frame-out variation effect C, similarly to the first example, first, as shown in FIG. 71(G), the fixed stop effect is executed and the effect symbol is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is a "8" pattern. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 71(H) and (I), a frame-out effect is executed. The frame-out effect is a effect in which at least part of the effect pattern is framed out from the display screen.
In FIG. 71(H), the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) has started to move leftward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG1. Also, the right effect symbol 8R ("8" symbol) has started to move rightward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG2. Further, the medium effect symbol 8C (“2” symbol) has started to move upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG3.
In FIG. 71(I), the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of the frame. Also, the right effect symbol 8R (“8” symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-third of the right side of the "8" pattern is out of the frame. Furthermore, the medium effect symbol 8C ("2" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG3, and part of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about one-fifth of the upper side of the "2" pattern is out of the frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(J), a large area frame-out effect is executed. The large area frame-out effect is an effect in which the frame-out area of the area of the effect pattern is larger than the frame-out effect. Here, the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1, and most of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the left side of the "1" symbol is out of the frame. Also, the right effect symbol 8R ("8" symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2, and most of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the right side of the "8" pattern is out of the frame. Furthermore, the medium effect symbol 8C (“2” symbol) is further moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG3, and most of it is out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Specifically, about two-thirds of the upper side of the "2" symbol is out of the frame.

In FIG. 71(J), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is a effect of changing the display color of at least a part of the effect pattern. The color change effect is performed when the expectation of a big win is relatively high. Here, the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R (“1” pattern, “2” pattern, and “8” pattern) are changed from white to red (indicated by hatching). The color change effect is executed in the middle of the large area frame-out effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(K), a position return effect is executed. The position return effect is a effect of returning the effect symbol in the frame-out state to the original stop position. Here, the left effect symbol 8L ("1" symbol) is moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG1 and returned to the original stop position. Also, the right performance symbol 8R ("8" symbol) is moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG2 and returned to the original stop position. Further, the medium effect symbol 8C ("2" symbol) is moved in the direction indicated by the arrow YG3 and returned to the original stop position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(L), a variable display start effect is executed. The variable display start effect is a effect for starting variable display of effect symbols. The performance symbols are variably displayed in the variable area within the display screen 7a. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is variably displayed in the variable area 8LR, the middle effect symbol 8C is variably displayed in the variable area 8CR, and the right effect symbol 8R is variably displayed in the variable area 8RR.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the frame-out variation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 69 to 71, a frame-out effect in which at least part of the effect symbols are framed out from the display screen, and after the frame-out effect, the variable display of the effect symbols is started. A variable display start effect is executed. According to this configuration, since the variation starts after the performance pattern is out of the frame, the player can be visually entertained by the novel performance that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
69(B)(C), (H) to (K), FIGS. 70(B)(C), (H)(I), FIGS. 71(B)(C), and FIG. 71(H) ( The frame-out effect of I) corresponds to the "frame-out effect", and FIGS. 69(D) to (F), (L), FIGS. The variable display start effect of L) corresponds to the "variable display start effect", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "effect executing means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, after the frame-out effect and before the variable display start effect, the area of the effect symbol area that is framed out is larger than that in the frame-out effect. Perform a large large area frame-out rendition. According to this configuration, since the large-area frame-out effect is executed following the frame-out effect, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel effect, and the interest can be improved. can.
70(D), (J), (K), and FIGS. 71(D) and (J) correspond to the "large area frame-out effect".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the frame-out effect or during the large area frame-out effect, the display color of at least a part of the effect pattern is changed (see FIG. 69(J), FIG. 70 (J), FIG. 71 (J)), and a color restoration effect (FIGS. 69 (K), 70 (K)) for returning the display color of the effect pattern changed by the color change effect to the original display color. , According to this configuration, in addition to the frame-out effect and the large-area frame-out effect, the display color of the effect pattern changes, so that the effect becomes even more novel, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest is improved. can be achieved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the frame-out effect, the effect pattern is framed out in the direction intersecting the variation direction HD of the effect pattern (Fig. 69 (C), (I) to (K), Fig. 70 (C ), (I)). According to this configuration, since the performance pattern is framed out in a direction different from the changing direction of the performance pattern, the player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. can be done.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the frame-out effect, the effect symbols are framed out in the direction opposite to the variation direction HD of the effect symbols (FIGS. 69(I) to (K), FIG. 70(I)). According to this configuration, since the performance pattern is framed out in a direction different from the changing direction of the performance pattern, the player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. can be done.

[Modification]
A modified example of the frame-out variation effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, in the frame-out effect, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R move apart in the left-right direction, and the middle effect symbol 8C moves upward. On the other hand, the direction of movement is not particularly limited because at least a part of the production pattern should be out of the frame. For example, the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R may move in the same direction while maintaining a relative positional relationship, and at least one of the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R may be framed out.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, a color change effect is executed to change the display color of at least a part of the effect pattern (FIGS. 69(J), 70(J), and 71(J)). On the other hand, it may be configured to be able to execute a mode change effect that changes the mode of at least a part of the effect pattern. In addition to the mode change effect, the configuration may be such that the mode return effect for returning the mode changed by the mode change effect to the original mode can be executed. The change in mode here is, for example, a change in at least one of the shape, size, direction, and transparency (darkness) of the production pattern.

[Modification 3]
The frame-out effect of the above-described embodiment has a configuration in which the frame-out is performed by moving the effect pattern. On the other hand, it may be configured to frame out by enlarging the production pattern. At this time, at least one of the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be enlarged, or the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be set as a set of production patterns. It may be configured to expand the effect pattern of. Further, when a plurality of performance symbols are stopped and displayed in the changing direction, all of the performance symbols displayed on the display screen 7a may be enlarged.

[Modification 4]
The frame-out effects and the large-area frame-out effects of the above-described embodiments have a configuration in which a portion of the effect pattern is framed out. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the entire production pattern is framed out.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, in the color change effect, the display color of the effect pattern is changed from white to red. On the other hand, for example, the display color of the performance symbol may be determined from among a plurality of display color candidates according to the degree of expectation for the big winning game. For example, as the degree of expectation increases, the display colors may be selected in the order of blue, green, purple, red, gold, and rainbow.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine,
An effect executing means capable of executing a frame-out effect of causing at least part of the effect pattern to be framed out from the display screen, and a variable display start effect of starting the variable display of the effect pattern after the frame-out effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
After the frame-out effect and before the variable display start effect, the effect executing means executes a large area frame-out effect in which a larger area is framed out than the area of the effect pattern as compared with the frame-out effect. it is possible to
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2,
The effect executing means, during the large area frame-out effect,
a color change effect that changes the display color of at least part of the effect pattern;
a color return effect for restoring the display color of the effect pattern changed by the color change effect to the original display color,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-3,
In the frame-out effect, the effect executing means causes the effect pattern to be framed out in a direction intersecting with the direction of variation of the effect pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-3,
In the frame-out effect, the effect executing means causes the effect pattern to be framed out in a direction opposite to the direction in which the effect pattern fluctuates.
A gaming machine characterized by:

72 to 74, the effect symbol mode changing effects A to C will be described below. 72 to 74, various movable accessories, various decorative members, and various background images arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing. FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the production pattern mode change production A, FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the production pattern mode change production B, and FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the production pattern mode change production C. It is a diagram.

In this production pattern mode change production, when the production pattern variation production (variation display) is started, the production pattern mode is changed to various modes until it is stopped and displayed. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the effect pattern mode change effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

Here, the performance symbols, reserved icons, etc. will be briefly explained first, and then the performance symbol mode change performance A, the performance symbol mode change performance B, and the performance symbol mode change performance C will be explained in order.

[Direction pattern]
First, the production pattern will be briefly explained. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern (symbol: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode. In the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design, each performance design is a number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → The reels are rotated in the order of number "7"→number "8"→number "9"→number "1"→number "2"→ . Note that the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9", except the number "7", all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. In this way, each production pattern is mainly designed in one of bright red, bright green, and bright blue. Further, since the number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) each have a color, for example, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are aligned with the same number pattern, and are temporarily stopped and displayed. is formed, and then the effect is developed, the more the number of times the player experiences the effect that is developed via the reach, the more the color of the temporarily stopped number pattern and the effect that is developed. , the player himself/herself can obtain an opportunity to discover the relationship (regularity) between . As a result, the number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) each have a color, which contributes to the enhancement of interest.

When the variable production (variable display) of the production pattern is started, the production patterns stopped and displayed at the stop position all at once (simultaneously) toward the lower side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "fluctuation direction"). While the speed is gradually increased from the low speed, the display mode changes from the opaque state to the translucent state at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent production pattern that is changing at high speed. The performance pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed temporarily and then stopped). In addition, in the temporary stop display state, the production pattern is displayed in a display mode in which the reflected light reflected by the production pattern rotates clockwise along the outline of the production pattern at the stop position, and then rotates clockwise. When the reflected light stops and disappears, it becomes a stopped display state.

In addition, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, as described above, the effect pattern stopped and displayed at the stop position all at once (simultaneously) gradually from low speed toward the variable direction (that is, downward) The display mode changed from an opaque state to a translucent state at high speed while increasing the speed. However, when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R move toward the fluctuation direction (that is, downward), the left production pattern 8L first moves by a predetermined distance (for example, 5 mm), then the middle The production pattern 8C moves by a predetermined distance (for example, 5 mm), and finally the right production pattern 8R moves by a prescribed distance (for example, 5 mm). It is also possible to adopt a display mode that changes at high speed.

The composition of the performance symbols in the performance symbol mode change performance A and the composition of the performance symbols in the performance symbol mode change performance B and the performance pattern mode change performance C are different. First, in the structure of the effect pattern in the effect symbol mode change effect B and the effect symbol mode change effect C, the three-dimensional image of the coin shape, the numbers "1" to "9", which are the above-mentioned number patterns, and the character It is composed of a first element consisting of characters A to I, which are symbols of . The pattern of the character is a stereoscopic image, and the image is arranged so as to fit within the outer shape of a coin. The numbers are three-dimensional images, and part of the numbers is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image. It is arranged in front of the character's pattern and united, and the number pattern covers at least a part of the character's pattern. The production pattern is a pattern of a number, and a pattern of a character corresponding to the pattern of the number is attached. The number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) are configured with different character patterns having multiple colors (full colors), respectively, and the character patterns are displayed large as the main effect pattern. be. Therefore, the size of the number design is smaller than the size of the character design attached to the number design.

As for the performance design, the character A is attached to the number "1", the character B is attached to the number "2", the character C is attached to the number "3", and the character D is attached to the number "4". , the number "5" is assigned the character E, the number "6" is assigned the character F, the number "7" is assigned the character G, the number "8" is assigned the character H, A character I is attached to the number "9", and a pattern of a different character having a plurality of colors (full color) is attached to each pattern of the number. For example, the character A may be attached to the numbers "1" and the numbers "7" and overlapped, and the character C may be attached to the numbers "3" and the numbers "8" and overlapped. In this case, the number "7" is a character A whose display mode is different from the character A attached to the number "1", and the number "8" is displayed differently from the character C attached to the number "3". Assume that a character C is in a mode.

On the other hand, in the composition of the effect pattern in the effect pattern mode change effect A, it is composed of the second element consisting only of the numbers "1" to "9" which are the above-described number patterns. The number pattern is a three-dimensional image, and the size (vertical size) of the number pattern is that of the coin-shaped three-dimensional image, which is the production pattern in the production pattern mode change production B and the production pattern mode change production C. It is almost the same as the size (size in the vertical direction).

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a, variations of the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ corresponding to the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R, respectively. A sub-variation area is provided in which an effect (variation display) is started. Due to the variation (variation with respect to the variation icon 9C), when the variation performance (variation display) of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area, a small left At the same time when the variable performance (variable display) of the production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ is started, and the left production pattern 8L, the medium production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed. , the corresponding small left effect symbol 8LZ, small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and small right effect symbol 8RZ are all stopped and displayed. The small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are the small number patterns of the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R, and are stopped. The small left effect pattern 8LZ displayed has the same color as the number pattern of the stopped left effect pattern 8L, and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ that is stopped is the same as that of the middle effect pattern 8C that is stopped. The number patterns and colors are the same, and the stop-displayed small right effect pattern 8RZ has the same number pattern and color as the stop-displayed right effect pattern 8R. In this way, each small production pattern is mainly designed in one of bright red, bright green, and bright blue.

The small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ are different from the variable effect (variable display) of the above-described effect symbols, and the reels are not rotated. At the display position of the left effect pattern 8LZ, the display position of the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the display position of the small right effect pattern 8RZ, the number patterns (symbol: number "1" to number "9") appear and are updated. It is a display mode that changes at high speed by being changed.

The small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, and the production pattern (that is, the right production pattern 8R), various effect images, and other various images do not hinder visibility.

A state in which one or more of the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the corresponding small production patterns (for example, even if the left production design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left production design 8LZ and the right production design 8R corresponding to the left production design 8L are temporarily stopped. Even if it is displayed, the right performance symbol 8R and the corresponding small right performance symbol 8RZ) are all kept in a variable performance (variable display) state. In addition, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and become misaligned, the small left effect pattern 8LZ and the small left effect pattern 8LZ are displayed. A medium performance pattern 8CZ and a small right performance pattern 8RZ are stop-displayed as the same patterns as the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R. In addition, when the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the same symbols win, the small left performance symbol 8LZ and the small left performance symbol 8LZ are displayed. A medium performance pattern 8CZ and a small right performance pattern 8RZ are stop-displayed together in the same pattern as each of the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R.

In addition, in the production pattern mode change productions A to C, when the production pattern variation production (variation display) is started, the production pattern mode is changed to various modes until it is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, small left production pattern 8LZ, small middle production pattern 8CZ, small right production pattern 8RZ fluctuation production (variation display) (hereinafter referred to as "small production pattern fluctuation production (variation display)") ) is started, the above-mentioned performance symbols change to various modes in the state of temporary stop display, but the small performance symbols are in the middle of a variable performance (variation display), and the small left There is no temporary stop display in the production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ. That is, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ never change in the temporary stop display like the above effect symbols.

Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed in the same pattern, and the same pattern is a number "1" having a bright green color and a bright blue color. number "2" with bright green, number "3" with bright blue, number "4" with bright blue, number "5" with bright green, number "6" with bright blue, number "8" with bright blue , the number "9" having a bright green color, the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability-high base state), whereas the same pattern is bright red. , the game state after the big hit is a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state). It should be noted that the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed in the same pattern, and in addition to the number "7" in which the same pattern has a bright red color, the number In the case of "3", the gaming state after the jackpot may be a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state). In this case, let the number "3", like the number "7", have a bright red color.

[Hold icon, etc.]
Next, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B will be explained. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position (on the white rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . A first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation in the area to the left of the variable display position, and a second reserved display area is provided as the second special figure reservation in the area to the right of the variable display position. It is In the first pending display area, four pending icons 9A can be displayed linearly in a row, and up to four pending icons 9A can be stocked. The first pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first pending icon 9A, the second pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is the third pending icon. 9A, and the farthest pending icon 9A from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9A. In the second pending display area, four pending icons 9B can be displayed linearly in a row, and a maximum of four pending icons 9B can be stocked. The first pending icon 9B closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first pending icon 9B, the second pending icon 9B to the variable icon 9C is called the second pending icon 9B, and the third pending icon 9B to the variable icon 9C is the third pending icon. 9B, and the farthest pending icon 9B from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9B. In the present embodiment, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B can suggest winning expectation by color, and the winning expectation increases in the order of white→blue→green→red→yellow (gold). . Therefore, the player has a high interest in the variable icon 9C and the suspended icons 9A and 9B.

[Production pattern mode change production A]
Next, the production pattern mode change production A will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A, and a game is played by hitting to the left. 1 pending icon 9A is determined and displayed. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. When the variable performance (variation display) of the performance design is started, the left performance design 8L, the middle performance design 8C, and the right performance design 8R are gradually increased in speed from a low speed toward the normal fluctuation direction, and the opaque state is translucent. state, and the display mode changes at high speed. At this time, a variable performance (variable display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. During this change, three game balls enter the first starting port 20, and are determined by the look-ahead as the first white reservation icon 9A, the second white reservation icon 9A, and the third white reservation icon 9A. Is displayed. As a result, there are three reserved icons 9A stocked.

After that, first, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green, then the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3" having bright green, and finally the middle effect pattern 8C is displayed. A bright blue numeral "2" is displayed temporarily, and then, as shown in FIG. 72(A), the display screen 7a is arranged in a line in the left-right direction with a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line. In this state, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern, and are stopped and displayed, a failure is confirmed, and the variation (variation with respect to the white variation icon 9C) is completed. The left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R which are stopped and displayed are displayed in the first mode in which no protruding portion that expands outward is formed in a part of the number pattern. It is

At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright blue. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with a number "3" having a bright green color. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. At this time, a variable performance (variable display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. When the white first suspension icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variation icon 9C, the white third suspension icon 9A and the white second suspension icon 9A both move to the right and become the white second suspension icon. The pending icon 9A and the first white pending icon 9A are displayed, and two reserved pending icons 9A are present.

The left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are produced in the state of being the first mode in which no protruding portion that expands toward the outside is formed in a part of the number pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 72(C), the left effect pattern 8L decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and a bright green color is displayed. The left effect symbol 8L with the number "5" is enlarged and displayed for a predetermined period (about 1 second) and temporarily stopped. At this time, a projecting portion 8Lf that expands toward the outside is formed at the upper right end of the bright green number "5" which is the left effect symbol 8L, changing to the second mode. That is, the left effect symbol 8L has a projecting portion 8Lf that expands outward when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. In the temporary stop display, the temporary stop display is changed from the first mode to the second mode in which the protrusion 8Lf is formed at the upper right end of the bright green number "5".

During this variation, two game balls enter the first starting port 20, and are determined and displayed as the white third reservation icon 9A and the white fourth reservation icon 9A by prefetching. As a result, the holding icon 9</b>A is stocked and presents four, so that the tank is full, and the player stops operating the handle 60 .

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIG. ), the left effect symbol 8L of the second mode, in which the protrusion 8Lf is formed on the upper right end of the bright green number "5", is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). At this time, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are in the middle production (variation display).

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIG. ' is formed at the right end of the central portion of ', and a projecting portion 8Lf that expands toward the outside is formed to change to the third mode. That is, when the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, first, from the first mode in which the projecting portion 8Lf that expands toward the outside is not formed at the upper right end of the bright green number "5", After changing to the second mode in which the projecting portion 8Lf is formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having a bright green color different from the first mode, further, from this second mode, the bright green color different from the second mode The third It's changing in form. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production A, as the third mode, a projecting part 8Lf that expands toward the outside is formed at the right end of the central part of the bright green number "5". Different from the second mode, the above-described first mode in which the protrusion 8Lf that expands toward the outside is not formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having bright green (that is, the protrusion 8Lf is bright green) It is good also as the 1st aspect which is not formed in the number "5" which has at all).

The protrusion 8Lf formed at the upper right end of the bright green number "5", which is the left effect pattern 8L, disappears, and the bright green number "5" is expanded toward the outside at the center right end. When the protruding portion 8Lf is formed and changed to the third mode, the right production pattern 8R then decelerates and changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and the right production pattern of the number "6" having bright blue color. 8R is enlarged and displayed for a predetermined period (about 1 second) and temporarily stopped. At this time, a projecting portion 8Rf that expands outward is formed at the upper right end of the bright blue number "6", which is the right effect symbol 8R, to change to the second mode. In other words, the right effect pattern 8R has a projecting portion 8Rf that expands outward when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. In the temporary stop display, the temporary stop display is changed from the first mode to the second mode in which the projection 8Rf is formed at the upper right end of the number "6" having bright blue color, which is different from the first mode.

After a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIG. ), the right effect symbol 8R of the second mode in which the protrusion 8Rf is formed on the upper right end of the bright blue number "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). At this time, the middle production pattern 8C is in the middle production (variation display).

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIG. ' is formed at the right end of the central portion thereof to form a projecting portion 8Rf that expands toward the outside to change to the third mode. That is, when the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, first, from the first mode in which the projecting portion 8Rf that expands toward the outside is not formed at the upper right end of the bright blue number "6", After changing to the second mode in which the projecting portion 8Rf is formed at the upper right end of the number "6" having a bright blue color different from the first mode, further from this second mode, the bright blue color different from the second mode The projection 8Rf formed at the upper right end of the number "6" having a color disappears, and a projection 8Rf is formed at the right end of the central part of the number "6" having a bright blue color and expands toward the outside. It's changing in form. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production A, as the third mode, a projecting part 8Rf that expands toward the outside is formed at the right end of the central part of the bright blue number "6". Different from the second mode, the above-described first mode in which the projecting portion 8Rf that expands outward is not formed at the upper right end of the number "6" having bright blue color (that is, the projecting portion 8Rf is bright blue) It is good also as the 1st aspect which is not formed in the number "6" which has at all).

The projection 8Rf formed at the upper right end of the bright blue number "6", which is the right production pattern 8R, disappears, and the bright blue number "6" is expanded toward the outside at the central right end. When the projecting portion 8Rf is formed and changed to the third mode, finally, the middle effect pattern 8C slows down and changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and the middle effect pattern of the number "7" having bright red color. 8C is enlarged and displayed for a predetermined period (about 1 second) and temporarily stopped. At this time, a projecting portion 8Cf that expands toward the outside is formed at the upper left end of the bright red number "7" which is the medium effect symbol 8C, changing to the second mode. That is, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the medium effect pattern 8C is formed with a projecting portion 8Cf that expands toward the outside at the upper left end of the bright red number "7". In the temporary stop display, the temporary stop display is changed from the first mode to the second mode in which the protrusion 8Cf is formed at the upper left end of the numeral "7" having bright red, which is different from the first mode.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIG. ), the medium effect symbol 8C of the second mode, in which the protrusion 8Cf is formed on the upper left end of the bright red number "7", is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second).

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIG. ' is formed at the right end of the central portion of ', and a projecting portion 8Cf that expands toward the outside is formed to change to the third mode. That is, when the medium effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, first, from the first mode in which the projecting portion 8Cf that expands toward the outside is not formed at the upper left end of the bright red number "7", the After changing to the second mode in which the projecting portion 8Cf is formed at the upper left end of the number "7" having a bright red color different from the first mode, further from this second mode, the bright red color different from the second mode The projection 8Cf formed at the upper left end of the number "7" having a red color disappears, and a projection 8Cf that expands outward is formed at the center right end of the number "7" having a bright red color. It's changing in form. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production A, as the third mode, a projecting part 8Cf that expands toward the outside is formed at the right end of the central part of the bright red number "7". Different from the second mode, the above-described first mode in which the projecting portion 8Cf that expands outward is not formed at the upper left end of the number "7" having a bright red color (that is, the projecting portion 8Cf is bright red) It may be a first mode in which the number "7" is not formed at all.

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all changed to the third mode, and the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is used as the center line in the horizontal direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (J), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R all shift from the third mode to the first mode ( At the same time), the symbols do not align to the same pattern, the symbols are stopped, the failure is confirmed, and the variation (variation with respect to the white variation icon 9C) ends. In other words, even if the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are changed to a variable effect (variable display) and changed from the first mode to another mode (second mode, and third mode), the game is stopped. By the time it is displayed, it returns to the original first mode.

At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "5" having bright green, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright red. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with a number "6" having a bright blue color. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and changes to the green variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 72(K), the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. At this time, a variable performance (variable display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. When the first suspension icon 9A in white moves to the variable display position and changes to the variation icon 9C in green, the fourth suspension icon 9A in white to the second suspension icon 9A in white all move to the right and change to the second suspension icon in white. 3 pending icon 9A, white second pending icon 9A, white first pending icon 9A, and three reserved pending icons 9A exist.

In this variation, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same number pattern to form a ready-to-win state. The change from the first mode to the third mode of the left production pattern 8L and the change from the first mode to the third mode of the right production pattern 8R until reach is formed are shown in FIGS. Since this is the same as F), detailed description is omitted here.

When the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed changes to the third mode, the right effect symbol 8R changes from the first mode to the second mode, then changes to the third mode, and the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect change. In the state where the pattern 8R has changed to the third mode, as described above, the protrusions 8Lf and 8Rf are formed at the right end of the central portion of the bright green number "5" so as to swell toward the outside. It's becoming When the right performance pattern 8R changes to the third mode and a predetermined time (approximately 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. An animation moving image that becomes a fourth mode in which a part of is enlarged is started.

Specifically, for example, the protruding portion 8Lf moves around in the bright green number "5", which is the left effect pattern 8L, and part of the bright green number "5", which is the left effect pattern 8L, becomes larger. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L is changed from the third mode in which the projecting part 8Lf that expands toward the outside is formed at the right end of the central part of the number "5" having bright green color. The part 8Lf moves around in the bright green number "5" and changes to a fourth mode in which a part of the bright green number "5" becomes larger.

In addition, in the right production pattern 8R, like the left production pattern 8L, the projecting portion 8Rf moves around within the bright green number "5" which is the right production pattern 8R, and the bright green number "5" which is the right production pattern 8R is displayed. A part of 5" becomes large. As a result, the right effect pattern 8R is changed from the third mode in which the projecting part 8Rf that expands toward the outside is formed at the right end of the central part of the bright green number "5". The part 8Rf moves around within the bright green number "5" and changes to a fourth mode in which part of the bright green number "5" becomes larger.

The animation animation is started, and when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2.5 seconds) elapses, the animation animation ends, and as shown in FIG. A projecting portion 8Lf that expands outward is formed at the left end of the central portion to change to the fifth aspect. That is, when the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, first, from the first mode in which the projecting portion 8Lf that expands toward the outside is not formed at the upper right end of the bright green number "5", After changing to the second mode in which the projecting portion 8Lf is formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having a bright green color different from the first mode, further, from this second mode, the bright green color different from the second mode The third mode, and then an animation movie is started in Reach, and from this third mode, the protruding part 8Lf moves around in bright green, which is different from the third mode, within the number "5" having a bright green color. part of the number "5" changes to a fourth mode in which the number "5" becomes larger, and then the animation movie ends, so that the number "5" having a bright green color different from the fourth mode changes from this fourth mode is changed to a fifth mode in which a protruding portion 8Lf that expands outward is formed at the left end of the central portion of the . In addition, in the production pattern mode change production A, as the fifth mode, a projecting part 8Lf that expands toward the outside is formed at the left end of the central part of the bright green number "5". Different from the fourth mode, the above-described first mode in which the projecting portion 8Lf that expands toward the outside is not formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having bright green (that is, the projecting portion 8Lf is bright green) It is good also as the 1st aspect which is not formed in the number "5" which has at all).

In addition, the right production pattern 8R, like the left production pattern 8L, has a protrusion 8Rf that expands toward the outside at the left end of the central part of the number "5" having a bright green color, and changes to the fifth mode. ing. That is, when the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, first, from the first mode in which the projecting portion 8Rf that expands toward the outside is not formed at the upper right end of the bright green number "5", After changing to the second mode in which the protrusion 8Rf is formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having a bright green color different from the first mode, further from this second mode, the bright green color different from the second mode The protrusion 8Rf formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having a color disappears, and a protrusion 8Rf is formed at the right end of the central portion of the number "5" having a bright green color and expands toward the outside. mode, and then an animation movie is started in Reach, and furthermore, from this third mode, the protruding part 8Rf, which is different from the third mode, moves around within the number "5" having a bright green color. Part of the number "5" having a bright green color changes to a fourth mode in which the number "5" becomes larger, and then the animation movie ends. It is changed to a fifth mode in which a projecting portion 8Rf that expands toward the outside is formed at the left end of the central portion of the number "5". In addition, in the production pattern mode change production A, as the fifth mode, a projecting portion 8Rf that expands toward the outside is formed at the left end of the central part of the bright green number "5". Different from the fourth mode, the above-described first mode in which the projecting portion 8Rf that expands toward the outside is not formed at the upper right end of the number "5" having bright green (that is, the projecting portion 8Rf is bright green) It is good also as the 1st aspect which is not formed in the number "5" which has at all).

In addition, similarly to the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R, the middle effect pattern 8C is formed with a projecting portion 8Cf that expands toward the outside at the left end of the central portion of the bright blue number "4". It has changed to 5 modes. It should be noted that the bright blue number "4", which is the medium effect symbol 8C, was displayed for the first time in FIG. 72(M) because the reach was formed. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production A, as the fifth mode, a projecting part 8Cf that expands toward the outside is formed at the left end of the central part of the number "4" having a bright blue color. The first mode, which is different from the fourth mode, does not have the projecting portion 8Cf that expands toward the outside at the upper right end of the number "4" having bright blue color (that is, the number "4" having the projecting portion 8Cf having bright blue color. 4" is not formed at all).

Here, for example, when the number "4" having a bright blue color is formed by the left effect pattern 8L and the reach is formed, when the temporary stop display is performed, the upper right end of the number "4" having a bright blue color is first extended to the outside. A change from the first mode in which the protruding part 8Lf that expands toward is not formed to the second mode in which the protruding part 8Lf is formed at the upper right end of the number "4" having a bright blue color, which is different from the first mode. After that, from this second mode, the projecting part 8Lf formed at the upper right end of the bright blue number "4", which is different from the second mode, disappears, and the bright blue number "4" is displayed at the center. The third aspect is changed to the third aspect in which the projecting portion 8Lf that expands toward the outside is formed at the right end of the part, and then the animation movie is started in the reach. The projecting portion 8Lf moves around in the bright blue number "4" to change a part of the bright blue number "4" to a larger size, and then the animation movie ends. Furthermore, this fourth mode is changed to a fifth mode in which a projecting portion 8Lf that expands toward the outside is formed at the left end of the central portion of the bright blue number "4", which is different from the fourth mode. . In addition, as the fifth mode, the protruding part 8Lf that expands toward the outside is formed at the left end of the central part of the bright blue number "4". Different from the above-described first mode in which the projecting portion 8Rf that expands toward the outside is not formed at the upper right end of the number "4" having a bright blue color (that is, the projecting portion 8Cf is a number having a bright blue color " 4" is not formed at all).

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all changed to the fifth mode, and the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is used as the center line in the left and right direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (N), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R all go from the fifth mode to the first mode all at once ( At the same time), the symbols do not align to the same pattern, the symbols are stopped, the failure is confirmed, and the variation (variation with respect to the green variation icon 9C) ends. In other words, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are variable production (variation display), and the first mode to other modes (second mode, third mode, fourth mode, and fifth mode) ), it returns to the original first mode before the stop display.

At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "5" having bright green, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright blue. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with a number "5" having a bright green color. Along with this, the green variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. At this time, a variable performance (variable display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small medium performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. When the white first suspension icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variation icon 9C, the white third suspension icon 9A to the white second suspension icon 9A move to the right to become the white second suspension icon. The icon 9A becomes the white first pending icon 9A, and two reserved pending icons 9A are present.

After that, when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are fixed. When the performance patterns 8R are stop-displayed together in the same pattern, the win is confirmed, the opening of the big win is started, and then the big win game in which the profit is given to the player is started.

[Production pattern mode change production B]
Next, the production pattern mode change production B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A, and a game is played by hitting to the left. 1 pending icon 9A is determined and displayed. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. When the variable performance (variation display) of the performance design is started, the left performance design 8L, the middle performance design 8C, and the right performance design 8R are gradually increased in speed from a low speed toward the normal fluctuation direction, and the opaque state is translucent. state, and the display mode changes at high speed. At this time, a variable performance (variable display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. During this change, three game balls enter the first starting port 20, and are determined by the look-ahead as the first white reservation icon 9A, the second white reservation icon 9A, and the third white reservation icon 9A. Is displayed. As a result, there are three reserved icons 9A stocked.

After that, first, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a three-dimensional coin-shaped image in which the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color and the pattern 8Lb of the character A are attached, and then the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in a bright red color. A three-dimensional coin-shaped image having a number "7" symbol 8Ra and a character G symbol 8Rb is temporarily stopped and displayed, and finally, a medium effect symbol 8C is bright green and a number "5" symbol 8Ca with a character E. After that, as shown in FIG. 73(A), as shown in FIG. 8L of the left production pattern, 8C of the middle production pattern, and 8R of the right production pattern are not arranged in the same pattern in the state where they are aligned in a row, and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the fluctuation (fluctuation with respect to the white fluctuation icon 9C) finish. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R which are stopped and displayed are displayed in the first mode in which both arms of the character of each effect symbol are put down.

At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright green. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with a number "7" having a bright red color. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the blue variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. At this time, a variable performance (variable display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the blue variable icon 9C, the white third pending icon 9A and the white second pending icon 9A both move to the right and become the white second pending icon. The pending icon 9A and the first white pending icon 9A are displayed, and two reserved pending icons 9A are present.

The left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are in the first state in which the characters of each effect pattern have their arms lowered, and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 73(C), first, the left effect pattern 8L decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and the left effect pattern 8L changes to a number "5" having a bright green color. A coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which a symbol 8Lb of a character E is attached to a symbol 8La is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). At this time, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is changed to the second mode which is extended upward. That is, when the left effect pattern 8L starts the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect pattern 8L is not extended upward, and both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are stretched. In the temporary stop display, the first mode is changed to the second mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E with the left effect symbol 8L is extended upward, which is different from the first mode. At this time, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are in the middle production (variation display).

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIG. 73(D), the right arm 8Lba of the character E with the left effect pattern 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward to change to the third mode. is doing. That is, when the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect symbol 8L is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are put down in the first mode. , different from the first mode, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is changed to the second mode, and then further from this second mode, the left production pattern different from the second mode The right arm 8Lba of the character E of 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is extended upward to change to the third mode. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production B, as the third mode, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward, but the third mode is the second mode. is different, the first mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E with the left production pattern 8L is not extended upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered (that is, the character E with the left production pattern 8L A first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are lowered may be used.

When the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is extended upward, the third mode is changed. A coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which the right performance pattern 8R is a pattern 8Ra of the number "5" having a bright green color and a pattern 8Rb of the character E is temporarily stopped for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). . At this time, the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect symbol 8R is changed to the second mode in which it is extended upward. That is, when the variable effect (variable display) of the right effect pattern 8R is started, the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are stretched. In the temporary stop display, the first mode is changed to the second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E with the right effect symbol 8R is extended upward, which is different from the first mode. At this time, the middle production pattern 8C is in the middle production (variation display).

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIG. 73(E), the right arm 8Rba of the character E with the right effect pattern 8R is put down and the left arm 8Rba is extended upwards to change to the third mode. is doing. That is, when the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, first, the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect symbol 8R is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are put down in the first mode. , different from the first mode, after changing to the second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right production pattern 8R is extended upward, further from this second mode, the right production pattern different from the second mode The character E of 8R has its right arm 8Rba lowered and its left arm 8Rba extended upwards in the third mode. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production B, as the third mode, the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right production pattern 8R is put down and the left arm 8Rba is stretched upward, but the third mode is the second mode. is different, the first mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E with the right production pattern 8R is not extended upward, both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered (that is, the character E with the right production pattern 8R A first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered may be used.

As a result, when both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the third mode and reach is formed, as shown in FIG. An animation moving image that is the fourth mode that jumps out toward the target is started.

More specifically, the character E with the left effect pattern 8L moves out of the coin-shaped frame and moves both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) while growing upward outside the frame and jumps out. As a result, the left production pattern 8L changes from the third mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is lowered and the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward, and the left production pattern 8L, which is different from the third mode, is changed. Character E moves from inside the coin-shaped frame to the outside of the frame, moving both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) and jumping out, changing to the fourth mode.

In addition, in the right production pattern 8R, as in the left production pattern 8L, the character E of the right production pattern 8R expands from the inside of the coin-shaped frame toward the outside of the frame while moving both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba). It becomes an action to move and jump out. As a result, the right effect pattern 8R changes from the third mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is lowered and the left arm 8Rba is extended upward, and the right effect pattern 8R, which is different from the third mode, is changed. The character E moves from inside the coin-shaped frame to the outside of the frame, moving both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) and jumping out, changing to the fourth mode.

The animation animation is started, and when a predetermined period (for example, 2.5 seconds) elapses, the animation animation ends, and as shown in FIG. The right arm 8Lba) is changed to the fifth mode that is extended upward. That is, when the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect symbol 8L is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are put down in the first mode. , different from the first mode, to the second mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is extended upward, and further from this second mode, the left production pattern different from the second mode The right arm 8Lba of the character E of 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is extended upward to change to the third mode. Different from the mode, the character E with the left effect pattern 8L changes to the fourth mode in which the character E moves from the inside of the coin-shaped frame to the outside of the frame and moves both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) to jump out. After that, when the animation movie ends, the fourth mode changes to a fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are extended upward, which is different from the fourth mode. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production B, both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are stretched upward as the fifth mode, but the fifth mode is different from the fourth mode, the above-described left production pattern 8L Character E's right arm 8Lba is not extended upward, and both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are lowered in the first mode (that is, both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) of character E with left production pattern 8L It is good also as the 1st aspect put down below).

Also, in the right effect pattern 8R, the character E in the right effect pattern 8R is changed to the fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are stretched upward, similarly to the left effect pattern 8L. That is, when the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, first, the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect symbol 8R is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are put down in the first mode. , different from the first mode, after changing to the second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right production pattern 8R is extended upward, further from this second mode, the right production pattern different from the second mode The right arm 8Rba of the character E of 8R is put down and the left arm 8Rba is extended upward to change to the third mode. Different from the mode, the character E with the right effect pattern 8R changes to a fourth mode in which the character E moves from the inside of the coin-shaped frame to the outside of the frame and moves both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) to jump out. After that, when the animation movie ends, the fourth mode changes to a fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are stretched upward, which is different from the fourth mode. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production B, both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are stretched upward as the fifth mode, but the fifth mode is different from the fourth mode. Character E's right arm 8Rba is not stretched upward, the first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered (that is, both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) of character E of right production pattern 8R It is good also as the 1st aspect put down below).

In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which the pattern 8Ca of the number "6" having a bright blue color and the pattern 8Lb of the character F are attached. Both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are changed to the fifth mode which is extended upward. In the fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are stretched upward, the character F holds the sword with both hands and raises the sword. Note that the coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which the pattern 8Ca of the number "6" having a bright blue color, which is the medium effect pattern 8C, and the pattern 8Lb of the character F are attached is formed in FIG. was displayed for the first time. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production B, as the fifth mode, a coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which the pattern 8Ca of the number "6" having a bright blue color and the pattern 8Lb of the character F is added, and the left production pattern 8L and the right Both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are stretched upward in the same way as the production pattern 8R, but the fifth mode is different from the fourth mode, and the right arm 8Cba of the character F in the middle production pattern 8C is stretched upward. No, the first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are lowered and the sword is lowered (that is, both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) of character F of medium production pattern 8C are lowered) aspect).

Here, for example, when the coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which the pattern 8Ca of the number "6" having a bright blue color and the pattern 8Lb of the character F is added to the pattern 8Lb of the character F forms a ready-to-win with the left effect pattern 8L, a temporary stop display is performed. Then, first, the right arm 8Lba of the character F of the left production pattern 8L is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are lowered and the sword is lowered. , the right arm 8Lba of the character F with the left effect pattern 8L is extended upwards, and the sword is held with the right hand and raised to the second mode. The right arm 8Lba of the character F of the production pattern 8L is put down, and the left arm 8Lba is extended upward, and the left hand holds the sword and raises it to change to the third mode. By doing so, from this third mode, the character F with the left effect symbol 8L, which is different from the third mode, expands from the inside of the coin-shaped frame toward the outside of the frame while increasing both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba). After that, when the animation movie ends, both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are stretched upward from this 4th mode, which is different from the 4th mode. It changes to the 5th mode where he holds the sword with both hands and raises it. In addition, as the fifth aspect, both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are stretched upward and the sword is held with both hands and raised, but as described above, the fifth aspect is different from the fourth aspect. The first mode in which the right arm 8Cba of the character F of the medium production pattern 8C described above is not extended upward, and both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are lowered and the sword is lowered (that is, the character of the medium production pattern 8C A first mode in which both arms of F (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are lowered) may also be used.

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all changed to the fifth mode, and the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is used as the center line in the left and right direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 73(H), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R all go from the fifth mode to the first mode all at once ( At the same time), the symbols do not align to the same pattern, the symbols are stopped, the failure is confirmed, and the variation (variation with respect to the green variation icon 9C) ends. In other words, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are variable production (variation display), and the first mode to other modes (second mode, third mode, fourth mode, and fifth mode) ), it returns to the original first mode before the stop display.

At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "5" having bright green, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright blue. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with a number "5" having a bright green color. Along with this, the blue variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. At this time, a variable performance (variable display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. When the white first suspension icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variation icon 9C, the white second suspension icon 9A moves to the right and becomes the white first suspension icon 9A, and is stocked. It will be in the state where one icon 9A exists.

After that, when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are fixed. When the performance patterns 8R are stop-displayed together in the same pattern, the win is confirmed, the opening of the big win is started, and then the big win game in which the profit is given to the player is started.

[Production pattern mode change production C]
Next, the effect symbol mode change effect C will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A, and a game is played by hitting to the left. 1 pending icon 9A is determined and displayed. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. When the variable performance (variation display) of the performance design is started, the left performance design 8L, the middle performance design 8C, and the right performance design 8R are gradually increased in speed from a low speed toward the normal fluctuation direction, and the opaque state is translucent. state, and the display mode changes at high speed. At this time, a variable performance (variable display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. During this fluctuation, three game balls enter the first start port 20, and by looking ahead, the yellow (gold) first reservation icon 9A, the white second reservation icon 9A, and the white third reservation icon 9A determined and displayed. As a result, there are three reserved icons 9A stocked. The player stops operating the handle 60 in order to pay attention (concentrate) on the progress of the future performance when the first pending icon 9A turns yellow (gold).

After that, first, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a three-dimensional coin-shaped image in which the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color and the pattern 8Lb of the character A are attached, and then the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in a bright red color. A three-dimensional coin-shaped image having a number "7" symbol 8Ra and a character G symbol 8Rb is temporarily stopped and displayed, and finally, a medium effect symbol 8C is bright green and a number "5" symbol 8Ca with a character E. After that, as shown in FIG. 74(A), as shown in FIG. 8L of the left production pattern, 8C of the middle production pattern, and 8R of the right production pattern are not arranged in the same pattern in the state where they are aligned in a row, and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, and the fluctuation (fluctuation with respect to the white fluctuation icon 9C) finish. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R which are stopped and displayed are displayed in the first mode in which both arms of the character of each effect symbol are put down.

At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright green. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with a number "7" having a bright red color. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the yellow (gold) first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. be done. At this time, a variable performance (variable display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. When the yellow (gold) first suspension icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variation icon 9C, the white third suspension icon 9A and the white second suspension icon 9A both move to the right. As a result, the second reserved icon 9A in white and the first reserved icon 9A in white are obtained, and two reserved reserved icons 9A are present.

The left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are in the first state in which the characters of each effect pattern have their arms lowered, and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 74(C), first, the left effect pattern 8L decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and the left effect pattern 8L changes to the number "5" having a bright green color. A three-dimensional coin-shaped image in which a symbol 8Lb of a character E is attached to a symbol 8La is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). At this time, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is changed to the second mode which is extended upward. That is, when the variable effect (variable display) of the left effect symbol 8L is started, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect symbol 8L is not extended upward, and both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are extended. In the temporary stop display, the first mode is changed to the second mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E with the left effect symbol 8L is extended upward, which is different from the first mode. At this time, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are in the middle production (variation display).

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIG. 74(D), the right arm 8Lba of the character E with the left effect pattern 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward to change to the third mode. is doing. That is, when the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect symbol 8L is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are put down in the first mode. , different from the first mode, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is changed to the second mode, and then further from this second mode, the left production pattern different from the second mode The right arm 8Lba of the character E of 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is extended upward to change to the third mode. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production B, as the third mode, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward, but the third mode is the second mode. is different, the first mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E with the left production pattern 8L is not extended upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered (that is, the character E with the left production pattern 8L A first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are lowered may be used.

When the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is extended upward, the third mode is changed. A coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which the right performance pattern 8R is a pattern 8Ra of the number "5" having a bright green color and a pattern 8Rb of the character E is temporarily stopped for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). . At this time, the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect symbol 8R is changed to the second mode in which it is extended upward. That is, when the variable effect (variable display) of the right effect pattern 8R is started, the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are stretched. In the temporary stop display, the first mode is changed to the second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E with the right effect symbol 8R is extended upward, which is different from the first mode. At this time, the middle production pattern 8C is in the middle production (variation display).

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed, as shown in FIG. 74(E), the right arm 8Rba of the character E with the right effect pattern 8R is put down and the left arm 8Rba is extended upwards to change to the third mode. is doing. That is, when the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, first, the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect symbol 8R is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are put down in the first mode. , different from the first mode, after changing to the second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right production pattern 8R is extended upward, further from this second mode, the right production pattern different from the second mode The character E of 8R has its right arm 8Rba lowered and its left arm 8Rba extended upwards, changing to the third mode. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production C, as the third mode, the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right production pattern 8R is put down and the left arm 8Rba is extended upward, but the third mode is the second mode. is different, the first mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E with the right production pattern 8R is not extended upward, both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered (that is, the character E with the right production pattern 8R A first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered may be used.

As a result, when both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the third mode and reach is formed, as shown in FIG. Animation movie 1 is started as a fourth mode that jumps out toward.

More specifically, the character E with the left effect pattern 8L moves out of the coin-shaped frame and moves both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) while growing upward outside the frame and jumps out. As a result, the left production pattern 8L changes from the third mode in which the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is lowered and the left arm 8Lba is stretched upward, and the left production pattern 8L, which is different from the third mode, is changed. Character E moves from inside the coin-shaped frame to the outside of the frame, moving both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) and jumping out, changing to the fourth mode.

In addition, in the right production pattern 8R, as in the left production pattern 8L, the character E of the right production pattern 8R expands from the inside of the coin-shaped frame toward the outside of the frame while moving both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba). It becomes an action to move and jump out. As a result, the right effect pattern 8R changes from the third mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R is lowered and the left arm 8Rba is extended upward, and the right effect pattern 8R, which is different from the third mode, is changed. The character E moves from inside the coin-shaped frame to the outside of the frame, moving both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) and jumping out, changing to the fourth mode.

Animation movie 1 is started, and when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2.5 seconds) elapses, animation movie 1 ends, and as shown in FIG. 8R, the variable display position, the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, the white first pending icon 9A, and the white second pending icon 9A are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the battle effect is started.

In this battle effect, a full-color ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, a full-color enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. , which is a super reach effect (SP reach effect) in which the degree of expectation for winning is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a win.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(H), in the battle presentation, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the ally character CRA is largely displayed on the left side of the center of the display screen 7a, and the message "Victory" is displayed. The image MS1 is displayed large on the right side of the center of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(I), the friend character CRA and the message image MS1 are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R appear (redisplayed). ), and the temporary stop display is displayed.

At this time, the character E of the left effect symbol 8L has changed to the fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are stretched upward. That is, when the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left effect symbol 8L is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are put down in the first mode. , different from the first mode, the right arm 8Lba of the character E of the left production pattern 8L is changed to the second mode, and then further from this second mode, the left production pattern different from the second mode The right arm 8Lba of the character E of 8L is put down and the left arm 8Lba is extended upward to change to the third mode. To the fourth mode, which is different from the third mode, in which the character E with the left effect pattern 8L moves out of the coin-shaped frame and moves both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) while growing upward and out of the frame. After that, when animation movie 1 ends, the fourth mode changes to a fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are stretched upward, which is different from the fourth mode. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production C, both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are stretched upward as the fifth mode, but the fifth mode is different from the fourth mode, the above-described left production pattern 8L Character E's right arm 8Lba is not extended upward, and both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) are lowered in the first mode (that is, both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) of character E with left production pattern 8L It is good also as the 1st aspect put down below).

Also, in the right effect pattern 8R, the character E in the right effect pattern 8R is changed to the fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are stretched upward, similarly to the left effect pattern 8L. That is, when the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, first, the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right effect symbol 8R is not stretched upward, and both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are put down in the first mode. , different from the first mode, after changing to the second mode in which the right arm 8Rba of the character E of the right production pattern 8R is extended upward, further from this second mode, the right production pattern different from the second mode The right arm 8Rba of the character E of 8R is put down and the left arm 8Rba is extended upward to change to the third mode. To the fourth mode, which is different from the third mode, in which the character E with the right effect pattern 8R moves from the inside of the coin-shaped frame to the outside of the frame and moves both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) to jump out. After that, when animation movie 1 ends, the fourth mode changes to a fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are stretched upward, which is different from the fourth mode. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production C, both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are stretched upward as the fifth mode, but the fifth mode is different from the fourth mode. Character E's right arm 8Rba is not stretched upward, the first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered (that is, both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) of character E of right production pattern 8R It is good also as the 1st aspect put down below).

In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which the pattern 8Ra of the number "5" having a bright green color and the pattern 8Rb of the character E are attached. The character E of the medium effect pattern 8C has changed to the fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are stretched upward. In addition, in the production pattern mode change production C, both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are stretched upward as the fifth mode, but the fifth mode is different from the fourth mode. The right arm 8Cba is not extended upward, the first mode in which both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) are lowered (that is, both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) of character E in medium production pattern 8C are lowered or the first mode).

As a result, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all changed to the fifth mode, and the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is used as the center line in the left and right direction. 74(J), a temporary stop display is displayed in a state in which the players are lined up in a row, and then the promotion effect is started as shown in FIG. 74(J).

In this promotion effect, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently temporarily stopped and displayed, are changed from the symbol of the number "5" having bright green to the symbol of a predetermined number (for example, "7"). (symbol)), the game state after the jackpot becomes a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state). In addition, when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the number "5" having a bright green color, the gaming state after the big hit is a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability-high base state). Become.

When the promotion effect is started, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed, move all at once (simultaneously) downward while remaining in the state of the fifth mode. , each subsequent effect pattern enters from the upper side of the display screen 7a in the first mode (the first mode in which each character's arms are lowered), resulting in a so-called full-rotation display mode.

After that, the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a shown in FIG. (here, number "5" with bright green color) and the same character (here, character E) are temporarily stopped again in the fifth mode, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74(L). Then, an animation moving image 2 is started in which the character of the effect pattern moves upward from the coin-shaped frame while moving both arms and corners to jump out.

The animated movie 2 is different from the animated movie 1 described above in that an action of closing and opening the corners of the character is added to the animated movie 1 described above.

Specifically, the character E with the left effect pattern 8L moves both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) while growing from inside the coin-shaped frame toward the outside of the frame, and jumps out. It also performs the action of closing and opening the corners of the In other words, the character E with the left effect pattern 8L moves out of the coin-shaped frame and moves both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) while growing upward, and furthermore, the corners of the character E are closed. It is open. As a result, the left effect pattern 8L is changed from the fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) of the character E of the left effect pattern 8L are stretched upward, and the character E of the left effect pattern 8L different from the fifth mode. Moves both arms (left arm 8Lba, right arm 8Lba) and jumps out while increasing from inside the coin-shaped frame toward the outside of the frame, and also performs the action of closing and opening the corners of character E. It has changed to the sixth mode.

In addition, in the right production pattern 8R, as in the left production pattern 8L, the character E of the right production pattern 8R expands from the inside of the coin-shaped frame toward the outside of the frame while moving both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba). The action of moving and popping out is performed, and the action of closing and opening the corners of the character E is also performed. In other words, the character E with the right effect pattern 8R jumps out by moving both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) while increasing in size from the inside of the coin-shaped frame toward the outside of the frame, and further, the corners of the character E are closed. It is open. As a result, the right effect pattern 8R is changed from the fifth mode in which both arms (the left arm 8Rba, the right arm 8Rba) of the character E of the right effect pattern 8R are extended upward, and the character E of the right effect pattern 8R different from the fifth mode. Moves both arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) and jumps out while increasing from inside the coin-shaped frame to outside the frame, and also performs actions to close and open the corners of character E. It has changed to the sixth mode.

In addition, in the medium production pattern 8C, as with the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R, the character E of the medium production pattern 8C expands from the inside of the coin-shaped frame toward the outside of the frame while both arms (left arm 8Cba) , move the right arm 8Cba) to jump out, and also perform the action of closing and opening the corners of the character E. In other words, the character E of the medium effect pattern 8C jumps out by moving both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) while growing from the inside of the coin-shaped frame toward the outside of the frame, and further, the corners of the character E are closed. It is open. As a result, the medium production pattern 8C is changed from the fifth mode in which both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) of the character E of the medium production pattern 8C are stretched upward, to the character E of the medium production pattern 8C, which is different from the fifth mode. Moves both arms (left arm 8Cba, right arm 8Cba) and jumps out while increasing from inside the coin-shaped frame toward the outside of the frame, and also performs the action of closing and opening the corners of character E. It has changed to the sixth mode.

The animation movie 2 is started, and when a predetermined period (for example, 2.5 seconds) elapses, the animation movie 2 ends, and the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are simultaneously (at the same time) the first Returning to the mode (first mode in which character E's arms (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered), temporary stop display is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. A bright green number "5") and the same character (here, character E) are stopped and displayed together, and a win is confirmed.

At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "5" having bright green, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright green. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with the number "5" having bright green.

When the win is confirmed, as shown in FIG. 74(N), the opening of the big win is started, and the message image MS2 saying "big win" is displayed on the display screen 7a at the left-right center and above the message image MS2. A message image MS3 reading "Please hit right" is displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a, and a right hitting image MY with "Right hit" written in a right arrow image is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. . After that, a jackpot game is started in which a profit is awarded to the player.

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of the production pattern mode change production is shown.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and one of the plurality of types of images includes a left effect symbol 8L, a middle effect symbol 8C, and a right effect. A first production (production pattern) that is a production pattern such as a pattern 8R, and a production pattern such as a left production pattern 8L, a middle production pattern 8C, and a right production pattern 8R is changed in the first mode (variation display) (variation start) 72 (A) to (B) in the mode change effect A, for example, FIG. 73 (A) to (B) in the effect pattern mode change effect B, and in FIG. ) to (B)), and after the first production, the production patterns such as the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are changed from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode. In the second production to temporarily stop (production pattern mode change production A, for example, left production pattern 8L: Fig. 72 (B) to (D), right production pattern 8R: Fig. 72 (B) to (F), middle Production pattern 8C: Figure 72 (B) ~ (H), production pattern mode change production B, left production design 8L: Figure 73 (B) ~ (C), right production design 8R: Figure 73 (B) ~ (D) ), in the production design mode change production C, left production design 8L: Figure 74 (B) ~ (C), right production design 8R: Figure 73 (B) ~ (D)), and after the second production, left A third production that changes the production patterns such as the production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R from the second mode to the third mode different from the second mode and temporarily stops (in the production pattern mode change performance A , For example, left production design 8L: Figure 72 (D) ~ (I), right production design 8R: Figure 72 (F) ~ (I), middle production design 8C: Figure 72 (H) ~ (I), production design In mode change effect B, left effect pattern 8L: Figure 73 (C) ~ (E), right effect pattern 8R: Figure 73 (D) ~ (E), in effect pattern mode change effect C, left effect pattern 8L: Figure 74(C)-(E), right effect pattern 8R: FIG. 73(D)-(E)) can be executed. According to this configuration, when the variable performance (variable display) of the left performance symbols 8L, the middle performance symbols 8C, the right performance symbols 8R, etc. is started in the first mode (when the fluctuation starts), then the left performance symbols 8L. , Middle production pattern 8C, right production pattern 8R, etc. are changed from the first mode to a second mode different from the first mode and temporarily stopped, such left production pattern 8L, From the state in which the production patterns such as the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are changed from the first mode to the second mode and temporarily stopped, they are further changed to the third mode different from the second mode and temporarily stopped. Since it is possible to provide a game player with an unprecedented novel performance of changing the mode of temporary stop, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern is difficult to become monotonous, contributing to the improvement of the motivation of the player. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the third effect in the effect symbol mode change effect A of FIG. 72, the effect symbol mode change effect B of FIG. 73, and the effect symbol mode change effect C of FIG. 74, the left effect symbol 8L , Middle production pattern 8C, right production pattern 8R, etc., are predetermined patterns and become ready state (for example, number "5" pattern), the production pattern in the ready state is changed from the third mode to the third mode. It is possible to execute a fourth effect that changes to the fourth mode and temporarily stops (in the effect pattern mode change effect A, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R: Fig. 72 (L) In the animation moving image, the effect pattern mode change effect B, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R: Fig. 73(F) In the animation video, the effect pattern mode change effect C, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R: Fig. 74 Animation movie 1) of (F). With this configuration, the production pattern in the ready-to-win state is changed from the third mode to the fourth mode different from the third mode and temporarily stopped, so that the production pattern in the ready-to-win state is temporarily stopped. , when the variable effect (variable display) is started in the first mode, it temporarily stops in the second mode, and the modes change one after another in the order of the third mode and the fourth mode. Various changes in the mode of the temporarily stopped production pattern contribute to directing the player's line of sight to the temporarily stopped production pattern and suppressing the decrease in interest in the variable production (variable display) of the production pattern. can.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the fourth effect in the effect symbol mode change effect A of FIG. 72, the effect symbol mode change effect B of FIG. 73, and the effect symbol mode change effect C of FIG. It is possible to execute a fifth effect in which the pattern is changed from the fourth mode to a fifth mode different from the fourth mode and temporarily stopped (in the effect pattern mode change effect A, all the design patterns: Fig. 72 (M), in the production design mode change performance B, all production designs: Fig. 73 (G), and in the production design mode change production C, all production designs: Fig. 74 (I)). With this configuration, not only the temporary stop before reaching the ready-to-reach state, but also when the ready-to-reach state occurs, the performance pattern in the ready-to-reach state is changed from the fourth mode to the fifth mode different from the fourth mode. By doing so, before and after reaching the ready-to-win state, it is possible to provide variations in the form of the temporary stop of the performance symbols. In addition, it is also possible to arouse the player's expectation that a super reach (SP reach) may develop after this due to such a change in the mode of the temporary stop of the effect symbols.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode in the performance symbol mode change performance A of FIG. 72, the performance symbol mode change performance B of FIG. 73, and the performance symbol mode change performance C of FIG. At least one of the aspect, the fourth aspect, and the fifth aspect is an animated moving image. Specifically, in the effect symbol mode change effect A, the fourth mode in FIG. 72 (L) is an animation animation, and in the effect symbol mode change effect B, the fourth mode in FIG. , In the production pattern mode change production C, the fourth mode in FIG. According to this configuration, since the mode in which the performance symbols are temporarily stopped includes the mode in which the animation video is displayed, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the variable performance (variation display) of the performance symbols. . Also, the player's experience of the animation movie can arouse the player's expectation that it may develop into super reach (SP reach).

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the production pattern mode change production is shown.
[Modification 1]
72 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the performance symbol mode change performance A in FIG. 73, in the performance symbol mode change performance B in FIG. 73, and in the performance symbol mode change performance C in FIG. It was based on what was done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 210 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the fourth mode of the effect symbol mode change effect A of FIG. 72(L) is an animation video, and the fourth mode of the effect symbol mode change effect B of FIG. It is a moving image, and the fourth mode of the effect pattern mode change effect C in FIG. However, among the first, second, third, fourth, and fifth modes, the second, third, and fifth modes may be animation videos instead of still images. By doing so, it is possible to increase variations in the manner in which the performance symbols are temporarily stopped. As a result, a mode in which the performance pattern is temporarily stopped includes a mode in which it is an animation moving image, so that the monotony of the variable performance (variation display) of the performance pattern can be reduced.

[Modification 3]
74 in the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the promotion effect is started, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all changed to the fifth mode. In contrast to this state, each subsequent effect pattern enters from the upper side of the display screen 7a in the first mode (the first mode in which each character's arms are lowered), like a so-called full rotation. It was a display mode. However, although the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are all changed to the fifth mode before the promotion production is started, the left production pattern 8L is at the timing when the promotion production is started. , The middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R all change to the first mode, move downward while maintaining this first mode, and each subsequent production pattern is in the first mode (both arms of each character down It is also possible to enter from the upper side of the display screen 7a as it is in the lowered first mode), so as to make a display mode such as a so-called full rotation. In this way, before and after the promotion effect starts, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R can all be daringly changed, and the player can receive a predetermined number pattern (for example, "7" pattern), it is possible to arouse the expectation that the game state after the big win may become a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state).

[Modification 4]
73 and C in FIG. 74 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a three-dimensional coin-shaped image and a number " 1” to the number “9” and characters A to I, which are the designs of the characters. The pattern of the character is a stereoscopic image, and the image is arranged so as to fit within the outer shape of a coin. However, the image of the character may be arranged so as to fit within the coin-shaped outer shape, but the character may be arranged as an image in which a part of the character protrudes from the coin-shaped outer shape. In this case, in the animation moving image (animation moving image 1), the character of the production pattern moves downward so as to fit within the coin-shaped frame. Even with this configuration, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols without changing the fact that the performance symbols temporarily stopped include the aspect of the animated moving image. . Also, the player's experience of the animation movie can arouse the player's expectation that it may develop into super reach (SP reach).

[Modification 5]
72 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect symbol mode change effect B of FIG. 73, and the effect symbol mode change effect C of FIG. A temporary stop sound may be played from the speaker 67 when the game is temporarily stopped in the third mode, the fourth mode, and the fifth mode (the sixth mode in the performance symbol mode change performance C of FIG. 74). The temporary stop sound may be one type of sound commonly used in the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, and sixth modes, or may be one type of sound commonly used in the first, second, and sixth modes. Dedicated sounds corresponding to the third mode, the fourth mode, the fifth mode, and the sixth mode, respectively, may also be used. In this way, it is possible to notify the player that the production pattern has temporarily stopped by using the temporary stop sound, and the temporary stop sound is mixed with other sound effects and production sounds depending on the timing of the progress of the production, so that the game can be played. It may be received as a different impression by the person, and it may be possible to add a sense of incongruity to the production. The player can assume this sense of incongruity without permission and think about the regularity of the degree of expectation for winning, which contributes to the improvement of the interest in the game.

[Modification 6]
72 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect symbol mode change effect B of FIG. 73, and the effect symbol mode change effect C of FIG. When changing to a mode, the posture may not be simply switched and displayed, but may be a continuous action that smoothly connects from the first mode to the second mode. Also, when the production design changes from the second mode to the third mode, when the production design changes from the third mode to the fourth mode, and when the production design changes from the fourth mode to the fifth mode, the performance design changes from the first mode to the second mode, the posture is not simply switched and displayed, but from the second mode to the third mode, from the third mode to the fourth mode, from the fourth mode It is good also as a continuous operation|movement which connects smoothly to a 5th aspect. Of course, even when the performance pattern changes from the fifth mode to the first mode, the attitude may not be simply switched and displayed, but may be a continuous action that smoothly connects from the fifth mode to the first mode.

[Modification 7]
72 in the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect symbol mode change effect B of FIG. 73, and the effect symbol mode change effect C of FIG. 74, the effect symbol change effect (variation display) starts. and the temporary stop display was always changed from the first mode to the other mode. However, in the variation of the production pattern composed of the second element consisting only of the numbers "1" to "9" which are the above-mentioned number patterns, in the specific fluctuation, the production pattern mode of FIG. As in the change effect A, a protrusion is formed in a part of the production pattern to change, whereas in normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation) that is not a specific fluctuation, no protrusion is formed in the production pattern. It may be set so that it does not change at all times. In addition, the variation of the effect pattern composed of the first element consisting of the numbers "1" to "9" which are the patterns of the numbers described above and the characters A to I which are the patterns of the characters, In specific fluctuations, as in the production pattern mode change production B in FIG. 73 and the production pattern mode change production C in FIG. On the other hand, in a normal variation (normal variation) which is not a specific variation, the attitude of the character in the production pattern does not change at all, and the character in the production pattern may not move. In this way, when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the effect symbol mode change effect A of FIG. 72, the effect symbol mode change effect B of FIG. 73, and the effect symbol mode change effect C of FIG. Since there are cases where it is performed and cases where it is not performed, it is possible to make it difficult for the variation performance (variation display) of the performance pattern to become monotonous.

[Modification 8]
74(M) in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the animation moving image 2 is started, and when a predetermined period (for example, 2.5 seconds) elapses, the animation moving image 2 ends and left The production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R all (at the same time) return to the first mode (the first mode in which both arms of the character E (left arm 8Rba, right arm 8Rba) are lowered) and temporarily stop. After that, the same pattern (here, the number "5" in bright green) and the same character (here, character E) were stopped and displayed together, and the win was confirmed. However, all of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (that is, the character pattern, the number pattern, and the coin shape itself) all at once (simultaneously) are colored in a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow). (Gold)) to start animation animation 2, stop emitting light in a predetermined color before animation animation 2 ends, and when animation animation 2 ends, left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C, The right effect symbols 8R may all return to the first mode (the first mode in which both arms (the left arm 8Rba and the right arm 8Rba) of the character E are lowered) to be temporarily stopped. In this way, the effect pattern itself becomes an effect image for the animation moving image 2, and the animation moving image 2 can be made stand out from other images.

[Modification 9]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect symbol mode change effect A of FIG. 72, the effect symbol mode change effect B of FIG. 73, and the effect symbol mode change effect C of FIG. Alternatively, other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A8-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a production design,
A first effect that starts to change the effect pattern in a first mode;
After the first effect, a second effect of changing the effect pattern from the first mode to a second mode different from the first mode and temporarily stopping;
After the second production, a third production in which the production pattern is changed from the second mode to a third mode different from the second mode and temporarily stopped;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-1,
After the third performance, when the performance pattern is in a ready state with a predetermined pattern, the performance pattern in the ready state is changed from the third mode to a fourth mode different from the third mode and temporarily stopped. Execute the fourth production to
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-2,
After the fourth production, the production pattern in the ready-to-reach state is changed from the fourth mode to a fifth mode different from the fourth mode and temporarily stopped to perform a fifth performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-3,
At least one of the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, the fourth aspect, and the fifth aspect is an animation video,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol arrangement change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. FIG. This decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern arrangement change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Decorative pattern arrangement change effect A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol arrangement change effect A. FIG. The decorative pattern arrangement change effect is a effect in which the relative positional relationship between two decorative patterns included in one decorative pattern pattern row changes. 75(A) to (F) show a first example of the decorative pattern array change effect A, and FIGS. 75(G) to (L) show a second example of the decorative pattern array change effect A. there is

In the first example of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high speed variation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" (ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a plurality of numerical patterns are visibly displayed in a vertical line in each pattern arrangement (pattern row), and are framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a and displayed downward. , and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 75(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are decelerated all at once and changed from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Become. After that, as shown in FIG. 75(C), the left decorative pattern 8L among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is accelerated and displayed again at a high speed, and each pattern becomes difficult to see. is executed.

In the decorative pattern arrangement change effect, as shown in FIG. 75(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in high speed fluctuation display, then decelerates again and is displayed in low speed fluctuation display. becomes visible. At this time, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L is reversed from before the high-speed fluctuation display. That is, in FIG. 75(B), the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. They are arranged downward in the order of "987654321" (descending order). In other words, the relative positional relationship between the two number patterns included in the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L changes (replaces). For example, "4" and "5" change (replace) "4" relatively above "5" to relatively lower side. In addition, the relative positional relationship of the three number designs included in the design row of the left decorative design 8L changes. For example, "3", "4" and "5" change their relative positional relationship with other two number patterns. When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the expectation of winning becomes higher than when it is not executed. Following the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R is accelerated and the high-speed fluctuation display is again performed, each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the decorative pattern arrangement change performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(E), the right decorative symbol 8R decelerates again and changes from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number patterns can be visually recognized in the pattern row. At this time, the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R is reversed from before the high-speed fluctuation display. That is, in FIG. 75(C), the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. They are arranged downward in the order of "987654321" (descending order). When the decorative pattern arrangement change performance is executed for the right decorative pattern 8R following the left decorative pattern 8L, the expectation of winning is further increased compared to the case where it is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(E), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in the reversed (descending order) pattern arrangement from the low-speed variable display to the stationary display. Here, in the stationary displayed pattern row (left decorative pattern 8L), three numerical patterns are displayed along the changing direction (vertical direction), and the display of other consecutive numerical patterns above and below disappears. That is, here, only the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle and lower stages (here, the upper stage is "5↓↓", the middle stage is "4↓↓", and the lower stage is "3↓↓"). . At the time of stop display, the display of the number patterns other than the three number patterns in the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed as they are without disappearing. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain low-speed variable display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number patterns can be visually recognized in each pattern row. The right decorative pattern 8R is in a state in which the pattern arrangement is reversed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(F), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a state where the pattern arrangement is reversed (descending order) from the low-speed variable display to the stationary display. Here, in the stopped-displayed pattern row (right decorative pattern 8R), three numerical patterns are displayed along the changing direction (vertical direction), and the display of other consecutive numerical patterns above and below disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at three positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages (here, the upper stage "5 ↓ 7", the middle stage "4 ↓ 6", the lower stage "3 ↓ 5 ”). At the time of stop display, the display of the number patterns other than the three number patterns in the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed as they are without disappearing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed from the low-speed fluctuation display in the state that the pattern arrangement is arranged in ascending order from the top to the bottom. Here, in the statically displayed pattern row (middle decorative pattern 8C), three numeric patterns are displayed along the changing direction (vertical direction), and display of other consecutive numeric patterns above and below disappears. That is, here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped at the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages (here, the upper stage "517", the middle stage "426", and the lower stage "335"). ). Thus, here, in each pattern row of the left and right decorative patterns 8K, 8R among the pattern rows of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the relative positional relationship between the two number patterns included in each pattern row. changes, and the relative positional relationship of all the number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C does not change.

In the second example of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect A, FIG. 75(G) is executed after FIGS. 75(A) to 75(C) are executed. In FIG. 75(C), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is accelerated and displayed again at high speed fluctuation, each pattern becomes difficult to see, and the decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed. In FIG. 75(G), the speed is decelerated again and the variable display is made at a low speed, and a plurality of vertically arranged number patterns can be visually recognized in the pattern row. At this time, the relative positional relationship of the number patterns continues to change in part of the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L. Here, the number "6" in the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L becomes two number patterns "6" and "5". Further, the numeral patterns "6" and "5" move (rotate) in a circular motion, changing their positions relative to each other. The left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in this state. Two number patterns "6" and "5" are displayed while moving relative to each other in the middle stage of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed. When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the expectation of winning becomes higher than when it is not executed. Following the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R is accelerated and displayed again at a high speed, making each pattern difficult to see, and the decorative pattern arrangement change performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(H), the right decorative symbol 8R decelerates again and becomes a low-speed variable display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols can be visually recognized in the symbol row. At this time, the relative positional relationship of the number patterns continues to change in part of the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R. Here, the number "6" in the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes two number patterns "6" and "5". Further, the numeral patterns "6" and "5" move (rotate) in a circular motion, changing their positions relative to each other. The right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in this state. Two number patterns "6" and "5" are displayed while moving relative to each other in the middle row of the stopped right decorative pattern 8R. When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the expectation of winning becomes even higher than when it is not executed. Following the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C is accelerated and the high-speed fluctuation display is again performed, making each pattern difficult to see.

As shown in FIG. 75(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated again and becomes a low-speed variable display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number patterns can be visually recognized in the pattern row. At this time, the decorative pattern arrangement change effect is not performed, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of "123456789" from top to bottom (ascending order). Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C has "6" in the upper stage, "7" in the middle stage, and "8" in the lower stage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(J), a decorative design arrangement change effect is executed in the medium decorative design 8C which is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the display positions of "6" in the upper row and "7" in the middle row in the symbol row of the middle decorative symbols 8C that are stopped and displayed alternately. That is, the case where the upper row is "6" and the middle row is "7" and the case where the upper row is "7" and the middle row is "6" are alternately switched. That is, here, the relative positional relationship of the number designs of the middle decorative design 8C is alternately replaced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(J), the decorative design arrangement change effect is further executed for the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative right design 8R which are stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the lower stage of each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative right pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed, the number "7" becomes two number patterns "7" and "8". Further, the numeral patterns of "7" and "8" move (rotate) in a circular motion to change their positions relative to each other. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative right pattern 8R maintain the stop display in this state. When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the expectation of winning becomes even higher than when it is not executed. By this decorative pattern arrangement change effect, the lower stage of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative right pattern 8R becomes one of "888", "787", "887", and "788". After that, as shown in FIG. 75(L), one of the above four types is selected in the lower row of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative right pattern 8R (here, "888" is selected. ) is displayed, and the display of other symbols disappears.

[Decorative pattern arrangement change effect B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol arrangement change effect B. FIG. The decorative pattern arrangement change effect is a effect in which the relative positional relationship between two decorative patterns included in one decorative pattern pattern row changes. 76A to 76F show a first example of the decorative pattern array change effect B, and FIGS. 76G to 76L show a second example of the decorative pattern array change effect B. there is

In the first example of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a high speed variation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" (ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed variable display, as shown in FIG. 76(B), a plurality of numerical patterns are visibly arranged vertically in each pattern arrangement (pattern row), and are framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a and displayed downward. , and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 76(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are decelerated all at once and changed from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Become. After that, as shown in FIG. 76(C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as they are from the low-speed variable display in the state that the patterns are arranged (in ascending order). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the winning mode (winning pattern) of "666" on the middle effective line, and other number patterns "555" and "555" and " 777” is also displayed. Other numerical patterns that are continuous vertically may be displayed in a small size or may be displayed in a translucent manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(D), a decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed. Specifically, in the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, the pattern arrangement is switched to the reversed state. That is, in FIG. 76(C), the pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C was arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. They are arranged downward in the order of "987654321" (descending order). In other words, the relative positional relationship between the two number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes. For example, "5" and "6" change (replace) "5" relatively above "6" to relatively lower side. Also, the relative positional relationship of the three number designs included in the design row of the middle decorative design 8C changes. For example, "5", "6" and "7" change their relative positional relationship with the other two number patterns. When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the jackpot will be promoted becomes higher than when it is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(E), the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear, and a character image of "promotion", which is a promotion notification image, is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 76(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R that have been stopped are displayed again. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were "666" before the display disappeared, are now "777", and the promotion is notified. Also at this time, the pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C is reversed. Thus, here, in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C among the pattern rows of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the relative positional relationship between the two number patterns included in the pattern row changes. The relative positional relationship of all the number patterns included in each pattern row of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R does not change.

In the second example of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect B, FIG. 76(G) is executed after FIGS. 76(A) to 76(B) are executed. In FIG. 76(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as they are from the low-speed variable display in the state that the patterns are arranged (in ascending order). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed as the missing pattern of "258", and the other number patterns "147" and "369" which are continuous above and below this "258" are also displayed. Other numerical patterns that are continuous vertically may be displayed in a small size or may be displayed in a translucent manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(H), a decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed. Specifically, in the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, the pattern arrangement is switched to the reversed state. That is, in FIG. 76(G), the pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C was arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. They are arranged downward in the order of "987654321" (descending order). When this decorative pattern array change effect is executed, the expectation of a big win is higher than when it is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and the high-speed change display is started again. At this time, each pattern becomes difficult to visually recognize. Thereafter, the speed is decelerated again and the variable display is performed at a low speed, and a plurality of vertically arranged number patterns can be visually recognized in each pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. At this time, not only the middle decorative pattern 8C among the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, but also the right decorative pattern 8R is reversed in pattern arrangement. That is, in FIG. 76(H), the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. They are arranged downward in the order of "987654321" (descending order). By executing the decorative pattern arrangement change performance for the right decorative pattern 8R following the middle decorative pattern 8C, the degree of expectation for the big win is further increased compared to when it is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(K), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and the high-speed change display is started again. At this time, each pattern becomes difficult to visually recognize. Thereafter, the speed is decelerated again and the variable display is performed at a low speed, and a plurality of vertically arranged number patterns can be visually recognized in each pattern row.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed in the winning mode (winning symbols) of "777".

[Decorative pattern arrangement change effect C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol array change effect C. FIG. The decorative pattern arrangement change effect is a effect in which the relative positional relationship between two decorative patterns included in one decorative pattern pattern row changes. 77(A) to (F) show a first example of the decorative pattern array change effect C, and FIGS. 77(G) to (L) show a second example of the decorative pattern array change effect C. there is

In the first example of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" (ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a plurality of number patterns are visibly arranged vertically in each pattern arrangement (pattern row), and are framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a and displayed downward. , and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 77(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are decelerated all at once and changed from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Become. After that, as shown in FIGS. 77(C) and (D), the decorative designs 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed in the order of the left decorative design 8L, the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stop-displayed in order from the low-speed variable display in the state that the patterns are arranged (in ascending order). Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stop-displayed are displayed in two stages of "555" on the upper stage and "666" on the lower stage, and all of them are in a winning mode (winning symbols). Here, both the upper and lower lines are valid lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(E), a decorative symbol arrangement change effect is executed. Specifically, in the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, the pattern arrangement is switched to the reversed state. That is, in FIG. 77(D), the pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C was arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. They are arranged downward in the order of "987654321" (descending order). In other words, the relative positional relationship between the two number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes. For example, "6" is below "5" and changes (replaces) below "7". When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the jackpot will be promoted becomes higher than when it is not executed.

After that, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R disappears, and as shown in FIG. 77(F), the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed again. At this time, the lower row of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were "666" before the display disappeared, is now "777", and the promotion is reported. Also at this time, the pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C is reversed. Thus, here, in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C among the pattern rows of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the relative positional relationship between the two number patterns included in the pattern row changes. The relative positional relationship of all the number patterns included in each pattern row of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R does not change.

In the second example of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect C, after FIGS. 77(A)-77(B) are executed, FIGS. 77(G)-(H) are executed. In FIGS. 77(G) to (H), low-speed fluctuation display is performed in a state where the numbers of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are aligned (jackpot mode).

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are displayed in two stages of "555" on the upper stage and "666" on the lower stage, and all of them are winning symbols. Here, both the upper and lower lines are valid lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(J), a decorative symbol arrangement change effect is executed. Specifically, in the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, the pattern arrangement is switched to the reversed state. That is, in FIG. 77(I), the pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C was arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. They are arranged downward in the order of "987654321" (descending order). In other words, the relative positional relationship between the two number patterns included in the pattern row of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes. For example, "6" is below "5" and changes (replaces) below "7". When this decorative pattern arrangement change effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the jackpot will be promoted becomes higher than when it is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(K), a decorative pattern arrangement change effect is further executed. Specifically, not only the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, but also the right decorative pattern 8R is switched to a state in which the pattern arrangement is reversed. That is, in FIG. 77(J), the pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order (ascending order) of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, but in FIG. They are arranged downward in the order of "987654321" (descending order). In other words, the relative positional relationship between the two number patterns included in the pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R changes. For example, "6" is below "5" but changes below "7". By executing the decorative pattern arrangement change performance for the right decorative pattern 8R following the middle decorative pattern 8C, the degree of expectation for promotion of the big win is further increased compared to the case where it is not executed.

After that, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R disappears, and the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed again as shown in FIG. 77(L). At this time, the lower row of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were "666" before the display disappeared, is now "777", and the promotion is reported.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern arrangement change production will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying a symbol row in which a plurality of decorative symbols are arranged along the fluctuation direction on the display screen 7a. , the relative positional relationship between two decorative patterns included in one pattern row changes (for example, FIGS. 75(B) to (K), FIGS. 76(C) to (J), and FIG. 77(D) ~ (F), (I) ~ (K)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, in the above effect, the relative positional relationship between two decorative symbols included in one symbol row is switched (for example, FIG. 75(B) , (D), "4" and "5" of the left decorative pattern 8L, which was relatively above "5", are replaced relatively below). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, in the above effect, the relative positional relationship changes when two decorative symbols included in one symbol row are stopped ( For example, FIGS. 75(G)-(K), FIGS. 76(C)-(J), FIGS. 77(D)-(F), (I)-(K)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, in the above effect, when the decorative symbols are stopped in a winning mode, two decorative symbols included in one symbol row are displayed. The relative positional relationship changes (for example, FIGS. 76(C)-(F), FIGS. 77(D)-(F), (I)-(K)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the relative positional relationship between two decorative symbols included in one symbol row out of the plurality of symbol rows changes in the above effect. , the relative positional relationship of all decorative patterns contained in another one of the plurality of pattern rows does not change (for example, FIGS. 75(B)-(F), FIGS. 76(C)-( J), FIGS. 77(D)-(F), (I)-(K)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, in the above effect, the relative positional relationship of the three decorative symbols included in one symbol row changes (for example, FIG. 75 (B ) to (F), FIGS. 76(C) to (J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern arrangement change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The decorative pattern arrangement change effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the decorative pattern arrangement change production B of FIGS. 76(A) to (F), between the productions of FIGS. 76(B) and (C), the decorative pattern arrangement change production of FIGS. 77(G) to (H) C may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern arrangement change performances A to C, the decorative patterns are composed only of images representing numbers, but a part representing numbers and a decorative part representing characters or the like may be combined.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern arrangement change performances A to C, the effective line for notifying the success or failure of the decorative pattern is horizontal, but the effective line may be vertical or oblique.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
The display means is capable of executing an effect of displaying a pattern row in which a plurality of the decorative patterns are arranged along the variation direction,
In the production, the relative positional relationship between two decorative patterns included in one pattern row changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
In the production, the relative positional relationship between the two decorative patterns included in one pattern row is replaced.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
In the production, the relative positional relationship changes in a state in which the two decorative patterns included in one of the pattern rows are stationary.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3,
In the effect, the relative positional relationship between the two decorative patterns included in one of the pattern rows changes while the decorative patterns are stopped in a winning mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
a plurality of the symbol rows are displayed on the display means;
In the above performance,
A relative positional relationship between two decorative patterns included in one pattern row among the plurality of pattern rows changes,
The relative positional relationship of all decorative patterns included in another one of the plurality of pattern rows does not change,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
In the production, the relative positional relationship of the three decorative patterns included in one of the pattern rows changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

78 to 80, the effects A to C of partial display disappearance of decorative symbols will be described. This decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the partial display disappearance effect of the decorative pattern, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103, and the image display device An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7 or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol partial display disappearance effect A. FIG. The decorative pattern partial display disappearance production is a production in which the display of a part of the decorative patterns disappears and the decorative patterns in a state where the display of the part of the decorative patterns disappears is displayed. 78(A) to (F) show a first example of the partial decorative pattern display disappearance effect A, and FIGS. 78(G) to (J) show a second example of the decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect A 78(K) to (L) show a third example of the effect A of partial display disappearance of the decorative pattern.

In the first example of the decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with high speed fluctuation. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during low-speed variable display. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" (ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, each number in "123456789" is represented by 7 segments. Here, each of the seven segments is also called "upper horizontal", "middle horizontal", "lower horizontal", "upper right vertical", "lower right vertical", "upper left vertical", and "lower left vertical". "3" consists of "upper horizontal", "middle horizontal", "lower horizontal", "upper right vertical" and "lower right vertical". "2" consists of "upper horizontal", "middle horizontal", "lower horizontal", "upper right vertical", and "lower left vertical". "1" consists of "top right vertical" and "bottom left vertical". The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see during the high-speed fluctuation display shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a plurality of number patterns are visibly arranged vertically in each pattern arrangement (pattern row), and are framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a and displayed downward. , and frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 78(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are decelerated all at once and changed from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display. Become. After that, as shown in FIG. 78(C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped (temporarily stopped) in the form of "353" being lost (losing pattern).

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(D), a decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect is executed. Specifically, the display of the upper half portion of the number image "5" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that is still displayed disappears (disappears), and only the lower half portion is displayed. Specifically, of the 7 segments "upper horizontal", "middle horizontal", "lower horizontal", "upper left vertical", and "lower right vertical" of the 7 segments that make up "5", "upper horizontal" and "upper left vertical" disappear, The U-shaped parts of "middle horizontal", "lower horizontal", and "lower right vertical" remain. When this decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect is executed, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than when it is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(E), a new image is displayed in the upper half portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C, resulting in the number "3" as a whole. Specifically, "upper horizontal" and "upper right vertical" are newly displayed where "upper horizontal" and "upper left vertical" have disappeared. When newly displayed, it is displayed in a fade-in manner. The U-shaped portions of "middle horizontal", "lower horizontal", and "lower right vertical" are displayed continuously.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 78(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes "3" as a whole. That is, the display of a part of the number image "5" of the middle decorative pattern 8C disappears, and a new display appears in the part where the display disappears, so that the effect of changing to the number image "3" is executed. At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the content related to the changed number pattern by voice. Here, the message "It became 3 after the change" is issued. As a result, the jackpot pattern of "333" is obtained, and the jackpot is notified.

In the second example of the partial display disappearance effect A of the decorative pattern, FIG. 78(G) is executed after FIGS. 78(A) to 78(B) are executed. In FIG. 78(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped (temporarily stopped) in the mode of losing "941" (losing symbols).

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(H), a decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect is executed. Specifically, the display of the upper half of the number image of "941" which is still displayed disappears (disappears), and only the lower half is displayed. Specifically, of the seven segments "upper horizontal", "middle horizontal", "upper right vertical", "lower right vertical", and "upper left vertical", "upper horizontal", "middle horizontal" , ``Upper right vertical'' and ``Upper left vertical'' disappear, and ``Lower right vertical'' remains. Of the 7 segments "middle horizontal", "upper right vertical", "lower right vertical", and "upper left vertical" that make up "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, "middle horizontal", "upper right vertical", and "upper left vertical" disappear, and " Lower right vertical" remains. Of the seven segments "upper right vertical" and "lower right vertical" forming "1" of the right decorative pattern 8R, the "upper right vertical" disappears and the "lower right vertical" remains.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(I), new images are displayed in the upper half portions of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the number "7" is displayed as a whole. In particular,
"Upper row horizontal" and "upper right vertical" are newly displayed in the upper half of the disappearing decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. When newly displayed, it is displayed in a fade-in manner. The “lower right vertical” of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are continuously displayed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 78(J), each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes "7" as a whole. In other words, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed with a part of "941" disappearing, and a new display appears in the part where the display disappears, so that all of them are changed to the number image "7". be done. At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the content related to the changed number pattern by voice. Here, the message "It became 7 after the change" is issued. As a result, the jackpot pattern of "777" is obtained, and the jackpot is notified.

In the third example of the partial display disappearance effect A of the decorative pattern, FIG. 78(K) is executed after FIGS. 78(A) to 78(B) are executed. In FIG. 78(K), when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the low-speed variable display, the decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect is executed. Specifically, among the numerical images of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in low speed, ``1'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', ``8'', and ``9'' are displayed. , the display of the upper half of the numeric image disappears (disappears), and only the lower half is displayed. For "1", "4", "7", and "9", only "lower right vertical" remains in the lower half. For "3" and "5", the letters "middle horizontal," "lower horizontal," and "lower right vertical" remain in the lower half. ``6'' and ``8'' have ``middle horizontal'', ``lower horizontal'', ''lower left vertical'' and ``lower right vertical'' in the lower half.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(L), in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R, only the lower half of the numeric symbols are stopped (temporarily stopped). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in U-shapes of "middle horizontal", "lower horizontal", and "lower right vertical". After that, there are cases where "333" and "555" are winning symbols, and there are cases where "353" and "553" are losing symbols.

[Decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol partial display disappearance effect B. FIG. The decorative pattern partial display disappearance production is a production in which the display of a part of the decorative patterns disappears and the decorative patterns in a state where the display of the part of the decorative patterns disappears is displayed. FIGS. 79A to 79E show a first example of the partial display disappearance of the decorative pattern B, and FIGS. 79F to 79L show a second example of the partial display disappearance of the decorative pattern B. shows an example.

In the first example of the decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during the variable display. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a plurality of numerical patterns arranged vertically in each pattern arrangement (design row) can be visually recognized during the variable display. , is framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 79A, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" (ascending order) from top to bottom of the display screen 7a. there is Here, each number pattern of "123456789" includes a number image representing a number and a face image representing a face, and the number image is arranged at the position of the forehead of the face image. A face image is configured by combining a contour image representing the outline of the face and a parts image representing parts of the face such as the eyes and mouth. The contour image may be any image that can identify the inside and outside of the face image including the parts image. For example, the contour image may be a frame-like line, or may be a surface (area) represented in a predetermined color. The parts image may include a face surface image (skin partial image) expressed in a predetermined color in addition to the eyes and mouth.

Here, the contour image of the number patterns with the number images "1", "4" and "7" is "triangle", and the contour image of the number patterns with the number images "2", "5" and "8" is "rectangle". , and the outline image of the figure pattern of which the figure images are "3", "6", and "9" is "circle". In addition, the part images of the number patterns with the number images "1", "2", and "3" are "smiling faces", and the part images of the number patterns with the number images of "4", "5", and "6" are "surprised faces". , and the part image of the number pattern of which the number images are "7", "8", and "9" is the "glasses face". For example, the number pattern "1" has a "triangle" contour image and a "smile" part image.

As shown in FIG. 79(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped (temporarily stopped) in the mode of losing "123" (losing symbols).

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(C), a decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect is executed. Specifically, display of a part (contour image) of the numerical images and face images of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are still displayed disappears (disappears), and a part of the face image (parts image) disappears. is displayed. Here, the parts images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "smiling faces". After that, a game is started to determine whether or not the display is switched to another number pattern having the part image of the "smiling face" remaining. When this decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect is executed, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than when it is not executed.

FIG. 79(D) shows a case where a jackpot pattern is obtained thereafter. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a new number image and outline image are displayed while maintaining the display of the "smiling face" parts image. Here, the number image of "3" and the contour image of "circle" are newly displayed for all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the contents of the changed number pattern by voice. Here, the message "After the change, everyone has a circular outline and the number has become 333" is issued. As a result, the jackpot pattern of "333" is obtained, and the jackpot is announced.

FIG. 79(E) shows a case where the design becomes a losing pattern after that. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a new number image and outline image are displayed while maintaining the display of the "smiling face" parts image. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are newly displayed with the number image "2" and the outline image of "square", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with the number image "3" and the "circle". A new contour image is displayed. As a result, the symbol "232" is lost, and the loss is notified.

In the second example of the partial display disappearance effect B of the decorative pattern, FIG. 79(F) is executed after FIGS. 79(A) to 79(B) are executed. In FIG. 79(F), a decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect is executed. Specifically, display of a part (parts image) of the numerical images and face images of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are still displayed disappears (disappears), and part of the face image (contour image) disappears. is displayed. Here, the contour images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "triangle", "quadrilateral" and "circle". After that, a game is started to determine whether or not the display is switched to another number pattern having the remaining outline image. When this decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect is executed, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than when it is not executed. After that, there are cases where it becomes FIG. 79(G) and cases where it becomes FIG. 79(H).

After that, in the case of FIG. 79(G), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R maintain the display of the outline images of "triangle", "square", and "circle", and new number images and parts are added to each of them. An image is displayed. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the number image of "7" and the part image of "glasses face" are newly displayed, and in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the number image of "5" and the part image of "surprised face" are displayed. A parts image is newly displayed, and a number image of "3" and a parts image of "smile" are newly displayed on the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the contents of the changed number pattern by voice. Here, the message "After the change, the face becomes glasses, a surprised face, a smile, and the number becomes 753" is issued. As a result, the symbol "753" is lost, and the loss is reported.

After that, in the case of FIG. 79(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from displaying only the outline images of "triangle", "square" and "circle" to displaying only the outline images of "square". display. 79(I), FIG. 79(J), and FIG. 79(K).

FIG. 79(I) shows a case where a jackpot pattern is obtained thereafter. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, new number images and part images are displayed while maintaining the display of the "square" outline image. Here, the number image of "5" and the parts image of "surprised face" are newly displayed for all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the contents of the changed number pattern by voice. Here, the message ``After the change, everyone has a square outline and a surprised face, and the number has become 555,'' is issued. As a result, the jackpot pattern of "555" is obtained, and the jackpot is announced.

On the other hand, FIG. 79(J) shows a case where the design becomes a losing pattern after that. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, new number images and part images are displayed while maintaining the display of the "square" outline image. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is newly displayed with the number image of "2" and the part image of "smiling face", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is newly displayed with the number image of "8" and the part image of "glasses face". , and a number image of "5" and a parts image of a "surprised face" are newly displayed on the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the contents of the changed number pattern by voice. Here, the message ``After the change, everyone has a smile with a square outline, a face with glasses, and a surprised face, the number has become 285'' is issued. As a result, the symbol "285" is lost, and the loss is notified.

In FIG. 79(K), after that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from displaying only "square" outline images to displaying only "triangular" outline images. After that, there may be a case where the jackpot pattern shown in FIG. In FIG. 79(L), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed with new number images and part images while maintaining the display of the "triangle" contour image. Here, the number image of "1" and the parts image of "smile" are newly displayed for all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. As a result, the jackpot pattern of "111" is obtained, and the jackpot is announced. After FIG. 79(K), in the case of a lost pattern, a number image at least one of which is different from the others among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and a part image are newly displayed.

[Decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect C]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol partial display disappearance effect C. FIG. The decorative pattern partial display disappearance production is a production in which the display of a part of the decorative patterns disappears and the decorative patterns in a state where the display of the part of the decorative patterns disappears is displayed. 80(A) to (J) show a first example of the partial decorative pattern display disappearance effect C, and FIG. 80(K) shows a second example of the decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect C. there is FIG. 80(L) shows a third example of the effect C of partially displaying decorative symbols.

In the first example of the decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 80(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of number patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during the variable display. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward on the display screen 7a during the variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). In the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a plurality of numerical patterns arranged vertically in each pattern arrangement (design row) can be visually recognized. , is framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" (ascending order) from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. there is Here, each figure pattern of "123456789" includes a number image representing a number and a face image representing a face, and the number image is arranged at the position of the forehead of the face image. A face image is configured by combining a contour image representing the outline of the face and a parts image representing parts of the face such as the eyes and mouth. The contour image may be any image that can identify the inside and outside of the face image including the parts image. For example, the contour image may be a frame-like line, or may be a surface (area) represented in a predetermined color. The parts image may include a face surface image (skin partial image) expressed in a predetermined color in addition to the eyes and mouth.

Here, the contour image of the number patterns with the number images "1", "4" and "7" is "triangle", and the contour image of the number patterns with the number images "2", "5" and "8" is "rectangle". , and the outline image of the figure pattern of which the figure images are "3", "6", and "9" is "circle". In addition, the part images of the number patterns with the number images "1", "2", and "3" are "smiling faces", and the part images of the number patterns with the number images of "4", "5", and "6" are "surprised faces". , and the part image of the number pattern of which the number images are "7", "8", and "9" is the "glasses face". For example, the number pattern "1" has a "triangle" contour image and a "smile" part image.

As shown in FIG. 80(B), in a state where the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed, the decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect is executed. Specifically, the display of a part (parts image) of the numerical images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the face image that are being variably displayed disappears (disappears), and a part of the face image (contour image) disappears. is displayed. When this decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect is executed, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than when it is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 80(C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed all at once. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed with only outline images. Here, the outline images of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are "triangle", "quadrilateral", and "circle". After that, a game is started as to what the number patterns of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R will eventually become.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(D), the still displayed decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are newly displayed with the number image and the parts image while maintaining the display of the outline image. Here, the number image of "1" and the parts image of "smile" are newly displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, and the number image of "2" and the parts image of "smile" are newly displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C. A number image of "3" and a parts image of "smile" are newly displayed on the right decorative pattern 8R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(E), the display of the "smiling face" parts image disappears from each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the outline image and the number image remain. The numeric images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R remain unchanged as "1", "2", and "3".

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(F), an effect is executed in which the outline image changes. Here, the contour image of the left decorative design 8L changes from "triangle" to "circle", the contour image of the middle decorative design 8C changes from "square" to "circle", and the contour image of the right decorative design 8R changes. It remains "circular". The numeric images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R remain unchanged as "1", "2", and "3".

FIG. 80(G) shows a case where a winning pattern is obtained thereafter. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, parts images are newly displayed while the outline image of "circle" and the number image of "123" are maintained. Here, parts images of "smile" are newly displayed for each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. "123" is displayed even though the number image corresponding to the "smile" part image and the "circle" contour image is "3". At this time, the player can be pleased that the number images are all "3" because the "smiling" part image and the "circle" outline image are all there.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(H), the number image is switched from "123" to "333" corresponding to the changed post-parts image and outline image, and the winning mode (winning pattern) is established. At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the contents of the changed number pattern by voice. Here, the message ``After the change, everyone has become a smiling face with a circular outline, and the number has become 333,'' is issued.

FIG. 80(I) shows a case where the pattern becomes a losing pattern after that. For the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, parts images are newly displayed while the outline image of "circle" and the number image of "123" are maintained. Here, a part image of a "glasses face" is newly displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, a part image of a "smile" is newly displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C, and a part image of a "surprised face" is newly displayed in the right decorative pattern 8R. is newly displayed. Although the number image corresponding to the "glasses face" part image and the "circle" contour image of the left decorative pattern 8L is "9", "1" is displayed. Also, "2" is displayed even though the numeric image corresponding to the "smile" part image and the "circle" contour image of the middle decorative pattern 8C is "3". Further, even though the numeral image corresponding to the part image of the "surprised face" and the "circular" outline image of the right decorative pattern 8R is "6", "3" is displayed. At this time, the player is suggested that the number images are not aligned because the part images and outline images are not aligned in the decorative symbols 8L, middle decorative symbols 8C, and right decorative symbols 8R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(J), the number image is switched from "123" to "936" corresponding to the post-change parts image and the outline image, and becomes a failure mode (loss pattern). At this time, the speaker 67 also outputs the contents of the changed number pattern by voice. Here, the message ``After the change, everyone has glasses with a circular outline, a smiling face, and a surprised face, and the number has become 936,'' is issued.

In the second example of the decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect C, FIG. 80(K) is executed after FIGS. 80(A) to 80(F). In FIG. 80(K), an effect of changing the outline image is further executed. Here, the contour image of the left decorative design 8L changes from "circle" to "square", the contour image of the middle decorative design 8C changes from "circle" to "triangle", and the contour image of the right decorative design 8R changes to " Change from circular to square. The numeric images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R remain unchanged as "1", "2", and "3". After that, similarly to the first example described with reference to FIGS. 80(G) to (J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed with outline images of "square, triangle, square" and a number image of "123". In the maintained state, the parts images are newly displayed, respectively, and then the numbers images corresponding to the parts images and contour images are changed to become winning or losing patterns. Alternatively, the shape of the contour image changes again as shown in FIGS. 80(E) and (F) and FIGS. In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have different contour images of "square" and "triangle".

In the third example of the partial display disappearance effect C of the decorative pattern, FIG. 80(L) is executed after FIGS. 80(A) to 80(H). As shown in FIG. 80(H), the number image is "333", the "smile" parts image, and the "circle" outline image are all present. It changes from "circular" to "triangular" as shown in FIG. 80(L). After that, a part image of a "glasses face" is displayed, and a promotion effect is executed in which the number image is switched from "333" to "777".

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the partial display disappearance effect of the decorative pattern is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, a first effect (for example, FIG. 79 (B), FIG. 80 (D)), and a second effect in which display of a part of the decorative patterns disappears after the first effect (for example, FIG. 78 (D), FIG. 79 (C) ( (F), FIG. 80 (E)), and after the second effect, a third effect (for example, FIG. 78 (D), FIG. 79 (C ) (F), FIG. 80 (E)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, after the third effect, a fourth effect (for example, a 78(E), FIGS. 79(D)(G), and FIGS. 80(H)(J)) can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R include number images representing numbers, and in the second effect, display of part of the number images disappears. (For example, FIG. 78(D)), in the third effect, a decorative pattern in which the display of a part of the number image disappears is displayed (for example, FIG. 78(D)), and in the fourth effect, the number image is displayed. A new display appears in the portion where the display has disappeared, so that the number represented by the number image becomes a number different from the number represented by the number image in the first effect (eg, FIG. 78(E)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the decorative pattern includes a face image (parts image) representing a specific object, and the face image disappears in the second effect. (For example, FIG. 79(F), FIG. 80(E)), in the third production, the decorative pattern with the face image disappearing is displayed (for example, FIG. 79(F), FIG. 80(E)), the fourth 2, a new face image appears in the part where the face image disappears in the decoration pattern (eg, FIG. 79(G), FIGS. 80(H) and (J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the second effect, the face image disappears and the contour (contour image) corresponding to the face image remains (for example, FIG. 79 (F) , FIG. 80(E)), in the third effect, a decorative pattern with an outline corresponding to the face image is displayed (for example, FIG. 79(F), FIG. 80(E)), and in the fourth effect, A new contour is displayed instead of the contour corresponding to the face image, and then a new image appears (for example, FIGS. 79(H) to (J), FIGS. 80(F)(H)(J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, in the fourth effect, when a new image appears, a sound corresponding to the new image is output (for example, the 78(E), FIGS. 79(D)(G), 80(H)(J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the partial display disappearance effect of the decorative pattern will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern partial display/disappearance effects A to C, the outline image may be an arbitrary image that can identify the inside and outside of the face image including the parts image. For example, the contour image may be a frame-like line, or may be a plane (region) represented by a predetermined color. In addition, the parts image includes the first contour image, and when the parts image is displayed, the first contour image and the second contour image are overlapped or displayed in parallel, and the parts image is displayed. A mode in which the second outline image remains when it disappears is also possible.

[Modification 2]
In the partial display/disappearance effects A to C of the decorative patterns, the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may change to other patterns once and then return to the original patterns. For example, in the decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect B, FIG. 79(C) may be executed after FIGS. In addition, in the decorative pattern partial display disappearance effect C, after FIG. 80 (D) to (G), FIG. 80 (F) is executed, then FIG. ) to confirm stop. Alternatively, after FIGS. 80(D) to (F) and (I), FIG. 80(F) is executed, then FIG. good too.

[Modification 3]
In the partial display and disappearance of the decorative patterns A to C, after the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are once stopped at the jackpot pattern, the face image changes to another image without changing the number pattern, and You can go back. For example, after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in FIG. ' appears, then the 'surprised face' part image disappears, all the contour images change from 'triangle' to 'circle', and then a 'smiling face' part image appears and stops. may

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the display means;
a second effect in which display of a part of the decorative pattern disappears after the first effect;
After the second effect, a third effect of displaying the decorative pattern with the part of the display disappearing can be executed.
◇[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
A gaming machine capable of executing a fourth effect in which a new display appears in a portion of the decorative pattern where the display has disappeared after the third effect.
◇ [Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-2,
The decorative pattern includes a number image representing a number,
In the second effect, display of a part of the number image disappears,
In the third effect, the decorative pattern in which the display of a part of the number image disappears is displayed,
In the fourth effect, a new display appears in a portion of the number image where the display has disappeared, so that the number represented by the number image is different from the number represented by the number image in the first effect. A game machine characterized by becoming numbers.
◇[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-2,
The decorative pattern includes a specific image representing a specific object,
In the second production, the specific image disappears,
In the third production, the decorative pattern with the specific image disappearing is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the fourth effect, a new image appears in a portion of the decorative pattern where the specific image has disappeared.
◇ [Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
In the second effect, the specific image disappears and a contour corresponding to the specific image remains,
In the third effect, the decorative pattern with an outline corresponding to the specific image is displayed,
In the fourth effect, a new outline is displayed in place of the outline corresponding to the specific image, and then the new image appears.
◇ [Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
A game machine characterized in that, in the fourth effect, when the new image appears, a sound corresponding to the new image is output.

The winning game type notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. FIG. This winning game type notification effect is executed when winning the special symbol lottery. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the winning game type notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Winning game type notification effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the winning game type notification effect A. FIG. The winning game type notification performance notifies the winning notification performance of notifying that the lottery of special symbols has been won, and the first special game or the second special game more advantageous than the first special game, which one has been won. It is an effect for executing a game type notification effect.

In the winning game type notification effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), the fixed stop effect is executed, and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is a "8" pattern. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R during high-speed fluctuation are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win production effect is an effect to stop the effect pattern in a predetermined ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8C are stopped at the "2" symbol. The middle production pattern 8C maintains high speed fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), a ready-to-win pattern overlapping effect is executed. The ready-to-win pattern overlapping effect is an effect to display the ready-to-win symbols stopped in the ready-to-win state in an overlapping manner. Here, the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R ("2" pattern) are superimposed and displayed. In addition, along with the execution of the ready-to-win pattern overlapping effect, the mode of the effect pattern is changed. Specifically, it is a production pattern of a design imitating a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design").

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), a normal ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates with respect to the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R ("2" pattern) which are ready-to-win patterns. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are 7-segment designs. After that, the medium effect pattern 8C stops after the moving speed slows down and becomes visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(F), a winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is a effect for notifying that you have won the special symbol lottery. Here, the middle effect pattern 8C stops at the "2" pattern, and the left, middle and right effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are all "2" patterns. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (“2” pattern) are 7-segment designs.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 81(G) to (L), the game type notification effect is executed. The game type notification effect is a effect for notifying which of the first special game and the second special game more advantageous than the first special game has been won. For example, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" corresponds to the "first special game", and the "16RV passing scheduled jackpot" corresponds to the "second special game". When the second special game is won, a "7" pattern is displayed, and when the first special game is won, a pattern other than the "7" pattern is displayed.

In FIG. 81(G), a re-fluctuation start effect is executed. The re-fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern stopped in the winning mode starts to fluctuate again. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed.
In FIG. 81(H), a symbol stop effect is executed. The pattern stop effect is a effect in which the effect pattern that has started to change again stops. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at the "7" symbol. Thereby, it is notified that the second special game has been won. Along with the execution of the symbol stop effect, the mode of the effect symbol is changed. Specifically, it is a production pattern of a vertically long simple design (also called "simple design").

In FIG. 81(I), a winning symbol overlapping effect is executed. The winning pattern overlapping production is a production in which a set of winning patterns are superimposed and displayed. Here, left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R ("7" pattern) are superimposed and displayed. At this time, the "7" pattern is a simple design.
In FIG. 81(J), a position return effect is executed. The position return effect is a effect of returning the effect symbols in the state of being overlapped in the winning symbol overlapping effect to the original stop position. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R ("7" symbols) are returned to their original stop positions.

In FIG. 81(K), the first color change effect is executed. The color change effect is a effect of changing the mode of the effect pattern by changing the display color of the effect pattern. Here, the display colors of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from white to green (hatched in the figure).
In FIG. 81(L), the second color change effect is executed. The color change effect is a effect of changing the mode of the effect pattern by changing the display color of the effect pattern. Here, the display colors of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from green to red (hatched in the figure).
It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the color is gradually changed in the color change effect. For example, in the first color change effect, the color is changed continuously from white to gradually approaching green. Further, for example, in the second color change effect, the color is continuously changed so as to gradually approach red from green.

[Winning game type notification effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the winning game type notification effect B. FIG. The winning game type notification effect B is another example of the winning game type notification effect A.

In the winning game type notification effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), the fixed stop effect is executed, and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is a "8" pattern. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R during high-speed fluctuation are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win production effect is an effect to stop the effect pattern in a predetermined ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8C are stopped at the "2" symbol. The middle production pattern 8C maintains high speed fluctuation. In addition, along with the execution of the reach forming effect, the mode of the effect pattern is changed. Specifically, it is a production pattern of a design imitating a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"). The mode of the performance pattern may be changed at the timing before the performance pattern is stopped, at the timing corresponding to the stop of the performance pattern, or at the timing after the performance pattern is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), a ready-to-win symbol frame-out effect is executed. The ready-to-win pattern frame-out effect is an effect to frame out the ready-to-win pattern stopped in the ready-to-win mode. Here, part of the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R (“2” pattern) is framed out from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the left half of the left effect pattern 8L (“2” pattern) is out of the frame, and the right half of the right effect pattern 8R (“2” pattern) is out of the frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), a normal ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates with respect to the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R ("2" pattern) which are ready-to-win patterns. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are 7-segment designs. After that, the medium effect pattern 8C stops after the moving speed slows down and becomes visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(F), a failure notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is a effect for notifying that the special symbol lottery has been lost. Here, the middle effect pattern 8C stops at the "3" pattern, and the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are the "2" patterns. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are 7-segment designs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), a mode return effect is executed. The mode return effect is a effect of returning the mode of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the 7-segment design to the mode before the start of the variable effect. Here, the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R are "2" patterns, and the medium production pattern 8C is "3" patterns, but both return to the state before the start of the fluctuation start production.

[Winning game type notification effect C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the winning game type notification effect C. FIG. The winning game type notification effect C is another example of the winning game type notification effects A and B.

In the winning game type notification effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), the fixed stop effect is executed, and the effect symbols are fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is a "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is a "2" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is a "8" pattern. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R during high-speed fluctuation are displayed transparently or semi-transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win production effect is an effect to stop the effect pattern in a predetermined ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8C are stopped at the "2" symbol. The middle production pattern 8C maintains high speed fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a cut-in effect is executed. The cut-in effect is a effect in which a predetermined image or the like is displayed for a certain period of time. Here, an image of an ally character CRA is displayed. The ready-to-win symbols are not displayed, but the ready-to-win symbols may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), a normal ready-to-win effect is executed. Here, the middle production pattern 8C fluctuates with respect to the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R ("2" pattern) which are ready-to-win patterns. In addition, with the execution of the normal reach effect, the mode of the effect pattern is changed. Specifically, it is a production pattern of a design imitating a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"). After that, the medium effect pattern 8C stops after the moving speed slows down and becomes visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is a effect for notifying that you have won the special symbol lottery. Here, the middle effect pattern 8C stops at the "2" pattern, and the left, middle and right effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are all "2" patterns. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (“2” pattern) are 7-segment designs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), a winning symbol overlapping effect is executed. The winning pattern overlapping production is a production in which a set of winning patterns are superimposed and displayed. Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R ("2" pattern) are obliquely arranged and displayed superimposed. At this time, the "2" pattern has a 7-segment design.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 83(H) to 83(L), a game type notification effect is executed. The game type notification effect is a effect for notifying which of the first special game and the second special game more advantageous than the first special game has been won. For example, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" corresponds to the "first special game", and the "16RV passing scheduled jackpot" corresponds to the "second special game". When the second special game is won, a "7" pattern is displayed, and when the first special game is won, a pattern other than the "7" pattern is displayed.

In FIG. 83(H), a re-fluctuation start effect is executed. The re-fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern stopped in the winning mode starts to fluctuate again. Here, the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are fluctuating at high speed.
In FIG. 83(I), a symbol stop effect is executed. The pattern stop effect is a effect in which the effect pattern that has started to change again stops. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "7" symbols. Thereby, it is notified that the second special game has been won. Along with the execution of the symbol stop effect, the mode of the effect symbol is changed. Specifically, it returns to the design (also called "normal design") at the time of confirmation stop (FIG. 83(A)).

In FIG. 83(J), a symbol position change effect is executed. The symbol position change effect is an effect of changing the position of at least one of a set of effect symbols (hit symbol) forming a winning mode. Here, a set of performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (win symbols, "7" symbols) are arranged obliquely.

In FIG. 83(K), the first decoration image addition effect is executed. The decoration image addition effect is an effect of changing the mode of the effect design by adding a decoration image to the identification information (number) of the effect design. Here, the "moon" image MG is added to the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" symbol).
In FIG. 83(L), the second decoration image addition effect is executed. The decoration image addition effect is an effect of changing the mode of the effect design by adding a decoration image to the identification information (number) of the effect design. Here, the "sun" image SG is added to the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" symbol).
It should be noted that the image may be gradually changed in the decoration image addition effect. For example, in the first decoration image addition effect, a small image appears from nothing and gradually changes continuously to become the "moon" image MG. Further, for example, in the second decorative image addition effect, the "moon" image MG is changed little by little continuously to become the "sun" image SG.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the winning game type notification effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the winning notification effect (FIG. 81 (F), FIG. 83 (F)) is performed with the effect pattern of the first mode, which is different from the first mode. A game type notification effect (FIGS. 81(G) to (L), FIGS. 83(H) to (L)) is performed with the effect pattern of the mode. According to this configuration, since the game type is notified by the performance pattern different from the notification of the winning, the novel performance is achieved, which can visually entertain the player and improve the interest. be able to.
81(D) to (F) correspond to the "first aspect of the production pattern", and the production designs shown in FIGS. Equivalent to the production pattern of The production patterns shown in FIGS. 82(C) to (F) correspond to the "production patterns of the first mode". The production patterns shown in FIGS. 83(E) to (G) correspond to the "production patterns of the first mode", and the production patterns shown in FIGS. Equivalent to the production pattern of Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control corresponds to "a production|presentation execution means."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the game type notification effect, after stopping the effect pattern of the second mode (Fig. 81 (H), Fig. 83 (I)), the effect pattern of the second mode is changed to the second mode 81 (K), FIG. 83 (K)). According to this configuration, since the third mode is performed after the second mode of performance pattern is stopped, the novel performance that has not existed in the past can be achieved, the player can be visually entertained, and the amusement can be improved. can be done.
81 (H) ~ (J), Figures 83 (I) (J) shown in the production pattern corresponds to the "second mode production pattern", shown in Figure 81 (K), Figure 83 (K) The production pattern corresponds to the "third mode production pattern", and the color change production shown in FIG. 81 and the decoration image addition production shown in FIG. 83 correspond to the "mode change production".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the game type notification effect, the effect pattern of the third mode (Fig. 81 (K), Fig. 83 (K)) is changed to the effect pattern of the fourth mode different from the third mode. (FIGS. 81(L) and 83(L)). According to this configuration, after the performance pattern of the second mode stops, the pattern changes to the third mode and then to the fourth mode. can be improved.
81(K) and FIG. 83(K) correspond to the "third aspect of the production pattern", and FIG. 81(L) and FIG. 83(L) correspond to the "fourth aspect Equivalent to the production pattern of The color change effect shown in FIG. 81 and the decorative image addition effect shown in FIG. 83 correspond to the "mode change effect".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the production pattern starts the variable production (Fig. 81 (B), Fig. 82 (B), Fig. 83 (B)), reach to stop the production pattern in a predetermined reach mode Formation production (Figure 81 (C), Figure 82 (C), Figure 83 (C)) to change the production design to the production design of the first mode, if you win the lottery of the special design, The winning notification effect (Fig. 81(F), Fig. 83(F)) is executed. According to this configuration, since the form of the production pattern changes with the formation of the ready-to-win state, the production associated with the ready-to-win state becomes a novel production, the player can be visually entertained, and the amusement can be improved. can.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the reach formation effect, if the lottery for the special symbol is lost, the effect symbol of the first mode is returned to the mode before the start of the variable effect (Fig. 82 (F) (G )). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the variation of the production pattern at the time of formation of the ready-to-win state look impressive, to visually entertain the player, and to improve the amusement.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the winning game type notification effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the effect pattern changes to the mode before the start of fluctuation, the first mode, the second mode, the third mode, and the fourth mode. The change in the aspect of the production pattern may be, for example, a change in at least one of the shape, size, direction, display color, and transparency (darkness) of the production pattern.

[Modification 2]
In the winning game type notification effect C of the above embodiment, the effect pattern of the second mode is the same as the mode (normal design) before the start of variation. Similarly, in the winning game type notification effects A to C, the effect pattern of the fourth mode may be the same as the mode (normal design) before the start of variation.

[Modification 3]
In the winning game type notification effect C of the above embodiment, after the cut-in effect following the ready-to-win formation effect, the mode of the effect pattern was changed to the first mode (FIGS. 83(C) to (E)). On the other hand, the cut-in effect may be performed first without performing the ready-to-win effect, and the mode of the effect pattern may be changed to the first mode along with the ready-to-reach effect after the cut-in effect (predetermined effect).

[Modification 4]
In the winning game type notification effect C of the above embodiment, after the cut-in effect following the ready-to-win formation effect, the mode of the effect pattern was changed to the first mode (FIGS. 83(C) to (E)). However, the production following the reach formation production is not limited to the cut-in production. For example, it may be a dark effect or an animation effect in which a moving image is displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, after the winning notification effect (FIG. 81 (F), FIG. 83 (F)), the re-variation effect is performed (FIG. 81 (G), FIG. 83 (H)), and then the game type notification effect is performed. (FIGS. 81(H)-(L), FIGS. 83(I)-(L)). On the other hand, a predetermined effect such as a cut-in effect may be performed instead of the re-variation effect.

[Modification 6]
Winning game type notification effect B in the above embodiment shows the case where the special symbol lottery is lost, but the loss notification effect (Fig. 82 (F)) is executed even when the special symbol lottery is won. After that, the winning type notification effect may be executed. For example, after the failure notification effect (FIG. 82(F)), the effects shown in FIGS. 81(G) to (L) are executed, the effects shown in FIGS. ) to (L), the effects of FIGS. 83(H) to (L), and the effects of FIGS. 83(I) to (L).

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine capable of executing either a first special game or a second special game more advantageous than the first special game when winning a special symbol lottery,
A winning notification effect for notifying that the lottery of the special symbols has been won, and a game type notification effect for notifying which of the first special game and the second special game has been won after the winning notification effect. Equipped with executable production execution means,
The effect execution means performs the winning notification effect with the effect pattern of the first mode, and performs the game type notification effect with the effect symbol of the mode different from the first mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The effect executing means, in the game type notification effect, after stopping the effect pattern of the second mode, the effect pattern of the second mode is changed to the effect pattern of the third mode different from the second mode. carry out change production,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
The effect execution means changes the effect pattern changed to the third mode to a fourth mode effect pattern different from the third mode in the mode change effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
After the performance design starts the variable performance, the performance execution means changes the performance design to the performance design of the first mode with the ready-to-win formation performance to stop the performance design in a predetermined reach mode, and the special design. If you have won the lottery, execute the winning notification effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
After the reach formation effect, if the special symbol lottery is lost, the effect execution means returns the effect symbol of the first mode to the mode before the start of the variable effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific symbol stop effects A and B will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. This specific symbol stop effect is executed when the effect symbol changes. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific symbol stop effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Specific pattern stop effect A]
The specific symbol stop effect is an effect in which a variable display is performed using only specific effect symbols included in the effect symbols. Before explaining the specific symbol stop effect, the arrangement of the effect symbols will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 84(A) shows a normal arrangement of performance symbols. The normal arrangement is an arrangement of performance symbols displayed in each row when the performance symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of rows. In the normal arrangement, the production symbols are "0" symbol EZ0, "1" symbol EZ1, "2" symbol EZ2, "3" symbol EZ3, "4" symbol EZ4, "5" symbol EZ5, "6" symbol EZ6, " 7" pattern EZ7, "8" pattern EZ8, "9" pattern EZ9, "sun" pattern EZ10, "moon" pattern EZ11, and "star" pattern EZ12 are arranged in this order, and consist of 13 kinds of patterns. Therefore, when the variable display of the performance symbols in the normal arrangement is performed, 13 types of performance symbols will appear on the display screen 7a in this order.

FIG. 84(B) shows a special arrangement 1 of production patterns. The special array 1 is an array of specific performance symbols included in the performance symbols displayed in each row of a plurality of rows. In the special arrangement 1, the production patterns are arranged in order of the "sun" pattern EZ10, the "moon" pattern EZ11, and the "star" pattern EZ12. The special array 1 is composed of three types of production patterns. Therefore, when the performance symbols of the special arrangement 1 are displayed in a variable manner, three types of performance symbols appear on the display screen 7a in this order.

FIG. 84(C) shows a special arrangement 2 of the production pattern. The special array 2 is an array of specific performance symbols included in the performance symbols displayed in each of the multiple rows. In the special arrangement 2, the effect symbols are arranged in order of the "sun" symbol EZ10 and the "moon" symbol EZ11. The special array 2 is composed of two types of performance patterns. Therefore, when the performance symbols of the special array 2 are displayed in a variable manner, two types of performance symbols will appear on the display screen 7a in this order.

FIG. 84(D) shows a special array 3 of production patterns. The special array 3 is an array of specific performance symbols included in the performance symbols displayed in each of the multiple rows. In the special arrangement 3, the effect patterns are arranged in order of the "sun" pattern EZ10 and the "star" pattern EZ12. The special arrangement 3 is composed of two kinds of performance patterns. Therefore, when the performance symbols of the special array 3 are displayed in a variable manner, two types of performance symbols will appear on the display screen 7a in this order.

FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the specific symbol stop effect A. FIG. The specific symbol stop effect is an effect in which a variable display is performed using only specific effect symbols included in the effect symbols. 85(A) to (F) show a first example of the specific symbol stop effect A, and FIGS. 85(G) to (L) show a second example of the specific symbol stop effect A.

In the first example of the specific symbol stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 85(A), the variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the special arrangement 1 (FIG. 84(B)). In the first example of the specific symbol stop effect A, the effective lines are so-called 5 lines. In each row, the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a are the stop positions, and the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are connected in order of "upper row" - "upper row" - "upper row". The first line, the second line connecting "middle" - "middle" - "middle", the third line connecting "lower" - "lower" - "lower", "upper" - "middle" - "lower" A winning mode is formed by stopping the performance pattern with the same identification information on any of the five lines of the connecting fourth line and the fifth line connecting "lower stage" - "middle stage" - "upper stage".

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the upper stage in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped at the middle stage, and the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the lower stage. The middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped at the upper stage in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the middle stage, and the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the lower stage. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the upper stage in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the middle stage, and the "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the "sun" symbol EZ10 stops at the upper stage of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle stage of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the lower stage of the right effect symbol 8R, forming a hit notification mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), a background change effect is executed. The background change effect is a effect of changing the background image of the display screen 7a to a background image of the same color for a certain period of time and hiding the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the background image changes are indicated by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), another mode forming effect is executed. The alternate mode forming effect is a effect of changing the stop position of at least one of the stopped effect symbols to form another hit notification mode. Here, the "sun" pattern EZ10 is displayed in the middle of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, forming a hit notification mode different from that of FIG. 85(D). At this time, the performance symbols other than the "sun" symbol EZ10 forming the winning notification mode are hidden.

In the second example of the specific symbol stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 85(G), the variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the special arrangement 1 (FIG. 84(B)). In the second example of the specific symbol stop effect A, the effective line is so-called one line. In each row, the upper, middle, and lower stages of the display screen 7a are the stop positions, and the line connecting the "middle" of the left production pattern 8L, the "middle" of the middle production pattern 8C, and the "middle" of the right production pattern 8R. A winning mode is formed by stopping the performance symbols having the same identification information.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(H), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the upper stage in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the middle stage, and the "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped at the lower stage. The middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(I), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the upper stage in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the middle stage, and the "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped at the lower stage. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. A reach line image RLG connecting the left and right "sun" patterns EZ10 is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(J), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the upper stage in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the middle stage, and the "moon" symbol EZ11 is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the "sun" symbol EZ10 stops at the middle stage of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle stage of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the middle stage of the right effect symbol 8R, forming a winning notification mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(K), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving the effect symbols other than the "sun" symbol EZ10 forming the hit notification mode to frame them out of the display screen 7a. Here, a set of left, middle, right "star" images EZ12 are moved upward as indicated by the arrow YG1 and out of the upper side of the display screen 7a. Also, a set of left, middle, right "moon" images EZ11 are moved downward as indicated by the arrow YG2 and out of the frame from the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(L), a winning mode display effect is executed. The win mode display effect is an effect of displaying the effect pattern of the win notification mode. Here, the "sun" pattern EZ10 is displayed in the middle of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Specific pattern stop effect B]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the specific symbol stop effect B. FIG. The specific symbol stop effect is an effect in which a variable display is performed using only specific effect symbols included in the effect symbols. 86(A) to (F) show a first example of the specific symbol stop effect B, and FIGS. 86(G) to (L) show a second example of the specific symbol stop effect B. FIG.

In the first example of the specific symbol stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 86(A), the variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At this time, the left effect pattern 8L is in the special arrangement 2 (FIG. 84(C)), and the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are in the special arrangement 3 (FIG. 84(D)). In the first example of the specific symbol stop effect B, the effective lines are so-called 5 lines. In each row, the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a are the stop positions, and the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are connected in order of "upper row" - "upper row" - "upper row". The first line, the second line connecting "middle" - "middle" - "middle", the third line connecting "lower" - "lower" - "lower", "upper" - "middle" - "lower" A winning mode is formed by stopping the performance pattern with the same identification information on any of the five lines of the connecting fourth line and the fifth line connecting "lower stage" - "middle stage" - "upper stage".

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "moon" symbol EZ11 stops at the upper stage in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "sun" symbol EZ10 stops at the middle stage, and the "moon" symbol EZ11 stops at the lower stage. The middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the upper stage in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the middle stage, and the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the lower stage. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the upper stage in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the middle stage, and the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the "sun" symbol EZ10 stops at the middle stage of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle stage of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the middle stage of the right effect symbol 8R, forming a winning notification mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(E), a background change effect is executed. The background change effect is a effect of changing the background image of the display screen 7a to a background image of the same color for a certain period of time and hiding the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. Here, the background image changes are indicated by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(F), a winning mode display effect is executed. The win mode display effect is an effect of displaying the effect pattern of the win notification mode. Here, the "sun" pattern EZ10 is displayed in the middle of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, the performance symbols other than the "sun" symbol EZ10 forming the winning notification mode are hidden.

In the second example of the specific symbol stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 86(G), the variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At this time, the left effect pattern 8L is in the special arrangement 2 (FIG. 84(C)), and the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are in the special arrangement 3 (FIG. 84(D)). In the second example of the specific symbol stop effect B, the effective lines are so-called 5 lines. In each row, the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a are the stop positions, and the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are connected in order of "upper row" - "upper row" - "upper row". The first line, the second line connecting "middle" - "middle" - "middle", the third line connecting "lower" - "lower" - "lower", "upper" - "middle" - "lower" A winning mode is formed by stopping the performance pattern with the same identification information on any of the five lines of the connecting fourth line and the fifth line connecting "lower stage" - "middle stage" - "upper stage".

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(H), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "moon" symbol EZ11 stops at the upper stage in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "sun" symbol EZ10 stops at the middle stage, and the "moon" symbol EZ11 stops at the lower stage. The middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(I), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the upper stage in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the middle stage, and the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the lower stage. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(J), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the upper stage in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "sun" symbol EZ10 is stopped at the middle stage, and the "star" symbol EZ12 is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the "sun" symbol EZ10 stops at the middle stage of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle stage of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the middle stage of the right effect symbol 8R, forming a winning notification mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(K), a cut-in effect is executed. The cut-in effect is a effect in which a predetermined image is displayed for a certain period of time and the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed. Here, an image of an ally character CRA is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(L), another mode forming effect is executed. The alternate mode forming effect is a effect of changing the stop position of at least one of the stopped effect symbols to form another hit notification mode. Here, the "sun" design EZ10 is displayed in the lower stage of the left production design 8L, the middle stage of the middle production design 8C, and the upper stage of the right production design 8R, forming a hit notification mode different from that of FIG. 86(J). ing. At this time, the performance symbols other than the specific performance symbols are displayed. "8" symbol EZ8 and "9" symbol EZ9 are displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the specific symbol stop production will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, a specific effect pattern (FIG. 84 (B) ( C) (D)) alone is used to perform a multi-column variable display. According to this configuration, since the variable display is performed only by the specific performance pattern, it becomes a novel performance that has never existed in the past, and the player can be visually entertained, and the amusement can be improved. The production control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "production executing means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a special stop effect (Fig. 85 (B) ~ (D), (H) ~ (J), Fig. 86 (B) ~ (D), (H) ~ (J)) are executed. According to this configuration, since the winning notification mode is formed by the specific performance pattern, it becomes a novel performance that has never existed in the past, and the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the special stop effect, the change mode display effect ( FIG. 85(F), FIG. 86(L)) are executed. According to this configuration, since the winning notification mode is changed, it is possible to create novel performances that have not existed in the past.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the special stop effect and before the change mode display effect, the visual difficulty effect (FIGS. 85 (E) and (K)) is executed to make the stopped effect pattern difficult to see. do. According to this configuration, since the changed winning notification mode is displayed with the visual recognition effect interposed therebetween, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the amusement.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the special stop effect, at least one row out of the plurality of rows displays an effect symbol other than a specific effect symbol (FIG. 86(B)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the special stop effect, the effect symbols other than the effect symbols forming the winning notification mode are hidden in at least one row of the plurality of rows (Fig. 85 (F), (L ), FIG. 86(F)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the specific symbol stop effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the background change effect (FIG. 85(E)) and the cut-in effect (FIG. 86(K)) are executed as the visibility difficulty effect. On the other hand, the hard-to-recognize effect may be any other effect as long as it makes the stopped effect pattern difficult to see. For example, it may be a blackout effect, an animation effect in which a moving image is displayed, or a character effect in which a movable character is moved to a position overlapping the display screen 7a.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, it is an example of variable display in which the left effect pattern 8L, the right effect pattern 8R, and the middle effect pattern 8C are stopped in this order. On the other hand, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be stopped in any order. Also, at least two of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be stopped substantially at the same time.

[Modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, the display screen 7a is configured to perform a variable display using only specific performance symbols. On the other hand, the display screen may be made different between the variable display using all the performance symbols included in the performance symbols and the variable display using only the specific performance symbols. For example, the variable display using all the performance symbols is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variable display using only the specific performance symbols is performed on the display screen 7a in addition to or instead of the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-screen). The display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U) may be used. As an example, it is conceivable that the variable display using only specific performance symbols is displayed across the display screen 7a and the upper sub-display screen 64U.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine comprising a production execution means for variably displaying production patterns in a plurality of rows,
The effect execution means is capable of performing a variable display of the plurality of rows using only specific effect symbols included in the effect symbols displayed in each row of the plurality of rows.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a special stop effect that forms a win notification mode in which one of the specific effect symbols in each row stops at a predetermined stop position to notify a win.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-2,
After the special stop effect, the effect execution means executes a change mode display effect of changing the stop position of at least one of the stopped effect symbols to form another win notification mode different from the win report mode. is possible,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
The effect execution means executes an invisible effect that makes the stopped effect pattern difficult to see after the special stop effect and before the change mode display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-2 to B4-4,
After the special stop effect, the effect execution means displays a effect symbol other than the specific effect symbol in at least one row of the plurality of rows.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-2 to B4-4,
After the special stop effect, the effect executing means hides the effect symbols other than the effect symbols forming the hit notification mode in at least one row of the plurality of rows.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Winning mode symbol display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. This winning mode symbol display effect is executed in the variation effect when winning the special symbol lottery. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a winning mode symbol display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Hit mode pattern display effect A]
The hit mode symbol display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined mode of effect symbols in various areas along with the big win effect.
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the winning mode symbol display effect A. FIG. In the winning mode symbol display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "3" symbol is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "2" symbol is stopped in the middle row, and the "1" symbol is stopped in the lower row. The middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the "3" symbol is stopped in the upper row in the vertical direction (fluctuation direction), the "4" symbol is stopped in the middle row, and the "5" symbol is stopped in the lower row. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a ready-to-win state notification effect is executed. The ready-to-win state notification effect is an effect for notifying an effective line on which the ready-to-win state is formed. In the winning mode symbol display effect A, the effective lines are so-called 5 lines. In each row, the upper, middle and lower stages of the display screen 7a are the stop positions, and the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are connected in order of "upper row" - "upper row" - "upper row". The first line, the second line connecting "middle" - "middle" - "middle", the third line connecting "lower" - "lower" - "lower", "upper" - "middle" - "lower" A winning mode is formed by stopping the performance pattern with the same identification information on any of the five lines of the connecting fourth line and the fifth line connecting "lower stage" - "middle stage" - "upper stage". Here, the "3" symbol stops at the upper stage of the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R to form a ready-to-win mode. A reach line image RL connecting left and right "3" symbols is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 87(E) and (F), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the middle effect symbol 8C slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position.
In FIG. 87(E), the variation (movement) speed of the medium effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and as indicated by the arrow Y, it moves slowly downward. In FIG. 87(F), the "3" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the medium effect symbol 8C, the "4" symbol is stopped on the middle stage, and the "5" symbol is stopped on the lower stage. As a result, the "3" symbol stops at the upper stage of the left effect symbol 8L, the upper stage of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the upper stage of the right effect symbol 8R, forming a winning mode.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 87(G) to 87(I), the visibility difficulty effect is executed. The hard-to-recognize production is a production that makes the stopped production pattern difficult to see.
In FIG. 87(G), the moon image TG is beginning to be displayed overlapping the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 87(H), the number of moon images TG increases, and it gradually becomes difficult to visually recognize the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 87(I), the number of moon images TG has further increased, making it difficult to visually recognize the performance symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(J), a blessing effect is executed. The blessing effect is a effect in which a winning pattern is displayed to notify the winning. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MS saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. At this time, reduced production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Also, a winning image AG of "333" is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(K), an opening effect is executed. Here, the image of the teammate character CRA is switched from the image shown in FIG. 87(J), and the message image MS saying "Big win" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. At this time, the reduced production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a are not displayed, and the winning image AG of "333" in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a remains displayed. there is

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(L), a round effect is executed. Here, the image display of the teammate character CRA is continued. In addition, a right-handed shot image RG of "Right-handed shot" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a round display RH of "1R" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the winning image AG of "333" at the lower left of the display screen 7a remains displayed.

[Performance pattern display effect B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the winning mode symbol display effect B. FIG. The winning mode symbol display effect B is another example of the winning mode symbol display effect A. In the winning mode symbol display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the left effect symbol 8L ("2" symbol) is stopped. The middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the right performance symbol 8R ("2" symbol) is stopped. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a ready-to-win state notification effect is executed. The ready-to-win state notification effect is an effect to notify that the ready-to-reach state is formed. Here, a reach line image RL connecting left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R (“2” symbol) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 88(E) and (F), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the middle effect symbol 8C slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position.
In FIG. 88(E), the variation (movement) speed of the medium effect symbol 8C slows down, and as indicated by the arrow Y, it moves slowly downward. In FIG. 88(F), the medium effect symbol 8C ("2" symbol) is stopped. As a result, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "2" symbols, forming a winning mode.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 88(G) to (I), the visibility difficulty effect is executed. The hard-to-recognize production is a production that makes the stopped production pattern difficult to see.
In FIG. 88(G), the brightness of the entire display screen 7a is low. In FIG. 88(H), the brightness of the entire display screen 7a is further reduced, and gradually it becomes difficult to visually recognize the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 88(I), the brightness of the entire display screen 7a is further lowered, making it difficult to visually recognize the production pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(J), a blessing effect is executed. The blessing effect is a effect in which a winning pattern is displayed to notify the winning. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MS saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. At this time, reduced production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(K), a promotion effect is executed. The promotion production is a production in which the stopped production pattern is promoted. Here, the message image MS "MAX" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the lower right part of the display screen 7a are changed from "2" symbols to "7" symbols. A winning image AG of "777" is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(L), a round effect is executed. Here, the image of the teammate character CRA is switched from the image of FIG. 88(K). In addition, a right-handed shot image RG of "Right-handed shot" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a round display RH of "1R" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the reduced production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a are not displayed, and the winning image AG "777" in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a remains displayed. there is

[Hit mode pattern display effect C]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the winning mode symbol display effect C. FIG. The winning mode symbol display effect C is another example of the winning mode symbol display effects A and B. In the winning mode symbol display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the left effect symbol 8L ("2" symbol) is stopped. The middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position. Here, the right performance symbol 8R ("2" symbol) is stopped. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a ready-to-win state notification effect is executed. The ready-to-win state notification effect is an effect to notify that the ready-to-reach state is formed. Here, a reach line image RL connecting left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R (“2” symbol) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 89(E) and (F), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation (movement) speed of the middle effect symbol 8C slows down and stops at a predetermined stop position.
In FIG. 89(E), the variation (movement) speed of the medium effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and as indicated by the arrow Y, it moves slowly downward. In FIG. 89(F), the medium effect symbol 8C ("1" symbol) is stopped. As a result, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are "2" symbols, and the middle performance symbol is "1", forming a ready-to-win mode.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 89(G) to (I), the visibility difficulty effect is executed. The hard-to-recognize production is a production that makes the stopped production pattern difficult to see.
In FIG. 89(G), display of a crack image WG as if a crack had occurred on the display screen 7a is started. In FIG. 89(H), the number of crack images WG further increases, and it gradually becomes difficult to visually recognize the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 89(I), the entire display screen 7a is black as if it were destroyed, making it difficult to visually recognize the production pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(J), a blessing effect is executed. The blessing effect is a effect in which a winning pattern is displayed to notify the winning. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MS saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. At this time, reduced production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Also, a winning image AG of "222" is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(K), an animation effect is executed. The animation effect is a effect of displaying a moving image on the display screen 7a. Here, the teammate character CRA displayed in FIG. 89(J) is enlarged while being moved to the left side of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG. At this time, the display of the reduced performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R on the lower right portion of the display screen 7a and the winning image AG of "222" on the lower left portion of the display screen 7a are continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(L), a round effect is executed. Here, the image of the teammate character CRA is switched from the image of FIG. 89(K). In addition, a right-handed shot image RG of "Right-handed shot" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a round display RH of "1R" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the reduced production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a are not displayed, and the winning image AG "777" in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a remains displayed. there is

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the winning mode symbol display effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, a first display effect (FIG. 87 (F), FIG. , FIG. 89 (F)) is executed, and then the visual recognition difficulty effect (FIGS. 87 (G) to (I), FIG. 88 (G) to (I ), FIG. 89 (G) to (I)) are executed, and then a second display effect (FIG. 87 (J), FIG. 88(J)(K), FIG. 89(J)(K)) are executed. According to this configuration, after the performance pattern is displayed in the first area in the predetermined mode, the performance pattern in the winning mode is displayed in the second area through the hard-to-see performance, so that a novel performance that has never existed before can be achieved. The user can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
It should be noted that the stop areas of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. The stop areas of 8L, 8C, and 8R (areas where three symbols stop) correspond to the "first area", and are shown in FIGS. corresponds to the "second area". Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control corresponds to "a production|presentation execution means."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in parallel with the second display effect, the third display effect (FIGS. 87(J), 88(K), 89(J) ( K)) can be executed. According to this configuration, since the third area effect is performed in parallel with the second display effect, it becomes a novel effect that has never existed before, and the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. can.
87(J)-(L), FIGS. 88(K)(L), and FIGS. 89(J)-(L) correspond to the "win mode production pattern", and the winning image AG The displayed area corresponds to the "third area".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the image switching effect is executed to switch the displayed image while the display of the effect symbols displayed in the third area is maintained by the third display effect, and the second display effect is executed. to hide the display of the effect symbols displayed in the second area (Fig. 87(K), Fig. 88(L), Fig. 89(L)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel performance that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as the visibility difficulty effect, the effect of making a part of the effect pattern difficult to see is repeated step by step to make the entire effect pattern of a predetermined mode difficult to see (Fig. 87 (G) ~ ( I), FIGS. 88(G)-(I), and FIGS. 89(G)-(I)). According to this configuration, the effect patterns in the first area become invisible in stages, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation that something will happen, and the amusement can be improved. can.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as an effect of making the entire effect pattern difficult to see, the effect in which the display screen on which the effect pattern is displayed is destroyed step by step is repeatedly executed (FIG. 89 (G ) to (I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of anticipation that something will happen, and to improve the amusement.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the winning mode symbol display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, an effect that makes a part of the effect pattern invisible is repeated step by step to make the entire effect pattern in a predetermined manner invisible (FIGS. 87(G) to (I), FIG. 88(G). ~ (I), Figure 89 (G) ~ (I)). On the other hand, an effect may be performed to make the effect pattern instantly difficult to see. For example, a blackout effect, a cut-in effect, or a character effect in which a movable accessory is moved so as to overlap with the effect pattern displayed on the display screen may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, the predetermined aspect of the production pattern displayed in the first area is the winning aspect of the production pattern (FIG. 87 (F), FIG. 88 (F)), the ready-to-lose production pattern (FIG. 89 (F)). It was On the other hand, the production pattern of a predetermined mode displayed in the first area may be a production pattern of a mismatched mode (a mode in which the left, middle, and right are all different).

[Modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, it is an example of variable display in which the left effect pattern 8L, the right effect pattern 8R, and the middle effect pattern 8C are stopped in this order. On the other hand, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be stopped in any order. Also, at least two of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be stopped substantially at the same time.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the display screen 7a is provided with the first area, the second area, and the third area. 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine,
After executing the first display effect of displaying the effect symbols in a predetermined mode in the first area of the display screen, and then executing the visibility difficulty effect of making the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the first area difficult to see, Effect executing means for executing a second display effect for displaying the effect pattern of the winning mode, which is a mode for notifying the winning, in the second area,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a third display effect of displaying the effect pattern of the winning mode in a third area in parallel with the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-2,
The effect executing means executes an image switching effect to switch the image displayed while the display of the effect symbol displayed in the third area by the third display effect is maintained, and the second display. Hide the display of the production pattern displayed in the second area by the production,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
The effect execution means repeats the effect of making a part of the effect pattern difficult to see as the difficult-to-recognize effect, and makes the entire effect pattern in the predetermined mode difficult to see in a stepwise manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-4,
The effect execution means makes the entire effect pattern invisible by repeatedly executing, as the difficult-to-visual effect, a effect in which a display screen on which the effect pattern is displayed is destroyed step by step.
A gaming machine characterized by:

90 to 92, the effect symbol mode changing effects A to C will be described below. This production pattern mode change production is executed along with the variation production of the production pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the effect symbol mode change effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Production pattern mode change production A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the production pattern mode change production A. FIG. In the production pattern mode change production A, first, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a variable start production is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. A game number display GH of "151 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A indicate the number of pending lotteries for the first special symbol (special symbol 1).

The special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5) includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. contains. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided.

The four reserved icons 9A are stored in the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a in order from the rightmost reserved icon 9A. Corresponds to a group of numbers (pending information). The suspension icons 9A corresponding to the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area are set to "first suspension", "second suspension", "third storage", and "fourth suspension", respectively. Also called These pending icons 9A shift to the right with each change. That is, the "first hold" hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, the "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "first hold" hold icon 9A, and the "third hold" hold icon 9A becomes " The pending icon 9A of the "second pending" becomes the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A of the "fourth pending" becomes the pending icon 9A of the "third pending".

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern. Let the mode of the production design here be a normal mode (it is also called a "normal mode"). As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the game number display GH of "151 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The number of pending icons 9A (fourth pending) indicated by the symbol T is increased by winning the first starting port 20 . The description will be continued assuming that the lottery determination result (forecast result) for the pending icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "big hit". A game number display GH of "152 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "3" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "4" pattern. Here, in particular, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the first mode. The first mode is a production pattern of a design imitating a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is white. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A game number display GH of "152 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. A pending icon 9A indicated by a symbol T is "third pending". A game number display GH of "153 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "7" pattern. The mode of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is the first mode (7-segment design), and the display color is white. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A game number display GH of "153 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Two pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "second pending". A game number display GH of "154 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "0" pattern. Here, in particular, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the second mode. The second mode is a production pattern of a design imitating a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is green. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Two pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A game number display GH of "154 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(I), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. A pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A pending icon 9A indicated by a symbol T is "first pending". A game number display GH of "155 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(J), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "7" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern. Here, in particular, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the third mode. The third mode is a production pattern of a design imitating a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is red. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. A pending icon 9A is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A game number display GH of "155 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(K), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The variation icon 9C indicated by the symbol T is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A game number display GH of "156 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(L), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the “7” symbol. As a result, it is notified that it is a "jackpot". Here, in particular, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to normal modes. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. A game number display GH of "156 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

In the production pattern mode change production A, the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C, 8L, 8C under the condition (first condition) that the hold icon 9A corresponding to the big hit hold becomes "fourth hold" or "third hold". The 8R mode is changed to the 1st mode. In addition, the mode of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is changed to the second mode under the condition (second condition) that the pending icon 9A corresponding to the big hit pending becomes "second pending". . Under the condition (third condition) that the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the reservation of the big hit has become the "first reservation", the mode of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is changed to the third mode. Then, in the variation that results in a big hit, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the normal mode (fourth mode).

[Production pattern mode change production B]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the production pattern mode change production B. FIG. The performance symbol mode change performance B is another example of the performance symbol mode change performance A.
In the production pattern mode change production B, first, as shown in FIG. 91(A), a variable start production is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. A game number display GH of "151 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A indicate the number of pending lotteries for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The four suspension icons 9A are also called "first suspension", "second suspension", "third suspension", and "fourth suspension" in order from the right end. These pending icons 9A shift to the right with each change. That is, the "first hold" hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, the "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "first hold" hold icon 9A, and the "third hold" hold icon 9A becomes " The pending icon 9A of the "second pending" becomes the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A of the "fourth pending" becomes the pending icon 9A of the "third pending".

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern. Let the mode of the production design here be a normal mode (it is also called a "normal mode"). As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the game number display GH of "151 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The number of pending icons 9A (fourth pending) indicated by the symbol T is increased by winning the first starting port 20 . The description will be continued assuming that the lottery determination result (forecast result) for the pending icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "big hit". A game number display GH of "152 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "3" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "4" pattern. Here, in particular, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the first mode. The first mode is a production pattern of a design imitating a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is white. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A game number display GH of "152 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. A pending icon 9A indicated by a symbol T is "third pending". A game number display GH of "153 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "7" pattern. Here, in particular, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the second mode. The second mode is a production pattern of a design imitating a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is green. Also, in the second mode, the production pattern is larger than in the first mode. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A game number display GH of "153 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Two pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "second pending". A game number display GH of "154 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(H), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "0" pattern. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the second mode. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Two pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A game number display GH of "154 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(I), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. A pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A pending icon 9A indicated by a symbol T is "first pending". A game number display GH of "155 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(J), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "7" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern. Here, in particular, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the third mode. The third mode is a production pattern of a design imitating a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is red. In the third mode, the production pattern is larger than in the second mode. As a result, part of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. A pending icon 9A is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A game number display GH of "155 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(K), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The variation icon 9C indicated by the symbol T is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A game number display GH of "156 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(L), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the “7” symbol. As a result, it is notified that it is a "jackpot". Here, in particular, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to normal modes (the modes shown in FIG. 91(B)). As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. A game number display GH of "156 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

In the production pattern mode change production B, the mode of the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is changed to the first mode under the condition (first condition) that the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the reservation that is a big hit becomes "fourth reservation". I am changing to the mode. In addition, under the condition (second condition) that the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the reservation that is a big hit has become "third reservation" or "second reservation", the mode of the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is changed to the second state. I am changing to the mode. Under the condition (third condition) that the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the reservation of the big hit has become the "first reservation", the mode of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is changed to the third mode. Then, in the variation that results in a big hit, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the normal mode (fourth mode).

[Production pattern mode change production C]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the production pattern mode change production C. FIG. The effect symbol mode change effect C is an example in which a pseudo-continuous effect is performed.
In the production pattern mode change production C, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), a variable start production is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. A game number display GH of "151 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A indicate the number of pending lotteries for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The four suspension icons 9A are also called "first suspension", "second suspension", "third suspension", and "fourth suspension" in order from the right end. These pending icons 9A shift to the right with each change. That is, the "first hold" hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, the "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "first hold" hold icon 9A, and the "third hold" hold icon 9A becomes " The pending icon 9A of the "second pending" becomes the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A of the "fourth pending" becomes the pending icon 9A of the "third pending". Here, the description will be continued assuming that the lottery determination result (prefetching result) for the pending icon 9A (third pending) indicated by symbol T is "big hit".

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern. Let the mode of the production design here be a normal mode (it is also called a "normal mode"). As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the game number display GH of "151 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The pending icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "second pending". A game number display GH of "152 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In particular, the number-of-games display GH is different from the number-of-games display at normal times. Here, it is a white character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "6" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at "5" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "3" symbol. Here, in particular, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the second mode. The second mode is a production pattern of a design imitating a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is green. The second mode has a larger performance pattern than the first mode (the modes shown in FIGS. 90(D) and (F) and FIGS. 91(D) and (F)). Three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, the number of games displayed GH is displayed in white characters "152".

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(E), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is a effect in which the temporarily stopped effect pattern starts to fluctuate again. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate again and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The pending icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "second pending". In the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, the number of games displayed GH is displayed in white characters "152".

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(F), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "2" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at "8" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "9" symbol. Here, especially, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the second mode. Three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, the number of games displayed GH is displayed in white characters "152".

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(G), a re-variation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is a effect in which the temporarily stopped effect pattern starts to fluctuate again. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate again and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The pending icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "second pending". In the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, the number of games displayed GH is displayed in white characters "152".

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(H), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at "4" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "0" design, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the second mode. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, the number of games displayed GH is displayed in white characters "152".

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(I), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Two pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A pending icon 9A indicated by a symbol T is "first pending". A game number display GH of "153 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The game number display GH returns to the normal mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(J), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "7" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern. Here, in particular, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the third mode. The third mode is a production pattern of a design imitating a 7-segment display (also referred to as a "7-segment design"), and the display color is red. In the third mode, the production pattern is larger than in the second mode. As a result, part of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Two pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A game number display GH of "153 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(K), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a pending icon 9A and a variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. A game number display GH of "154 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(L), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the “7” symbol. As a result, it is notified that it is a "jackpot". Here, in particular, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to normal modes. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. A game number display GH of "154 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

In the effect pattern mode change effect C, the mode of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is changed to the second mode over the period of the pseudo-continuous effect. In addition, under the condition (third condition) that the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the reservation that is a big hit has become the "first reservation", the mode of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is changed to the third mode. . Then, in the variation that results in a big hit, the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed to the normal mode (fourth mode).

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of the production pattern mode change production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the first condition is established, the mode of the production pattern is changed to the first mode while the production pattern is fluctuating, and the production pattern of the first mode is stopped (Fig. 90 (D) (F) ), FIG. 91(D)). According to this configuration, since the mode of the performance pattern changes to the first mode when the first condition is established, the performance is unprecedented and novel, and the player can be visually entertained, thereby improving the amusement. be able to. The production control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "production executing means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the second condition is established, the mode of the production pattern is changed to the second mode different from the first mode during the variation of the production pattern, and the production pattern of the second mode is stopped (Fig. 90). (H), FIG. 91(F)(H)). According to this configuration, since the mode of the performance pattern changes to the second mode when the second condition is satisfied, the performance is novel and unprecedented, and the player can be visually entertained, thereby improving the amusement. be able to.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the third condition is established, the mode of the performance pattern is changed to the third mode different from the first mode and the second mode while the performance pattern is fluctuating, and the performance pattern of the third mode is stopped. (Fig. 90(J), Fig. 91(J), Fig. 92(J)). According to this configuration, the mode of the performance pattern changes to the third mode when the third condition is established, so that the performance becomes novel and unconventional, and the player can be visually entertained, thereby improving the amusement. be able to.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the pseudo-continuous effect that produces a pseudo continuous variation during one fluctuation of the effect symbols, the mode of the effect symbol is changed to the second mode over the period of the pseudo-continuous effect. (FIGS. 92(C)-(H)). According to this configuration, the period of the pseudo-continuous effect can be emphasized, so that the effect is novel and unprecedented, and the player can be visually entertained, thereby improving the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of games is displayed as the number of times information based on the number of variations of the performance symbols. is changed to a mode different from the normal mode (FIGS. 92(C) to (H)). According to this configuration, the period of the pseudo-continuous effect can be emphasized, so that the effect is novel and unprecedented, and the player can be visually entertained, thereby improving the interest. The effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "number of times display means".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when a big win is achieved, the fourth mode (normal mode) different from the first mode, the second mode and the third mode is changed during the fluctuation of the effect pattern, and the fourth mode is changed to the normal mode. The production pattern is stopped (Fig. 90 (L), Fig. 91 (L), Fig. 92 (L)). According to this configuration, when the jackpot is won, the mode of the performance pattern is changed to the fourth mode, so that it becomes a novel performance that has never been seen before, the player can be visually entertained, and the amusement is improved. can be planned.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the production pattern mode change production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, in the performance pattern mode change performances A and B, the mode of the performance pattern is changed from normal mode→first mode→second mode→third mode→normal mode (fourth mode). In addition, in the production pattern mode change production C, the production pattern mode is changed from normal mode→second mode→third mode→normal mode (fourth mode). On the other hand, the mode of the production pattern may be changed in any order. For example, a change may be made from the normal mode to the third mode, the first mode to the third mode, or the change from the third mode to the second mode, the second mode to the first mode, and the first mode to the normal mode. You may let

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the mode of the performance symbol is changed to the second mode over the period of the pseudo-continuous performance (FIGS. 92(C)-(H)). On the other hand, the mode of the performance symbol may be changed to the first mode or the third mode over the period of the pseudo-continuous performance.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the condition is which of the "first suspension", "second suspension", "third suspension" and "fourth suspension" the suspension icon 9A corresponding to the suspension of the jackpot As a result, the aspect of the production pattern was changed. Any one of "1st hold", "2nd hold", "3rd hold" and "4th hold" and the condition can be any of the 1st condition, the 2nd condition and the 3rd condition good. How to set the first to third conditions can be determined by scheduling using a dedicated table or the like in the preliminary determination process, for example.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, the big hit hold is the target hold (the hold indicated by the symbol T), but the target hold including the loss hold may be selected. In this case, the aspect of the production pattern may be changed according to the degree of expectation for the big win. For example, the higher the degree of expectation for the big win, the easier it is to change to the third mode.

[Modification 5]
In the above-described embodiment, the design is changed to the normal mode (fourth mode), the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. The change in the aspect of the production pattern may be, for example, a change in at least one of the shape, size, orientation, display color, and transparency (darkness) of the production pattern.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the normal mode is the fourth mode, but the fourth mode may be provided separately from the normal mode.

[Modification 7]
In the above-described embodiment, when the target hold (the hold indicated by the symbol T) is a jackpot, the mode of the production pattern is changed to the fourth mode in the variation corresponding to the hold. On the other hand, when the target hold includes a loss (when a false result is included), the mode of the production pattern may be changed to the fourth mode in at least one of the winning variation and the losing variation.

[Modification 8]
In the above embodiment, the first to third conditions are set on the assumption that there is a target hold (hold indicated by symbol T). On the other hand, it does not matter how the first to third conditions are set. For example, the first to third conditions may be satisfied when a specific number of games is reached. For example, the first condition is met when the number of games is a multiple of 2, the second condition is met when the number of games is a multiple of 3, and the second condition is met when the number of games is a multiple of 5. A configuration that satisfies the third condition is conceivable. Further, for example, the first to third conditions may be met when the number of games is within a predetermined range. For example, the first condition is satisfied when the number of games is 0 to 99, the second condition is satisfied when the number of games is 100 to 199, and the third condition is satisfied when the number of games is 200 or more. It is conceivable to make a configuration that holds.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine comprising an effect execution means for executing a variable stop display that stops and displays the effect symbols that are fluctuating in a plurality of rows,
The effect execution means changes the mode of the effect pattern to the first mode during the fluctuation of the effect symbol when the first condition is established, and executes the change stop display to stop the effect symbol of the first mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
The effect executing means changes the mode of the effect pattern to a second mode different from the first mode during the fluctuation of the effect pattern when a second condition is established, and stops the effect pattern of the second mode. perform a stop display,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2,
The performance execution means changes the mode of the performance pattern to a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode during the variation of the performance pattern when a third condition is established, and the performance pattern of the third mode. executing the variable stop indication to stop the
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-3,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect that produces a pseudo-continuous change during one variation of the effect symbol,
In the pseudo-continuous effect, the mode of the effect pattern is changed to one of the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode over the period of the pseudo-continuous effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-3,
The effect execution means can execute a pseudo-continuous effect that produces a pseudo continuous change during one variation of the effect symbol,
A frequency display means capable of displaying frequency information based on the number of times of variation of the performance pattern in parallel with the change stop display by the performance execution means,
The number display means changes the display mode of the number information to a mode different from the normal mode during the pseudo-continuous performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-3 to C1-5,
The production execution means changes the production pattern to a fourth mode different from the first mode, the second mode and the third mode during the fluctuation of the production pattern when the jackpot is won, and the production pattern of the fourth mode is changed. executing the variable stop indication to stop the
A gaming machine characterized by:

The game number display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. FIG. This number-of-games display effect is executed in conjunction with the variable effect of the effect symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the number-of-games display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Number of games display effect A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-games display effect A. FIG. In the number-of-games display effect A, the number-of-games display of the first mode and the number-of-games display of the second mode different from the first mode are performed. 93(A) to (F) show a first example of the number-of-games display effect A, and FIGS. 93(G)-(L) show a second example of the number-of-games display effect A. FIG.

In the first example of the number-of-games display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 93(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game count display GH1 of the first mode of "151 times" is displayed. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A indicate the number of pending lotteries for the first special symbol (special symbol 1).

The special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5) includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. contains. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided.

The four reserved icons 9A are stored in the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a in order from the rightmost reserved icon 9A. Corresponds to a group of numbers (pending information). The suspension icons 9A corresponding to the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area are set to "first suspension", "second suspension", "third storage", and "fourth suspension", respectively. Also called These pending icons 9A shift to the right with each change. That is, the "first hold" hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, the "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "first hold" hold icon 9A, and the "third hold" hold icon 9A becomes " The pending icon 9A of the "second pending" becomes the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A of the "fourth pending" becomes the pending icon 9A of the "third pending".
Here, in particular, the description will be continued assuming that the lottery determination result (prefetching result) for the second pending reservation icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "big hit".

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "151 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. A pending icon 9A indicated by a symbol T is the first pending. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH1 of the first mode of "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(D), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "3" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "4" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH1 of the first mode of "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(E), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. At the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "153 times" is displayed. The number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode is displayed in bold letters unlike the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the “7” symbol. As a result, it is notified that it is a "jackpot". As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. At the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "153 times" is displayed.

In the second example of the number-of-games display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 93(G), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH1 of the first mode of "151 times" is displayed. Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A indicate the number of pending lotteries for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). They are also referred to as "first suspension", "second suspension", "third suspension", and "fourth suspension" in order from the right end of the suspension icon 9A. These pending icons 9A shift to the right with each change. That is, the "first hold" hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, the "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "first hold" hold icon 9A, and the "third hold" hold icon 9A becomes " The pending icon 9A of the "second pending" becomes the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A of the "fourth pending" becomes the pending icon 9A of the "third pending".
Here, in particular, the description will be continued assuming that the lottery determination result (prefetching result) for the second pending reservation icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "big hit".

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(H), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "151 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(I), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "151 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(I), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. A pending icon 9A indicated by a symbol T is the first pending. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH1 of the first mode of "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(J), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "3" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "4" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH1 of the first mode of "152 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(K), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "153 times" is displayed. The number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode is displayed in bold letters unlike the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(L), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the “7” symbol. As a result, it is notified that it is a "jackpot". As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode of "153 times" is displayed.

[Number of games display effect B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-games display effect B. FIG. In the number-of-games display effect B, the number-of-games display of the first mode and the number-of-games display of the second mode different from the first mode are performed. 94(A) to (F) show a first example of the number-of-games display effect B, and FIGS. 94(G)-(L) show a second example of the number-of-games display effect B. FIG.

In the first example of the number-of-games display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 94(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game count display GH1 of the first mode of "151 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "twice" is displayed. The number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode is displayed in bold letters unlike the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode.

Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A indicate the number of pending lotteries for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The four suspension icons 9A are also called "first suspension", "second suspension", "third suspension", and "fourth suspension" in order from the right end. These pending icons 9A shift to the right with each change. That is, the "first hold" hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, the "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "first hold" hold icon 9A, and the "third hold" hold icon 9A becomes " The pending icon 9A of the "second pending" becomes the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A of the "fourth pending" becomes the pending icon 9A of the "third pending".
Here, in particular, the description will be continued assuming that the lottery determination result (prefetching result) for the second pending reservation icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "big hit".

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "151 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "twice" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. A pending icon 9A indicated by a symbol T is the first pending. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH1 of the first mode of "152 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "1 time" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(D), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "3" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "4" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH1 of the first mode of "152 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "1 time" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(E), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "0 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the “7” symbol. As a result, it is notified that it is a "jackpot". As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "0 times" is displayed.

In the second example of the number-of-games display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 94(G), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game count display GH1 of the first mode of "151 times" is displayed. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode of "twice" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG. The number-of-games display GH2 in the second mode is displayed in bold letters unlike the number-of-games display in the first mode.

Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A indicate the number of pending lotteries for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). They are also referred to as "first suspension", "second suspension", "third suspension", and "fourth suspension" in order from the right end of the suspension icon 9A. These pending icons 9A shift to the right with each change. That is, the "first hold" hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, the "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "first hold" hold icon 9A, and the "third hold" hold icon 9A becomes " The pending icon 9A of the "second pending" becomes the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A of the "fourth pending" becomes the pending icon 9A of the "third pending".
Here, in particular, the description will be continued assuming that the lottery determination result (prefetching result) for the second pending reservation icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "big hit".

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(H), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "151 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode of "twice" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(I), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. A pending icon 9A indicated by a symbol T is the first pending. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH1 of the first mode of "152 times" is displayed. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode of "once" is displayed and moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(J), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "3" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "4" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH1 of the first mode of "152 times" is displayed. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode of "once" is displayed and moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(K), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "0 times" is displayed and moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(L), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the “7” symbol. As a result, it is notified that it is a "jackpot". As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "0 times" is displayed and moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG.

[Number of games display effect C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-games display effect C. FIG. In the number-of-games display effect C, the number-of-games display of the first mode, the number-of-games display of the second mode different from the first mode, and the number-of-games display of the third mode different from the first and second modes are performed. 95(A) to (F) show a first example of the number-of-games display effect C, and FIGS. 95(G)-(L) show a second example of the number-of-games display effect C. FIG.

In the first example of the number-of-games display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 95(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game count display GH1 of the first mode of "151 times" is displayed. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode of "twice" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG. The number-of-games display GH2 in the second mode is displayed in bold letters unlike the number-of-games display in the first mode. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH3 of the third mode of "twice" is displayed. The number-of-games display GH3 of the third mode is displayed in white characters unlike the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode and the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode.

Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A indicate the number of pending lotteries for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The four suspension icons 9A are also called "first suspension", "second suspension", "third suspension", and "fourth suspension" in order from the right end. These pending icons 9A shift to the right with each change. That is, the "first hold" hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, the "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "first hold" hold icon 9A, and the "third hold" hold icon 9A becomes " The pending icon 9A of the "second pending" becomes the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A of the "fourth pending" becomes the pending icon 9A of the "third pending".
Here, in particular, the description will be continued assuming that the lottery determination result (prefetching result) for the second pending reservation icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "big hit".

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "151 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode of "twice" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH3 of the third mode of "twice" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. A pending icon 9A indicated by a symbol T is the first pending. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH1 of the first mode of "152 times" is displayed. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode of "once" is displayed and moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH3 of the third mode of "1 time" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(D), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "3" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "4" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH1 of the first mode of "152 times" is displayed. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode of "once" is displayed and moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH3 of the third mode of "1 time" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(E), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "0 times" is displayed and moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH3 of the third mode "0 times" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the “7” symbol. As a result, it is notified that it is a "jackpot". As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game count display GH of the first mode of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "0 times" is displayed and moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH3 of the third mode "0 times" is displayed.

In the second example of the number-of-games display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 95(G), the variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game count display GH1 of the first mode of "151 times" is displayed. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode of "twice" is displayed, moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG. The number-of-games display GH2 in the second mode is displayed in bold letters unlike the number-of-games display in the first mode. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH3 of the third mode of "twice" is displayed. The number-of-games display GH3 of the third mode is displayed in white characters unlike the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode and the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode.

Four pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Four pending icons 9A indicate the number of pending lotteries for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). They are also referred to as "first suspension", "second suspension", "third suspension", and "fourth suspension" in order from the right end of the suspension icon 9A. These pending icons 9A shift to the right with each change. That is, the "first hold" hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, the "second hold" hold icon 9A becomes the "first hold" hold icon 9A, and the "third hold" hold icon 9A becomes " The pending icon 9A of the "second pending" becomes the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9A of the "fourth pending" becomes the pending icon 9A of the "third pending".
Here, in particular, the description will be continued assuming that the lottery determination result (prefetching result) for the second pending reservation icon 9A indicated by the symbol T is "big hit".

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "151 times" is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH3 of the third mode of "twice" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(I), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. A pending icon 9A indicated by a symbol T is the first pending. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH1 of the first mode of "152 times" is displayed. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode of "once" is displayed and moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(J), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "3" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "4" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH1 of the first mode of "152 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH3 of the third mode of "1 time" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(K), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C indicated by the symbol T are displayed. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper area R of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH2 of the second mode of "0 times" is displayed and moved in the direction indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(L), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the “7” symbol. As a result, it is notified that it is a "jackpot". As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. In the lower right part of the display screen 7a, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode of "153 times" is displayed. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the game number display GH3 of the third mode "0 times" is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the number-of-games display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is capable of executing a first mode of game number display GH1 and a second mode of game number display GH2 different from the first mode. According to this configuration, the display of the number of times related to the number of games is a novel presentation that has never existed before, and the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. Note that the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "number of times display means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode displays the number of times related to the number of games in the first area, and does not move the display of the number of times related to the number of games within the first area. The number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode, which is the first display, displays the number of times related to the number of games in the second area, and moves the display of the number of times related to the number of games within the second area. (FIGS. 94(G) to (L), FIG. 95). According to this configuration, the display of the number of times related to the number of games is presented in a novel way that has not existed in the past, and the player can be visually entertained, thereby improving the amusement.
In FIGS. 94(G)-(L) and FIG. 95, the lower right area of the display screen 7a where the game number display GH1 is performed corresponds to the "first area", and the display screen where the game number display GH2 is performed. The region R above 7a corresponds to the "second region". The game number display GH1 in FIGS. 94(G)-(L) and FIG. 95 corresponds to the "first display", and the game number display GH2 corresponds to the "second display".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the number-of-games display GH1 of the first mode displays the number of times related to the number of games in the first area, and increases the display of the number of times related to the number of games. The number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode displays the number of times related to the number of games in the second area, and is a decrease display that decreases the number of times in the display of the number of times related to the number of games (Fig. 94, Fig. 95). According to this configuration, the display of the number of times related to the number of games is a novel presentation that has never existed before, and the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
In FIGS. 94 and 95, the lower right area of the display screen 7a where the game number display GH1 is displayed corresponds to the "first area", and in FIGS. 94A to 94F the game number display GH2 is displayed. 94(G)-(L) and FIG. 95, and the upper area R of the display screen 7a where the game number display GH2 is displayed correspond to the "second area". The game number display GH1 in FIGS. 94 and 95 corresponds to "increase display", and the game number display GH2 corresponds to "decrease display".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game number display GH3 of the third mode, which is different from the first mode and the second mode, can be executed. At least two of the game number displays GH1, GH2, and GH3 can be executed in parallel (FIG. 95). According to this configuration, the display of the number of times related to the number of games is a novel presentation that has never existed before, and the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the number-of-games display GH3 of the third aspect displays the number of times related to the number of games in the third area, and displays a decrease display to decrease the number of times related to the number of games. (Fig. 95). According to this configuration, the display of the number of times related to the number of games is a novel presentation that has never existed before, and the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
In FIG. 95, the upper left area of the display screen 7a where the number of games display GH3 is displayed corresponds to the "third area". The number-of-games display GH3 in FIG. 95 corresponds to the "decrease display".

[Modification]
A modification of the number-of-games display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the areas where the number of games GH1, GH2, and GH3 are displayed are provided at the periphery of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the area where the number of games is displayed may be provided anywhere on the display screen 7a.
For example, an area where the number of games is displayed may be provided so as to overlap at least a part of the areas where the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed. In this case, it is conceivable that the number of games is displayed when the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Also, for example, as shown in FIGS. 93A to 93F, areas may be provided so that the areas where the number of games GH1, GH2, and GH3 are displayed overlap each other.

[Modification 2]
In the number-of-games display effect A (FIG. 93) in the above-described embodiment, the number-of-games display GH2 of the second mode is performed in the variation of the big win. In addition, in the number-of-games display effects B and C (FIGS. 94 and 95), the number of games remaining until a big win is displayed by number-of-games displays GH2 and GH3 of the second and third modes. The display of the number of games may be any display of the number of times related to the number of games, and is not limited to these. For example, the mode of displaying the number of games may be changed during a period such as a zone effect that is executed over a plurality of variations.

[Modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, the big hit hold is the target hold (the hold indicated by the symbol T), but the target hold including the loss hold may be selected. In this case, the mode of displaying the number of games may be changed according to the degree of expectation for the big win.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, when performing the game number display GH1, GH2, and GH3 of the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode, the game number display GH2 of the second mode is displayed in bold characters, and the game number display GH2 of the third mode is displayed in bold. The game number display GH3 is displayed in white characters. Such a mode of displaying the number of games may be different, for example, in at least one of character shape, size, orientation, display color, and transparency (darkness).

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with the first to third areas where the number of games GH1, GH2, and GH3 are displayed. Alternatively, at least one of the first to third regions may be provided on the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine comprising a number display means capable of displaying the number of times, which is the display of the number of times related to the number of games showing the number of times the special symbols have changed,
The number of times display means is capable of executing the number of times display of a first mode and the number of times display of a second mode different from the first mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The display of the number of times of the first mode is a first display in which the number of times related to the number of games is displayed in the first area and the display of the number of times related to the number of games is not moved within the first area,
The display of the number of times of the second mode is a second display that displays the number of times related to the number of games in a second area and moves the display of the number of times related to the number of games within the second area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The display of the number of times of the first aspect is an increase display that displays the number of times related to the number of games in the first area, and increases the number of times in the display of the number of times related to the number of games,
The display of the number of times of the second mode is a decrease display that displays the number of times related to the number of games in the second area, and decreases the number of times in the display of the number of times related to the number of games.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
The number-of-times display means can execute the number-of-times display of a third mode that is different from the first mode and the second mode, and the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. is executable in parallel at least two of said counts of
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-4,
The display of the number of times of the third aspect is a decrease display that displays the number of times related to the number of games in a third area, and decreases the number of times in the display of the number of times related to the number of games.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Enlarged pattern display effects A and B and reduced pattern display effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. FIG. The enlarged symbol display effects A and B and the reduced symbol display effects are executed during the variable effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the enlarged pattern display effect A, B or the reduced pattern display effect is included, the corresponding image is read from the ROM 103. Data is read out and images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Enlarged pattern display effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the enlarged pattern display effect A. FIG. The enlarged pattern display effect A is a effect in which, during the variable effect, an enlarged pattern with a changed aspect ratio of the decorative pattern is variably displayed and stopped in place of a certain decorative pattern. It should be noted that the change in the aspect ratio here refers to the change in the aspect ratio in the direction in which the numbers representing the contents of the decorative design are read. In addition, the display of images in this effect is performed by the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. In addition, when the display is stopped, there are cases where the display screen 7a stops so that two symbols can be visually recognized at the same time, and cases where one symbol is displayed so that it can be visually recognized. If the result of (2) is a win, the game is stopped so that any one of the three pairs of symbols arranged on a straight line (not necessarily horizontal) is in a winning mode. In addition, the three patterns arranged on a straight line here include those arranged on a substantially straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 96(A), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied at high speed, and their contents become difficult to see. Although the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. It should be noted that the result of the special figure lottery that triggered this variable production continues to explain as if it was a hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), only the left decorative pattern 8L undergoes deceleration fluctuation, while the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the enlarged pattern 8Lb is framed in the left decorative pattern 8L that is being displayed in deceleration. Here, instead of the decorative symbol 8L representing "6", the enlarged symbol 8Lb is decelerated and variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), in the left decorative pattern 8L, the enlarged pattern 8Lb representing "6" framed in in FIG. 111(C) is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), the right ornamental pattern 8R is decelerated and displayed, and the contents can be visually recognized. At this time, all of the right decorative symbols 8R that are decelerated and displayed are replaced with the enlarged symbols 8Rb and displayed. Here, the decorative pattern 8R representing "2" and the decorative pattern 8R representing "3" are replaced with enlarged patterns 8Rb representing the contents of each, and are displayed in deceleration variation. That is, after the enlarged pattern 8Lb is stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L, a plurality of enlarged patterns 8Rb are variably displayed in the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(F), the right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed. Here, the enlarged symbols 8Rb representing "5" and "6" are stopped. Therefore, at this point, two patterns of "6↓5" and "6↓6" are arranged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(G), the middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and variably displayed. Furthermore, the background image representing the chance zone is displayed in a straight line forming a row of "6 ↓ 6" among the rows of the two decorative patterns formed in Fig. 96 (F), and the background image A message image CM of "CHANCE ZONE" is displayed, indicating that the displayed position is the chance zone. This chance zone CZ is displayed only when a ready-to-win is formed, and when a decorative pattern having the same content as the decorative pattern forming the ready-to-win stops within a range where the background image is different, a win is achieved. It is intended to suggest that Therefore, since the chance zone CZ shown in FIG. 96(G) is due to the reach formed by the enlarged patterns 8Lb and 8Rb, the width in the direction of variation of the chance zone at the time of reaching by the decorative patterns 8L and 8R in the normal mode Also, it is assumed that the width in the change direction of the chance zone at the time of reach by the enlarged symbols 8Lb and 8Rb is wider.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed. Here, the middle decorative symbols 8C representing "5" and "6" are stopped and displayed so as to be visible. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C representing "6" is stopped and displayed within the chance zone CZ, suggesting that the variation is a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(I), among the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in FIG. The decorative pattern of is difficult to see. Also, the chance zone CZ and the message image CM are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(J), among the decorative symbols 8Lb, 8C, and 8Rb stopped and displayed in FIG. 96(I), the aspect ratio of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is not the enlarged pattern, gradually changes. Then, it becomes an enlarged pattern 8Cb. That is, after the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped, the aspect ratio of the middle decorative pattern 8C that is stopped and displayed changes, and the enlarged pattern 8Cb changes. After that, a fixed stop is executed, and a jackpot game is executed.

The above is the display example of the enlarged pattern display effect A and the execution flow. In the enlarged pattern display effect A, when the reach is formed by the enlarged patterns 8Lb and 8Rb, the chance zone is displayed with a wider width in the direction of fluctuation than the chance zone at the time of reach by the decorative patterns 8R and 8L of the normal mode. , the possibility that the player will have a feeling of anticipation for winning is higher than reach by the decorative symbols 8L and 8R of the normal mode. Therefore, by executing the enlarged pattern display effect A, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Enlarged pattern display effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining enlarged pattern display effect B. FIG. It should be noted that all decorative designs are composed of a number image representing the content of the design and a decorative image forming a decorative portion. The enlarged pattern display performance B is a performance in which an enlarged pattern whose aspect ratio is changed by enlarging the decorative image of a certain decorative pattern is variably displayed and stopped in place of a certain decorative pattern during the variable performance. . In the enlarged pattern, the size of the numeric image described above is not changed, and the size of the enlarged pattern in the direction of fluctuation is the same as the size of the decorative pattern in the normal mode due to the expansion of the decorative image. It shall be greater than the sum of the size of the interval and Further, the change in the aspect ratio here refers to the change in the aspect ratio in the direction in which the numbers representing the contents of the decorative design are read. In addition, the display of images in this effect is performed by the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. In addition, when the display is stopped, there are cases where the display screen 7a stops so that two symbols can be visually recognized at the same time, and cases where one symbol is displayed so that it can be visually recognized. If the result of (2) is a win, the game is stopped so that any one of the three pairs of symbols arranged on a straight line (not necessarily horizontal) is in a winning mode. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 97(A), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied at high speed, and their contents become difficult to see. Although the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. It should be noted that the result of the special figure lottery that triggered this variable production continues to explain as if it was a hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), only the left decorative pattern 8L undergoes deceleration fluctuation, while the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L representing "5" and "6" is stopped and displayed so as to be visible. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with high-speed fluctuation, as in FIG. 97(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), the right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated and variably displayed. Therefore, "5" and "6" of the left decorative pattern 8L are displayed in a stopped state, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in deceleration fluctuation display, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in high speed fluctuation display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is stop-displayed. Here, the right decorative pattern 8R representing "6" and "7" is stopped and displayed. In this case, four patterns of "6↓7", "6↓6", "5↓7", and "5↓6" are conceivable for the arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. A sequence of "6↓6", that is, a left decorative symbol 8L representing "6" stopped and displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a and a right decorative symbol 8R representing "6" stopped and displayed in the lower right part of the display screen 7a. is forming the reach.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(G), in the middle decorative pattern 8C that is being displayed in deceleration variation, instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C representing "6", an enlarged pattern 8Cb that similarly represents "6" is framed. do.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), an enlarged design 8Cb representing "6" is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative design 8C. That is, after the enlarged pattern 8Cb is variably displayed in FIG. 97(G), the enlarged pattern 8Cb is stopped and displayed so as to be visible. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L representing "6" is stopped in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the enlarged pattern 8Cb representing "6" is stopped in the central part, and the left decorative pattern 8Cb is stopped in the lower right part of the display screen 7a. The arrangement of the winning mode of the right decorative symbol 8R representing "6" and the decorative symbol "666" suggests that the variation is a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(I), in FIG. 97(H), the left decorative symbol 8L representing "6" is stopped in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped in the lower right part of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R representing "6" gradually changes to "6" enlarged patterns 8Lb and 8Rb, respectively. That is, after the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed, the aspect ratios of the decorative patterns are changed. It should be noted that when the left decorative pattern 8L that has been stopped and displayed gradually changes to the enlarged pattern 8Lb, the decoration image of the left decorative pattern 8L is expanded in the direction of fluctuation, and the position of the number image is also moved in the direction of fluctuation. Further, when the right decorative pattern 8R that has been stopped and displayed gradually changes to the enlarged pattern 8Rb, the decorative image of the right decorative pattern 8R is expanded vertically upward, and the position of the number image is also moved vertically upward. do. In addition, along with this, the left decorative pattern 8L representing "5" and the right decorative pattern 8R representing "7", which have been stopped and displayed, are replaced by enlarged patterns 8Lb and 8Rb of the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, respectively. It gradually becomes difficult to see due to the change to

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(J), the enlarged patterns 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb representing "6" gradually change to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R of the normal mode, and the game is fixed and stopped. That is, after the enlarged patterns 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Rb are stopped and displayed, the aspect ratios of the enlarged patterns 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Rb return to the aspect ratios before the change. As a result, it is determined that the variation was a win, and thereafter, a big win game is executed.

The above is the display example of the enlarged pattern display effect B and the execution flow. In the enlarged pattern display effect B, after forming reach with the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, the enlarged pattern 8Cb having the same content as the decorative pattern forming the reach is displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C by decelerating and fluctuating. Then, the time for the enlarged pattern 8Cb to pass through the straight line forming the reach becomes longer, so that the player may have more expectations for winning than when the middle decorative pattern 8C in the normal mode passes. becomes higher. Therefore, by executing the enlarged symbol display effect B, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Reduced pattern display effect]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the reduced pattern display effect. The reduced pattern display performance is a performance in which, in place of a certain decorative pattern, a reduced pattern in which the aspect ratio of the size of the decorative pattern is changed is variably displayed and stopped. It should be noted that the change in the aspect ratio here refers to the change in the aspect ratio in the direction in which the numbers representing the contents of the decorative design are read. Also, the image display in this effect is performed by the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the time of deceleration fluctuation. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed so as to be difficult to see. In addition, when the display is stopped, there are cases where the display screen 7a stops so that two symbols can be visually recognized at the same time, and cases where one symbol is displayed so that it can be visually recognized. If the result of (2) is a win, the game is stopped so that any one of the three pairs of symbols arranged on a straight line (not necessarily horizontal) is in a winning mode. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the variable effect is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and the contents of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R become difficult to see. Although the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. It should be noted that the result of the special figure lottery that triggered this variable production continues to explain as if it was a hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), only the left decorative pattern 8L undergoes deceleration fluctuation, while the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), in the left decorative pattern 8L that is being displayed with deceleration variation, instead of the left decorative pattern 8L representing "6", a plurality of reduced patterns 8Ls similarly representing "6" are displayed. frame in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a slowdown and variable manner so as to be filled with countless reduced patterns 8Ls representing "6", and then stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated and variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(F), in the right decorative pattern 8R as well, instead of the right decorative pattern 8R representing "6", after a plurality of reduced patterns 8Rs similarly representing "6" are framed in, A stop display is made in a state in which a reduced pattern 8Rs representing an infinite number of "6" is displayed. This suggests that a reach is formed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C representing "6" stops in a row of "666" in the winning mode no matter where the middle decorative pattern 8C stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(G), in order to notify that the middle decorative pattern 8C representing "6" in the middle decorative pattern 8C stops at any position, and the winning mode "666" is aligned. , a message image SM saying "Big Chance!!! Stop 6!!!" is displayed. While the message image SM is displayed, all the decorative patterns and reduced patterns are difficult to see, but may be made visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C representing "6" and "7" is stopped and displayed. Therefore, at least one of the innumerable reduced symbols 8Ls representing "6" stopped and displayed on the left part of the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C representing "6" stopped and displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, At least one of the innumerable 8Rs of reduced symbols representing '6' displayed stopped on the right side forms a row of '666' winning modes, suggesting that the variation is a win. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(J), in FIG. 98(H), a reduced pattern 8Ls representing a countless number of "6" is displayed stopped on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a reduced pattern 8Ls is stopped on the right side of the display screen 7a. The innumerable reduced patterns 8Rs representing "6" are changed to the decorative patterns 8L, 8R representing "6" in the normal mode, and then fixed and stopped. As a result, it is determined that the variation was a win, and after that, a big win game is executed.

The above is the display example of the reduced pattern display effect and the execution flow. In the reduced pattern display effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with countless reduced patterns having the same content, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C has the same content as that forming the reach. Since the middle decorative pattern can be recognized as a hit no matter where it stops, the player can have more expectations for the hit than when the reach is formed by the decorative patterns 8L and 8R in the normal mode. become more sexual. Therefore, by executing the reduced symbol display effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 96 to 98, a first effect of variably displaying the symbol row in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged in the varying direction, and after the first effect, A second effect in which enlarged patterns 8Lb, 8Rb, 8Cb or reduced patterns 8Ls, 8Rs, which are patterns obtained by changing the aspect ratio of decorative patterns in the pattern row, are displayed, and after the second effect, the enlarged patterns are displayed. 8Lb, 8Rb, 8Cb, or a third effect in which the reduced symbols 8Ls, 8Rs are stop-displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponds to "display means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, in the first effect, a plurality of pattern rows of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, and in the second effect, for example, "6" is displayed. is displayed, and in the third effect, after the enlarged symbol 8Lb of "6" is stopped and displayed, all the decorative symbols that are decelerated and variably displayed in the right decorative symbol 8R are replaced with the enlarged symbol 8Rb. It was configured to be displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponds to "display means".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, after the third effect, the aspect ratio of the enlarged symbols 8Lb, 8Rb, 8Cb or the reduced symbols 8Ls, 8Rs stopped is changed. It was configured to be able to execute the fourth effect of returning to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the decorative symbols are configured to include a number image and a decorative image. It has the same size as the numerical image of the decorative design of the mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the length of the enlarged pattern 8Cb in the variation direction is the length of the decorative pattern in the normal mode and the interval between the decorative patterns included in the pattern row. The composition is larger than the total. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, a first effect of variably displaying a symbol row in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged in the varying direction, and after the first effect, A second effect in which the middle decorative pattern 8C or the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed, and after the second effect, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R that are stopped and displayed vertically and horizontally. It is configured to be able to execute the third effect of the enlarged pattern 8Cb or the enlarged patterns 8Lb and 8Rb. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
4 shows a modification of the present embodiment.
[Modification 1]
In the enlarged pattern display performance B, the number image of the decorative patterns was displayed in the central part of the decorative patterns. On the other hand, the position of the numeric image within the decorative pattern may be changed arbitrarily.

[Modification 2]
In the enlarged symbol display performances A and B, for example, when the enlarged symbol 8Cb representing "6" enters the frame, the enlarged symbol 8Cb representing "6" is always stopped and displayed. On the other hand, it may be configured to execute an effect such that the enlarged pattern is out of the frame.

[Modification 3]
In the enlarged pattern display effects A and B, and the reduced pattern display effect, the orientation of the enlarged pattern whose aspect ratio has been changed and the number image representing the contents of the reduced pattern are the same as before the change in aspect ratio. was configured. On the other hand, the aspect ratio of the size of the decorative design may be changed by changing the orientation of the numeric image representing the content of the decorative design or the orientation of the decorative design itself.

[Modification 4]
In the enlarged pattern display performance B, as shown in FIGS. 97(H) and (I), when the decorative image of the stationary displayed decorative patterns is expanded and changed to the enlarged pattern, the position of the number image is also changed. was configured to be On the other hand, the position of the numeric image may be configured so as not to be changed.

[Modification 5]
In the enlarged pattern display effects A, B, and the reduced pattern display effect, after the enlarged pattern 8Lb or the reduced pattern 8Ls is stopped in one pattern row (here, the left decorative pattern 8L), the other pattern rows ( Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R), the enlarged pattern 8Rb or the reduced pattern 8Rs is framed and displayed variably. On the other hand, resized symbols with changed aspect ratios may be variably displayed at the same time in a plurality of symbol rows.

[Modification 6]
In numerical image display effects A to C, the described effects may be appropriately combined.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect of variably displaying a symbol row in which a plurality of decorative symbols are arranged in a varying direction;
a second effect in which, after the first effect, a resized pattern in which the aspect ratio of the decorative pattern is changed is displayed in the pattern row;
After the second effect, a third effect in which the resized pattern is stopped and displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
In the first production, the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed,
In the second effect, the resized symbol is displayed in one symbol row out of the plurality of symbol rows,
In the third effect, after the resized symbols are stopped and displayed, a plurality of the resized symbols are variably displayed in another symbol row different from the symbol row in which the resized symbols are stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
After the third effect, a fourth effect can be executed in which the aspect ratio of the stopped and displayed resized pattern returns to that before the change;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The decorative pattern includes a numeric image and a decorative image,
The number image included in the resized design has the same size as the number image of the decorative design.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
In the direction of fluctuation, the length of the resized pattern is greater than the sum of the length of the decorative pattern and the interval between the decorative patterns included in the pattern row.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-6]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect of variably displaying a symbol row in which a plurality of decorative symbols are arranged in a varying direction;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the decorative symbols included in the symbol row are stopped and displayed;
After the second effect, a third effect in which the aspect ratio of the stationary display of the decorative pattern changes,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending image simultaneous change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. This pending image all-at-once change effect is executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the pending image simultaneous change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub-display screen 64. FIG.

[Holding image simultaneous change effect A]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the pending image simultaneous change effect A. FIG. The pending image simultaneous change effect is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning by sequentially changing the color of a plurality of pending icons in a state in which a plurality of pending icons are displayed in a row.

In the pending image simultaneous change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 99(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. be.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed above the display screen 7a. Variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation) is represented by variable display, and a special symbol lottery result is notified by stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. In FIG. 99(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation corresponding to the current special figure variation (the variation).

In FIG. 99(A), two pending icons 9A are displayed according to the number of stored first special figure pending, and a variable icon 9C is displayed on a rectangular image indicating the variable icon display position. Here, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are white circular images. The pending icons 9A are displayed in a horizontal row at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A suggests the degree of expectation of a big win by its color. Here, when the pending icon 9A changes to white, blue, red, and gold, the expectation of a big hit at the time of special figure fluctuation corresponding to the pending icon 9A whose color has changed increases. Here, expectations increase in the order of white, blue, red, and gold. The expectation level of the jackpot is 1% when the color is white, the expectation level of the jackpot is 10% when the color is blue, the expectation level of the jackpot is 30% when the color is red, and the expectation level of the jackpot is when the color is gold. is 50%. The hold icon 9A of this embodiment changes to black, green, and purple in addition to the above four colors. When the pending icon 9A changes to black, green, and purple, the expectation of the jackpot in the special figure variation (the variation) at the time when the color changes (current time) is not the special figure variation corresponding to the changed pending icon 9A. get higher When the variation is black, the variation's jackpot expectation is 10%, when the variation is green, the variation's jackpot expectation is 30%, and when purple, the variation's jackpot expectation is 50%. . Here, the colors of the pending icon 9A are black, green, and purple, prior to blue, red, and gold. That is, it may switch from blue, red, and gold to black, green, and purple during the special figure fluctuation, but there is no opposite. It should be noted that there are cases where black, green, and purple return to blue, red, and gold at the end of fluctuation.

In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and wins, a third pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 99(B). Here, all three pending icons 9A are white. After that, the pending image simultaneous change effect may be executed at a specific timing after the start of the fluctuation. When this pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, the expectation of the jackpot in the special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation) at the time of execution (current time) increases.

When the pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 99(C), all the (three) displayed pending icons 9A are changed to black all at once (simultaneously). This suggests that the expectation of a jackpot in this variation has risen to 10%. After that, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a pending image disappearing effect is executed in which the three pending icons 9A disappear all at once.

After that, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and wins, four pending icons 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a all at once, as shown in FIG. 99(E). At this time, all four pending icons 9A appear in black.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in the losing mode (losing symbol) of "326". When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears due to the pending digestion. After that, the hold icon 9A shifts to the right.

When the pending icon 9A shifts to the right, the rightmost pending icon 9A moves to the variable icon display position and becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C, as shown in FIG. 99(G). In addition, simultaneously with the shift movement, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the next special figure variation is displayed. Also, the color of all the pending icons 9A changes from black to white. Therefore, the white variation icon 9C and the three pending icons 9A are displayed. After that, the pending image simultaneous change effect may be executed at a specific timing after the start of the fluctuation. When this pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, the expectation of the jackpot in the special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation) at the time of execution (current time) increases.

When the pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 99(H), the three pending icons 9A change to black all at once (simultaneously). This suggests that the expectation of a jackpot in this variation has risen to 10%. After that, as shown in FIG. 99(I), a pending image disappearing effect is executed in which the three pending icons 9A disappear all at once.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(J), 3 pending icons 9A are displayed in green all at once (simultaneously) on the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expectation of a jackpot in this variation has risen to 30%. After that, as shown in FIG. 99(K), a pending image disappearing effect is executed in which the three pending icons 9A disappear all at once.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(L), 3 pending icons 9A are displayed in purple all at once (simultaneously) on the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expectation of a jackpot in this variation has risen to 50%.

[Holding image simultaneous change effect B]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the pending image simultaneous change effect B. FIG. The pending image simultaneous change effect is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning by sequentially changing the color of a plurality of pending icons in a state in which a plurality of pending icons are displayed in a row.

In the pending image simultaneous change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 100(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. be.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed above the display screen 7a. Variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation) is represented by variable display, and a special symbol lottery result is notified by stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. In FIG. 100(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation corresponding to the current special figure variation (the variation).

In FIG. 100(A), four pending icons 9A are displayed according to the number of stored first special figure pending, and a variable icon 9C is displayed on a rectangular image indicating the variable icon display position. Here, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are white circular images. The pending icons 9A are displayed in a horizontal row at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending icon 9A suggests the degree of expectation of a big win by its color. Here, when the pending icon 9A changes to white, blue, red, and gold, the expectation of a big hit at the time of special figure fluctuation corresponding to the pending icon 9A whose color has changed increases. Here, expectations increase in the order of white, blue, red, and gold. The expectation level of the jackpot is 1% when the color is white, the expectation level of the jackpot is 10% when the color is blue, the expectation level of the jackpot is 30% when the color is red, and the expectation level of the jackpot is when the color is gold. is 50%. The hold icon 9A of this embodiment changes to black, green, and purple in addition to the above four colors. When the pending icon 9A changes to black, green, and purple, the expectation of the jackpot in the special figure variation (the variation) at the time when the color changes (current time) is not the special figure variation corresponding to the changed pending icon 9A. get higher When the variation is black, the variation's jackpot expectation is 10%, when the variation is green, the variation's jackpot expectation is 30%, and when purple, the variation's jackpot expectation is 50%. . Here, the colors of the pending icon 9A are black, green, and purple, prior to blue, red, and gold. That is, it may switch from blue, red, and gold to black, green, and purple during the special figure fluctuation, but there is no opposite. It should be noted that there are cases where black, green, and purple return to blue, red, and gold at the end of fluctuation.

A pending image simultaneous change effect may be executed at a specific timing after the start of the fluctuation. When this pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, the expectation of the jackpot in the special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation) at the time of execution (current time) increases.

When the pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 100(B) to 100(D), the four pending icons 9A sequentially change from left to right to black. Specifically, the leftmost pending icon 9A among the four pending icons 9A, the second pending icon 9A from the left, the third pending icon 9A from the left, and the rightmost pending icon 9A are colored white in this order. to black. When the color of each pending icon 9A changes, the color changes in order from the left end to the right end of the pending icon 9A, and the area of the black portion gradually increases. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100(D), all (four) of the displayed pending icons 9A change to black. This suggests that the expectation of a jackpot in this variation has risen to 10%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100(E), a suspended image disappearing effect is executed in which the four suspended icons 9A disappear all at once. After that, as shown in FIG. 100(F), a pending image number change effect is executed in which the number of displayed pending icons 9A is changed at random. In other words, an effect is executed in which the number of displayed pending icons 9A is randomly set to "1", "2" or "3" even though the number of stored first special figure pending is "4". As a result, the player can be temporarily confused and interested in the number of displayed pending icons 9A. Here, the number of display of the pending icon 9A is temporarily "1".

After that, the pending image number change effect ends, and the number of displayed pending icons 9A returns to the original number of "4" as shown in FIG. 100(G). After that, as shown in FIG. 100(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in the losing mode (losing symbol) of "326". When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon (the relevant pending icon) 9C disappears due to pending digestion. After that, the hold icon 9A shifts to the right.

When the pending icon 9A shifts to the right, as shown in FIG. 100(I), the rightmost pending icon 9A moves to the variable icon display position and becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. In addition, simultaneously with the shift movement, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the next special figure variation is displayed. Also, the color of all the pending icons 9A changes from black to white. Therefore, the white variation icon 9C and the three pending icons 9A are displayed. After that, the pending image simultaneous change effect may be executed at a specific timing after the start of the fluctuation. When this pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, the expectation of the jackpot in the special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation) at the time of execution (current time) increases.

When the pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 100(J) to 100(K), the three pending icons 9A sequentially change to black from bottom to top. Specifically, in each of the three pending icons 9A, the color changes in order from the lower end to the upper end, and the area of the black portion gradually increases. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100(K), all (three) of the displayed pending icons 9A change to black. This suggests that the expectation of a jackpot in this variation has risen to 10%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in the losing mode (losing symbol) of "567". When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears due to the pending digestion. After that, the hold icon 9A shifts to the right.

When the pending icon 9A shifts to the right, the rightmost pending icon 9A moves to the variable icon display position and becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. In addition, simultaneously with the shift movement, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the next special figure variation is displayed. Also, the color of all the pending icons 9A changes from black to white. Therefore, the white variation icon 9C and the two pending icons 9A are displayed.

[Holding image simultaneous change effect C]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the pending image simultaneous change effect C. FIG. The pending image simultaneous change effect is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning by sequentially changing the color of a plurality of pending icons in a state in which a plurality of pending icons are displayed in a line.

In the pending image simultaneous change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 101(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. be.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed above the display screen 7a. Variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation) is represented by variable display, and a special symbol lottery result is notified by stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. In FIG. 101(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation corresponding to the current special figure variation (the variation).

In FIG. 101(A), two pending icons 9A are displayed according to the number of stored first special figure pending, and a variable icon 9C is displayed on a rectangular image indicating the variable icon display position. Here, the variation icon 9C is a white circular image. The pending icon 9A is a white character image, and is displayed in a horizontal line at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The character content of the pending icon 9A changes depending on the number of displayed items. Here, when the number of displayed pending icons 9A is "2", the two pending icons 9A are "I" and "No", resulting in "Dog", and when the number of displayed pending icons 9A is "3", 3 The four pending icons 9A are ``mi'', ``ru'' and ``ku'', resulting in ``milk''. "ya" and "ku" make "Takoyaki".

The pending icon 9A suggests the degree of expectation of a big win by its color. Here, when the pending icon 9A changes to white, blue, red, and gold, the expectation of a big hit at the time of special figure fluctuation corresponding to the pending icon 9A whose color has changed increases. Here, expectations increase in the order of white, blue, red, and gold. The expectation level of the jackpot is 1% when the color is white, the expectation level of the jackpot is 10% when the color is blue, the expectation level of the jackpot is 30% when the color is red, and the expectation level of the jackpot is when the color is gold. is 50%. The hold icon 9A of this embodiment changes to black, green, and purple in addition to the above four colors. When the pending icon 9A changes to black, green, and purple, the expectation of the jackpot in the special figure variation (the variation) at the time when the color changes (current time) is not the special figure variation corresponding to the changed pending icon 9A. get higher When the variation is black, the variation's jackpot expectation is 10%, when the variation is green, the variation's jackpot expectation is 30%, and when purple, the variation's jackpot expectation is 50%. . Here, the colors of the pending icon 9A are black, green, and purple, prior to blue, red, and gold. That is, it may switch from blue, red, and gold to black, green, and purple during the special figure fluctuation, but there is no opposite. It should be noted that there are cases where black, green, and purple return to blue, red, and gold at the end of fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 101(A), in a state in which two pending icons 9A, ie, "I" and "Nu", are displayed, if a game ball enters the first start port 20, FIG. 101 ( As shown in B), after the two pending icons 9A "i" and "nu" disappear once, as shown in FIG. 101(C), three pending icons 9A " "mi", "ru" and "ku" are displayed all at once. In addition, there is a case where the pending image simultaneous change effect is executed at a specific timing after the start of the fluctuation. When this pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, the expectation of the jackpot in the special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation) at the time of execution (current time) increases.

When the pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 101(D) to 101(F), the three pending icons 9A sequentially turn black from left to right. Specifically, the leftmost pending icon 9A of the three pending icons 9A is "only", the middle pending icon 9A is "ru", and the rightmost pending icon 9A is "ku". changes from white to black. When the color of each pending icon 9A changes, the color changes in order from the left end to the right end of the pending icon 9A, and the area of the black portion gradually increases. As a result, as shown in FIG. 101(F), all (three) of the displayed pending icons 9A change to black. This suggests that the expectation of a jackpot in this variation has risen to 10%. After that, the second pending image simultaneous change effect may be executed at a specific timing. When this second reserved image simultaneous change effect is executed, the expectation of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation) at the time of execution (current time) is further increased.

When the pending image simultaneous change effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 101(G) to (H), the three pending icons 9A sequentially change from left to right in green. Specifically, the leftmost pending icon 9A of the three pending icons 9A is "only", the middle pending icon 9A is "ru", and the rightmost pending icon 9A is "ku". switches from black to green. When the color of each pending icon 9A changes, the color changes in order from the left end to the right end of the pending icon 9A, and the area of the green portion gradually increases. As a result, as shown in FIG. 101(H), all (three) of the displayed pending icons 9A change to green. This suggests that the expectation of a jackpot in this variation has risen to 30%.

As shown in FIG. 101(H), in the state where the three pending icons 9A, ie, "mi", "ru" and "ku" are displayed, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, As shown in FIG. 101(I), the four pending icons 9A, ie, "ta", "ko", "ya" and "ki" are displayed all at once on the display screen 7a. After the game ball enters the first start port 20, the display of "Milk" may disappear and "Takoyaki" may be displayed, or the display of "Milk" may be switched to the display of "Takoyaki". good too.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in the losing mode (losing symbol) of "567". When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears due to the pending digestion. After that, the hold icon 9A shifts to the right.

When the pending icon 9A shifts to the right, the rightmost pending icon 9A "ki" moves to the variable icon display position and becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Specifically, when the holding icon 9A “ki” reaches the variable icon display position, it emits light as shown in FIG. 101(K), and then, as shown in FIG. become. As shown in FIG. 101(K), ``ta'', ``ko'' and ``ya'', which are the pending icons 9A other than ``ki'' on the far right side, disappear at the same time as the shift movement. As shown in L), it is redisplayed in a white state. Therefore, the white circular variation icon 9C and the three pending icons 9A, ie, the white "Takoya" are displayed. Simultaneously with the shift movement, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the next special figure variation is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the pending image simultaneous change effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, a plurality of pending icons 9A representing the degree of expectation of winning are displayed in a row on the display screen 7a during the special figure variation. After the first effect (for example, FIG. 99(B), FIG. 100(A), FIG. 101(C)), and after the first effect, at least two of the plurality of pending icons 9A By changing the color in order, at least the second production that suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the special figure fluctuation (for example, FIG. 99 (C), FIG. 100 (B) to (D), FIG. 101 (D) ~ (F)) and can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, in the second effect, the colors of all pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen 7a change in order (eg, FIG. 99 (C), FIG. 100(D), FIG. 101(F)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, one of the plurality of reserved icons 9A arranged in a line is moved from the left end side of the reserved icon 9A to the right end side. 100(B) to (D), FIGS. 101(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, when the color of each pending icon 9A changes, from the left end side of one of the pending icons 9A The color changes toward the right end (for example, FIGS. 100(B) to (D) and FIGS. 101(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, after the second effect, the number of pending icons 9A displayed on the display screen is smaller than the number of the pending icons 9A displayed during the second effect. A third effect displayed in 7a can be executed (for example, FIGS. 100(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, in the third effect, after the display of the hold icon 9A displayed during the second effect disappears, the second effect The number of pending icons 9A that is two or more less than the number of pending icons 9A displayed at the time of 100 is redisplayed on the display screen 7a (for example, FIGS. 100(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the pending image simultaneous change effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the pending image simultaneous change effect A, for example, as shown in FIGS. 99B and 99C, the colors of the multiple pending icons 9A are changed all at once. However, even in the pending image simultaneous change effect A, the colors of the multiple pending icons 9A are changed in order as shown in FIGS. may change.

[Modification 2]
In the pending image simultaneous change effects A to C, when the color of the pending icon 9A changes, the entirety may dimly switch to another color. Alternatively, a pending icon 9A of another color may appear to replace the pending icon 9A of the previous color. Further, in the pending image simultaneous change effects B and C, when the plurality of pending icons 9A are changed in order, the entire pending icon may be switched all at once in each pending icon 9A. Further, in the pending image simultaneous change effects B and C, when the colors of the multiple pending icons 9A change in order, the order of change is not limited to left to right or bottom to top. For example, it may be from right to left or from top to bottom.

[Modification 3]
In the pending image simultaneous change effects A to C, when the multiple pending icons 9A change in order, the color of the variable icon 9C may also change. For example, in FIG. 99(C) and FIG. 100(D), the variation icon 9C may also be black. In the pending image simultaneous change effects A to C, not all of the multiple pending icons 9A, but only some of the pending icons 9A may sequentially change colors, and there may be pending icons 9A whose colors do not change. The effect may be such that the color of only a portion of the hold icon 9A is changed instead of the entire hold icon 9A.

[Modification 4]
In the pending image simultaneous change effects A and C, as shown in FIG. 100F of the pending image simultaneous change effect B, a pending image number change effect in which the number of displayed pending icons 9A changes randomly may be executed. That is, although the number of stored first special figure suspension is "4", the number of display of the suspension icon 9A may be randomly set to "1", "2", or "3". . As a result, the player can be temporarily confused and interested in the number of displayed pending icons 9A. For example, after FIG. 99(D), only one pending icon 9C may be displayed, and then four pending icons 9C may be displayed as shown in FIG. 99(E). Also, for example, after FIG. 101(H), the display of the pending icon 9C disappears, then only "mi" is displayed, and then four pending icons 9C are displayed as shown in FIG. 101(I). good too.

[Modification 5]
In the pending image simultaneous change effects A to C, the pending image simultaneous change effect suggests the degree of expectation for the big win in the variation. However, depending on the pending image simultaneous change effect, it may suggest the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the special figure fluctuation other than the fluctuation. For example, it may suggest the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the next special figure variation in which the pending image simultaneous change effect is executed. Further, in pending image simultaneous change effects A to C, the pending image simultaneous change effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. However, the reserved image simultaneous change effect may suggest a small hit, a normal pattern hit, a prize to the general prize winning opening 27, a big hit type, and the like. In the pending image simultaneous change effects A to C, the pending image simultaneous change effect changes the color of the pending icon 9A. However, the pending image simultaneous change effect may be executed by an image other than the pending icon 9A that suggests the degree of expectation of a big win in the change by changing the color.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image that represents the degree of expectation of winning by color,
A first effect in which a plurality of the specific images are displayed in a row on the display means during special figure fluctuation;
After the first effect, by changing the color of at least two or more specific images among the plurality of specific images in order, a second effect that suggests at least the degree of expectation of winning in the special figure variation; , executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
A game machine characterized in that, in the second effect, colors of all the specific images displayed on the display means are changed in order.
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2,
In the second effect, the color changes in order from the specific image on one end side of the plurality of specific images arranged in a row toward the specific image on the other end side. Amusement machine.
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3,
In the second effect, when the color changes in each specific image, the color changes from one end side to the other end side of one of the specific images.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4,
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the number of the specific images displayed on the display means is smaller than the number of the specific images displayed during the second effect. A game machine characterized by
◇[Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-5,
In the third effect, after the display of the specific images displayed during the second effect disappears, the number of the specific images displayed during the second effect is two or more. A gaming machine, wherein a small number of the specific images are re-displayed on the display means.

102 to 104, the special symbol pending display effects A to C will be described below. This special symbol pending display effect is executed along with the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the special symbol pending display effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is displayed. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Special symbol hold display effect A]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol pending display effect A. FIG. In the special symbol reservation display performance A, the first reservation display in the first mode is performed for the reservation of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) of the reserved lottery (first special figure reservation). , the second hold display is performed in a second mode different from the first mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 102(A), a hold icon 9A indicating the first special figure hold is displayed in the lower right area of the display screen 7a, and the first special figure hold is displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 7a. The display of the suspension lamp 9D indicating 1 special figure suspension is performed. The special symbol pending display effect A is an example of the normal game state (“low base state”). Here, the pending icon 9A is a triangular white icon. On the other hand, the hold lamp 9D is a circular icon, and switches between a lit state and an extinguished state. The pending lamp 9D indicates the pending number by the number of lit icons. The variation icon 9C is displayed in the central lower area of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C is the same icon as the pending icon 9A. In the upper right region of the display screen 7a, a suspension lamp 9E indicating suspension (second special symbol suspension) of the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed. The suspension lamp 9E has an icon similar to that of the suspension lamp 9D, and the number of suspensions is indicated by the number of lit icons.

The special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5) includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. contains. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided.

The pending icon 9A in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from the pending icon 9A on the left end. corresponds to a group of random values (pending information) stored in .
In addition, the suspension lamp 9D in the upper left part of the display screen 7a is the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area of the first special figure suspension storage area 85a in order from the suspension lamp 9D on the right end. It corresponds to the random value group (pending information) stored in the storage area. Below, the suspension icons 9A, 9B and suspension lamps 9D, 9E corresponding to the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area are referred to as "first suspension", "second suspension", " Also referred to as "third suspension" and "fourth suspension".

Regarding the special symbol pending display effect A, the explanation is first started from the fixed stop state shown in FIG. 102(B). Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Further, four suspension lamps 9D are displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and all the four suspension lamps 9D are in a lighting state (indicated by hatching in the figure). As a result, it can be seen that there are four first special figure reservations. Four suspension lamps 9E are displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, and all the four suspension lamps 9E are in the off state. As a result, it can be seen that there is no second special figure reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The suspension icon 9A in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the variable start effect. Specifically, as indicated by the arrow Y1, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is moved to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is the hold icon for the first hold. 9A, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the hold icon 9A for the second hold, and the hold icon 9A for the fourth hold becomes the hold icon 9A for the third hold. Further, in accordance with the variable start effect, the suspension lamp 9D corresponding to the fourth suspension among the suspension lamps 9D in the upper left part of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "3" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "4" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, three holding lamps 9D are lit (hatched in the figure). As a result, it can be seen that there are three first special figure reservations. At the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, all the four pending lamps 9E are in the off state. As a result, it can be seen that there is no second special figure reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The suspension icon 9A in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the variable start effect. Specifically, as indicated by the arrow Y1, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is moved to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is the hold icon for the first hold. 9A, and the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the hold icon 9A for the second hold. Further, in accordance with the variable start effect, the suspension lamp 9D corresponding to the third suspension among the suspension lamps 9D in the upper left part of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is determined and stopped at "0" design, the middle effect pattern 8C is determined and stopped at "1" design, and the right effect design 8R is determined and stopped at "8" design. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Two pending icons 9A are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, two holding lamps 9D are lit (indicated by hatching in the figure). As a result, it can be seen that there are two first special figure reservations. At the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, all the four pending lamps 9E are in the off state. As a result, it can be seen that there is no second special figure reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The suspension icon 9A in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the variable start effect. Specifically, as indicated by the arrow Y1, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is moved to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is the hold icon for the first hold. 9A. Further, in accordance with the variable start effect, the suspension lamp 9D corresponding to the second suspension among the suspension lamps 9D in the upper left part of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(H), a pending increase effect is executed. Here, it is assumed that the second special figure reservation has increased due to the winning of the second starting port 21 . At this time, of the four suspension lamps 9E in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, the suspension lamp 9E corresponding to the first suspension is turned on (hatched in the figure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(I), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "7" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "3" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern. As the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. One pending icon 9A is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, one hold lamp 9D is lit (hatched in the figure). Thus, it can be seen that there is one first special figure reservation. At the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, one hold lamp 9E is lit. Thus, it can be seen that there is one second special figure reservation. In this embodiment, the second special figure reservation is preferentially digested.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(J), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At this time, the second special figure reservation is preferentially digested. Therefore, the suspension lamp 9E corresponding to the first suspension among the suspension lamps 9E in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a is turned off in accordance with the variable start effect. Note that the variation icon 9C is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(K), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "1" design, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern. One pending icon 9A is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, one hold lamp 9D is lit (hatched in the figure). Thus, it can be seen that there is one first special figure reservation. At the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, all the four pending lamps 9E are in the off state. As a result, it can be seen that there is no second special figure reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(L), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The suspension icon 9A in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the variable start effect. Specifically, as indicated by an arrow Y1, the hold icon 9A of the first hold moves to become the variable icon 9C. Further, in accordance with the variable start effect, the suspension lamp 9D corresponding to the first suspension among the suspension lamps 9D in the upper left part of the display screen 7a is turned off.

[Special symbol pending display effect B]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol pending display effect B. FIG. In the special symbol pending display performance B, the first pending display in the first mode is performed for the pending lottery (second special symbol pending) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) among the pending lotteries. , the second hold display is performed in a second mode different from the first mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103(A), a hold icon 9B indicating the second special figure hold is displayed in the lower right area of the display screen 7a, and the second special figure hold is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 7a. The display of the suspension lamp 9E indicating 2 special figure suspension is performed. The special symbol pending display effect B is an example of the probability variable gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (“high base state”). Here, the pending icon 9B is an inverted triangle white icon. On the other hand, the hold lamp 9E is a circular icon, and switches between a lit state and an extinguished state. The pending lamp 9E indicates the pending number by the number of lit icons. The variation icon 9C is displayed in the central lower area of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C is an icon similar to the pending icon 9B. In the upper left area of the display screen 7a, a suspension lamp 9D indicating suspension (first special symbol suspension) of the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed. The pending lamp 9D has an icon similar to that of the pending lamp 9E, and the number of pending items is indicated by the number of lit icons.

The special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5) includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. contains. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided.

The pending icon 9B in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is the first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area of the first special figure pending storage area 85a in order from the pending icon 9B on the left end. corresponds to a group of random values (pending information) stored in .
In addition, the suspension lamp 9E in the upper right part of the display screen 7a is the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, the fourth storage area of the first special figure suspension storage area 85a in order from the suspension lamp 9E at the left end. It corresponds to the random value group (pending information) stored in the storage area. Below, the suspension icons 9A, 9B and suspension lamps 9D, 9E corresponding to the first storage area, the second storage area, the third storage area, and the fourth storage area are referred to as "first suspension", "second suspension", " Also referred to as "third suspension" and "fourth suspension".

Regarding the special symbol pending display effect B, the explanation is first started from the fixed stop state shown in FIG. 103(B). Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "3" pattern. As the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9B are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Further, four suspension lamps 9E are displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, and all the four suspension lamps 9E are in a lighting state (indicated by hatching in the figure). As a result, it can be seen that there are four second special figure reservations. Four suspension lamps 9D are displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen 7a, and all the four suspension lamps 9D are in the off state. As a result, it can be seen that there is no first special figure reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The suspension icon 9B in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the variable start effect. Specifically, as indicated by arrow Y1, the hold icon 9B for the first hold is moved to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the hold icon 9B for the second hold is the hold icon for the first hold. 9B, the hold icon 9B for the third hold becomes the hold icon 9B for the second hold, and the hold icon 9B for the fourth hold becomes the hold icon 9B for the third hold. Further, in accordance with the variable start effect, the suspension lamp 9E corresponding to the fourth suspension among the suspension lamps 9E in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "4" design, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "1" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Three pending icons 9B are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, three holding lamps 9E are lit (indicated by hatching in the figure). As a result, it can be seen that there are three second special figure reservations. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, all the four holding lamps 9D are turned off. As a result, it can be seen that there is no first special figure reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The suspension icon 9B in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the variable start effect. Specifically, as indicated by the arrow Y1, the pending icon 9B of the first pending is moved to become the variable icon 9C, and as indicated by the arrow Y2, the pending icon 9B of the second pending is the pending icon of the first pending. 9B, and the hold icon 9B of the third hold becomes the hold icon 9B of the second hold. In addition, the suspension lamp 9E corresponding to the third suspension among the suspension lamps 9E in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a is turned off in accordance with the variable start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "1" design, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Two pending icons 9B are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, two holding lamps 9E are lit (indicated by hatching in the figure). As a result, it can be seen that there are two second special figure reservations. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, all the four holding lamps 9D are turned off. As a result, it can be seen that there is no first special figure reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The suspension icon 9B in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the variable start effect. Specifically, as indicated by arrow Y1, the hold icon 9B for the first hold is moved to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the hold icon 9B for the second hold is the hold icon for the first hold. 9B. Further, in accordance with the variable start effect, the suspension lamp 9E corresponding to the second suspension among the suspension lamps 9E in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(H), a pending increase effect is executed. Here, it is assumed that the first special figure reservation has increased due to the winning of the first starting port 20 . At this time, of the four suspension lamps 9D in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the suspension lamp 9D corresponding to the first suspension is turned on (hatched in the drawing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(I), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "7" pattern. As the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. One pending icon 9B is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, one hold lamp 9E is lit (hatched in the drawing). Thus, it can be seen that there is one second special figure reservation. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, one hold lamp 9D is lit. Thus, it can be seen that there is one first special figure reservation. In this embodiment, the second special figure reservation is preferentially digested.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(J), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The suspension icon 9B in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the variable start effect. Specifically, as indicated by an arrow Y1, the hold icon 9B of the first hold moves to become the variable icon 9C. Further, in accordance with the variable start effect, the suspension lamp 9E corresponding to the first suspension among the suspension lamps 9E in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(K), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "0" design, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern. The pending icon 9B is not displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In addition, all the four holding lamps 9E are turned off in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that there is no second special figure reservation. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, one hold lamp 9D is lit. As a result, it can be seen that there is one first special figure reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(L), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. In accordance with the variable start effect, the suspension lamp 9D corresponding to the first suspension among the suspension lamps 9D in the upper left part of the display screen 7a is turned off. Note that the variation icon 9C is not displayed.

[Special symbol pending display effect C]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol pending display effect C. FIG. The special symbol reservation display effect C is another example of the special symbol reservation effect A.
Regarding the special symbol pending display effect C, the explanation is first started from the changing state shown in FIG. 104(A). Here, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. At this time, it is assumed that a prize has been won in the first starting port 20 . As a result, the suspension icon 9A corresponding to the fourth suspension is newly displayed among the suspension icons 9A in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The description of the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the fourth reservation is continued assuming that the determination result (prefetching result) of the lottery is "big hit". The hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth hold is changed to a predetermined display color (for example, red). Further, by winning the first starting port 20, the suspension lamp 9D corresponding to the fourth suspension among the suspension lamps 9D in the upper left part of the display screen 7a is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "2" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "6" pattern. As the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Four pending icons 9A are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. Further, four suspension lamps 9D are displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and all the four suspension lamps 9D are in a lighting state (indicated by hatching in the figure). As a result, it can be seen that there are four first special figure reservations. Four suspension lamps 9E are displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, and all the four suspension lamps 9E are in the off state. As a result, it can be seen that there is no second special figure reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The suspension icon 9A in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the variable start effect. Specifically, as indicated by the arrow Y1, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is moved to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is the hold icon for the first hold. 9A, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the hold icon 9A for the second hold, and the hold icon 9A for the fourth hold becomes the hold icon 9A for the third hold. The hold icon 9A that is changed to hold becomes the third hold. Further, in accordance with the variable start effect, the suspension lamp 9D corresponding to the fourth suspension among the suspension lamps 9D in the upper left part of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "9" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "3" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "4" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Three pending icons 9A are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, three holding lamps 9D are lit (indicated by hatching in the figure). As a result, it can be seen that there are three first special figure reservations. At the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, all the four pending lamps 9E are in the off state. As a result, it can be seen that there is no second special figure reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The suspension icon 9A in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the variable start effect. Specifically, as indicated by the arrow Y1, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is moved to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is the hold icon for the first hold. 9A, and the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the hold icon 9A for the second hold. The hold icon 9A that is changed to hold becomes the second hold. Further, in accordance with the variable start effect, the suspension lamp 9D corresponding to the third suspension among the suspension lamps 9D in the upper left part of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(F), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is determined and stopped at "0" design, the middle effect pattern 8C is determined and stopped at "1" design, and the right effect design 8R is determined and stopped at "8" design. As the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. Two pending icons 9A are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, two holding lamps 9D are lit (indicated by hatching in the figure). As a result, it can be seen that there are two first special figure reservations. At the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, all the four pending lamps 9E are in the off state. As a result, it can be seen that there is no second special figure reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The suspension icon 9A in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the variable start effect. Specifically, as indicated by the arrow Y1, the hold icon 9A for the first hold is moved to become the variable icon 9C, and as shown by the arrow Y2, the hold icon 9A for the second hold is the hold icon for the first hold. 9A. The hold icon 9A that is changed to hold becomes the first hold. Further, in accordance with the variable start effect, the suspension lamp 9D corresponding to the second suspension among the suspension lamps 9D in the upper left part of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(H), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is fixed and stopped at "7" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "3" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "5" pattern. As the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the variation icon 9C is hidden. One pending icon 9A is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. In the upper left part of the display screen 7a, one hold lamp 9D is lit (hatched in the figure). Thus, it can be seen that there is one first special figure reservation. In the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, all the four pending lamps 9E are in the off state. As a result, it can be seen that there is no second special figure reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(I), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. The suspension icon 9A in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in accordance with the variable start effect. Specifically, as indicated by an arrow Y1, the hold icon 9A of the first hold that is changed to hold moves to become the variable icon 9C. Further, in accordance with the variable start effect, the suspension lamp 9D corresponding to the first suspension among the suspension lamps 9D in the upper left part of the display screen 7a is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(J), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the "7" symbol. As a result, it is reported that the game is a big hit. Here, the hold icon 9A is not displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The four suspension lamps 9D in the upper left portion of the display screen 7a and the four suspension lamps 9E in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a are all in the off state. As a result, it can be seen that there is neither the first special figure reservation nor the second special figure reservation.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the special symbol holding display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first pending display in the first mode is performed with respect to the suspension of a specific lottery among the suspended lotteries, and the second mode in the second mode different from the first mode is displayed. 2 Hold display. Specifically, in the special symbol suspension display effects A and C, the suspension icon 9A is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen 7a for the first special symbol suspension, and the suspension lamp 9D is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. Display is performed (FIGS. 102 and 104). In the special symbol suspension display effect B, the second special symbol suspension is displayed by the suspension icon 9B in the lower right part of the display screen 7a, and by the suspension lamp 9E in the upper right part of the display screen 7a (Fig. 103 ). According to this configuration, the pending display becomes a novel presentation that has not existed in the past, and the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved. In addition, in the special symbol pending display effects A and C, the display of the pending icon 9A corresponds to the "first pending display", and the display of the pending lamp 9D corresponds to the "second pending display". In the special symbol pending display effect B, the display of the pending icon 9B corresponds to the "first pending display", and the display of the pending lamp 9E corresponds to the "second pending display". The effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "holding image control means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 104, regarding the display of the pending icons 9A and 9B in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, when the game state is switched, the mode changes according to the game state. On the other hand, the display of the suspension lamps 9D and 9E on the upper part of the display screen 7a is not changed even if the game state is switched. According to this configuration, the pending display becomes a novel presentation that has not existed in the past, and the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 104, regarding the display of the hold icons 9A and 9B in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, an image indicating the hold is moved and displayed when the hold is digested. Regarding the display of the suspension lamps 9D and 9E on the upper part of the display screen 7a, the moving display of the image indicating the suspension is not performed when the suspension is completed. According to this configuration, the pending display becomes a novel presentation that has not existed in the past, and the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, regarding the display of the pending icons 9A and 9B in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a, a display indicating the degree of expectation that the pending special symbol lottery will be won is performed. With respect to the display of the holding lamps 9D and 9E on the upper part of , no display suggesting the degree of expectation that the reserved special symbol lottery will be won is performed (Fig. 104). According to this configuration, the pending display becomes a novel presentation that has not existed in the past, and the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the reservation of the lottery of the first special symbol (first special figure reservation) or the reservation of the lottery of the second special symbol (second special figure reservation) is selected according to the game state. It is generally reserved for certain lotteries. According to this configuration, the pending display becomes a novel presentation that has not existed in the past, and the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of special design reservation display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, in the special symbol reservation display performance A, when the second special symbol reservation is completed, the variation icon 9C is not displayed (FIG. 102(J)). Also, in the special symbol reservation display effect B, when the first special symbol reservation is completed, the variation icon 9C is not displayed (Fig. 103 (L)). Alternatively, the variation icon 9C may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the reserve icon 9A indicating the first special figure reserve and the reserve icon 9B indicating the second special figure reserve are selectively displayed according to the game state. Alternatively, the suspension icons 9A and 9B may be displayed together in the same manner as the suspension lamps 9D and 9E. When the suspension icons 9A and 9B and the suspension lamps 9D and 9E are displayed together, the first special figure suspension and the second special figure suspension correspond to "specific lottery suspension".

[Modification 3]
In the special symbol reservation display effects A and C of the above embodiment, the first special symbol reservation is "suspension of a specific lottery", and in the special symbol reservation display effect B, the second special symbol reservation is "suspension of a specific lottery". was said. On the other hand, the suspension of a particular lottery may be chosen in any way. For example, among the reserved lotteries, those with relatively high expectations for a big win may be reserved for a specific lottery.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, both the first pending display and the second pending display are performed within the display screen 7a. Alternatively, at least one of the first pending display and the second pending display may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine,
It is possible to suspend the special symbol lottery, and a pending image control means for displaying an image on the display screen corresponding to the number of the pending lotteries,
The holding image control means performs a first holding display in a first mode for holding a specific lottery among the held lotteries, and performs a first holding display in a second mode different from the first mode. 2 display a hold,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
The holding image control means changes the mode of the first holding display according to the game state when the game state is switched with respect to the first holding display, and changes the game state with respect to the second holding display. Do not change the aspect of the second pending display even if
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
The holding image control means performs moving display of an image indicating holding when the holding is digested for the first holding display, and performs moving display of the image showing holding when the holding is digested for the second holding display. do not have,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
The holding image control means performs a display suggesting the degree of expectation that the reserved special symbol lottery will be won with respect to the first holding display, and the holding with respect to the second holding display. Do not display the expectation that the special pattern lottery will be won,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
The special symbol lottery includes a first special symbol lottery and a second special symbol lottery,
The holding image control means selectively suspends the lottery of the first special symbol or suspends the lottery of the second special symbol according to the game state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pseudo continuous effects A to C at the time of specific change will be described below with reference to FIGS. 105 to 107. FIG. In FIGS. 105 to 107, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing. FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous performance A at the time of the specific fluctuation, FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo-continuous performance B at the time of the specific fluctuation, and FIG. It is a figure for doing.

In this specific fluctuation pseudo-continuous effect, the production of the specific game state that is executed in the high probability short time state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game state is changed to the low probability low base state ( It is designed to run at certain fluctuations in the normal state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a pseudo-continuous effect at the time of a specific change is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) time-saving state which is a time-saving state controlled after the jackpot game is compared with the low-probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time-saving state. It is a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time tends to be short.

In addition, when the movable accessory 15 is operated during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols, it is more effective after the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is completed than when the movable accessory 15 is not operated. This suggests to the player that there is a high expectation that a win will occur (that is, after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed). Therefore, the player is highly interested in the operation (movement) of the movable accessory 15 .

Here, we will first briefly explain the performance symbols, pending icons, etc., and then the pseudo-continuous performance A at the time of the specific fluctuation, the pseudo-continuous performance B at the time of the specific fluctuation, the pseudo-continuous performance at the time of the specific fluctuation C, and the pseudo-continuous performance D at the time of the specific fluctuation in order. to explain.

[Direction design]
First, the production pattern will be briefly explained. The production pattern is a configuration in a non-time-saving production (normal production), which is a production performed in a low-probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, and a high-probability short-time state (high-probability It is different from the configuration in the production of the specific game state executed in the high base state). As a result, the player can determine whether or not the specific game state effect is being executed based on the structure of the effect symbols.

The production pattern in the non-short-time production (normal production) performed in the low-probability base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image, and the numbers "1" to "9" are the patterns of the numbers. , and characters A to I, which are the designs of the characters. The pattern of the character is a stereoscopic image, and the image is arranged so as to fit within the outer shape of a coin. The numbers are three-dimensional images, and part of the numbers is a coin-shaped three-dimensional image. It is arranged in front of the character's pattern and united, and the number pattern covers at least a part of the character's pattern. The production pattern is a pattern of a number, and a pattern of a character corresponding to the pattern of the number is attached.

Specifically, the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. . Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) are configured with different character patterns having multiple colors (full colors), respectively, and the character patterns are displayed large as the main effect pattern. be. Therefore, the size of the number design is smaller than the size of the character design attached to the number design.

As for the performance design, the character A is attached to the number "1", the character B is attached to the number "2", the character C is attached to the number "3", and the character D is attached to the number "4". , the number "5" is assigned the character E, the number "6" is assigned the character F, the number "7" is assigned the character G, the number "8" is assigned the character H, A character I is attached to the number "9", and a pattern of a different character having a plurality of colors (full color) is attached to each pattern of the number. For example, the character A may be attached to the numbers "1" and the numbers "7" and overlapped, and the character C may be attached to the numbers "3" and the numbers "8" and overlapped. In this case, the number "7" is a character A whose display mode is different from the character A attached to the number "1", and the number "8" is displayed differently from the character C attached to the number "3". Assume that a character C is in a mode.

On the other hand, the production pattern in the production of the specific game state executed in the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot game state is the number “1” to the number “ 9" only. The number pattern is a three-dimensional image, and the size of the number pattern (vertical size) is a coin shape that is the production pattern in the production performed in the non-time-saving low-probability-low base state (normal state). The size (vertical size) of the 3D image is almost the same as that of the 3D image.

Specifically, the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. . Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. Regarding the color attached to the number pattern of the production pattern in the production performed in the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state), which is a non-time-saving state, in the low-probability low base state (normal state) It has the same color as the production pattern in the production to be performed.

In this way, the pattern of the numbers of the production pattern in the non-time-saving production (normal production) performed in the low-probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, and the high-probability time-saving state after the jackpot game state Since the number patterns of the production patterns in the production of the specific game state executed in the (high probability high base state) are respectively colored, for example, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are the same A ready-to-stop display is formed in line with the pattern of the numbers, and the effect is developed after that. The player himself/herself can obtain an opportunity to discover the relationship (regularity) between the colors of the symbols and the presentation to be developed. As a result, the number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) each have a color, which contributes to the enhancement of interest.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern (number pattern: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode. In the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design, each performance design is a number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → The reels are rotated in the order of number "7"→number "8"→number "9"→number "1"→number "2"→ .

When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, the performance symbols stopped and displayed at the stop position move slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) upward once. After that (in other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is set to a display mode in which the production pattern is about to move), while gradually increasing the speed from low speed toward the bottom, from the opaque state The display mode changes to a translucent state and changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent production pattern that is changing at high speed. The production pattern decelerates just before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed at the stop position (temporarily stopped and then stopped). ). In the state where the temporary stop is displayed, the production pattern is in the vertical direction (for example, with the stop position as the reference, 2.5 mm upward and 2.5 mm downward (that is, the swing width is 5 mm)). It becomes a moving display mode. Incidentally, the effect pattern may disappear from the display screen 7a.

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a, variations of the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ corresponding to the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R, respectively. A sub-variation area is provided in which an effect (variation display) is started. Due to the variation (variation with respect to the variation icon 9C), when the variation performance (variation display) of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area, a small left At the same time when the variable performance (variable display) of the production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ is started, and the left production pattern 8L, the medium production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed. , the corresponding small left effect symbol 8LZ, small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and small right effect symbol 8RZ are all stopped and displayed. The small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are the small number patterns of the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R, and are stopped. The small left effect pattern 8LZ displayed has the same color as the number pattern of the stopped left effect pattern 8L, and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ that is stopped is the same as that of the middle effect pattern 8C that is stopped. The number patterns and colors are the same, and the stop-displayed small right effect pattern 8RZ has the same number patterns and colors as the stop-displayed right effect pattern 8R. In this way, each small production pattern is mainly designed in one of bright red, bright green, and bright blue.

The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are, as described above, the effect symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to When the variable effect (variable display) of the number "9") is started and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the effect pattern stopped and displayed at the stop position once moves upward for a predetermined distance (for example, , about 5 mm) after moving slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode (in other words, after the stop display of the performance design is canceled, the performance design is in a display mode in which it is about to move), The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state at a high speed while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed toward the side. On the other hand, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ are different from the variable effect (variable display) of the above-described effect symbols, and have a display mode in which the reels are rotated. However, at the display position of the small left production pattern 8LZ, the display position of the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the display position of the small right production pattern 8RZ, the number patterns (symbol: number "1" to number "9") appears and is updated, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed.

The small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, and various effect images and other various Visibility is not obstructed by images.

A state in which one or more of the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern to reach is formed), the corresponding small production patterns (for example, even if the left production design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left production design 8LZ and the right production design 8R corresponding to the left production design 8L are temporarily stopped. Even if it is displayed, the right performance symbol 8R and the corresponding small right performance symbol 8RZ) are all kept in a variable performance (variable display) state. In addition, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and become misaligned, the small left effect pattern 8LZ and the small left effect pattern 8LZ are displayed. A medium performance pattern 8CZ and a small right performance pattern 8RZ are stop-displayed as the same patterns as the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R. In addition, when the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the same symbols win, the small left performance symbol 8LZ and the small left performance symbol 8LZ are displayed. A medium performance pattern 8CZ and a small right performance pattern 8RZ are stop-displayed together in the same pattern as each of the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R. As a result, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are changed (variation display) from the start to the end of the variation (variation with respect to the variation icon 9C). is continued.

Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed in the same pattern, and the same pattern is a number "1" having a bright green color and a bright blue color. number "2" with bright green, number "3" with bright blue, number "4" with bright blue, number "5" with bright green, number "6" with bright blue, number "8" with bright blue , the number "9" having a bright green color, the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability-high base state), whereas the same pattern is bright red. , the game state after the big hit is a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state). It should be noted that the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed in the same pattern, and in addition to the number "7" in which the same pattern has a bright red color, the number In the case of "3", the gaming state after the jackpot may be a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state). In this case, let the number "3", like the number "7", have a bright red color.

In addition, the background image is designed in full color, and when it is in a low-probability-low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, and when it is a time-saving state that is controlled after a jackpot game, it is a high-probability short-time state (high It is different when it is in the fixed height base state). For example, background images such as city images, forest images, ocean images, undersea images, underground images, etc. are background images in the non-time-saving state (low probability low base state (normal state)) (hereinafter referred to as "non-time-saving background image" It may be described.), and it is a still image or a moving image. Background images such as space images, spacecraft images, spacecraft images, ground images of planets, and underground images of planets are background images in the time-saving state (high-precision high-base state) (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving background images") There are cases.)

[Hold icon, etc.]
Next, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B will be explained. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position (on the white rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . A first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation in the area to the left of the variable display position, and a second reserved display area is provided as the second special figure reservation in the area to the right of the variable display position. It is In the first pending display area, four pending icons 9A can be displayed linearly in a row, and up to four pending icons 9A can be stocked. The first pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first pending icon 9A, the second pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is the third pending icon. 9A, and the farthest pending icon 9A from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9A. In the second pending display area, four pending icons 9B can be displayed linearly in a row, and a maximum of four pending icons 9B can be stocked. The first pending icon 9B closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first pending icon 9B, the second pending icon 9B to the variable icon 9C is called the second pending icon 9B, and the third pending icon 9B to the variable icon 9C is the third pending icon. 9B, and the farthest pending icon 9B from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9B. In the present embodiment, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B can suggest winning expectation by color, and the winning expectation increases in the order of white→blue→green→red→yellow (gold). . Therefore, the player has a high interest in the variable icon 9C and the suspended icons 9A and 9B.

[Specific Fluctuation Pseudo Continuous Performance A]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the pseudo-continuous effect A at the time of specific change will be described. Here, on the premise that it is in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, the player shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A and hits left. Play games by In the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time-saving state, a background image is non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image). In the left-handed game, a non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in a low-probability-low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, progresses. In this non-time-saving effect (normal effect), when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, first the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, then the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, and finally the middle effect pattern. After 8C is temporarily stopped, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time (all at once). It should be noted that, in the non-time-saving production (normal production), the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same time, and finally the medium production pattern 8C may be temporarily stopped, and the left production pattern 8L and the medium production pattern 8C. and the right effect symbol 8R may temporarily stop at the same time (all at once).

The player shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A and plays a game by hitting to the left, one game ball enters the first start port 20, and the entered game ball is determined and displayed as the white first pending icon 9A by prefetching. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the stock pending icon 9A does not exist at all.

When the white first reservation icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. At this time, a variable performance (variable display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started.

When the variable production (variable display) of the production pattern is started, after that, as shown in FIG. A movable role object image KMG imitating the second movable role object 15 appears on the front side of the production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R while moving from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the movable character object image KMG is suddenly displayed. In this embodiment, the size of the movable accessory image KMG is one size larger than the size of the second movable accessory 15 . However, the size of the movable role product image KMG may be the same as the size of the second movable role product 15, or may be twice as large as the size of the second movable role product 15.

The suddenly generated movable role product image KMG is a non-time-saving performance (normal performance) that is performed in a low-probability-low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, when playing a left-handed game. It occurs suddenly when there is, and the variation (variation for the white variation icon 9C) is a specific variation, and while it is a low probability low base state (normal state) that is a non-time saving state, after the jackpot gaming state And it is a specific image that suggests the start of the production of the specific game state executed in the high probability short time state (high probability high base state). The movable accessory image KMG, which is the specific image, is displayed as a notice of the start of the performance of the specific game state, so that the player can be informed that the performance of the specific game state will start soon.

The player stops operating the handle 60 in order to pay attention (concentrate) on the change (on the white change icon 9C) because the movable character image KMG, which is the suddenly generated specific image, increases the expectation of winning. .

The movable role product image KMG here moves along the same route as the second movable role product 15 moves at the same speed as the second movable role product 15 moves. In other words, the movable role product image KMG is displayed in a display mode imitating the action of the second movable role product 15 .

The movable role object image KMG is a crystal-like model of the second movable role object 15, and emits light in a predetermined single color (for example, white, blue, green, red, purple, and yellow (gold)). It is displayed in a display mode (here, it is displayed in a display mode in which the movable role object image KMG emits white light). At this time, the second movable accessory 15 remains in a retracted (waiting) state at the retracted position, and has not yet started moving. It should be noted that the movable accessory image KMG may be an image that imitates the shape and color of the second movable accessory 15 as it is. Predetermined single colors indicate the degree of expectation of winning, and the degree of expectation of winning increases in the order of white→blue→green→red→purple→yellow (gold).

Fluctuation icon 9C is a non-time-saving state low probability low base state (normal state), after the jackpot game state high probability time-saving state (high probability high base state) of the specific game state to be executed When the production is started, it is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), so that the color of the variation icon 9C is changed in the production of the specific game state to respond to the variation (variation to the variation icon 9C). It's hard to give an indication of what to expect. Therefore, in the pseudo-continuous effect A at the time of the specific change, by setting the color of the movable accessory image KMG to a predetermined color, it is possible to suggest the degree of winning expectation for the effect of the specific game state instead of the change icon 9C. It's like The expected winning degree set for the color of the movable role product image KMG is the same as the expected winning degree set for the color of the variation icon 9C. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the movable accessory image KMG.

Note that the color of the movable accessory image KMG may jump up to a color with a high probability of winning the color of the variation icon 9C, or may jump down to a color with a low probability of winning. The relationship (regularity) between the color of 9C and the color of the movable character object image KMG is difficult to understand and can be stirred up.

Also, the second movable role object 15 emits light in a predetermined single color (for example, white, blue, green, red, purple, yellow (gold)) (here, the second movable role object 15 emits blue light). (displayed in the display mode that is used). When the second movable accessory 15 emits light in a predetermined single color, the first single color (for example, blue) and the second single color (for example, red) may alternately emit light. , a loop that sequentially switches to other monochrome colors different from the first monochrome color (e.g., white) and returns to the first monochrome color again (e.g., white → blue → green → red → purple → yellow (gold) → white → blue → ) may be repeatedly emitted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105(C), when the movable accessory image KMG completes the movement to the advanced position of the second movable accessory 15, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the retracted position (the second movable accessory in FIG. 1). 15) to the center position of the display screen 7a (the intersection of a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). Start moving down to As a result, the player's sense of anticipation for winning increases due to the actuation (movement) of the second movable accessory 15 .

Since the second movable accessory 15 moves in front of the display screen 7a, the movable accessory image KMG displayed on the display screen 7a changes as the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advanced position. The area (portion) covered by the second movable role object 15 gradually increases, and the portion where the movable role object image KMG can be visually recognized becomes smaller. When the second movable accessory 15 starts moving from the retracted position toward the advanced position, the movable accessory image KMG changes from white to pink, which is the effect emission color. The rear of the second movable accessory 15 is brightly illuminated by the effect light color from the movable accessory image KMG, which is the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the second movable accessory 15, and the second movable accessory 15 is illuminated. The outer shape (contour) becomes clearer, and the motion of the second movable accessory 15 can be highlighted. In this embodiment, the pink color is used only as an effect emission color, and is a dedicated color that is not used in other effects.

As the movable accessory image KMG moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R during the variable effect (variable display) are moved. The area (portion) covered by the object image KMG gradually increases. Then, in a state in which the movable role object image KMG has completely moved to the advanced position, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R during the variable effect (variable display) are completely covered with the movable object image KMG. , the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are covered.

Instead of this, as the movable accessory image KMG moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R during the variable production (variable display). Although the area (portion) covered by the movable role product image KMG gradually increases, even in the state where the movable role product image KMG has completely moved to the advanced position, the left effect pattern 8L and the middle effect are displayed during the variable effect (variable display). The pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R may not be completely covered with the movable accessory image KMG, and the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R may not be partially covered. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are undergoing a variable effect (variable display).

The small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are displayed in the same manner as the movable role product image KMG even when the movable role product image KMG is moved to the advanced position and stopped. There is no overlap in the front-rear direction, and the visibility is not hindered by the movable character object image KMG.

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 completes moving to the advanced position, it stops at the advanced position for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) as shown in FIG. 105(D). It should be noted that the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ and the small right production pattern 8RZ are the second movable combination even when the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the advanced position and stopped. It does not overlap with the object 15 in the front-rear direction, and visibility is not obstructed by the second movable accessory 15.例文帳に追加

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 105(E), the second movable accessory 15 starts moving upward from the advanced position to the retracted position. When the movement of the second movable accessory 15 to the retracted position is completed, the movable accessory image KMG starts moving upward from the advanced position as shown in FIGS. 105(F) and (G). When the movable role object image KMG starts to move upward from the advance position, it is performed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state, and in the low-probability-low base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state. A non-reduction of working hours performance (normal performance) is switched to a performance of a specific game state to be executed in a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) after a jackpot game state, and the performance of the specific game state is started.

As a result, in the left-handed game, as described above, the non-time-saving production (normal production) performed in the non-time-saving low-probability base state (normal state) progresses, but the fluctuation (white fluctuation icon 9C variation) as a specific variation, while in a low-probability low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, after the jackpot game state and in a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) By starting the production of the specific game state, the background image is switched from the non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time saving background image KHG (city image). The player can also determine from the background image whether or not the specific game state effect is being executed.

At the timing when the background image switches from the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time-saving background image KHG (city image) (in other words, non-time-saving performed in a low-probability base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state At the timing of switching from the production (normal production) to the production of the specific game state executed in the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot game state) The fluctuation icon 9C and the fluctuation display position are hidden. (disappears from the display screen 7a). In addition, when the pending icon 9A (9B) exists, the pending icon 9A (9B) is also hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). On the other hand, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, the right production pattern 8R, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ and the small right production pattern 8RZ are not hidden (display screen 7a It does not disappear from), and remains in the variable production (variable display).

When the movable role object image KMG moves upward from the advanced position and disappears from the display screen 7a, although it is in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, in the production of the specific game state, a pseudo continuous production is performed. be started. In the pseudo-continuous production, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R, which have started the fluctuation production (variation display), are temporarily stopped and the fluctuation production (variation display) is started again. Or do it over multiple times. In the pseudo-continuous production, the order of temporary stop of the production pattern is different from the non-short-time production (normal production), first the left production pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, then the middle production pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, and finally the right production pattern. 8R temporarily stops. In addition, in the pseudo continuous effect, the higher the number of pseudo fluctuations, the higher the expectation of winning, and the maximum number of pseudo times with the highest expectation of winning is set to 8 times (for example, , the probability of winning is higher when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 8 than when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 4). Due to the pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo continuous effect (because the time (fluctuation time) for one pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo continuous effect is set to, for example, 2 seconds), temporary stop and re-fluctuation It can be performed rhythmically at a good tempo, and the monotony of the variable performance (variable display) of the performance patterns by the pseudo-continuous performance can be reduced. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous effect A at the time of specific variation, pseudo-variation is performed four times in the effect of the specific game state.

Although it is a low-probability low-base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state at the time the production of the specific game state is started, the performance pattern is performed in a low-probability-low base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state It switches from the one in the non-time-saving performance (normal performance) that is performed to the one in the performance of the specific game state that is executed in the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot game state. 105A to 105E are coin-shaped three-dimensional images, and include numerals "1" to "9", which are number patterns, and characters A to I, which are character patterns. , whereas the effect pattern in FIG. 105(F) is composed only of numbers "1" to "9", which are numerical patterns, and the structure of the effect pattern is switched.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105(H), a horizontal line that passes through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is set as the center line, and on this center line, the left effect pattern 8L is a number "4" having a bright blue color. It is temporarily stopped, then temporarily stopped at the number "7" in which the medium effect pattern 8C is bright red, and finally temporarily stopped at the number "9" in which the right effect pattern 8R is bright green. At this time, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are all in the middle of high-speed fluctuation production (variation display). After that, as shown in FIG. 105(I), the variable effect (variable display) is started again, temporarily stopped, and the re-variation and temporary stop are repeated, and the pseudo-variation is performed four times (fourth pseudo-consecutive). , as shown in FIG. 105(J), first the left effect pattern 8L temporarily stops at the number "5" having a bright green color, then the middle effect pattern 8C temporarily stops at the number "6" having a bright blue color, Finally, the right production pattern 8R temporarily stops at the number "8" having a bright blue color. At this time, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are all in the middle of high-speed fluctuation production (variation display). In other words, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ are all in a high-speed fluctuation effect (variable display).

After that, while the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped on the above-mentioned center line, as shown in FIG. Appears while moving from the top to the bottom of the . As a result, the movable character object image KMG is suddenly displayed again.

The movable role product image KMG here is in a low-probability low-base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state, but is executed in a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot gaming state. It suddenly occurs during the pseudo continuous effect in the specific game state effect, and is a specific image that suggests the end of the specific game state effect. The movable accessory image KMG, which is the specific image, is displayed as an advance notice of the end of the performance of the specific game state, so that it is possible to inform the player that the performance of the specific game state will soon end.

Again, as described above, the movable role object image KMG is an imitation of the second movable role object 15 formed in a crystal shape, and has a predetermined single color (for example, white, blue, green, red, purple, (Here, the movable character object image KMG is displayed in a display mode emitting white light as in FIGS. 105B to 105F.) . At this time, the second movable accessory 15 remains in a retracted (waiting) state at the retracted position, and has not yet started moving. As described above, the predetermined monochromatic colors indicate the degree of expectation of winning, and the degree of expectation of winning increases in the order of white→blue→green→red→purple→yellow (gold). Note that the movable role product image KMG may be displayed in a display mode in which it emits light in a color (for example, red) different from that shown in FIGS. The KMG may be one that imitates the shape and color of the second movable accessory 15 as it is.

After that, as the movable role object image KMG moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped on the center line are moved. The area (portion) covered by the object image KMG gradually increases, and in a state where the movable object image KMG has completed its movement to the advance position, as shown in FIG. The pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are completely covered with the movable accessory image KMG. As a result, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped on the center line, cannot be visually recognized. It should be noted that the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ and the small right production pattern 8RZ are movable role product images even when the movable role product image KMG is moved to the advanced position and stopped. It does not overlap with the KMG in the front-rear direction, and visibility is not hindered by the movable character object image KMG.

It should be noted that until immediately before the movable accessory image KMG completes its movement to the advanced position and stops, as described above, the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at the number "5" having bright green, and the middle effect symbol 8C is bright blue. , and temporarily stopped at the number "8" in which the right effect symbol 8R has a bright blue color. However, in the display mode in which the movable accessory image KMG completes movement to the advance position and stops, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect, although the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R cannot be visually recognized. There is a case where the pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are aligned with the same pattern and temporarily stopped. For this reason, in the pseudo continuous effect A at the time of specific fluctuation, the color of the movable role product image KMG suggests the degree of expectation for matching the same pattern in the display mode in which the movable role product image KMG stops after completing the movement to the advanced position. can do. In the display mode in which the movable accessory image KMG completes movement to the advancing position and stops, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are aligned with the same pattern and are temporarily stopped. , the same symbols are stopped and displayed, the win is confirmed, the opening of the big win is started, and then the big win game in which profits are given to the player is started.

When the movable role product image KMG is displayed in a state of being stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) at the advance position, the movable role product image KMG starts moving upward from the advance position as shown in FIG. 105(M). do. The movable accessory image KMG starts to move upward from the advance position. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect ends. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous effect, when the reach is formed, the win is determined.

When the movable role object image KMG starts to move upward from the advance position, it is performed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state, and in the low-probability-low base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state. From the non-time-saving production (normal production) to the production of a specific game state that is executed in a high-accuracy short-time state (high-accuracy high-base state) after the jackpot game state, the original non-time-saving production ( return to normal performance). Thereby, the production of the specific game state is finished.

Thereby, from the state where the background image was switched from the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time-saving background image KHG (urban image), while being in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state , returns to the original non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image).

At the timing when the background image switches from the time-saving background image KHG (city image) to the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) (in other words, after the jackpot gaming state, a high-quality time-saving state (high-quality high base state) At the timing of switching from the production of the specific game state executed in to the non-short-time production (normal production) performed in the low-probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state), the fluctuation icon 9C and the fluctuation display position are displayed again. be. In addition, when the pending icon 9A (9B) exists, the pending icon 9A (9B) is also displayed again.

Furthermore, at the timing when the background image switches from the time-saving background image KHG (city image) to the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) (in other words, after the jackpot gaming state, a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base At the timing of switching from the production of the specific game state executed in the state) to the non-time-saving production (normal production) performed in the low-probability base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state), the composition of the production pattern is in a non-time-saving state A specific game that is executed in a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot game state from the non-short-time production (normal production) performed in the low-probability low-base state (normal state) The state of switching to the state performance is returned to the non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), which is the non-time-saving state, which is the composition of the original performance pattern.

Here, the left effect pattern 8L, which is composed only of the number patterns temporarily stopped on the center line, is a coin-shaped three-dimensional figure in which the bright green number "5" pattern 8Lb is added to the character E pattern 8La. The intermediate effect symbol 8C, which is switched to an image and is composed of only the number symbols temporarily stopped on the center line, is a coin-shaped symbol 8Cb of the number "6" having a bright blue color and a symbol 8Ca of the character F. The right effect symbol 8R, which is switched to a stereoscopic image and is composed of only the symbol of the number temporarily stopped on the center line, is a coin shape in which the symbol 8Rb of the number "8" having a bright blue color and the symbol 8Ra of the character H are attached. 3D image. At this time, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are all in the middle of high-speed fluctuation production (variation display).

When the movable role object image KMG moves upward from the advanced position and disappears from the display screen 7a, thereafter, as shown in FIG. symbols are displayed in a stopped state, a failure is confirmed, and the specific variation (variation for the white variation icon 9C) ends. At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "5" having bright green, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright blue. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with the number "8" having a bright blue color. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the player starts operating the handle 60 again, the game ball enters the first starting port 20, and the first holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position to become the variable icon 9C, the variable performance of the performance symbol is performed. (Variable display) is started, and when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed, a failure is confirmed, whereas the left effect symbol 8L, When the medium performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are stop-displayed together with the same pattern, the win is confirmed, the opening of the big win is started, and then the big win game in which the profit is given to the player is started. becomes.

In this way, in the pseudo-continuous performance A at the specific fluctuation, while the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, the fluctuation for the white fluctuation icon 9C in FIG. 105 (A), in a non-time saving state As a specific variation in a certain low-probability-low base state (normal state), in this specific variation, production of a specific game state that is executed in a high-probability short-time state (high-probability-high base state) after the jackpot game state can be executed. As a result, the player can experience the production of a specific game state that could only be experienced in the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot game state in the past. Since the opportunity to experience it in the low base state (normal state) is provided, players feel that the production in the low probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, is monotonous. can be made difficult.

In addition, in the pseudo-continuous production A at the time of specific fluctuation, it is a low-probability low-base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state, but a non-time-saving production ( Normal production), even after switching to the production of the specific game state that is executed in the high probability short time state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game state, when the production of the specific game state ends, again, the original After returning to the non-short-time production (normal production), the specific fluctuation is to end. In fact, although the game is progressing in a low-probability low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, it is as if it is a high-probability, which is a time-saving state, from a low-probability low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state After giving the player the illusion of being controlled to a time-saving state (high-probability-high base state), finally facing the reality that it remains in a low-probability-low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state Conventionally It is possible to provide the player with an effect that is not available in the game.

[Specific Fluctuation Pseudo Continuous Performance B]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the pseudo-continuous effect B at the time of specific change will be described. Here, on the premise that it is in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, the player shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A and hits left. Play games by In the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time-saving state, a background image is non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image). In the left-handed game, a non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in a low-probability-low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, progresses. In this non-time-saving effect (normal effect), when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, first the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, then the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, and finally the middle effect pattern. After 8C is temporarily stopped, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time (all at once). It should be noted that, in the non-time-saving production (normal production), the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same time, and finally the medium production pattern 8C may be temporarily stopped, and the left production pattern 8L and the medium production pattern 8C. and the right effect symbol 8R may temporarily stop at the same time (all at once).

The player shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A and plays a game by hitting to the left, one game ball enters the first start port 20, and the entered game ball is determined and displayed as the white first pending icon 9A by prefetching. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the stock pending icon 9A does not exist at all.

When the white first reservation icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. At this time, a variable performance (variable display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern is started, after that, two game balls enter the first start port 20, and two game balls enter the first start port 20. The entered game ball is determined and displayed as the first white reservation icon 9A by prefetching, and the last entered game ball is determined and displayed as the second white reservation icon 9A by prefetching. As a result, there are two stocked pending icons 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106(B), a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is set as the center line, and on this center line, first, the number "1" having the bright green color of the left effect pattern 8L is displayed. A coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which a pattern 8Lb of a character A is attached to a pattern 8Lb is temporarily stopped, and then a pattern 8Ra of a character G is attached to a pattern 8Rb of a number "7" having a bright red color as a right performance pattern 8R. Temporarily stop at a coin-shaped three-dimensional image, and finally temporarily stop at a coin-shaped three-dimensional image in which the middle effect pattern 8C is a number "5" pattern 8Cb with a bright green color and a character E pattern 8Ca is added, and then, The left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright green. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with a number "7" having a bright red color. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. At this time, a variable performance (variable display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. When the white first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the white second pending icon 9A moves to the right and becomes the white first pending icon 9A. As a result, there is one stocked pending icon 9A.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, after that, as shown in FIG. An upper shutter image USG1 that constitutes a pair of upper and lower shutter images that moves downward from the upper side of the display screen 7a appears on the front side of the production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R, and moves upward from the lower side of the display screen 7a. A lower shutter image LSG1 that constitutes a pair of upper and lower shutter images that move toward appears. As a result, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which form a pair of upper and lower shutter images, are suddenly displayed. Here, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 both have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 are both the above-described shapes. It has a shape of a horizontal straight line parallel to the center line of

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images that suddenly occur, are in a low-probability low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, when playing a game by hitting to the left. It occurs suddenly when the non-time-saving production (normal production) is progressing, and the variation (variation for the white variation icon 9C) is a specific variation. (Normal state), it is a specific image suggesting the start of the production of the specific game state to be executed in the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot game state. The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, which are the specific images, are displayed as an advance notice of the start of the specific game state effect, so that the specific game state effect will soon start. The player can be implicitly told that the

The player's sense of anticipation for winning increases due to the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images, which are the suddenly generated specific images. In order to gaze (concentrate), the operation of the handle 60 is stopped.

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, simulate shutters, and have predetermined single colors (for example, silver (silver), beige, green, red, yellow (gold)). (here, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which form a pair of upper and lower shutter images, are displayed in silver). Predetermined single colors indicate the degree of expectation of winning, and the degree of expectation of winning increases in the order of silver, beige, green, red, purple, and yellow (gold).

Fluctuation icon 9C is a non-time-saving state low probability low base state (normal state), after the jackpot game state high probability time-saving state (high probability high base state) of the specific game state to be executed When the production is started, it is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), so that the color of the variation icon 9C is changed in the production of the specific game state to respond to the variation (variation to the variation icon 9C). It's hard to give an indication of what to expect. Therefore, in the pseudo continuous effect B at the time of the specific change, by setting the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, to predetermined colors, the hit expectation for the effect of the specific game state is increased. , change to the variation icon 9C, and can be suggested. The winning expectations set to the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, correspond to the winning expectations set to the white color of the variation icon 9C in silver. Beige corresponds to the winning expectation set to the blue color of the variation icon 9C, and green, red, purple, and yellow (gold) are the winning expectations set to the green, red, purple, and yellow (gold) variation icons 9C. degrees, respectively.

Note that the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 may jump up to colors with high expectations for winning the color of the variation icon 9C, and may jump down to colors with low expectations for winning. Therefore, the relationship (regularity) between the color of the variation icon 9C and the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 is difficult to understand and can be aroused.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106(E), the upper shutter image USG1 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images moves downward, and the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 is aligned with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. is the centerline and this centerline is reached. In addition, the lower shutter image LSG1 that constitutes a pair of upper and lower shutter images moves upward, and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 is set to a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. to reach The downward movement speed of the upper shutter image USG1 and the upward movement speed of the lower shutter image LSG1 are the same speed. The timing at which the upper side of the side shutter image LSG1 reaches the center line matches.

As the upper shutter image USG1 moves downward, the first area extending from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 is gradually covered with the upper shutter image USG1 and becomes larger. A region (part) where the displayed non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image), the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are gradually covered with the upper shutter image USG1 is enlarged. Further, as the lower shutter image LSG1 moves upward, the second area extending from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 is gradually covered with the lower shutter image LSG1 and becomes larger. , The area (part) where the non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R that are displayed on the display screen 7a are gradually covered by the lower shutter image LSG1 growing. Note that even if the lower shutter image LSG1 moves upward, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ are all arranged on the front side, so the high speed The small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ, which are fluctuating production (variable display), are hindered by the lower shutter image LSG1 moving upward, hindering visibility. never be

When the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 reaches the center line and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 reaches the center line, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 form a pair of upper and lower shutter images. , the entire display screen 7a is covered, and the display screen 7a appears as if it were closed by a shutter. In the display mode with the shutter closed, the upper horizontal character string forming the horizontal character string arranged on the surface along the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 and the horizontal characters arranged on the surface along the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 The horizontal character string "OARO" is completed by matching with the lower horizontal character string that constitutes the column. This horizontal character string "OARO" is the same horizontal character string as the horizontal character string "OARO" formed on the surface of the second movable accessory 15, and is one of the character strings representing the world view expressed by the game board 2. be.

Since the shutter is closed, the size of the upper shutter image USG1 becomes the size of the entire area above the center line of the display screen 7a. In other words, as the upper shutter image USG1 moves downward, the first area extending from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 finally moves from the center line of the display screen 7a. It becomes the size of the entire upper area. In addition, the size of the lower shutter image LSG1 becomes the size of the entire region below the above-described center line of the display screen 7a due to the display mode in which the shutter is closed. In other words, as the lower shutter image LSG1 moves upward, the second area extending from the lower edge of the display screen 7a to the upper edge of the lower shutter image LSG1 finally reaches the center of the display screen 7a. It becomes the size of the entire area below the line.

When the shutter closed display mode is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), the upper shutter image USG1 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images moves upward as shown in FIGS. Also, the lower shutter image LSG1 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images moves downward. In this manner, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which form a pair of upper and lower shutter images, move upward and downward so as to separate from each other.

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, are in a low probability low base state (normal state) that is a non-time saving state when they start moving upward and downward so as to be separated from each other. , Non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in a low-probability low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, is executed in a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot game state. It switches to the production of the specific game state, and starts the production of the specific game state.

As a result, in the left-handed game, as described above, the non-time-saving production (normal production) performed in the non-time-saving low-probability base state (normal state) progresses, but the fluctuation (white fluctuation icon 9C variation) as a specific variation, while in a low-probability low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, after the jackpot game state and in a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) By starting the production of the specific game state, the background image is switched from the non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time saving background image KHG (city image). The player can also determine from the background image whether or not the specific game state effect is being executed.

At the timing when the background image switches from the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time-saving background image KHG (city image) (in other words, non-time-saving performed in a low-probability base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state At the timing of switching from the production (normal production) to the production of the specific game state executed in the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot game state) variation icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variation display The position is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). In addition, when the pending icon 9B exists, the pending icon 9B is also hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). On the other hand, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, the right production pattern 8R, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ and the small right production pattern 8RZ are not hidden (display screen 7a It does not disappear from), and remains in the variable production (variable display).

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which form a pair of upper and lower shutter images, start to move upward and downward so as to separate from each other, the upper shutter image USG1 disappears from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the lower shutter image appears. When the LSG1 disappears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, although it is in the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time-saving state, a pseudo-continuous effect is started in the specific game state effect. In the pseudo-continuous production, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R, which have started the fluctuation production (variation display), are temporarily stopped and the fluctuation production (variation display) is started again. Or do it over multiple times. In the pseudo-continuous production, the order of temporary stop of the production pattern is different from the non-short-time production (normal production), first the left production pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, then the middle production pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, and finally the right production pattern. 8R temporarily stops. In addition, in the pseudo continuous effect, the higher the number of pseudo fluctuations, the higher the expectation of winning, and the maximum number of pseudo times with the highest expectation of winning is set to 8 times (for example, , the probability of winning is higher when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 8 than when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 5). Due to the pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo continuous effect (because the time (fluctuation time) for one pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo continuous effect is set to, for example, 2 seconds), temporary stop and re-fluctuation It can be performed rhythmically at a good tempo, and the monotony of the variable performance (variable display) of the performance patterns by the pseudo-continuous performance can be reduced. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous effect B at the time of the specific change, the pseudo-variation is performed five times in the effect of the specific game state.

Although it is a low-probability low-base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state at the time the production of the specific game state is started, the performance pattern is performed in a low-probability-low base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state It switches from the one in the non-time-saving performance (normal performance) that is performed to the one in the performance of the specific game state that is executed in the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot game state. 106A to 106E are coin-shaped three-dimensional images, and include numerals "1" to "9", which are numeral patterns, and characters A to I, which are character patterns. , whereas the effect pattern in FIG. 106(F) is composed only of numbers "1" to "9", which are numerical patterns, and the structure of the effect pattern is switched.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106(H), a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is set as the center line, and on this center line, first, the left effect pattern 8L is a number "4" having a bright blue color. It is temporarily stopped, then temporarily stopped at the number "7" in which the medium effect pattern 8C is bright red, and finally temporarily stopped at the number "9" in which the right effect pattern 8R is bright green. At this time, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are all in the middle of high-speed fluctuation production (variation display). After that, as shown in FIG. 106(I), the variable effect (variable display) is started again, temporarily stopped, and the re-variation and temporary stop are repeated, and when the pseudo-variation is performed five times (fifth pseudo-consecutive) , as shown in FIG. 106(J), first the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "5" having a bright green color, then the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the number "6" having a bright blue color, Finally, the right production pattern 8R temporarily stops at the number "8" having a bright blue color. At this time, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are all in the middle of high-speed fluctuation production (variation display). In other words, in the pseudo-continuous effect, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ are all in a high-speed fluctuation effect (variable display).

After that, while the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are temporarily stopped on the above-described center line, as shown in FIG. An upper shutter image USG2 that constitutes a pair of upper and lower shutter images that moves downward from the upper side of the display screen 7a appears on the front side of the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R. At the same time, a lower shutter image LSG2 that constitutes a pair of upper and lower shutter images that moves upward from the lower side of the display screen 7a appears. As a result, the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images are suddenly displayed. Note that the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2 forming the pair of upper and lower shutter images have shapes different from those of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 forming the pair of upper and lower shutter images. Although both the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2 have a horizontally long rectangular shape, the lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG2 are both up and down. It has a shape of a bent polygonal line.

The upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images here, are in a low probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time saving state, but after the jackpot gaming state and high It suddenly occurs during the pseudo continuous performance in the performance of the specific game state executed in the short probability state (high probability high base state), and is a specific image suggesting the end of the performance of the specific game state. The upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, which are the specific images, are displayed as an advance notice of the end of the specific game state effect, so that the specific game state effect will soon end. The player can be implicitly told to do so.

Here, the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, simulate shutters, and are in a predetermined single color (for example, silver, beige, green, red, purple, etc.). yellow (gold)) (here, the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which form a pair of upper and lower shutter images, are displayed in red). Predetermined single colors indicate the degree of expectation of winning, and the degree of expectation of winning increases in the order of silver, beige, green, red, purple, and yellow (gold).

In addition, in the production of the specific game state, since the variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the color of the variation icon 9C is changed to It's hard to give an indication of what to expect. Therefore, in the pseudo-continuous effect B at the time of the specific change, by setting the shape and color of the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, to predetermined colors, the expectation of winning for the effect of the specific game state is achieved. degree can be suggested by changing to the variation icon 9C. The upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2 forming the pair of upper and lower shutter images have different shapes from the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 forming the pair of upper and lower shutter images. The hit expectation set for the color of the shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2 is slightly higher.

Specifically, the winning expectations set to the colors of the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute the pair of upper and lower shutter images, are the winning expectations set to the white color of the variation icon 9C. Although it is higher than the degree, it is lower than the winning expectation set to the blue color of the variation icon 9C, and beige is higher than the winning expectation set to the blue color of the variation icon 9C. Although it is lower than the set winning expectation level and higher than the winning expectation level set to the green color of the variation icon 9C, it is lower than the winning expectation level set to the red color of the variation icon 9C. Although it is higher than the winning expectation set in the red color of the variation icon 9C, it is lower than the winning expectation set in the purple color of the variation icon 9C. However, it is lower than the winning expectation set in yellow (gold) of the variation icon 9C, and yellow (gold) is higher than the winning expectation set in yellow (gold) of the variation icon 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106(L), the upper shutter image USG2 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images moves downward, and the lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 is a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. is the center line, and it reaches on this center line. In addition, the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitutes a pair of upper and lower shutter images, moves upward, and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG2 is positioned on the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. to reach The downward movement speed of the upper shutter image USG2 and the upward movement speed of the lower shutter image LSG2 are the same speed. The timing at which the upper side of the side shutter image LSG2 reaches the center line matches.

As the upper shutter image USG2 moves downward, the third area extending from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 is gradually covered with the upper shutter image USG2 and becomes larger. A region (portion) where the displayed time-saving background image KHG (city image), left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are covered with the upper shutter image USG2 gradually increases. Further, as the lower shutter image LSG2 moves upward, the fourth area extending from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG2 is gradually covered with the lower shutter image LSG2 and becomes larger. , The area (portion) where the time saving background image KHG (city image), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R displayed on the display screen 7a is gradually covered with the lower shutter image LSG2 becomes large. Become. Even if the lower shutter image LSG2 moves upward, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ are all arranged on the front side, so the high speed The small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ, which are fluctuating production (variable display), are obstructed by the lower shutter image LSG2 moving upward, hindering visibility. never be

When the lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 reaches the above-described center line and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG2 reaches the above-described center line, the polygonal lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images and the lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 , and the polygonal upper side of the lower shutter image LSG2 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images are fitted in a comb-like manner, and the entire display screen 7a is covered with the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2. The display screen 7a is displayed as if it were closed by a shutter. In the display mode in which the shutter is closed, the upper horizontal character string forming the horizontal character string arranged on the surface along the lower side of the upper shutter image USG2 and the horizontal characters arranged on the surface along the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG2. The horizontal character string "OARO" is completed by matching with the lower horizontal character string that constitutes the column. This horizontal character string "OARO" is the same horizontal character string as the horizontal character string "OARO" formed on the surface of the second movable accessory 15, and is one of the character strings representing the world view expressed by the game board 2. be.

Since the shutter is closed, the size of the upper shutter image USG2 becomes the size of the entire area above the center line of the display screen 7a. In other words, as the upper shutter image USG2 moves downward, the third area extending from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 finally moves from the center line of the display screen 7a. It becomes the size of the entire upper area. In addition, the size of the lower shutter image LSG2 becomes the size of the entire region below the above-described center line of the display screen 7a due to the display mode in which the shutter is closed. In other words, as the lower shutter image LSG2 moves upward, the fourth area extending from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 finally reaches the center of the display screen 7a. It becomes the size of the entire area below the line.

Incidentally, until just before the shutter closes, as described above, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "5" having a bright green color, the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the number "6" having a bright blue color, and the right The production pattern 8R was temporarily stopped at the number "8" having a bright blue color. However, in the display mode in which the shutter is closed, although the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R cannot be visually recognized, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are the same pattern. It may be in a state of temporary stop all at once. For this reason, in the pseudo-continuous effect at the time of the specific change B, the expectation level that the colors of the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which form a pair of upper and lower shutter images, are aligned in the same pattern in the display mode in which the shutter is closed. can be suggested. When the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are aligned with the same pattern in the display mode in which the shutter is closed and are temporarily stopped, after that, the same pattern is stopped and displayed, and the hit is won. It is determined, the jackpot opening is started, and then the jackpot game in which profits are awarded to the player is started.

When the display mode in which the shutter is closed is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), the upper shutter image USG2 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images moves upward as shown in FIG. A lower shutter image LSG2 that forms a pair of shutter images moves downward. In this manner, the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which form a pair of upper and lower shutter images, move upward and downward so as to separate from each other. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect ends. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous effect, when the reach is formed, the win is determined.

When the upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, start moving upward and downward so as to separate from each other, they are in a low probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time saving state. , Non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in a low-probability low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, is executed in a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot game state. From the state of switching to the specific game state performance, it returns to the original non-time-saving performance (normal performance). Thereby, the production of the specific game state is finished.

Thereby, from the state where the background image was switched from the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time-saving background image KHG (urban image), while being in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state , returns to the original non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image).

At the timing when the background image switches from the time-saving background image KHG (city image) to the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) (in other words, after the jackpot gaming state, a high-quality time-saving state (high-quality high base state) At the timing of switching from the production of the specific game state executed in the non-time-saving state to the non-time-saving production (normal production) performed in the low-probability-low-base state (normal state), the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, and the variable display position appears again. In addition, when the pending icon 9B exists, the pending icon 9B is also displayed again.

Furthermore, at the timing when the background image switches from the time-saving background image KHG (city image) to the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) (in other words, after the jackpot gaming state, a high-quality time-saving state (high-quality high base At the timing of switching from the production of the specific game state executed in the state) to the non-time-saving production (normal production) performed in the low-probability base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state), the composition of the production pattern is in a non-time-saving state A specific game that is executed in a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot game state from the non-short-time production (normal production) performed in the low-probability low-base state (normal state) The state of switching to the state performance is returned to the non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), which is the non-time-saving state, which is the composition of the original performance pattern.

Here, the left effect pattern 8L, which is composed only of the number patterns temporarily stopped on the center line, is a coin-shaped three-dimensional figure in which the bright green number "5" pattern 8Lb is added to the character E pattern 8La. The intermediate effect symbol 8C, which is switched to an image and is composed of only the number symbols temporarily stopped on the center line, is a coin-shaped symbol 8Cb of the number "6" having a bright blue color and a symbol 8Ca of the character F. The right effect symbol 8R, which is switched to a stereoscopic image and is composed of only the symbol of the number temporarily stopped on the center line, is a coin shape in which the symbol 8Rb of the number "8" having a bright blue color and the symbol 8Ra of the character H are attached. 3D image. At this time, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are all in the middle of high-speed fluctuation production (variation display).

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which form a pair of upper and lower shutter images, start to move upward and downward so as to separate from each other, the upper shutter image USG1 disappears from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the lower shutter image appears. When the LSG1 disappears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, after that, as shown in FIG. 106(N), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are stopped and displayed, resulting in a loss. is determined, and the specific variation that is the variation (variation for the white variation icon 9C) ends. At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "5" having bright green, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright blue. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with the number "8" having a bright blue color. Along with this, the white variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the player starts operating the handle 60 again and the first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, and the left performance symbols 8L and 8L are displayed. When the medium production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, a loss is determined, whereas the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R are the same pattern. When the symbols are stopped and displayed together, the win is confirmed, the opening of the big win is started, and then the big win game in which profits are given to the player is started.

In this way, in the pseudo-continuous performance B at the specific fluctuation, while the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, the fluctuation for the white fluctuation icon 9C in FIG. As a specific variation in a certain low-probability-low base state (normal state), in this specific variation, production of a specific game state executed in a high-probability short-time state (high-probability-high base state) after the jackpot game state can be executed. As a result, the player can experience the production of a specific game state that could only be experienced in the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot game state in the past. Since it is possible to get the opportunity to experience in the low base state (normal state), players feel that the production in the low probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, is monotonous. can be made difficult.

In addition, in the pseudo-continuous performance B at the time of the specific fluctuation, the non-time-saving performance ( Normal production), even after switching to the production of the specific game state that is executed in the high probability short time state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game state, when the production of the specific game state ends, again, the original After returning to the non-short-time production (normal production), the specific fluctuation is to end. In fact, although the game is progressing in a low-probability low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, it is as if it is a high-probability, which is a time-saving state, from a low-probability low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state After giving the player the illusion of being controlled to a time-saving state (high-probability-high base state), finally facing the reality that it remains in a low-probability-low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state Conventionally It is possible to provide the player with an effect that is not available in the game.

[Specific Fluctuation Pseudo Continuous Performance C]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the pseudo-continuous effect C at the time of specific change will be described. Here, on the premise that it is in a low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, the player shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A and hits left. Play games by In the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time-saving state, a background image is non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image). In the left-handed game, a non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in a low-probability-low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, progresses. In this non-time-saving effect (normal effect), when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, first the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, then the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, and finally the middle effect pattern. After 8C is temporarily stopped, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time (all at once). It should be noted that, in the non-time-saving production (normal production), the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same time, and finally the medium production pattern 8C may be temporarily stopped, and the left production pattern 8L and the medium production pattern 8C. and the right effect symbol 8R may temporarily stop at the same time (all at once).

The player shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A and plays a game by hitting to the left, one game ball enters the first start port 20, and the entered game ball is determined and displayed as the yellow (gold) first pending icon 9A by prefetching. The yellow (gold) first pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes a yellow (gold) variable icon 9C. The player's expectation for winning is increased by the yellow (gold) first pending icon 9A being displayed and the yellow (gold) variation icon 9C, and the variation (yellow (gold) variation icon 9C In order to focus on (concentrate on) the change to the current position, the operation of the handle 60 is stopped, and as a result, there is no stock reserved icon 9A at all.

When the yellow (gold) first reserved icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. be done. At this time, a variable performance (variable display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started.

Since it is a variable production (variable display) of the production pattern in the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state, the configuration of the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R is a coin, respectively. It is a three-dimensional image of a shape, and is composed of numerals "1" to "9", which are numeral patterns, and characters A to I, which are character patterns.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, after that, as shown in FIG. An upper shutter image USG1 that constitutes a pair of upper and lower shutter images that moves downward from the upper side of the display screen 7a appears on the front side of the production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R, and moves upward from the lower side of the display screen 7a. A lower shutter image LSG1 that constitutes a pair of upper and lower shutter images moving toward appears. As a result, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images are suddenly displayed. Here, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 both have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 are both It has a shape of a horizontal straight line parallel to a horizontal line (center line) passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a.

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images that suddenly occur, are in a low probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time saving state, when playing a game by hitting left. It occurs suddenly when the non-time-saving production (normal production) is in progress, and the variation (variation for the yellow (gold) variation icon 9C) is a specific variation. Although it is in the low base state (normal state), it is a specific image that suggests the start of the production of the specific game state executed in the high probability short time state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game state. . The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, which are the specific images, are displayed as an advance notice of the start of the specific game state production, so that the specific game state production will soon start. The player can be implicitly told that the

The player's sense of anticipation for winning is increased by the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images, which are the suddenly generated specific images. Note that even if the player continues to operate the handle 60 until this time, the player stops shooting the useless ball because the expectation for the hit has increased due to the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1. Therefore, the operation of the handle 60 is stopped.

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, simulate shutters, and have predetermined single colors (for example, silver (silver), beige, green, red, and yellow (gold)). is displayed. Predetermined single colors indicate the degree of expectation of winning, and the degree of expectation of winning increases in the order of silver, beige, green, red, purple, and yellow (gold).

Fluctuation icon 9C is a non-time-saving state low probability low base state (normal state), after the jackpot gaming state high probability time-saving state (high probability high base state) of the specific game state to be executed When the effect is started, it is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). It's hard to give an indication of what to expect. Therefore, in the pseudo-continuous effect C at the time of the specific change, by setting the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, to predetermined colors, the hit expectation for the effect of the specific game state is increased. , is changed to the variation icon 9C, and can be suggested. The winning expectations set to the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, correspond to the winning expectations set to the white color of the variation icon 9C in silver. Beige corresponds to the winning expectation set to the blue color of the variation icon 9C, and green, red, purple, and yellow (gold) are the winning expectations set to the green, red, purple, and yellow (gold) variation icons 9C. degrees, respectively.

Note that the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 may jump up to colors with high expectations for winning the color of the variation icon 9C, and may jump down to colors with low expectations for winning. Therefore, the relationship (regularity) between the color of the variation icon 9C and the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 is difficult to understand and can be aroused.

Here, as the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which form a pair of upper and lower shutter images, silver, which has the lowest probability of winning, is intentionally displayed. Since the color of the variation icon 9C is already displayed as yellow (gold), it suggests that the degree of expectation for winning is high, giving the player a feeling of anticipation. By setting the color of the lower shutter image LSG1 to silver, which has the lowest chance of winning, as described above, the color of the variation icon 9C does not always jump up to the color with the highest chance of winning. By jumping down to colors with a low expectation of winning, it is intended to make the relationship (regularity) difficult to understand and make the player feel uneasy. Of course, since the variation icon 9C is already displayed in yellow (gold), the colors of the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 may also be yellow (gold).

After that, as shown in FIG. 107C, the upper shutter image USG1 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images moves downward, and the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 is aligned with the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. is the center line, and it reaches on this center line. In addition, the lower shutter image LSG1 constituting a pair of upper and lower shutter images moves upward, and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 is positioned on the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. to reach The downward movement speed of the upper shutter image USG1 and the upward movement speed of the lower shutter image LSG1 are the same speed. The timing at which the upper side of the side shutter image LSG1 reaches the center line matches.

As the upper shutter image USG1 moves downward, the first area extending from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 is gradually covered with the upper shutter image USG1 and becomes larger. A region (part) in which the displayed non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image), the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are gradually covered with the upper shutter image USG1 is enlarged. Further, as the lower shutter image LSG1 moves upward, the second area extending from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 is gradually covered with the lower shutter image LSG1 and becomes larger. , The area (part) where the non-time saving background image GG1 (underground image), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R that are displayed on the display screen 7a are gradually covered by the lower shutter image LSG1 growing. Even if the lower shutter image LSG1 moves upward, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ are all arranged on the front side, so the high speed The small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ, which are fluctuating production (variable display), are hindered by the lower shutter image LSG1 moving upward, hindering visibility. never be

When the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 reaches the center line and the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 reaches the center line, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 form a pair of upper and lower shutter images. , the entire display screen 7a is covered, and the display screen 7a appears as if it were closed by a shutter. In the display mode in which the shutter is closed, the upper horizontal character string forming the horizontal character string arranged on the surface along the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 and the horizontal characters arranged on the surface along the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 The horizontal character string "OARO" is completed by matching with the lower horizontal character string that constitutes the column. This horizontal character string "OARO" is the same horizontal character string as the horizontal character string "OARO" formed on the surface of the second movable accessory 15, and is one of the character strings representing the world view expressed by the game board 2. be.

Since the shutter is closed, the size of the upper shutter image USG1 becomes the size of the entire area above the center line of the display screen 7a. In other words, as the upper shutter image USG1 moves downward, the first area extending from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the upper shutter image USG1 finally moves from the center line of the display screen 7a. It becomes the size of the entire upper area. In addition, the size of the lower shutter image LSG1 becomes the size of the entire area below the above-described center line of the display screen 7a due to the display mode in which the shutter is closed. In other words, as the lower shutter image LSG1 moves upward, the second area extending from the lower side of the display screen 7a to the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 finally reaches the center of the display screen 7a. It becomes the size of the entire area below the line.

When the display mode in which the shutter is closed is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), the upper shutter image USG1 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images moves upward as shown in FIGS. Also, the lower shutter image LSG1 forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images moves downward. In this manner, the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which form a pair of upper and lower shutter images, move upward and downward so as to separate from each other.

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images, are in a low probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time saving state, when they start moving upward and downward so as to be separated from each other. , Non-time-saving performance (normal performance) performed in a low-probability-low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, is executed in a high-probability-shortening state (high-probability-high base state) after the jackpot game state. It switches to the production of the specific game state, and starts the production of the specific game state.

As a result, in the left-handed game, as described above, the non-time-saving production (normal production) performed in the non-time-saving low-probability base state (normal state) progresses, but the change (yellow (gold) The variation for the variation icon 9C) is a specific variation, and while it is a low-probability low-base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state, it is a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot gaming state. , the background image is switched from the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time-saving background image KHG (city image). The player can also determine from the background image whether or not the specific game state effect is being executed.

At the timing when the background image switches from the non-time-saving background image GG1 (underground image) to the time-saving background image KHG (city image) (in other words, non-time-saving performed in a low-probability base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state At the timing of switching from the production (normal production) to the production of the specific game state executed in the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot game state) The fluctuation icon 9C and the fluctuation display position are hidden. (disappears from the display screen 7a). In addition, when the pending icon 9A (9B) exists, the pending icon 9A (9B) is also hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). On the other hand, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, the right production pattern 8R, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ and the small right production pattern 8RZ are not hidden (display screen 7a It does not disappear from), and remains in the variable production (variable display).

The upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which form a pair of upper and lower shutter images, start to move upward and downward so as to separate from each other, the upper shutter image USG1 disappears from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the lower shutter image appears. When the LSG1 disappears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, although it is in the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time-saving state, a pseudo continuous effect is started in the specific game state effect. In the pseudo-continuous production, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R, which have started the fluctuation production (variation display), are temporarily stopped and the fluctuation production (variation display) is started again. Or do it over multiple times. In the pseudo continuous production, the order of temporary stop of the production pattern is different from the non-short-time production (normal production), first the left production pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, then the medium production pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, and finally the right production pattern. 8R temporarily stops. In addition, in the pseudo continuous effect, the higher the number of pseudo fluctuations, the higher the expectation of winning, and the maximum number of pseudo times with the highest expectation of winning is set to 8 times (for example, , the probability of winning is higher when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 8 than when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 3). Due to the pseudo variation in the pseudo continuous effect (because the time (fluctuation time) for one pseudo variation in the pseudo continuous effect is set to, for example, 2 seconds), temporary stop and re-fluctuation It can be performed rhythmically at a good tempo, and the monotony of the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern by the pseudo-continuous performance can be reduced. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous effect C at the time of the specific change, the pseudo-variation is performed eight times in the effect of the specific game state.

Although it is a low-probability low-base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state at the time the production of the specific game state is started, it is performed in a low-probability-low base state (normal state) that is a non-time-saving state It switches from the one in the non-time-saving performance (normal performance) that is performed to the one in the performance of the specific game state that is executed in the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot game state. 107A to 107C are coin-shaped three-dimensional images, and include numbers "1" to "9", which are number patterns, and characters A to I, which are character patterns. , whereas the effect pattern in FIG. 107(D) is composed only of numerals "1" to "9", and the structure of the effect pattern is switched.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107(F), a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is set as the center line, and on this center line, first, the left effect pattern 8L is a number "4" having a bright blue color. It is temporarily stopped, then temporarily stopped at the number "7" in which the medium effect pattern 8C is bright red, and finally temporarily stopped at the number "9" in which the right effect pattern 8R is bright green. At this time, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are all in the middle of high-speed fluctuation production (variation display). After that, as shown in FIG. 107(G), the variable effect (variable display) is started again, temporarily stopped, and the re-variation and temporary stop are repeated, and when the pseudo-variation is performed eight times (pseudo-consecutive eighth time). , as shown in FIG. 107(H), here, the rule is broken, first the left production pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "7" having a bright red color, and then the right production pattern 8R is a number having a bright red color. Temporarily stopped at "7", medium production pattern 8C is in the variable production (variation display), and ready-to-win is formed. The pseudo-continuous effect ends when the reach is formed. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous effect, when the reach is formed, the win is determined.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (I), it is on the front side of the time saving background image KHG (city image), behind the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R, shining golden. An ally character CRA with wings is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, after which the medium effect pattern 8C temporarily stops at the number "7" having a bright red color, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern. 8R pause at number "7" with all bright red.

After that, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stop-displayed with the same pattern (here, number "7" having a bright red color), and winning is confirmed. At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "7" having bright red, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright red. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with the number "7" having a bright red color. That is, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, number "7" having bright red color).

The left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are stop-displayed with the number "7" having a bright red color, so that the game state after the big hit becomes a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state). .

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (J), the background image switches from the time-saving background image KHG (city image) to the jackpot opening background image AOG, which is the background image of the jackpot opening, and at this time, has golden shining wings. The teammate character CRA, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the opening of the jackpot is started. When the jackpot opening is started, a large message image MS1 saying "jackpot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a game ball is shot from the left-handed game so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B. Then, a right-handed shot image MY in which "Right-handed" is written in the right arrow image is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a so as to switch to a right-handed game. The right-handed image MY is an image that suggests to the player that the player will play a right-handed game, and thus is an image that suggests a game state of "right-handed game." In addition, the right-handed image MY is always arranged and displayed on the front side in the right-handed game such as the jackpot game state and the time saving state, and is hindered by various effect images and other various images. visibility is not hindered.

Even when the jackpot opening is started, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, number "7" having bright red color). state is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107(K), the background image is switched from the jackpot opening background image AOG to the jackpot game background image RHG1, which is the background image of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is started. . Along with this, the player starts operating the handle 60 again to play a right-handed game. When a jackpot game is started, a round image RG called "Round 1" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a to inform the player of the number of rounds currently being played. Even when the jackpot game is started, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ stop at the same pattern (here, number "7" having bright red color). displayed state is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107(L), when all the rounds in the jackpot game are completed, the background image switches from the jackpot game background image RHG1 to the jackpot ending background image AEG, which is the background image of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot ending starts. be done. When the jackpot ending is started, a message image MS2 saying "Total: XXXX GET" (XXXX indicates the number of balls) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, indicating the number of game balls that the player has won in the jackpot game. displayed large. Even when the jackpot ending is started, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ stop at the same pattern (here, number "7" having bright red color). displayed state is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (M), when the jackpot ending ends, the background image switches from the jackpot ending background image AEG to the time-saving background image KHG (city image), and is a non-time-saving state low probability low base state ( Normal state) is controlled to a high-precision time-saving state (high-precision high base state), which is a time-saving state, the production of a specific game state is started, and again, the left production pattern 8L, which is stopped and displayed on the above-mentioned center line. A production design 8C and a right production design appear. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, number "7" having bright red color). At this point, there are no pending icons 9A, 9B.

After that, the player enters two game balls into the second starting port 21 by playing the game by hitting to the right, and then, of the two game balls entering the second starting port 21, the game ball that enters first. is determined and displayed as the first white pending icon 9B by prefetching, and the game ball that entered last is determined and displayed as the second white pending icon 9B by prefetching. As a result, there are two stocked pending icons 9B.

When the white first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. At this time, a variable performance (variation display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. When the white first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, the white second pending icon 9B moves to the left and becomes the white first pending icon 9A. As a result, there is one stocked pending icon 9A.

After that, when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are fixed. When the performance patterns 8R are stop-displayed together in the same pattern, the win is confirmed, the opening of the big win is started, and then the big win game in which the profit is awarded to the player is started.

In this way, in the pseudo-continuous effect C at the time of the specific fluctuation, while it is in the low-probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, the fluctuation for the yellow (gold) fluctuation icon 9C in FIG. As a specific variation in the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a time saving state, in this specific variation, a specific game that is executed in a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game state It is designed to be able to execute the production of the state. As a result, the player can experience the production of a specific game state that could only be experienced in the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot game state in the past. Since it is possible to get the opportunity to experience in the low base state (normal state), players feel that the production in the low probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, is monotonous. can be made difficult.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the pseudo-continuous effect at the time of specific fluctuation is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect of the specific game state executed after the jackpot game state (win game state) can be executed in a specific variation before the jackpot game state (win game state) occurs. (Fig. 105 (F) to (L) for pseudo-continuous performance A at specific fluctuation, Fig. 106 (F) to (K) for pseudo-continuous performance B at specific fluctuation, pseudo-continuous performance C at specific fluctuation 107 (D) to (I)). According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the performance of the specific game state, which could only be experienced after the jackpot game state (hit game state) in the past, before the jackpot game state (hit game state) occurs. You will have the opportunity to experience it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the performance before the big win game state (win game state) occurs is monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when a specific variation is started in the pseudo-continuous effect A at the time of the specific change in FIG. 105, the pseudo-continuous effect at the time of the specific change B in FIG. , the specific image is displayed, then the specific image disappears, and the specific game state effect is executed. Specifically, in the pseudo-continuous production A at the time of the specific fluctuation, the fluctuation for the white fluctuation icon 9C in FIG. When the specific variation is started, the movable role product image KMG (specific image) is displayed in FIGS. A production is to be executed. In the pseudo continuous effect B at the time of specific fluctuation, the fluctuation for the white fluctuation icon 9C in FIG. Then, an upper shutter image USG1 (specific image) and a lower shutter image LSG1 (specific image) forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images are displayed in FIGS. The specific game state effects in (F) to (K) are executed. In the specific fluctuation pseudo-continuous effect C, the fluctuation for the yellow (gold) fluctuation icon 9C in FIG. When the change starts, the upper shutter image USG1 (specific image) and the lower shutter image LSG1 (specific image) forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images in FIGS. , 107(D) to (I), the specific game state effects are executed. According to this configuration, the production of the specific game state which is executed after the jackpot game state (hit game state) at the timing when the specific variation is started is not suddenly executed, but the specific image is displayed first, and then , disappearing can serve as an advance notice of the start of the performance of the specific game state, and can inform the player that the performance of the specific game state will start soon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a specific image is displayed during execution of the specific game state effect in the pseudo-continuous effect A at the time of the specific change in FIG. 105 and the pseudo-continuous effect at the time of the specific change B in FIG. When the image disappears, the effect of the specific game state ends and the specific variation ends. Specifically, in the pseudo continuous effect A at the time of the specific change, during the execution of the specific game state effect, the movable accessory image KMG (specific image) is displayed in FIGS. 105 (K) to (M), and then disappears. Then, the effect of the specific game state ends, and the specific variation ends in FIG. 105(N). 106(K) to (M), an upper shutter image USG2 (specific image) and a lower shutter image that form a pair of upper and lower shutter images in FIGS. 106(K) to (M). LSG2 (specific image) is displayed, then disappears, and the specific variation ends in FIG. 106(N). According to this configuration, the production of the specific game state is not abruptly ended at the timing when the specific variation ends, but the specific image is displayed first, and then disappears to give notice of the end of the production of the specific game state. , and it is possible to inform the player that the effect of the specific game state will end soon.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the specific game state effects in the pseudo-continuous effect A at the time of the specific change in FIG. 105, the pseudo-continuous effect at the time of the specific change B in FIG. A continuous effect can be executed a plurality of times, and when a reach is formed in the pseudo continuous effect, a win is achieved. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the win at the stage when the reach is formed in the pseudo-continuous effect, so that the pseudo-continuous effect in the effect of the specific game state is executed. Thus, it is possible to continuously give the player a sense of anticipation for the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols (left performance symbols 8L, middle performance symbols 8C, right performance symbols 8R).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the specific images in the pseudo-continuous effect A at the time of the specific change in FIG. 105, the pseudo-continuous effect at the time of the specific change B in FIG. It is arranged in front of the informing left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C, right production pattern 8R (a set of production patterns), and at least the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, the right production pattern 8R (a set of Directing pattern) can be covered. Specifically, in the pseudo continuous effect A at the time of specific fluctuation, the movable role object image KMG (specific image) in FIGS. A set of production patterns), and at least a part of the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R (a set of production patterns), or the whole can be covered. ing. In the pseudo-continuous effect at the time of the specific change B, the upper shutter image USG1 (specific image) and the lower shutter image LSG1 (specific image), which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images in FIGS. 8L, medium production pattern 8C, right production pattern 8R (a set of production patterns), and at least part of the left production pattern 8L, medium production pattern 8C, right production pattern 8R (a set of production patterns). , or can be covered entirely. In the pseudo-continuous effect C at the time of the specific change, the upper shutter image USG1 (specific image) and the lower shutter image LSG1 (specific image), which constitute a pair of upper and lower shutter images in FIGS. 8L, medium production pattern 8C, right production pattern 8R (a set of production patterns), and at least part of the left production pattern 8L, medium production pattern 8C, right production pattern 8R (a set of production patterns). , or can be covered entirely. According to this configuration, by covering the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (a set of effect patterns) with the specific image, in addition to the notice of the start of the effect in the specific game state, the left It is also possible to arouse the expectation that the production pattern 8L, the medium production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R (a set of production patterns) may change into winning patterns.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the pseudo-continuous effect at the time of specific fluctuation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the pseudo-continuous effect in the pseudo-continuous effect A at the time of the specific change in FIG. 105 and the pseudo-continuous effect at the time of the specific change B in FIG. In the pseudo-continuous performance A, the pseudo-variation is performed four times. In FIG. 106 (J) of the pseudo-continuous 5 sea surface which is the time), in the pseudo-continuous effect A at the time of the specific change, the movable character image KMG, which is a specific image suggesting the end of the specific effect, moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The upper shutter image USG2 and the lower shutter image LSG2 constituting a pair of upper and lower shutter images, which are specific images that appear while moving toward and suggest the end of the specific effect in the pseudo continuous effect B at the time of the specific change, move downward and upward. Appeared while moving. However, even before the pseudo variation reaches the final round, the specific image may appear and disappear one or more times, and the pseudo continuous effect may be continued until the final round is reached. . In this way, it is possible to incite the player a sense of crisis that the pseudo continuous production may end and the specific production may end, and in a specific fluctuation in the low probability low base state (normal state) which is a non-time saving state , It is possible to increase the variations of the specific production performed in the high-precision time-saving state (high-precision high base state), which is a time-saving state.

[Modification 2]
105 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the specific fluctuation pseudo-continuous effect A in FIG. 106, in the specific fluctuation pseudo-continuous effect B in FIG. The production of a specific game state that is executed in a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) can be executed in a specific variation in a low-probability low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state. rice field. In addition, the production of the specific game state executed in the high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot game state was executed in the time-saving state controlled after the jackpot game. . In the time saving state, there are so-called a time saving, b time saving, and c time saving in addition to the high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). In a time saving, b time saving, c time saving, although the specific game state effect is not executed, a time saving specific game state effect that is performed only in a time saving is provided, and b time saving specific game state is performed only in b time saving. A game state effect may be provided, and a specific game state effect for c time saving which is executed only in c time saving may be provided. In this case, in the specific fluctuation in the low-probability base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, the production of a specific game state for short-time production, the production of specific game state for short-time b, and the specific game state for short-time production It may be made executable. In this way, in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, in addition to the specific game state production, a specific game state production for time reduction, b specific game state production for time reduction , c. You can also get an opportunity to experience the production of the specific game state for time saving. This can contribute to making the player feel less monotonous in the performance in the low probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state.

[Modification 3]
In the pseudo-continuous effect in the specific effect in the specific change pseudo-continuous effect A in FIG. 105, the specific change pseudo-continuous effect B in FIG. 106, and the specific change pseudo-continuous effect C in FIG. The higher the number of pseudo fluctuations, the higher the expectation of winning. The number of simulated times was 1 to 8 times. However, the maximum number of pseudo times may be increased from eight times. For example, the pseudo number of times may be 1 to 15 times, 1 to 20 times, or 1 to 30 times. By doing this, the maximum number of times of the pseudo-continuous performance increases, and the pseudo-variation in the pseudo-continuous performance increases, and the temporary stop and re-variation can be rhythmically performed at a good tempo, and the performance pattern by the pseudo-continuous performance can be performed. This can contribute to further reducing the monotony of the variable presentation (variable display).

[Modification 4]
106 and C in FIG. 107 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a pair of upper and lower shutter images that move downward from the upper side of the display screen 7a are formed. An upper shutter image USG1 (specific image) appeared, and a lower shutter image LSG1 (specific image) forming a pair of upper and lower shutter images moved upward from the lower side of the display screen 7a appeared. 106, the upper shutter image USG2 (specific image) that constitutes a pair of upper and lower shutter images that move downward from the upper side of the display screen 7a appears, and the upper shutter image USG2 (specific image) appears on the display screen 7a. A lower shutter image LSG2 (specific image) that constitutes a pair of upper and lower shutter images that move upward from the lower side appears. However, a left shutter image forming a pair of left and right shutter images moving rightward from the left side of the display screen 7a appears, and a pair of left and right shutter images moving leftward from the right side of the display screen 7a appears. A constituent left shutter image may appear. That is, the specific image may be a pair of left and right shutter images. In this case, the left shutter image constituting the pair of left and right shutter images moves to the right, and the right side of the right shutter image is positioned on the vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. reach. Also, the right shutter image constituting the pair of left and right shutter images moves to the left, and the left side of the right shutter image reaches the center line, which is a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. do. The moving speed of the left shutter image to the right and the moving speed of the right shutter image to the left are the same speed. coincides with the timing at which the left side of reaches the center line.

It should be noted that the left shutter image and the right shutter image forming the pair of left and right shutter images simulate shutters and are predetermined displayed in a single color (for example, silver, beige, green, red, purple, yellow (gold)). This predetermined single color, like the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1, which form a pair of upper and lower shutter images, suggests the degree of expectation for winning, silver → beige → green → red → purple. → The degree of expectation for winning is increasing in the order of yellow (gold). Even with this configuration, the player can increase the expectation of winning by the left shutter image and the right shutter image that constitute a pair of left and right shutter images that are suddenly generated specific images, and the player is in a non-time-saving state. In a specific variation in the probability low base state (normal state), instead of suddenly executing the production of the specific game state executed in the high probability short time state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game state By displaying the specific image as a notice of the start of the performance of the specific game state, it is possible to inform the player that the performance of the specific game state will start soon. In addition, in a specific variation in the low-probability low base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, the production of a specific game state that is executed in a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot game state However, by displaying a specific image as an advance notice of the end of the performance of the specific game state instead of ending suddenly, it is possible to inform the player that the performance of the specific game state will soon end.

In addition, when a display mode in which the shutter is closed by a pair of left and right shutter images is displayed, the left vertical character string forming the vertical character string arranged on the surface along the right side of the left shutter image and the left side of the right shutter image along the left side of the right shutter image. The vertical character string "OARO" is completed by matching with the vertical character string on the right side constituting the vertical character string arranged on the surface. This vertical character string "OARO" is formed by arranging the horizontal character string "OARO" formed on the surface of the second movable accessory 15 as a vertical character string. is one.

[Modification 5]
106 and C in FIG. 107 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the upper shutter image USG1 is displayed when the pair of upper and lower shutter images causes the shutter to close. The upper horizontal character string forming the horizontal character string arranged on the surface along the lower side and the lower horizontal character string forming the horizontal character string arranged on the surface along the upper side of the lower shutter image LSG1 are matched. As a result, the horizontal character string "OARO" was completed. However, patterns may be used instead of character strings. The pattern may be, for example, a simple symbol such as a circle, a triangle, or a square, a projection of a three-dimensional structure, or a figure representing the world view represented by the game board 2. may In this way, variations of shutter images can be increased. Also, the pattern may be changed when a pair of upper and lower shutter images appear. Furthermore, when a pair of upper and lower shutter images appear, the pattern of the shutter images may indicate the degree of expectation of winning.

[Modification 6]
105(C) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position (the position of the second movable accessory 15 in FIG. 1) to the display screen 7a. It has started moving downward to the advanced position, which is the central position (the intersection of a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). However, instead of the second movable role 15, or together with the second movable role 15, the first movable role 14 may appear on the display screen 7a and move in the horizontal direction, or the frame may be moved. The accessories 69 may be moved from the retracted position toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other. Similarly to the second movable role 15, the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role 69 are also operated during the variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern, the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role The player has a higher expectation for winning after the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is completed (that is, after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed) compared to when the object 69 is not operated. It suggests to Therefore, the player is highly interested in the operation (movement) of the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 . As a result, the player's sense of expectation for winning increases due to the actuation (action) of the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 in the same way as the actuation (action) of the second movable accessory 15 . Further, by operating (operating) the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role 69, which are different from the second movable role 15 corresponding to the movable role image KMG, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of discomfort. It can also contribute to increasing variations in performance.

[Modification 7]
105 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the movable role object image KMG, which is the specific image, appears, it can be used as an advance notice of the start of the specific game state effect. It was possible to inform the player that the performance of the specific game state was started. 106 and C in FIG. 107, when the upper shutter image USG1 and the lower shutter image LSG1 constituting a pair of upper and lower shutter images, which are specific images, appear. , it can be used as an advance notice of the start of the performance of the specific game state, and it is possible to inform the player that the performance of the specific game state will start soon. However, the specific image may appear not only as an advance notice of the start of the production of the specific game state, but also as an advance notice of development to a super ready-to-win production (SP ready-to-win) with a high chance of winning. In this way, by the appearance of the specific image, it is possible to increase the variation of whether the subsequent effect will be the effect of the specific game state or the super ready-to-win effect (SP reach).

[Modification 8]
105 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the specific fluctuation pseudo-continuous effect A in FIG. 106, the specific fluctuation pseudo-continuous effect B in FIG. It may be omitted, or other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E1-1]
is a game machine,
The performance of the specific game state executed after the winning game state can be executed in a specific variation before the winning game state occurs,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
When the specific variation is started, a specific image is displayed, then the specific image disappears, and the specific game state effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
During the execution of the specific game state effect, the specific image is displayed, and then when the specific image disappears, the specific game state effect ends and the specific variation ends.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-3,
In the effect of the specific game state, a pseudo-continuous effect can be executed multiple times, and when a reach is formed in the pseudo-continuous effect, it becomes a win.
characterized by

◇[Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4,
The specific image is arranged in front of a set of performance symbols capable of informing success or failure, and covers at least the set of performance symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operation means image display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This operation means image display effect is executed along with the variation effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the operation means image display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Operation Means Image Display Effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect A. FIG. Regarding the operation means image display effect A, first, the description will start from the effect during variation shown in FIG. 108(A). Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are performing high-speed fluctuations. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. A button image BG1 and a button image BG2 imitating the production button 63 are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The button image BG1 is displayed below the changing left effect symbol 8L. The button image BG2 is displayed below the changing right effect symbol 8R. The button image BG1 is swaying and is red (shown with hatching in the figure), and the button image BG2 is white, and their modes are different.

Next, when the player presses the effect button 63, the left symbol stop effect is executed as shown in FIG. 108(B). The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol slows down and stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the "2" symbol. The middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8C are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the button image BG1 becomes white, and the button image BG2 fluctuates and becomes red.

Next, when the player presses the effect button 63, the right symbol stop effect is executed as shown in FIG. 108(C). The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol slows down and stops. Here, the right performance symbol 8R is stopped at "4" symbol. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. At this time, both the button images BG1 and BG2 are white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(D), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium design design slows down and stops. Here, the medium effect pattern 8C is stopped at the "3" pattern. At this time, both the button images BG1 and BG2 are white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(E), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. A button image BG1 and a button image BG2 imitating the production button 63 are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The button image BG1 is displayed below the changing left effect symbol 8L. The button image BG2 is displayed below the changing right effect symbol 8R. The button image BG1 is swaying and is red (shown with hatching in the figure), and the button image BG2 is white, and their modes are different.

Next, when the player presses the effect button 63, the left symbol stop effect is executed as shown in FIG. 108(F). The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol slows down and stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the "7" symbol. The middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8C are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the button image BG1 becomes white, and the button image BG2 fluctuates and becomes red.

Next, when the player presses the effect button 63, the right symbol stop effect is executed as shown in FIG. 108(G). The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol slows down and stops. Here, the right performance symbol 8R is stopped at the "7" symbol. The left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both stopped at the "7" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. At this time, both the button images BG1 and BG2 are white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(H), the development effect is executed. The development effect is a effect for notifying the development from normal reach to SP reach (super reach). Here, a message image MS of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A reduced left effect pattern 8L ("7" pattern) is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and a reduced right effect pattern 8R ("7" pattern) is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. there is

Next, as shown in FIGS. 108(I) and (J), a battle effect is executed. A battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character.
In FIG. 108(I), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a reduced left effect pattern 8L ("7" pattern) is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and a reduced right effect pattern 8R ("7" pattern) is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. is displayed.
In FIG. 108(J), it is the final phase of the battle production, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are about to deliver the final blow to each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(K), an operation prompting effect is executed. The operation prompting effect is a effect that prompts the user to operate the operating means. Here, a sword image BG3 simulating a sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, an arrow image YG is displayed to the left of the sword image BG3, and a message image MS "push" is displayed to the right of the sword image BG3. is displayed. A button image BG1 is displayed on the left side of the center of the display screen 7a, and a button image BG2 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG1 is red (hatched in the figure), and the button image BG2 is white.

When the player pushes the sword member 65 or presses the effect button 63, the win/lose notification effect as shown in FIG. 108(L) is executed. Winning/losing notification production is a production for informing whether or not the lottery of the special symbols has been won or lost. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7" patterns. Thereby, the fact that the prize has been won (that the prize is a jackpot) is reported. On the other hand, in the case of informing of the failure, the middle production pattern 8C is other than the "7" pattern (for example, the "8" pattern) with respect to the left and right production patterns 8L, 8R ("7" pattern). If the sword member 65 and the effect button 63 are not operated, the win-lose notification effect is executed after the operation valid period elapses.

[Operation Means Image Display Effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect B. FIG. Regarding the operation means image display effect B, first, the description is started from the effect during variation shown in FIG. 109(A). Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are performing high-speed fluctuations. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a sword image BG1 imitating the sword member 65 and a button image BG2 imitating the production button 63 are displayed. The sword image BG1 is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen 7a. The button image BG2 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a (under the changing right effect symbol 8R).

When the player operates the sword member 65 during the fluctuation, the number-of-games display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 109(B). The number-of-games display effect is an effect of displaying the number of games after the big hit (the number of variations of the special symbols). Here, the number-of-games image GH of "187G" is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. The number-of-games image GH disappears after a predetermined time (for example, "1" second) has elapsed. Also at this time, the sword image BG1 and the button image BG2 are displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63 during fluctuation, the reliability suggesting effect is executed as shown in FIG. 109(C). The reliability suggesting effect is a effect suggesting the reliability of winning the special symbol lottery. Here, a reliability image SH of "reliability 10%" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. The reliability image SH disappears after a predetermined time (for example, "1" second) has passed. Also at this time, the sword image BG1 and the button image BG2 are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(D), a fixed stop effect is executed. The fixed stop production is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is confirmed and stopped at "2" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is confirmed and stopped at "3" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is confirmed and stopped at "4" symbol. Also at this time, the sword image BG1 and the button image BG2 are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(E), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and perform high-speed fluctuation. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a sword image BG1 imitating the sword member 65 and a button image BG2 imitating the production button 63 are displayed. The sword image BG1 is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen 7a. The button image BG2 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a (under the changing right effect symbol 8R).

When the player operates the sword member 65 during the fluctuation, the number-of-games display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 109(F). The number-of-games display effect is an effect of displaying the number of games after the big hit (the number of variations of the special symbols). Here, the number-of-games image GH of "188G" is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. The number-of-games image GH disappears after a predetermined time (for example, "1" second) has elapsed. Also at this time, the sword image BG1 and the button image BG2 are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(G), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win production effect is an effect to stop the effect pattern in a predetermined ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "7" symbol. When the player presses the effect button 63 even during reach, the reliability suggesting effect is executed. The reliability suggesting effect is a effect suggesting the reliability of winning the special symbol lottery. In this case, a reliability image SH of "Extremely Hot" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. The reliability image SH disappears after a predetermined time (for example, "1" second) has passed. Also at this time, the sword image BG1 and the button image BG2 are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(H), the development effect is executed. The development effect is a effect for notifying the development from normal reach to SP reach (super reach). Here, a message image MS of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A reduced left effect pattern 8L ("7" pattern) is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and a reduced right effect pattern 8R ("7" pattern) is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. there is

Next, as shown in FIGS. 109(I) and (J), a battle effect is executed. A battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character.
In FIG. 109(I), the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a reduced left effect pattern 8L ("7" pattern) is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and a reduced right effect pattern 8R ("7" pattern) is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. is displayed.
In FIG. 109(J), it is the final phase of the battle production, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are about to deliver the final blow to each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(K), an operation prompting effect is executed. The operation prompting effect is a effect that prompts the user to operate the operating means. Here, a button image BG3 imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG3 is red (indicated by hatching), is displayed as if it vibrates finely, and has a character image "PUSH" superimposed thereon. An arrow image YG is displayed above the button image BG3, a message image MS saying "Press!" is displayed above the arrow image YG, and a validity period image VG is displayed above the message image MS. The effective period image VG is an image that indicates the period during which pressing of the effect button 63 is effective, and the hatched portion displayed within the rectangular frame indicates the remaining time of the effective period. Also at this time, the sword image BG1 and the button image BG2 are displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a win/lose notification effect is executed as shown in FIG. 109(L). Winning/losing notification production is a production for informing whether or not the lottery of the special symbols has been won or lost. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7" patterns. Thereby, the fact that the prize has been won (that the prize is a jackpot) is reported. On the other hand, in the case of informing of the failure, the middle production pattern 8C is other than the "7" pattern (for example, the "8" pattern) with respect to the left and right production patterns 8L, 8R ("7" pattern). In addition, when the effect button 63 is not operated, the winning/losing notification effect is executed after the operation valid period elapses. Further, when the sword member 65 is operated, the number of games may be displayed.

[Operation Means Image Display Effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect C. FIG. Regarding the operation means image display effect C, first, the description will start from the effect during variation shown in FIG. 110(A). Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are performing high-speed fluctuations. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. A button image BG1, a button image BG2, and a button image BG3 imitating the effect button 63 are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The button image BG1 is displayed below the changing left effect symbol 8L. The button image BG2 is displayed below the changing right effect symbol 8R. The button image BG3 is displayed below the middle effect symbol 8C that is changing. The button images BG1 to BG3 differ in the degree of protrusion of the button portion. The button image BG1, the button image BG2, and the button image BG3 have a higher degree of rising in this order.

Next, when the player presses the effect button 63, the left symbol stop effect is executed as shown in FIG. 110(B). The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol slows down and stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the "2" symbol. The middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8C are fluctuating at high speed. Button images BG1 to BG3 are displayed here as well.

Next, when the player presses the effect button 63, the right symbol stop effect is executed as shown in FIG. 110(C). The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol slows down and stops. Here, the right performance symbol 8R is stopped at "4" symbol. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Button images BG1 to BG3 are displayed here as well.

Next, when the player presses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 110(D), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium design design slows down and stops. Here, the medium effect pattern 8C is stopped at the "3" pattern. Button images BG1 to BG3 are displayed here as well.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(E), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At this time, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. A button image BG1, a button image BG2, and a button image BG3 imitating the production button 63 are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The button image BG1 is displayed below the changing left effect symbol 8L. The button image BG2 is displayed below the changing right effect symbol 8R. The button image BG3 is displayed below the middle effect symbol 8C that is changing. The button images BG1 to BG3 differ in the degree of protrusion of the button portion. The button image BG1, the button image BG2, and the button image BG3 have a higher degree of rising in this order.

Next, when the player presses the effect button 63, the left symbol stop effect is executed as shown in FIG. 110(F). The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol slows down and stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at the "7" symbol. The middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8C are fluctuating at high speed. Button images BG1 to BG3 are displayed here as well.

Next, when the player presses the effect button 63, the right symbol stop effect is executed as shown in FIG. 110(G). The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol slows down and stops. Here, the right performance symbol 8R is stopped at the "7" symbol. The left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both stopped at the "7" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. The middle production pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed. Button images BG1 to BG3 are displayed here as well.

Next, when the player presses the effect button 63, the development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 110(H). The development effect is a effect for notifying the development from normal reach to SP reach (super reach). Here, a message image MS of "development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A reduced left effect pattern 8L ("7" pattern) is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and a reduced right effect pattern 8R ("7" pattern) is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. there is

Next, as shown in FIGS. 110(I) and 110(J), a battle effect is executed. A battle production is a production in which a friendly character fights against an enemy character.
In FIG. 110(I), the friend character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a reduced left effect pattern 8L ("7" pattern) is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and a reduced right effect pattern 8R ("7" pattern) is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. is displayed.
In FIG. 110(J), it is the final phase of the battle production, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are about to deliver the final blow to each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(K), an operation prompting effect is executed. The operation prompting effect is a effect that prompts the user to operate the operating means. Here, a button image BG3 imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG3 is red (indicated by hatching), and the character image "PUSH" is superimposed thereon. A message image MS saying "Push!" is displayed above the button image BG3. A sword image BG1 imitating the sword member 65 is displayed to the left of the button image BG3. A downward arrow image YG1 is displayed to the left of the sword image BG1, and a message image MS1 reading "push" is displayed so as to overlap the sword image BG1. A sword image BG2 imitating the sword member 65 is displayed to the right of the button image BG3. An upward arrow image YG2 is displayed to the right of the sword image BG2, and a message image MS2 of "pull out" is displayed above the sword image BG2.

When the player presses the effect button 63, the player pushes the sword member 65, or the player pulls out the sword member 65, a win/lose notification effect as shown in FIG. executed. Winning/losing notification production is a production for informing whether or not the lottery of the special symbols has been won or lost. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "7" patterns. Thereby, the fact that the prize has been won (that the prize is a jackpot) is reported. On the other hand, in the case of informing of the failure, the middle production pattern 8C is other than the "7" pattern (for example, the "8" pattern) with respect to the left and right production patterns 8L, 8R ("7" pattern). If the sword member 65 and the effect button 63 are not operated, the win-lose notification effect is executed after the operation valid period elapses.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation means image display effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the first operation means image, which is an image imitating the operation means, is displayed in the first area of the display screen, and the second area of the display screen is displayed. , a second operation means image which is an image simulating an operation means and has a different aspect from the first operation means image is displayed.
Specifically, in the operation means image display effect A, the button image BG1 is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a, and the button image BG2 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button images BG1 and BG2 have different modes (FIGS. 108(A), (B), (E), (F), and (K)). In the operation means image display effect B, the sword image BG1 is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a, and the button image BG2 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 109(A) to (G) and (K)). In the operation means image display effect C, the button image BG1 is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a, and the button image BG2 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button images BG1 and BG2 have different modes (FIGS. 110(A) to (G)). A sword image BG1 is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen 7a, and a sword image BG2 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The sword images BG1 and BG2 have different aspects (FIG. 110(K)).
According to this configuration, the performance using the operating means becomes a novel performance that has not existed in the past, and the player can be entertained, and the amusement can be improved.

Note that the button image BG1 or the sword image BG1 corresponds to the "first operating means image", the lower left area of the display screen 7a on which the image BG1 is displayed corresponds to the "first area", and the button image BG2 or the sword image BG1 corresponds to the "first area". The image BG2 corresponds to the "second operation means image", the lower right area of the display screen 7a on which the image BG2 is displayed corresponds to the "second area", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "image display means". Equivalent to.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, at least one of the first operation means image and the second operation means image is continuously displayed over a plurality of variations of the special symbols (FIGS. 108(A) to (G), FIGS. 109(A) to (G), FIGS. 110(A) to (G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to impress upon the operation of the operation means, to entertain the player, and to improve the amusement.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first operation means image and the second operation means image are displayed, and the third operation means image imitating the operation means is displayed in the third region of the display screen. A third operation means image is displayed in a mode different from the image and the second operation means image.
Specifically, in the operation means image display effect A, the button images BG1 and BG2 are displayed, and the sword image BG3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 108(K)). In the operation means image display effect B, the sword image BG1 and the button image BG2 are displayed, and the button image BG3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 109(K)). In the operation means image display effect C, the button images BG1 and BG2 are displayed, and the button image BG3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 110(A) to (G)). Also, the sword images BG1 and BG2 are displayed, and the button image BG3 is displayed (FIG. 110(K)).
According to this configuration, the performance using the operation means becomes a more novel performance, and the player can be entertained, and the interest can be improved. Note that the button image BG3 or the sword image BG3 corresponds to the "third operation means image", and the central area of the display screen 7a on which the image BG3 is displayed corresponds to the "third area".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the first operation means image, the second operation means image, and the third operation means image are displayed, the first operation means and the second operation means corresponding to the first operation means image are displayed. Both of the second operating means corresponding to the operating means image and the third operating means corresponding to the third operating means image are operable (FIGS. 108(K), 109(K), FIG. 110(A)-(G)(K)). According to this configuration, the performance using the operation means becomes a more novel performance, and the player can be entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display indicating the effective period of the operation of the third operating means is performed, and the display indicating the effective period of the operation of the first operating means and the second operating means is not performed (FIG. 109(K)). ). According to this configuration, even when a plurality of operation means images are displayed, the main operation means can be easily recognized, and interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the operation means image display rendering will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the operation means image display effects A and C of the above embodiment, the effect of stopping the effect pattern by pressing the effect button 63 was performed (FIGS. 108(B)(C)(F)(G), FIG. (B)-(D)(F)(G)). At this time, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the production pattern is slowed down and then stopped. On the other hand, at the timing when the performance button 63 is pressed, the performance pattern to be stopped may be stopped. Further, when the player does not press the production button 63, the left production pattern, the right production pattern, and the middle production pattern may be stopped in this order at intervals of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). The right performance symbols may be stopped simultaneously at a predetermined timing.

[Modification 2]
In the operation means image display effect A of the above embodiment, there is a period in which the button images BG1 and BG2 have the same mode (FIGS. 108(C), (D), and (G)). On the other hand, the button images BG1 and BG2 may be configured to always be displayed in different modes.

[Modification 3]
In the operation means image display effect B of the above embodiment, the game number image GH is displayed by operating the sword member 65 (FIGS. 109(B) and (F)). Further, the reliability image SH is displayed by operating the effect button 63 (FIGS. 109(C) and 109(G)). The number-of-games image GH and the reliability image SH are hidden after a predetermined period of time (for example, "1" second) has elapsed after being displayed. On the other hand, the display of the number-of-games image GH and the reliability image SH may be continued until a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of finalization, the timing of starting the next variation, the timing of forming a ready-to-win state). Alternatively, the display of the number-of-games image GH may be continued until the sword member 65 is operated again, or the display of the reliability image SH may be continued until the effect button 63 is operated again.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the modes of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, and the third operation means image are different. Such operation means images may differ in, for example, at least one of the shape, size, orientation, display color, transparency (darkness), and animation (image movement) of the operation means images. .

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the first operation means image, the second operation means image, and the third operation means image are displayed within the display screen 7a. On the other hand, if at least one of the first operating device image, the second operating device image, and the third operating device image is displayed on the sub display screen 64 (the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen), It may be displayed on the display screen 64U).

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect F1-1]
A gaming machine,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A first operation means image that simulates the operation means is displayed in a first area of the display screen, and an image that simulates the operation means and the first operation means image is displayed in a second area of the display screen. and an image display means capable of displaying second operation means images in different modes,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect F1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1,
The image display means can continuously display at least one of the first operation means image and the second operation means image over a plurality of variations of the special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect F1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1 or aspect F1-2,
The image display means displays the first operation means image and the second operation means image, and displays a third operation means image simulating the operation means in a third area of the display screen, wherein the first operation means image is displayed. It is possible to display a third operation means image in a mode different from the means image and the second operation means image,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect F1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-3,
When the first operation means image, the second operation means image, and the third operation means image are displayed, the first operation means image and the second operation means image corresponding to the first operation means image are displayed. Both the corresponding second operation means and the third operation means corresponding to the third operation means image are operable,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect F1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-4,
wherein the image display means displays a valid period of operation of the third operating means and does not display a valid period of operations of the first operating means and the second operating means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Numerical image display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. FIG. This numerical image display effect is executed during the variable effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the numerical image display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Numeric image display effect A]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the numerical image display effect A. FIG. The numerical image display effect is a kind of effect that suggests a win or loss of the variable after two of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach during the variable effect, and the numerical value represented by the displayed numerical image. It is a production that changes. In particular, the numerical image display effect A determines whether the numerical value represented by the meter images KMG and MMG displayed as numerical images is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (here, "350") or less. It is a suggestive performance.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and three or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when the deceleration fluctuates. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 111(A), the variable effect is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed at high speed, and the contents of each become difficult to see. Although the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. The explanation continues assuming that the result of the special lottery that triggered this variable production was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the left and right decorative patterns 8R and 8L representing "7" are stopped in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. be done. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state of "7↓7", and after suggesting the winning or losing of the variation in the numerical image display effect executed later, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. By doing so, the winner or loser of the change is notified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(C), the image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched, and an opening effect is executed to notify that the numerical image display effect is to be started. Here, a message image NM reading "Throw over 350m!!!" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 111D and 111E, a numerical image display effect is started, and a symbol image T7 representing a decorative symbol of "7", a character image CR for throwing the symbol image T7, and a A meter image KMG representing the flying distance of the pattern image T7 and number images KH, KT, and KO representing each digit of the numerical value represented in the meter image KMG are displayed. Here, the numerical image representing each digit of the numerical value in the meter image KMG changes randomly.

Further, the meter image KMG displayed in FIG. 111(D) and the number images KH, KT, and KO representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented in the meter image KMG are displayed toward the character CR. displayed as if it were. That is, the display screen 7a is displayed in an inclined state along the display surface, and the numeric image KH is displayed as if it were farther from the plane formed by the display screen 7a than the numeric image KO. Therefore, the numbers are displayed so that the size increases in the order of the number image KH, the number image KT, and the number image KO, that is, the sizes are different. Furthermore, since the left side of the numeric image KH is displayed as if it is farther from the plane formed by the display screen 7a than the right side, the numeric image KH is displayed in a distorted state. This also applies to the numeric images KT and KO. That is, the meter image KMG and the number images KH, KT, and KO in FIG. is tilted toward

Furthermore, the meter image KMG and the number images KH, KT, and KO displayed in FIG. It is displayed as if it has fallen in a direction approaching the plane formed by the display screen 7a. That is, the meter image KMG and the number images KH, KT, and KO in FIG. , and is also tilted vertically.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 111F, 111G, and 111H, the flying and landing pattern image T7, the meter image MMG, and the number of each digit of the numerical value represented in the meter image MMG are Numeric images MH, MT, and MO representing the number are displayed. The meter image MMG and the number images MH, MT, and MO representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented in the meter image MMG are arranged in the horizontal direction and displayed in the vertical direction with respect to the display surface of the display screen 7a. Therefore, unlike the meter image KMG in FIGS. 111(D) and (E), the number images MH, MT, and MO are all displayed in the same size, and each number image is displayed in a non-distorted state. Further, unlike the meter image KMG, the number images MH, MT, and MO representing the number of each digit of the numerical value in the meter image MMG represent the flight distance of the pattern image T7, and the number represented by the number image KO is changed at regular time intervals. (for example, updated twice in one second), the number represented by the number image KT is updated every 10 times the number image KO is updated, and the number represented by the number image KH is updated every time the number image KO is updated 10 times. An update is performed each time it is updated. Further, the numeral image KH represents the hundreds digit, the numeral image KT represents the gun digit, and the numeral image KO represents the ones digit, thus representing one number. In FIG. 111(H), the numerical value represented by the meter image MMG is "349m", which is smaller than "350m" in the message image NM displayed in FIG. is suggested.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(I), an ending effect for informing the end of the numerical image display effect is executed. Here, from the difference between the numerical value represented by the meter image MMG displayed in FIG. 111(H) and the numerical value specified in the message image NM displayed in FIG. !!” is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(J), the image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the same state as shown in FIG. 111(B), after which the middle decorative pattern 8C slows down. ,Stop. Since the variation was a loss, the middle decorative pattern 8C represents "8" and is stopped, and is stopped in a loss mode of "787". After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next special figure lottery variation effect is started.

If the variation is a hit, the numerical value represented by the meter image MMG in FIG. 111(H) is "350m" or more, and in FIG. 111(I), for example, "Over 350m! Great success! ' is displayed, and after that, in FIG.

The above is the display example of the number image display effect A and the execution flow. In the numeric image display effect A, the meter image KTG displayed in FIGS. Since the meter image MMG displayed in F) to (H) is displayed parallel to the display surface, the player is more likely to feel as if he or she has become the character CR. In addition to the expectation that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will stop in a winning manner, whether or not the numerical value displayed on the meter images KMG and MMG is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (here, 350). more likely to have expectations for Therefore, by executing the number image display effect A, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Numeric image display effect B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the numerical image display effect B. FIG. The numerical image display performance is a kind of performance suggesting the winning or losing of the variation after the decorative pattern forms reach during the variable performance, and is a performance in which the numerical value represented by the displayed numerical image changes. In particular, in the numerical image display effect B, the numerical values represented by the timer images HTG and STG displayed as numerical images represent the time of the timer. It is a production that suggests a variable hit or drop.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and three or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when the deceleration fluctuates. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(A), the variable effect is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed at high speed, and the contents of each are difficult to see. Further, although the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. The explanation continues assuming that the result of the special lottery that triggered this variable production was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R representing "7" are stopped in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R. be done. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state of "7↓7", and after suggesting the winning or losing of the variation in the numerical image display effect executed later, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. By doing so, the winner or loser of the change is notified.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 112C and 112D, the image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched, and the numerical image display effect is started. Here, a bomb image BG, an image of a character CR, a timer image HTG representing the time limit until the bomb explodes, and number images H1 to H5 representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented by the timer image HTG. , is displayed. In FIG. 112(C), the number images H1 to H5 representing the number of digits of the numerical value in the timer image HTG are hard to see, as if the remaining time until a bomb explodes is charged. It is designed to change at high speed (eg, 10 times per second). In FIG. 112(D), the timer image HTG displays 1 minute 00.00 seconds and stops because the time has been charged in FIG. 112(C). Also, the timer image HTG displayed in FIGS. 112C and 112D and the number images H1 to H5 representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented in the timer image HTG are directed toward the character CR. It is displayed as if it were a display. That is, the display surface of the display screen 7a is rotated 180 degrees from the direction facing the player, and the timer image is displayed in a reversed state from the player's perspective. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(E), a message image RM is displayed to suggest activation of the timer. Here, a message image RM reading "Escape within 1 minute!!!" is displayed. This indicates that the character CR is suggested to win or lose depending on whether or not he or she can escape in one minute until the bomb explodes.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 112F and 112G, a character CR fleeing from a bomb, a timer image STG, and number images S1 and S2 representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented by the timer image STG. , is displayed. Since the timer image STG and the number images S1 and S2 representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented in the timer image STG are displayed facing the player from the display surface of the display screen 7a, the player can It is displayed so that the time represented by the timer image STG can be easily recognized by the user. Also, the number images S1 and S2 representing the number of digits of the numerical value in the timer image STG are designed to represent one numerical value, and unlike the timer image HTG in FIGS. At least one update is performed every second. In FIG. 112(F), the numerical value represented by the timer image STG is "59 seconds until the explosion", and in FIG. 112(G), the numerical value represented by the timer image STG is "2 seconds until the explosion". there is In addition, since the countdown using the timer image STG executed in FIGS. The number of displayed numeric images is different from the timer image HTG in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 112(H) and 112(I), an ending effect for notifying the end of the numerical image display effect is executed. In FIG. 112(H), an image as if a bomb had exploded is displayed. In FIG. 112(I), a character CR that looks as if it has collapsed due to an explosion and a message image BM that says "I didn't make it in time..." are displayed. This suggests that the result of the variation is a failure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(J), the image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the same state as shown in FIG. 112(B), after which the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. , all decorative symbols stop. Since the variation was a loss, the middle decorative pattern 8C represents "8" and is stopped, and is stopped in a loss mode of "787". After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next special figure lottery variation performance is executed.

If the change is a win, for example, in FIG. 112(I), a happy character CR and a message image saying "I escaped!" are displayed, and then, in FIG. , the decorative pattern stops in a winning mode.

The above is the display example of the number image display effect B and the execution flow. In the numeric image display effect B, the timer image HTG displayed in FIGS. 112C and 112D is moved in the opposite direction from the display surface of the display screen 7a to the player so as to face the character CR. Since the timer image STG displayed in FIGS. 112(F) to 112(G) is displayed in the direction of the player from the display surface, the player feels as if he or she has become the character CR. more likely to hold In addition to the expectation that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R will stop in the winning mode, it is also possible to determine whether or not a predetermined state is reached within the time displayed on the timer images HTG and STG (here, from the bomb to the Whether you can escape or not) is likely to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, by executing the number image display effect B, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Numeric image display effect C]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the numerical image display effect C. FIG. The numerical image display performance is a kind of performance suggesting the winning or losing of the variation after the decorative pattern forms reach during the variable performance, and is a performance in which the numerical value represented by the displayed numerical image changes. In particular, in the numerical image display effect C, the numerical values represented by the timer images GTG and KTG displayed as numerical images represent the period during which the operation of the effect button 63 is valid, and the timer is activated when the effect button 63 is pressed. This is an effect that indicates whether or not the indicated remaining time reaches a predetermined remaining time, or not, that the variation will win or lose.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and three or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when the deceleration fluctuates. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 113(A), the variable performance is started, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and their contents become difficult to see. Further, although the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. It should be noted that the result of the special figure lottery that triggered this variable production continues to explain as if it was a hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R representing "7" are stopped in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. be done. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state of "7↓7", and after suggesting the winning or losing of the variation in the numerical image display effect executed later, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. By doing so, the winner or loser of the change is notified.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 113C and 113D, the image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched, and the numerical image display effect is started. Here, an image of the character CR, a timer image GTG representing the period during which the operation of the effect button 63 is valid, and number images G1 to G4 representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented by the timer image GTG are displayed. be done. In FIG. 113C, the number image representing the number of each digit of the numerical value in the timer image GTG is charged at a high speed (for example, 10 times per second) as if the period during which the operation of the effect button 63 is valid is charged. ). In FIG. 113(D), the timer image GTG shows 33 seconds 33 due to the charging of the time in FIG. 113(C). Also, the timer image GTG displayed in FIGS. 113C and 113D and the number images G1 to G4 representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented in the timer image GTG are directed toward the character CR. It is displayed as if it were a display. That is, the display surface of the display screen 7a is rotated 180 degrees from the direction of the player, and the timer image is displayed in a reversed state from the player's perspective. It is

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(E), a message image OM prompting the operation of the effect button 63 is displayed. Here, a message image OM reading "Stop at 7:77!!!" is displayed. Thus, by operating the production button 63, whether or not the timer image can stop the numerical value counted down in GTG at 7:77 indicates that a win or loss is suggested.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 113F and 113G, a timer image KTG, number images K1 to K4 representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented in the timer image KTG, and "press at 7:77". !!!” and an effect button image PG are displayed, and further, a seek bar SB is displayed as another means representing the period indicated by the timer image KTG. The timer image KTG and the number images K1 to K4 representing the number of each digit of the numerical value represented by the timer image KTG are displayed facing the player from the display surface of the display screen 7a. The time represented by the timer image KTG is displayed so that it is easy for the user to visually recognize it. Further, the number images K1 to K4 representing the number of digits of the numerical value in the timer image KTG differ from the timer image GTG in FIGS. One update is performed, and at least one of K3 and K4 is updated every 0.01 seconds. Furthermore, the seek bar SB changes its display mode as the remaining time represented by the timer image KTG decreases (in FIG. 113(F), there is a pattern, and in FIG. There is a pattern only on the part.). In FIG. 113(F), the numerical value represented by the timer image KTG is "33:33", and in FIG. 113(G), the numerical value represented by the timer image KTG is "07:77". The description is continued assuming that the effect button 63 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 113(G). Note that the effect button 63 is configured to execute the effect of vibrating the effect button 63 regardless of whether the change is hit or lost when the operation in the numerical image display effect C is valid. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(H), a timer image KTG showing the remaining time at the time when the effect button 63 is operated, and simulated decorative patterns 8Lu, 8Cu, 8Ru are displayed. The simulated decorative symbols 8Lu, 8Cu, and 8Ru are displayed in a variety of hits and stopped. Therefore, it is suggested that the result of the variation is a win when the timer stop time becomes 7:77 by operating the effect button 63 . At this time, the seek bar SB, operation prompting message image PM, and effect button image PG that were displayed in FIGS. 113(F) and (G) are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(I), the timer image KTG and the simulated decorative patterns 8Lu, 8Cu, and 8Ru displayed in FIG. , the middle decorative pattern 8C stops. Since the variation was a win, the middle decorative pattern 8C stops at "7" and is stopped and displayed in a win mode of "777". After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(J), the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed. Here, a message image KM reading "big win!!!" is displayed.

If the change is a loss, the remaining time indicated by the timer image KTG is other than "07:77" in FIG. "787") is displayed, and after that, in FIG.

The above is the display example of the number image display effect C and the execution flow. In the number image display effect C, the timer image GTG displayed in FIGS. 113C and 113D is turned in the direction opposite to the direction toward the player from the display surface of the display screen 7a so as to face the character CR. Since the timer image KTG displayed in FIGS. 113(F) to 113(H) is displayed in the direction of the player from the display surface, the player feels as if he or she has become the character CR. more likely to hold In addition, not only can the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop displaying the same number, but the effect button can be operated when the remaining time displayed on the timer images GTG and KTG reaches a predetermined time. There is a high possibility that you will have a thrilling feeling about whether or not. Therefore, by executing the number image display effect C, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 111 to 113, the meter image KMG including the number images KH, KT, and KO, the timer image HTG including the number images H1 to H5, or the number images G1 to G4. a first effect in which a timer image GTG including a , a meter image MMG including numeric images MH, MT and MO, a timer image STG including numeric images S1 and S2, or a timer image KTG including numeric images K1 to K4; It is viable. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponds to "display means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, in the first effect, the number images KH, KT, and KO included in the meter image KMG are displayed, and each has a different size. was becoming According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, in the first effect, the number images KH, KT, and KO in the meter image KMG are tilted in the direction along the display surface of the display screen 7a, and Distortedly displayed, in the second effect, the number images MH, MT, and MO are arranged horizontally in the meter image MMG, and each of the plurality of number images is displayed vertically, and a predetermined time elapses. It was configured so that the numerical values represented would change in order each time. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the number of numeric images (here, two) in the timer image STG displayed in the second effect is equal to the timer displayed in the first effect. The number of numeric images S1 and S2 in the timer image STG displayed in the second effect is different from the number of numeric images in the image HTG (here, five), and the sizes of the numeric images S1 and S2 in the timer image STG displayed in the second effect are the same as those displayed in the first effect. It is displayed in a size different from the size of the number images H1 to H5 in the timer image HTG. Furthermore, although the numerical values represented by the number images S1 and S2 in the timer image STG displayed in the second effect change every second, the number images H1 to H5 in the timer image HTG displayed in the first effect change. The speed at which the indicated numerical values change is so high that the numerical values are difficult to see, and each has a different configuration. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, timer images GTG and KTG composed of number images G1 to G4 and K1 to K4 are displayed in the first effect and the second effect. In the second effect, the timer image KTG is configured to represent the remaining period during which the effect button 63 can be operated. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, the seek bar SB is displayed in the second effect, and the display mode of the seek bar SB changes according to the change in the remaining time indicated by the timer image KTG. It's becoming According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
4 shows a modification of the present embodiment.
[Modification 1]
In the numeric image display effects A to C, whether the numeric images KH, KT, KO, the numeric images H1 to H5, or the numeric images G1 to G4 in the first presentation are all directed toward the character CR. was displayed as On the other hand, the character CR may not be displayed, and the direction of display may be changed arbitrarily.

[Modification 2]
Numerical image display effects A to C are performed after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form reach, but may be configured to be performed at any appropriate timing.

[Modification 3]
In the numerical image display effect C, an effect linked with the operation of the effect button 63 is executed. Additionally or alternatively, it may be interlocked with other operating means (eg, handle 60).

[Modification 4]
In the numerical image display effect A, a timer image representing time like the numerical image display effect B may be displayed. Also, in this case, before executing the countdown (countup), an effect may be executed in which the update speed of the numerical value is different from that of the countdown (countup).

[Modification 5]
In numerical image display effect B or C, a meter image representing distance like numerical image display effect A may be displayed. Also, in this case, the updating speed of the numerical values may be changed arbitrarily.

[Modification 6]
In the numerical image display effects A and B, like the numerical image display effect C, a timer image indicating a period during which the operation of the operation means (here, the effect button 63) is valid may be displayed.

[Modification 7]
In numerical image display effects A to C, the described effects may be combined as appropriate.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect F2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a numeric image representing a number;
a first effect in which a first numeric image is displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect in which a second number image representing a number different in direction from the number represented by the first number image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
the first numeric image includes a plurality of numeric images;
In the first effect, the plurality of numeric images are displayed, and the plurality of numeric images are different in size from each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
the second numeric image includes a plurality of numeric images;
In the first production,
the first numeric image is displayed tilted and distorted in a direction along the display surface of the display means;
In the second production,
The second numeric images are displayed, the second numeric images are arranged along the first direction of the display means, and each of the second numeric images is oriented perpendicular to the first direction. displayed in
The numeric value represented by at least one of the second numeric images changes in order each time a predetermined time elapses.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The second numeric image is
Displayed in a number different from the number of the first numeric images, in a size different from the size of the first numeric images, and represented at a speed different from the speed at which the numerical values represented by the first numeric images change. numbers change,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4, further comprising:
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
wherein the first numeric image and the second numeric image are timer images composed of a plurality of numeric images,
In the second effect, the timer image represents a remaining period in which the operation means can operate.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect F2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect 5,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image whose appearance changes over time;
In the second effect, the specific image is displayed, and the mode of the specific image changes according to the change in the remaining time represented by the timer image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

114 to 116, the expectation degree suggesting effects A to C will be described below. This expectation degree suggesting effect is executed during the jackpot game. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the expectation level suggesting effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Expectation Suggestion A]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the expectation degree suggesting effect A. FIG. Regarding the expectation degree suggesting effect A, first, the explanation will be started from the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 114(A). The winning notification effect is a effect for notifying that a big win has been achieved by means of a performance pattern. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), an opening effect is executed. The opening effect is a effect that is executed at the beginning of the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS saying "The jackpot is about to start" is displayed below the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 114(C)-(H), a round effect is executed. The round effect is a effect that is executed along with the round game that constitutes the jackpot.
In FIG. 114(C), a round image RH of "1R" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that it is the 1st round of the jackpot. An ally character CRA is displayed to the right of the round image RH. A message image MS reading "0060pt acquired" is displayed to the right of the ally character CRA. This indicates the total number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game.

In FIG. 114(D), a round image RH of "5R" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that it is the 5th R of the jackpot. Again, the teammate character CRA is displayed to the right of the round image RH. A message image MS reading "0075pt acquired" is displayed to the right of the ally character CRA. Here, in particular, a suggestive image SH1 written as "Super Lucky" is displayed above the message image MS. The suggestive image SH1 indicates that the pending lottery has been won.

In the next FIG. 114(E), the suggestive image SH1 written as "Super Lucky" is not displayed. The timing at which the suggestive image SH1 is hidden is one of the winning timings of the plurality of game balls into the first big winning hole 30 after the suggestive image SH1 is displayed.
In the next FIG. 114(F), above the message image MS, there is displayed a winning image TH stereoscopically representing the letter "V". The display of the winning image TH is performed substantially at the same time as the non-display of the suggestion image SH1 described above.

Next, in FIG. 114(G), the winning image TH is moved below the round image RH of "5R" so as to overlap with the front of the teammate character CRA as indicated by the arrow Y. In FIG. At this time, the winning image TH is first reduced.
In the next FIG. 114(H), the round image RH of "10R" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that it is the 10th round of the jackpot. Again, the teammate character CRA is displayed to the right of the round image RH. A message image MS reading "1410pt acquired" is displayed to the right of the ally character CRA. Here, in particular, below the round image RH, a winning image TH stereoscopically representing the letter "V" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(I), an ending effect is executed. The ending effect is a effect executed at the end of the jackpot game. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed slightly left of the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS saying "It's a big win" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a. A winning image TH stereoscopically representing the letter "V" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(J), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. This shows the first fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game, but if the pending lottery wins, the jackpot will be won within the first four fluctuations.

After the start of the variation for the big win, as shown in FIG. 114(K), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is a effect for notifying that a big win has been achieved by means of a performance symbol. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(L), an opening effect is executed. The opening effect is a effect that is executed at the beginning of the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS saying "The jackpot is about to start" is displayed below the ally character CRA.

[Expectation Suggestion Production B]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the expectation degree suggesting effect B. FIG. Regarding the expectation degree suggesting effect B, first, the explanation starts from the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 115(A). The winning notification effect is a effect for notifying that a big win has been achieved by means of a performance pattern. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(B), an opening effect is executed. The opening effect is a effect that is executed at the beginning of the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS saying "The jackpot is about to start" is displayed below the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 115(C)-(F), a round effect is executed. The round effect is a effect that is executed along with the round game that constitutes the jackpot.
In FIG. 115(C), the round image RH of "1R" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that it is the 1st round of the jackpot. An ally character CRA is displayed to the right of the round image RH. A message image MS reading "0060pt acquired" is displayed to the right of the ally character CRA. This indicates the total number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game.

In FIG. 115(D), the round image RH of "5R" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that it is the 5th R of the jackpot. Again, the teammate character CRA is displayed to the right of the round image RH. A message image MS reading "0075pt acquired" is displayed to the right of the ally character CRA. In particular, a suggestive image SH2 written as "Lucky?" is displayed above the message image MS. The suggestive image SH2 indicates that the expectation that the pending lottery will be won is relatively high.

In the next FIG. 115(E), the suggestive image SH2 written as "Lucky?" is not displayed. The timing at which the suggestive image SH2 is hidden is one of the winning timings of the plurality of game balls into the first big winning hole 30 after the suggestive image SH2 is displayed.
In the next FIG. 115(F), a round image RH of "10R" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that it is the 10th round of the jackpot. Again, the teammate character CRA is displayed to the right of the round image RH. A message image MS reading "1410pt acquired" is displayed to the right of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), an ending effect is executed. The ending effect is a effect executed at the end of the jackpot game. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed slightly left of the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS saying "Probably odd" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(H), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. This shows the first variation after the jackpot game ends.

Here, an example was given in which the pending lottery was not successful. On the other hand, if the reserved lottery is won, the effect similar to that shown in FIG. 114(F) and thereafter is performed after FIG.

[Expectation Suggestion Production C]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the expectation degree suggesting effect C. FIG. Regarding the expectation degree suggesting effect C, first, the explanation starts from the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 116(A). The winning notification effect is a effect for notifying that a big win has been achieved by means of a performance symbol. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(B), an opening effect is executed. The opening effect is a effect that is executed at the beginning of the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS saying "The jackpot is about to start" is displayed below the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 116(C)-(F), a round effect is executed. The round effect is a effect that is executed along with the round game that constitutes the jackpot.
In FIG. 116C, the round image RH of "1R" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that it is the 1st round of the jackpot. An ally character CRA is displayed to the right of the round image RH. A message image MS reading "0060pt acquired" is displayed to the right of the ally character CRA. This indicates the total number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game.

In FIG. 116(D), a round image RH of "5R" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a. As a result, it can be seen that it is the 5th R of the jackpot. Again, the teammate character CRA is displayed to the right of the round image RH. A message image MS reading "0075pt acquired" is displayed to the right of the ally character CRA. Here, in particular, the message image MS is displayed while being finely moved so as to vibrate. The vibrating message image MS indicates that the pending lottery has a relatively high expectation of winning.
In FIG. 116(E), above the message image MS, a winning image TH with the words "Winner confirmed" is displayed. The display timing of the winning image TH is one of the winning timings of the plurality of game balls into the first big winning hole 30 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(G), an ending effect is executed. The ending effect is a effect executed at the end of the jackpot game. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed slightly left of the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS saying "It's a big win" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(H), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. This shows the first variation after the end of the jackpot game, but if the reserved lottery wins, the jackpot will be achieved within the first four variations.

After the start of the variation for the big win, as shown in FIG. 116(I), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is a effect for notifying that a big win has been achieved by means of a performance symbol. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at the "7" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(J), an opening effect is executed. The opening effect is a effect that is executed at the beginning of the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MS saying "The jackpot is about to start" is displayed below the ally character CRA.

Here, an example is given in which the pending lottery has been won. On the other hand, if the pending lottery is not won, the effect similar to that shown in FIG. 115(F) and thereafter is performed after FIG.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the expectation level suggesting effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, when the jackpot lottery is held while the jackpot game is being executed, the held lottery is won (jackpot). An expectation level suggesting effect that suggests the expected level of expectation is executed (Fig. 114(D), Fig. 115(D), Fig. 116(D)). According to this configuration, the performance during the big win becomes a novel performance that has not existed in the past, and the player can be visually entertained, and the amusement can be improved.
114D, the effect of displaying the suggestive image SH2 in FIG. 115D, and the effect of displaying the vibrating message image MS in FIG. The performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "performance executing means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as the expectation suggesting effect, a specific image is displayed during the round game to indicate the expectation that the pending lottery is won. Specifically, suggestive images SH1 and SH2 and message image MS are displayed (FIGS. 114(D), 115(D), and 116(D)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The suggestive image SH1 in FIG. 114(D), the suggestive image SH2 in FIG. 115(D), and the vibrating message image MS in FIG. 116(D) correspond to the “specific image”.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as the case of displaying the specific image, the case of displaying the first specific image indicating that the expectation that the pending lottery will be won is relatively high (FIG. 114 (D )), and a second specific image indicating that the pending lottery has been won may be displayed (FIGS. 115(D) and 116(D)). According to this configuration, the display of the first specific image can make the player nervous, and the display of the second specific image can reassure the player and give the player a sense of superiority, thereby improving interest. can.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the execution of the expectation suggesting effect, if the suspended lottery is won during the round game, the winning notification effect of displaying the winning image indicating that the winning has been won is performed. Execute (FIGS. 114(F) to (H), FIG. 116(F)). According to this configuration, since the next big win is confirmed during the round game, the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved. Note that the winning image TH in FIGS. 114(F) to (H) and the winning image TH in FIG. 116(F) correspond to the "winning image".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the suggestive image SH1 is displayed in the expectation degree suggestive effect (Fig. 114(D)), the suggestive image SH1 is hidden when the game ball wins the first prize-winning hole 30. 114(E)-(H)). According to this configuration, since the presentation progresses with the winning of the game ball as a trigger, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Modifications of the expectation level suggesting effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the timing at which the suggestive images SH1 and SH2 are hidden is the timing at which one of the plurality of game balls that have entered the first big winning hole 30 wins. On the other hand, for example, the suggestive images SH1 and SH2 may be hidden at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the suggestive images SH1 and SH2 were displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, in 5R, the suggestive images SH1 and SH2 are displayed, and the message image MS is vibrated to perform the expectation level suggestive effect. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the expectation level suggesting effect is performed continuously or intermittently over a plurality of rounds. When the expectation degree suggesting effect is performed a plurality of times, it is conceivable to perform the winning notification effect after executing the last expectation degree suggesting effect.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the display timing of the suggestive images SH1 and SH2 and the timing of vibrating the message image MS are not particularly limited. For example, the suggestion images SH1 and SH2 may be displayed or the message image MS may be vibrated at the start timing of a round game of a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 5R). Further, for example, at the timing when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls have won after a round game of a predetermined number (for example, 5R) is started, the suggestion images SH1 and SH2 are displayed, or the message image MS is displayed. It may be vibrated. For example, the suggestion images SH1 and SH2 are displayed or the message image MS is vibrated at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after a round game of a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 5R) is started. may

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the suggestive images SH1 and SH2 and the message image MS are displayed only within the display screen 7a. In addition to or instead of the display screen 7a, the suggestive images SH1 and SH2 and the message image MS are displayed using the sub-display screens 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U). You may make it display. For example, it is conceivable that the winning image TH is displayed on the display screen 7a, and then moved and displayed on the sub-display screen 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U). be done. Further, for example, it is conceivable that the message image MS indicating the total number of game balls put out is displayed on the sub-display screen 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U) from the beginning. receive.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect G1-1]
A gaming machine that executes a special game when winning a special symbol lottery,
When the lottery of the special symbols is suspended while the special game is being executed, execution of a performance capable of executing an expectation degree suggesting performance suggesting the degree of expectation that the suspended lottery is won. have the means
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games,
The effect executing means displays, as the expectation level suggesting effect, a specific image suggesting the level of expectation that the reserved lottery is won during the round game,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-2,
The effect execution means may display the specific image as a case of displaying a first specific image indicating that the pending lottery is likely to be won, or a case of displaying the reserved lottery. In some cases, a second specific image indicating that the lottery has been won is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-2 or aspect G1-3,
After the execution of the expectation-suggesting effect, the effect executing means performs a winning notification effect of displaying a winning image indicating that the pending lottery has been won during the round game. Run,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect G1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-4,
After displaying the specific image in the expectation level suggesting effect, the effect executing means hides the specific image when the game ball enters a specific ball entrance, and executes the winning notification effect. do,
A gaming machine characterized by:

117 to 119, screen split effects A to D will be described below. In FIGS. 117 to 119, various movable accessories and various decorative members arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing. FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the screen split effect A, FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the screen split effect B and the screen split effect C, and FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the screen split effect D. is.

In this screen cracking effect, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is mainly cracked, or the display screen 7a is cracked and broken. (Of course, various characters, various effect images, various effect images, etc. are also displayed on the display screen 7a in the screen cracking effect). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a screen split effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, to display an image on the display screen 7a.

In addition, when the second movable accessory 15 is operated during the variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern, the variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern is higher than when the second movable accessory 15 is not operated. This suggests to the player that there is a high expectation that a win will occur after the game ends (that is, after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed). Therefore, the player has a high interest in the actuation (movement) of the second movable accessory 15 .

In this embodiment, when the second movable accessory 15 moves from its retracted position to the advanced position and stops, then the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise from the horizontal state at the advanced position and tilts. (tilted about 10 degrees with respect to the horizontal line), and then rotates clockwise to return to the original horizontal state, and moves from the advanced position to the retracted position.

Here, the effect symbols, the pending icon, etc. will be briefly described first, and then the screen split effect A, the screen split effect B, the screen split effect C, and the screen split effect D will be described in order.

[Production pattern]
First, the production pattern will be briefly explained. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern (symbol: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode. In the variable performance (variable display) of the performance design, each performance design is a number design Number "1" → Number "2" → Number "3" → Number "4" → Number "5" → Number "6" → The reels are rotated in the order of number "7"→number "8"→number "9"→number "1"→number "2"→ . Note that the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9", except the number "7", all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. Thus, each production design is mainly designed with one of bright red, bright green, and bright blue colors. Further, since the number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) each have a color, for example, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are aligned with the same number pattern, and are temporarily stopped and displayed. is formed, and then the effect is developed, the more the number of times the player experiences the effect that is developed via the reach, the more the color of the temporarily stopped number pattern and the effect that is developed. The player himself/herself can obtain an opportunity to discover the relationship (regularity) between . As a result, the number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) each have a different color, which contributes to the enhancement of interest.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, the performance symbols stopped and displayed at the stop position move slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) upward once. After that (in other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which the production pattern is about to move), while gradually increasing the speed from low speed to the bottom, from the opaque state The display mode changes to a translucent state and changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent production pattern that is changing at high speed. The production pattern decelerates immediately before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed at the stop position (temporarily stopped and then stopped). ). In the state of temporary stop display, the production pattern is in a small step in the vertical direction (for example, based on the stop position, 2.5 mm upward and 2.5 mm downward (that is, 5 mm swing width)). It becomes a moving display mode. Incidentally, the effect pattern may disappear from the display screen 7a.

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a, variations of the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ corresponding to the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R, respectively. A sub-variation area is provided in which an effect (variation display) is started. When the fluctuation effect (variation display) of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R is started by the change (variation icon 9C), a small left effect pattern is started in the sub-variation area. 8LZ, small medium production pattern 8CZ, small right production pattern 8RZ start variable production (variable display), left production pattern 8L, medium production pattern 8C, right production pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed at the same time, respectively The corresponding small left effect symbol 8LZ, small medium effect symbol 8CZ and small right effect symbol 8RZ are all stopped and displayed. The small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are the numbers of the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R, which are reduced in size, and are stopped. The small left effect pattern 8LZ displayed has the same color as the number pattern of the stopped left effect pattern 8L, and the small medium effect pattern 8CZ that is stopped is the same as that of the middle effect pattern 8C that is stopped. The number patterns and colors are the same, and the stop-displayed small right effect pattern 8RZ has the same number patterns and colors as the stop-displayed right effect pattern 8R. In this way, each small production pattern is mainly designed in one of bright red, bright green, and bright blue.

The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are, as described above, the effect symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to When the variable effect (variable display) of the number "9") is started and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the effect pattern stopped and displayed at the stop position once moves upward for a predetermined distance (for example, , about 5 mm) after moving slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode (in other words, after the stop display of the effect pattern is canceled, the effect pattern is in a display mode in which it is about to move), The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state at a high speed while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed toward the side. On the other hand, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ are different from the variable effect (variable display) of the above-described effect symbols, and have a display mode in which the reels are rotated. However, at the display position of the small left production pattern 8LZ, the display position of the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the display position of the small right production pattern 8RZ, the number patterns (symbol: number "1" to number "9") appears and is updated, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed.

The small left production pattern 8LZ, the small middle production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed, and various effect images and other various Visibility is not obstructed by images.

A state in which one or more of the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same pattern and reach is formed), the corresponding small production patterns (for example, even if the left production pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ and the right production pattern 8R corresponding to the left production pattern 8L are temporarily stopped. Even if it is displayed, the right performance symbol 8R and the corresponding small right performance symbol 8RZ) are all kept in a variable performance (variable display) state. In addition, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned with the same pattern and become misaligned, the small left effect pattern 8LZ and the small left effect pattern 8LZ are displayed. A medium performance pattern 8CZ and a small right performance pattern 8RZ are stop-displayed as the same patterns as the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C and right performance pattern 8R. In addition, when the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the same symbols win, the small left performance symbol 8LZ and the small left performance symbol 8LZ are displayed. A medium performance pattern 8CZ and a small right performance pattern 8RZ are stop-displayed together in the same pattern as each of the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R. As a result, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are changed (variation display) from the start to the end of the variation (variation with respect to the variation icon 9C). is continued.

Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed in the same pattern, and the same pattern is a number "1" having a bright green color and a bright blue color. number "2" with bright green, number "3" with bright blue, number "4" with bright blue, number "5" with bright green, number "6" with bright blue, number "8" with bright blue , the number "9" having a bright green color, the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability-high base state), whereas the same pattern is bright red. , the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state). It should be noted that the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed in the same pattern, and in addition to the number "7" in which the same pattern has a bright red color, the number In the case of "3", the game state after the big hit may be a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state). In this case, let the number "3", like the number "7", have a bright red color.

In addition, the background image is designed in full color, when it is in a low-probability low-base state (normal state), which is a non-time-saving state, and when it is a high-probability-shortening state (high-probability-high base state), which is a time-saving state And they are different. For example, background images such as city images, forest images, ocean images, seabed images, underground images, etc. are background images in non-time saving state (low probability low base state (normal state)) (hereinafter referred to as "non-time saving background image" It may be described.), and it is a still image or a moving image. Background images such as space images, spacecraft images, spacecraft images, ground images of planets, underground images of planets, etc. may be described.)

[Hold icon, etc.]
Next, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B will be explained. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position (on the white rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . A first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation in the area to the left of the variable display position, and a second reserved display area is provided as the second special figure reservation in the area to the right of the variable display position. It is In the first reservation display area, four reservation icons 9A can be displayed linearly in a row, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9A can be stocked. The first pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first pending icon 9A, the second pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is the third pending icon. 9A, and the farthest pending icon 9A from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9A. In the second pending display area, four pending icons 9B can be displayed linearly in a line, and up to four pending icons 9B can be stocked. The first pending icon 9B closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first pending icon 9B, the second closest pending icon 9B to the variable icon 9C is called the second pending icon 9B, and the third pending icon 9B is the third pending icon to the variable icon 9C. 9B, and the farthest pending icon 9B from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9B. In the present embodiment, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icons 9A and 9B can suggest the expectation of winning by their colors, and the expectation of winning increases in the order of white→blue→green→red→yellow (gold). . Therefore, the player has a high interest in the variable icon 9C and the suspended icons 9A and 9B.

[Screen cracking effect A]
Next, screen split effect A will be described with reference to FIG. Here, after the big hit, on the premise that it is in a state of transition to a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state), which is a time-saving state, the player, so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B A game ball is shot to the right and a game is played by hitting to the right. In a right-handed game, a right-handed image MY in which "Right-handed" is written in the right arrow image is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The right-handed image MY is a stereoscopic image designed in full color. Note that the right-handed image MY may be a planar image designed in full color.

The right shot image MY is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, like the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ. In addition, the right-handed image MY is always displayed in the state of transition to the jackpot game state and the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state), which is a time-saving state, and various effect images and other various Visibility is not obstructed by images. Here, since it is a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) which is a time saving state, the background image is the time saving time background image HG1 (the spacecraft image).

A player shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B and plays a game by hitting to the right. Of the two game balls entered, the first entered game ball is determined and displayed as the green first reservation icon 9B by prefetching, and the last entered game ball is prefetched and displayed as the white second holding icon 9B. It is determined and displayed as the pending icon 9B. When the green first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the green variable icon 9C, one stock pending icon 9B exists accordingly.

When the green first reserved icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the green variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. At this time, a variable performance (variation display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. At this point, the display screen 7a is in a state in which no cracks have occurred on the display screen 7a. The player stops operating the handle 60 in order to watch (concentrate) on the variation (green variation icon 9C) when the variation effect (variation display) of the performance pattern by the green variation icon 9C is started. .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, after that, as shown in FIG. to be displayed. The screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen, and is placed in the foreground, right hitting image MY, small left production pattern 8LZ, small medium production pattern 8CZ and small right production pattern. It is located behind the 8RZ. In other words, since the screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen as described above, in FIG. , the display screen 7a is displayed in a state in which it is not cracked, and in FIG. 117(B), the state in which the display screen 7a is not cracked changes to a state in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a. there is

As a result, the right shot image MY, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ and the small right effect symbol 8RZ maintain their own modes. That is, the right shot image MY, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ can realize a display mode that does not change to a split mode by the screen split image CLK. In this way, the right shot image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are not visible through the cracked screen crack image CLK, Visibility is not hindered by the screen crack image CLK. On the other hand, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, the right production pattern 8R, the pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9B, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position is the screen split. It is arranged behind the image CLK. As a result, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, the right production pattern 8R, the pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9B, the variable icon 9C, and the variable display position are cracked. Since it is visually recognized through the cracked screen image CLK, it is possible to realize a display mode that is changed to a cracked mode by the cracked screen image CLK. In addition, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, the right production pattern 8R, the pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9B, the change icon 9C, the change display position is the cracked screen. Since the screen is viewed through the split image CLK, visibility may be hindered by the screen split image CLK. The cracked screen image CLK is a moving image in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, but it is a still image after the cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a. good too.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(C), the cracked screen image CLK is hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the cracked screen is resolved. In other words, the cracked screen image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen as described above. In FIG. 117(C), the display screen 7a has changed to a non-cracked state. After that, as shown in FIG. 117(D), a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is set as the center line, and the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color on the center line. A ready-to-win state is formed in which the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a number "1" having a bright green color, and the middle performance symbol 8C is fluctuating. At this time, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are all in the middle of high-speed fluctuation production (variation display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(E), the bright green number "1" left effect symbol 8L moves to the upper left side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped, and the bright green number "1" is temporarily stopped. The right effect symbol 8R is located on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and moves to the left of the right-handed shot image MY to be temporarily stopped. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C, the variable icon 9C, the first reserved icon 9B, and the variable display position are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a). Also, the size of the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R moved to the left and right upper sides of the display screen 7a may be the same size as the size in the state where the reach is formed in FIG. 117(D). , may be one or two times smaller.

When the left performance pattern 8L or the right performance pattern 8R moves to the upper left side or the upper right side of the display screen 7a, the screen crack image CLK, in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, is displayed on the entire display screen 7a again. be done. As described above, the screen split image CLK is arranged behind the right hitting image MY, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ, which are arranged in the foreground. However, here, it is further arranged behind the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped by forming a reach. As described above, the screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen, so in FIGS. In FIG. 117(E), the display screen 7a changes from the display screen 7a to the display screen 7a with cracks running in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a.

As a result, the right hitting image MY, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, the small right production pattern 8RZ, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R that temporarily stop with the reach formed are their own. It is designed to maintain its appearance. In other words, the right hitting image MY, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, the small right effect symbol 8RZ, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R where the reach is formed and temporarily stopped are the screen crack images CLK. By arranging it in front (on the near side) of the display, it is possible to realize a display mode that does not change to a split mode. In this way, the right hitting image MY, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, the small right effect symbol 8RZ, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped by forming a reach, are cracked. Since it is not viewed through the cracked screen image CLK along which the split screen image CLK runs, the visibility is not hindered by the cracked screen image CLK. On the other hand, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) is arranged behind the screen split image CLK. As a result, since the time-saving background image HG1 (the spacecraft image) is visually recognized through the cracked screen image CLK, visibility may be hindered by the screen crack image CLK. Here, as described above, the medium effect pattern 8C, the pending icon 9B, the variable icon 9C, and the variable display position have already been hidden (because they have disappeared from the display screen 7a), so they cannot be visually recognized. , visibility is not hindered by the screen split image CLK. It should be noted that, unlike the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped after a reach is formed, the middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating, but the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern are temporarily stopped after a reach is formed. Like 8R, it may be arranged in front of the split screen image CLK (on the near side), or may be arranged behind the split screen image CLK. In addition, as described above, the cracked screen image CLK is a moving image in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a. It may be a still image.

In this way, before reaching the ready-to-reach state, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are arranged behind the split screen image CLK, so that they change to a split mode due to the split screen image CLK. While it is possible to realize such a display mode, in the reach state, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R in the reach state are arranged in front of the screen split image CLK. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel effect that has never been seen before, in which a display mode that does not change to a split screen image CLK can be realized.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(F), a fragment image HB of the screen image scatters and falls in all directions in front (toward the player) to the left of the center of the screen crack image CLK. Then, a closed first crack area CB1 is formed (appears), and further, in the center of the screen crack image CLK, fragment images HB of the screen image are forward (toward the player) and extend in all directions. A closed second crack region CB2 is formed (appears). The first cracked region CB1 and the second cracked region CB2 are closed regions that do not communicate with each other. The time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) can be easily visually recognized through the crack region CB2. In other words, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) is not impeded in visibility by the first split region CB1 and the second split region CB2 formed in the screen split image CLK, but the first split region CB1 and the second split region CB2 Visibility is hindered by the area of the screen split image CLK where the split area CB2 is not formed.

By scattering the fragment image HB toward the front of the cracked screen image CLK, it is possible to express a mode in which the cracked screen image CLK is pulverized, and a realistic presentation as if the display screen 7a were pulverized. can be provided to the player.

After that, the screen crack image CLK is hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the screen crack is eliminated. After that, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. A plurality of SP reach suggestion images SG are arranged so as not to overlap each other, and among the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the right hitting image MY, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, the small size Except for the right production pattern 8RZ, the time saving background image HG1 (image in the spacecraft) and a plurality of SP reach suggesting images SG are converted to grayscale (this grayscale conversion process is performed in real time) . Although the SP reach suggesting image SG is a full-color image mainly composed of blue and a stereoscopic image having a horizontally long rectangular shape, it is converted to a gray scale here. Note that the SP reach suggestion image SG may be a planar image.

As described above, the time saving background image HG1 (inside spacecraft image) and the plurality of SP reach suggestion images SG are converted into grayscale. On the other hand, the right-handed shot image MY is not converted to grayscale and is still displayed in full color. The effect symbol 8RZ is also not converted to gray scale, and is still maintained in a state of full-color variable effect (variable display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(H), each time one or some of the plurality of SP reach suggesting images SG are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a) and disappear, the remaining SP reach suggesting images The size of SG becomes larger than the size when it first appears in FIG. As shown in (I), the conversion process to grayscale is completed, the image returns to a full-color image mainly composed of blue, and the SP reach suggesting image SG, which has become a stereoscopic image having a horizontally long rectangular shape, is displayed on the display screen 7a. displayed in a large size in the center of the Thus, SP reach suggestion image SG returns to the original full-color image by the conversion process to a gray scale being complete|finished, and time-saving background image HG1 (image in a spacecraft) returns to the original full-color image.

After that, the SP reach suggesting image SG displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the background image is designed in full color from the time saving background image HG1 (image in the spacecraft). The time saving background image HG2 (planetary ground image) is displayed. In addition, you may make it a background image switch from time saving background image HG1 (image in a spacecraft) to the background image only for battle production designed by the full color.

In the battle production, as shown in FIG. 117(J), a full-color ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, a full-color enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a ally character appears in the center of the display screen 7a. This is an effect in which CRA and the enemy character CRB fight, and is a super ready-to-win effect (SP ready-to-win effect) in which the degree of expectation for winning is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a win. In the battle production, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position (the position of the second movable accessory 15 in FIG. 1) to the center position of the display screen 7a (the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a). , and a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). be.

After that, in the battle production, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the background image switches again from the time-saving background image HG2 (ground image of the planet) to the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft). With the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a as the center line, the left production pattern 8L reappears on the center line in a display mode temporarily stopping at the number "1" having bright green, and the middle production pattern. 8C reappears in a display mode temporarily stopping at the number "9" having bright green, and the right production pattern 8R reappears in a display mode temporarily stopping at the number "1" having bright green. As shown in K), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned with the same number "1" having bright green color and are stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright green. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with a number "1" having a bright green color. Along with this, the green variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the white first reserved icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. (variation display) is started. At this time, a variable performance (variation display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started.

The white first reserved icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes a variable icon 9C, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern is started, and the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are the same. When the symbols are stopped and displayed without being aligned, a loss is determined, whereas when the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbols and stopped and displayed, the win is determined. Then, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started.

In addition, in FIG. 117(H), when all of the plurality of SP reach suggesting images SG are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) and disappear, the battle effect does not develop, and the conversion process to gray scale is performed. After the game ends, the content shown in FIG. 117(K) is established, and the failure is confirmed, and the process proceeds to FIG. 117(L) to proceed with the effect.

117(A) to (B), the display screen 7a is cracked at the time when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. However, after that, during the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern, the display screen 7a becomes a mode in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, and the screen crack image CLK appears on the display screen. 7a as a whole. In addition, in FIGS. 117(D) to (F), the display screen 7a returns to a state in which no cracks are generated in the display screen 7a, but after that, during the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols, the display screen 7a again becomes a state in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, and the screen crack image CLK is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. As a result, the player is given a sense of anticipation that it may develop into an effect with a high degree of expectation for winning or an announcement of winning in the future. It is possible to provide a novel presentation that has never existed in the past by being able to apply it by the screen crack image CLK that has changed to a mode in which cracks run in all directions.

[Screen cracking effect B]
Next, screen split effect B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, after the big hit, on the premise that it is in a state of transition to a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state), which is a time-saving state, the player, so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B A game ball is shot to the right and a game is played by hitting to the right. In a right-handed game, a right-handed image MY in which "Right-handed" is written in the right arrow image is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The right-handed image MY is a stereoscopic image designed in full color. Note that the right-handed image MY may be a planar image designed in full color.

The right shot image MY is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, like the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ. In addition, the right-handed image MY is always displayed in the state of transition to the jackpot game state and the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state), which is a time-saving state, and various effect images and other various Visibility is not obstructed by images. Here, since it is a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) which is a time saving state, the background image is the time saving time background image HG1 (the spacecraft image).

A player shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B and plays a game by hitting to the right. Of the two game balls entered, the first entered game ball is determined and displayed as a yellow (gold) first reservation icon 9B by prefetching, and the last entered game ball is white by prefetching. is determined and displayed as the second pending icon 9B. When the yellow (gold) first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, one stock pending icon 9B exists accordingly.

When the yellow (gold) first reserved icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. be done. At this time, a variable performance (variation display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. At this point, the display screen 7a is in a state in which no cracks have occurred on the display screen 7a. When the variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern by the yellow (gold) variation icon 9C is started, the player pays attention (concentrates) on the variation (yellow (gold) variation icon 9C). Stop the operation of 60.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, after that, as shown in FIG. The left effect pattern 8L becomes a display mode of temporarily stopping at the number "6" having a bright blue color, the middle effect pattern 8C becomes a display mode of temporarily stopping at the number "6" having a bright blue color, and the right production pattern 8R becomes a light blue color. It becomes a display mode to temporarily stop with the number "6". At this time, the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, the white first pending icon 9B, and the variable display position are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a). At this time, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are all in the middle of high-speed fluctuation production (variation display). In addition, when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a bright blue color, the game state after the big hit is a low probability short time state (low probability high base state). Become.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118(C), a cracked screen image CLK in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a is displayed over the entire display screen 7a. The screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen, and is placed in the foreground, right hitting image MY, small left production pattern 8LZ, small medium production pattern 8CZ and small right production pattern. It is located behind the 8RZ. In other words, as described above, the screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen, so in FIG. , the display screen 7a is displayed in a state in which it is not cracked, and in FIG. 118(C), the state in which the display screen 7a is not cracked changes to a state in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a. there is

As a result, the right shot image MY, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ and the small right effect symbol 8RZ maintain their own modes. In other words, the right-handed image MY, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ are placed in front of the cracked screen image CLK (on the front side), so that they are split. A display mode that does not change can be realized. In this way, the right shot image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are not visible through the cracked screen crack image CLK, Visibility is not hindered by the screen crack image CLK. On the other hand, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are arranged behind the screen split image CLK. As a result, the time saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are visually recognized through the cracked screen crack image CLK. It is possible to realize a display mode that is changed to a split mode by the split image CLK. In addition, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are visually recognized through the cracked screen crack image CLK, so the screen cracks. Visibility may be hindered by the image CLK. The cracked screen image CLK is a moving image in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, but it is a still image after the cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a. good too.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(D), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), suggesting to the player that the win is high. (In other words, the ally character CRA with wings shining golden (in other words, the expectation of winning is set high) is arranged behind the split screen image CLK and displayed large on the display screen 7a, and the background image is the time-saving background. The image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) is switched to a rich suggestive background image SHG, which is a dedicated background image of the friendly character CRA having wings shining in gold. In addition, the ally character CRA, which has wings that shine in golden color, is a battle production that is highly expected to hit, or a hit notification (after a big hit game, it is possible to shift to a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state). This suggests that it will develop into a notification). Here, it is suggested to develop into a winning notification. In the battle production, a full-color ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, a full-color enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. Yes, it is a super reach effect (SP reach effect) in which the hit expectation is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a win. In the battle production, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position (the position of the second movable accessory 15 in FIG. 1) to the center position of the display screen 7a (the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a). , and a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). be.

After that, the ally character CRA with golden shining wings pulverizes the cracked screen image CLK from behind the cracked screen image CLK while holding the sword image KG with the right hand, resulting in a crushed screen image SSI, as shown in FIG. 118(E). , the fragment image HB of the screen image is forward (toward the player) and scatters and falls in all directions, the screen crack image CLK disappears, and the wings shine golden. ally character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and a bright red number "7" (number pattern) that indicates a win appears (is displayed) in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. ). In other words, at the timing when the cracked screen image CLK changes to the shattered screen image SSI, the effect pattern of the number "7" (number pattern) having a bright red color indicating a win suddenly appears in the center of the display screen 7a ( displayed). As a result, at the timing when the cracked screen image CLK changes to the shattered screen image SSI, an unprecedented effect is developed in which a bright red number "7" (number pattern) suddenly appears. The sudden appearance of the number "7" (number pattern) in bright red color actually informs the transition to a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot game. can be realized.

A friendly character CRA with golden wings shatters the cracked screen image CLK from behind the cracked screen image CLK, causing the fragment image HB to scatter in front of the cracked screen image CLK, thereby creating the cracked screen image CLK. A pulverized mode can be expressed, and a realistic presentation can be provided to the player as if the display screen 7a were pulverized by the ally character CRA having golden shining wings. In this way, the fragment image HB scatters toward the front of the cracked screen image CLK, so that the cracked screen image CLK is pulverized, and the cracked screen image SSI that pulverizes the cracked screen image CLK is realized. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(F), the teammate character CRA with shining golden wings is displayed again in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, and a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is drawn. As the center line, the left effect pattern 8L appears again on the center line in a display mode temporarily stopping at the bright red number "7", and the middle effect pattern 8C temporarily stops at the bright red number "7". It reappears in the display mode, and reappears in the display mode in which the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stops at the number "7" having a bright red color. In other words, in FIG. 118(B), when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the number "6" having a bright blue color, in FIG. 118(F) , the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are switched to a display mode temporarily stopped at the number "7" having a bright red color.

After that, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stop-displayed in line with the number "7" having a bright red color, and the win is confirmed. At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "7" having bright red, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright red. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with the number "7" having a bright red color. That is, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, number "7" having bright red color). In addition, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the number "7" having a bright red color, so that the gaming state after the big hit is a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state). becomes.

After that, the background image is switched from the background image SHG suggesting a rich win to the background image of the opening of the big win, and the opening of the big win is started. After that, the background image is switched from the background image of the opening of the jackpot to the background image of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game advantageous to the player is started. Along with this, the player starts operating the handle 60 again to play a right-handed game. After the jackpot game, it will shift to a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state).

Thus, in the screen cracking effect B, the display screen 7a is cracked at the time when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started in FIGS. Although there is no mode, after that, in the state where the production patterns are temporarily stopped (small left production pattern 8LZ, small medium production pattern 8CZ, small right production pattern 8RZ are all fluctuating production (variable display). ), the display screen 7a becomes a state in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, and the screen crack image CLK is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. As a result, the player is shown a sense of expectation on the display screen 7a that it may develop into a winning notification (announcement of transition to a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state) after a jackpot game). It can be imparted by the screen crack image CLK changed from a mode in which no crack is generated to a mode in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, thereby providing an unprecedented novel presentation.

In the screen cracking effect B, in FIG. 118 (D), the ally character CRA having wings shining in golden color is notified of the winning (after the jackpot game, a high-accuracy short-time state (high-accuracy high base state)). It was suggested that it would develop into a report). However, suggesting development to a performance (battle performance) with a high expectation of winning, after FIG. Therefore, the process may proceed to FIG. 118(E).

[Screen cracking effect C]
Next, screen split effect C will be described with reference to FIG. Here, after the big hit, on the premise that it is in a state of transition to a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state), which is a time-saving state, the player, so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B A game ball is shot to the right and a game is played by hitting to the right. In a right-handed game, a right-handed image MY in which "Right-handed" is written in the right arrow image is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The right-handed image MY is a stereoscopic image designed in full color. Note that the right-handed image MY may be a planar image designed in full color.

The right shot image MY is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, like the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ. In addition, the right-handed image MY is always displayed in the state of transition to the jackpot game state and the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state), which is a time-saving state, and various effect images and other various Visibility is not obstructed by images. Here, since it is a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) which is a time saving state, the background image is the time saving time background image HG1 (the spacecraft image).

A player shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B and plays a game by hitting to the right. Of the two game balls entered, the first entered game ball is determined and displayed as a yellow (gold) first reservation icon 9B by prefetching, and the last entered game ball is white by prefetching. is determined and displayed as the second pending icon 9B. When the yellow (gold) first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, one stock pending icon 9B exists accordingly.

When the yellow (gold) first reserved icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. be done. At this time, a variable performance (variation display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. At this point, the display screen 7a is in a state in which no cracks have occurred on the display screen 7a. When the variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern by the yellow (gold) variation icon 9C is started, the player pays attention (concentrates) on the variation (yellow (gold) variation icon 9C). Stop the operation of 60.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, after that, as shown in FIG. A reach is formed in which the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with a bright blue number "6", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with a bright blue number "6", and the middle effect pattern 8C is fluctuating. be done. At this time, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ are all in the middle of high-speed fluctuation production (variation display).

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, the right effect symbol 8R, the yellow (gold) variable icon 9C, the white first pending icon 9B, and the variable display position are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and the As shown in 118 (I), the background image is a dedicated background image of a friendly character CRA having golden shining wings that suggests to the player that the background image is a high hit from the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft). At some point, the background image SHG is switched to a highly suggestive background image, and a cracked screen image CLK in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

At this time, at the center of the cracked screen image CLK, a sword image KG imitating a sword that divides the display screen 7a is displayed in a display mode in which it pierces (pops out) forward (toward the player) from behind the cracked screen image CLK. Along with this, the fragment image HB of the screen image is forward (toward the player) and scattered and dropped in all directions to form a third crack area CB3 closed to the screen crack image CLK. (Appearance), the display mode is such that the tip of the sword image KG protrudes from the third split region CB3. That is, the split screen image CLK is displayed at the timing when the sword image KG is displayed. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect as if the display screen 7a (screen) were divided by the sword image KG (member image).

The sword image KG pierces (jumps out) the cracked screen image CLK from the rear toward the front (player side), so that the fragment image HB scatters toward the front of the cracked screen image CLK, thereby pulverizing the cracked screen image CLK. It is possible to express the state in which the sword image KG is being used, and it is possible to provide the player with a realistic effect as if the display screen 7a were being pulverized by the sword image KG.

The screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen, and is placed in the foreground, right hitting image MY, small left production pattern 8LZ, small medium production pattern 8CZ and small right production pattern. It is located behind the 8RZ. In other words, since the screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen as described above, in FIG. , the display screen 7a is displayed in a state in which it is not cracked, and in FIG. 118(I), the state in which the display screen 7a is not cracked changes to a state in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a. there is

As a result, the right shot image MY, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ and the small right effect symbol 8RZ maintain their own modes. That is, the right shot image MY, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ can be prevented from changing to the split mode by the screen split image CLK. In this way, the right shot image MY, the small left effect pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ are not visible through the cracked screen crack image CLK, Visibility is not hindered by the screen crack image CLK. On the other hand, the rich-hit-suggestion background image SHG is arranged behind the screen split image CLK. As a result, since the rich suggestive background image SHG is visually recognized through the cracked screen image CLK, visibility may be hindered by the screen crack image CLK. The cracked screen image CLK is a moving image in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, but it is a still image after the cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a. good too.

After that, when the sword image KG is hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), as shown in FIG. The character CRA, holding the sword image KG with the right hand, is placed behind the split screen image CLK and displayed large on the display screen 7a. In addition, the ally character CRA, which has wings that shine in golden color, is a battle production that is highly expected to hit, or a hit notification (after a big hit game, it is possible to shift to a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state). This suggests that it will develop into a notification). Here, it suggests that it develops into a hit notification (announced that it shifts to a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game). In the battle production, a full-color ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, a full-color enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. Yes, it is a super reach effect (SP reach effect) in which the hit expectation is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a win. In the battle production, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position (the position of the second movable accessory 15 in FIG. 1) to the center position of the display screen 7a (the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a). , and a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a). be.

An ally character CRA with shining golden wings is placed behind the split screen image CLK while holding the sword image KG with her right hand, and is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a. The head and chest of the ally character CRA with shiny colored wings and a partial area of the hit suggestion background image SHG (the area corresponding to the third crack area CB3, the ally character with golden shining wings It becomes easy to visually recognize the head and chest of the CRA and the area of the hit-rich suggestive background image SHG that does not overlap in the front-rear direction. In other words, the visibility of the head and chest of the friendly character CRA with golden wings is not hindered by the third crack area CB3 formed in the screen crack image CLK. However, the region of the screen crack image CLK in which the third crack region CB3 is not formed impedes the visibility of the teammate character CRA, excluding the head, which has golden wings.

After that, the broken screen image CLK is pulverized from behind the broken screen image CLK with the sword image KG held by the friendly character CRA, who has wings shining in golden color, as shown in FIG. It develops into a winning notification (notifying that it will shift to a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) after a jackpot game), and the fragment image HB of the screen image is in front (towards the player side) and in all directions. The broken screen image CLK disappears, the ally character CRA with shining golden wings disappears (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the bright red number "7" (number ) is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(F) described above, the teammate character CRA having golden shining wings is displayed again in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, and passes through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. With the horizontal line as the center line, on this center line, the left production pattern 8L appears again in a display mode temporarily stopped at the bright red number "7", and the middle production pattern 8C temporarily stops at the bright red number "7". It reappears in the display mode of stopping, and reappears in the display mode of temporarily stopping with the number "7" in which the right effect symbol 8R has a bright red color. In other words, in FIG. 118(H), when the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R forming the reach are in the display state of temporarily stopping at the number "6" having a bright blue color, the above-described FIG. 118(F) , the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are switched to a display mode temporarily stopped at the number "7" having a bright red color.

After that, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stop-displayed in line with the number "7" having a bright red color, and the win is confirmed. At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "7" having bright red, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright red. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with the number "7" having a bright red color.

After that, the background image is switched from the background image SHG suggesting a rich win to the background image of the opening of the big win, and the opening of the big win is started. After that, the background image is switched from the background image of the opening of the jackpot to the background image of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game advantageous to the player is started. Along with this, the player starts operating the handle 60 again to play a right-handed game. After the jackpot game, it will shift to a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state).

118(H) to 118(J), the display screen 7a is cracked at the time when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. Although there is no mode, after that, in the state where the reach is formed by the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R (small left production pattern 8LZ, small medium production pattern 8CZ, small right production pattern 8RZ are all The display screen 7a has cracks running in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, and the screen crack image CLK is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. As a result, the player is shown a sense of expectation on the display screen 7a that it may develop into a winning notification (announcement of transition to a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state) after a jackpot game). It can be imparted by the screen crack image CLK changed from a mode in which no crack is generated to a mode in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, thereby providing an unprecedented novel presentation.

Note that, in the screen cracking effect C, in FIG. 118(J), the teammate character CRA having wings shining in golden color suggests that it will develop into a hit notification. However, suggesting development to a performance (battle performance) with a high expectation of winning, a battle performance is performed after FIG. Therefore, the process may proceed to FIG. 118(E).

[Screen cracking effect D]
Next, the screen split effect D will be described with reference to FIG. Here, after the big hit, on the premise that it is in a state of transition to a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability high base state), which is a time-saving state, the player, so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B A game ball is shot to the right and a game is played by hitting to the right. In a right-handed game, a right-handed image MY in which "Right-handed" is written in the right arrow image is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The right-handed image MY is a stereoscopic image designed in full color. Note that the right-handed image MY may be a planar image designed in full color.

The right shot image MY is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, like the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, and the small right effect symbol 8RZ. In addition, the right-handed image MY is always displayed in the state of transition to the jackpot game state and the high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state), which is a time-saving state, and various effect images and other various Visibility is not obstructed by images. Here, since it is a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) which is a time saving state, the background image is the time saving time background image HG1 (the spacecraft image). It should be noted that above the small middle effect symbol 8CZ, similarly to the right hitting image MY, a small right hitting image SAG in which "Right hitting" is written in the right arrow image is arranged and displayed.

The small right-handed image SAG is a smaller version of the right-handed image MY, and has a figure similar to the right-handed image MY. Although the small right-handed image SAG is a stereoscopic image designed in full color, it is designed in a color different from the right-handed image MY (for example, if the right-handed image MY is mainly designed in red, , the small right-handed image SAG is mainly designed in white or light gray). Like the right-handed image MY, the small right-handed image SAG is also arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a. Note that the small right-handed image SAG may be a planar image designed in full color.

A player shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B and plays a game by hitting to the right. Of the two game balls entered, the first entered game ball is determined and displayed as the red first reservation icon 9B by prefetching, and the last entered game ball is prefetched and displayed as the white second holding icon 9B. It is determined and displayed as the pending icon 9B. When the red first pending icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the red variable icon 9C, one stock pending icon 9B exists accordingly.

When the red first reserved icon 9B moves to the variable display position and becomes the red variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. At this time, a variable performance (variation display) of small performance symbols such as a small left performance symbol 8LZ, a small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and a small right performance symbol 8RZ is also started. At this point, the display screen 7a is in a state in which no cracks have occurred on the display screen 7a. The player stops operating the handle 60 in order to watch (concentrate) on the variation (red variation icon 9C) when the variation effect (variation display) of the performance symbol by the red variation icon 9C is started. .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, after that, as shown in FIG. With the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of 7a as the center line, the left production pattern 8L stops at the number "1" having bright green color and the middle production pattern 8C has bright blue color on this center line. It becomes a display mode to stop at the number "2", and it becomes a display mode to stop at the number "3" in which the right production pattern 8R has a bright green color. In this state, the small performance symbols such as the small left performance symbol 8LZ, the small middle performance symbol 8CZ, and the small right performance symbol 8RZ do not stop, and all of the small performance symbols fluctuate at high speed. It is during production (variation display). In other words, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are pseudo-stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119C, a cracked screen image CLK in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a is displayed over the entire display screen 7a. The screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen, and is placed in the foreground, right hitting image MY, small left production pattern 8LZ, small medium production pattern 8CZ, small right production pattern. It is arranged behind 8RZ and a small right-handed image SAG. In other words, since the screen crack image CLK imitates a colorless and transparent glass-like screen as described above, in FIG. , the display screen 7a is displayed in a state in which it is not cracked, and in FIG. 119(C), the state in which the display screen 7a is not cracked changes to a state in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a. there is

As a result, the right shot image MY, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, the small right effect symbol 8RZ and the small right shot image SAG maintain their own modes. That is, the right shot image MY, the small left effect symbol 8LZ, the small medium effect symbol 8CZ, the small right effect symbol 8RZ, and the small right shot image SAG are arranged in front of the screen split image CLK. Thus, it is possible to realize a display mode that does not change to a split mode. In this way, the right-handed image MY, the small left-handed design 8LZ, the small medium-sized design 8CZ, the small right-handed design 8RZ, and the small right-handed design SAG are viewed through the cracked screen image CLK. Therefore, visibility is not hindered by the screen split image CLK. On the other hand, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spaceship), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, the right production pattern 8R, the pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9B, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position is the screen split. It is arranged behind the image CLK. As a result, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, the right production pattern 8R, the pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9B, the variable icon 9C, and the variable display position are cracked. Since it is visually recognized through the cracked screen image CLK, it is possible to realize a display mode that is changed to a cracked mode by the cracked screen image CLK. In addition, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft), the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, the right production pattern 8R, the pending icon 9A, the pending icon 9B, the change icon 9C, the change display position is the cracked screen. Since the screen is viewed through the split image CLK, visibility may be hindered by the screen split image CLK. The cracked screen image CLK is a moving image in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, but it is a still image after the cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a. good too.

After that, to the left of the center of the screen crack image CLK, there is a fourth crack area CB4 in which the fragment image HB of the screen image is forward (toward the player), scattered in all directions, dropped, and closed. formed (appear). As a result, in the rear area corresponding to the fourth split area CB4, the right part of the left effect pattern 8L is cut by the fourth split area CB4, and the time saving background image HG1 (inside the spacecraft image) is also displayed. The display mode is cut by the fourth crack region CB4. On the other hand, through the fourth split region CB4, the right arm and a portion of the right wing of the ally character CRA, which has wings that shine in gold, suggesting to the player that the hit is strong, and a part of the wings that shine in gold. A partial region of the hit suggestive background image SHG, which is a dedicated background image of the winged ally character CRA (a region corresponding to the fourth cracked region CB4, is the right arm and It becomes easy to visually recognize a part of the right wing portion and the region of the hit-rich suggestion background image SHG that does not overlap in the front-rear direction. Although the cracked screen image CLK is cracked, the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) is visible through other regions of the screen cracked image CLK where the fourth cracked region CB4 is not formed. ing.

The ally character CRA, which has wings that shine in golden color, is a battle production that is a production with a high degree of expectation for winning, or a winning notification (notifying that it will shift to a high-accuracy short-time state (high-accuracy high base state) after a jackpot game). This suggests that it will develop into Here, it is suggested that it will develop into a battle production, which is a production with a high degree of expectation for winning.

After that, at the center of the cracked screen image CLK, as shown in FIG. 119(D), a fragmented image HB of the screen image scatters forward (toward the player) in all directions. A closed fifth crack region CB5 is formed (appears). As a result, in the rear area corresponding to the fifth split area CB5, the entire middle effect pattern 8C is cut by the fifth split area CB5, and the time saving background image HG1 (inside the spacecraft image) is also the fifth It becomes a display mode cut by the crack area CB5. On the other hand, through the fifth split area CB5, the head, left chest, and a part of the left wing of the ally character CRA, which has golden wings that suggest to the player that the hit is strong, A partial area of the hit suggestive background image SHG, which is a dedicated background image of the friendly character CRA with shining golden wings (an area corresponding to the fifth split area CB5, and is a friendly character having shining golden wings The head, left chest, and part of the left wing portion of the CRA, and the area of the hit-rich suggestive background image SHG that does not overlap in the front-rear direction, become easily visible. Although the screen crack image CLK has cracks through other regions where the fourth crack region CB4 and the fifth crack region CB5 are not formed in the screen crack image CLK, the time-saving background image HG1 (the spacecraft image ) is visible.

In this way, at the timing when the fourth cracked region CB4 and the fifth cracked region CB5 are formed, a part of the friendly character CRA having golden shining wings can be seen only through the fourth cracked region CB4 and the fifth cracked region CB5. It is possible to realize a novel production that has never been seen before. In addition, in the face crack image CLK, only through the fourth crack region CB4 and the fifth crack region CB5 where the display screen 7a is split, at least a part of the teammate character CRA having golden shining wings can be visually recognized. , By the appearance of this ally character CRA, it may develop into a production with a high degree of expectation from now on, or a hit notification (notifying that it will shift to a high probability short time state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game). It is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that it will not be possible.

After that, an ally character CRA with golden wings shatters the cracked screen image CLK from behind the cracked screen image CLK, so that the fragment image HB of the screen image is in front (toward the player) and in four directions. When it scatters and falls in all directions, the background image in the area corresponding to the scattered fragment image HB switches from the time-saving background image HG1 (image in the spacecraft) to the hit-rich suggestive background image SHG, and each time the fragment image HB scatters. While the area of the time-saving background image HG1 (inside the spacecraft image) displayed in 119 becomes smaller, the area of the displayed hit-rich suggestive background image SHG becomes larger, and as shown in FIG. 119 (E), When the screen split image CLK disappears, all the background images are switched from the time-saving background image HG1 (image inside the spacecraft) to the hit-rich suggestion background image SHG.

When all the background images are switched from the time-saving background image HG1 (image in the spacecraft) to the hit-rich suggestive background image SHG, then the friendly character CRA having golden shining wings is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and SP An SP reach suggesting image SG written as "battle effect" suggesting a reach (super reach) is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. The SP reach suggesting image SG is a full-color image, mainly blue, and a stereoscopic image having a horizontally long rectangular shape. Note that the SP reach suggestion image SG may be a planar image.

After that, the SP reach suggesting image SG, which is displayed and arranged largely in the center of the display screen 7a, is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the background image hits, and the time saving background designed in full color from the rich suggestive background image SHG. Switch to image HG2 (planetary ground image). It should be noted that the background image may be switched from the background image SHG, which suggests a strong win, to a background image designed in full color and dedicated to the production of a battle.

In the battle production, as shown in FIG. 119(G), a full-color ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, a full-color enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a ally character appears in the center of the display screen 7a. This is an effect in which CRA and the enemy character CRB fight, and is a super ready-to-win effect (SP ready-to-win effect) in which the degree of expectation for winning is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a win.

When the battle effect is started, as shown in FIG. 119(H), the second movable accessory 15 having the character string "OARO" formed on its surface, which is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, moves to the retracted position (see FIG. 119H). 1) to the center position of the display screen 7a (a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, a vertical line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a, intersection)). As a result, the player's sense of anticipation for winning is further heightened by the actuation (movement) of the second movable accessory 15 .

When the second movable accessory 15 advances to the advanced position and stops, after that, as shown in FIG. tilted about 10 degrees with respect to), then rotates clockwise to return to the original horizontal state, and moves from the advanced position to the retracted position. Due to the reciprocating movement of the second movable accessory 15 between the retracted position and the advanced position, the right-handed shot image MY displayed at the upper right side of the display screen 7a is covered with the second movable accessory 15. A period will occur. On the other hand, the small right-handed image SAG, which is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a and is arranged on the frontmost side like the right-handed image MY, causes the second movable accessory 15 to retreat. Due to the reciprocating movement between the position and the advanced position, the period of being covered by the second movable accessory 15 does not occur at all. The pattern 8LZ, the small medium effect pattern 8CZ, and the small right effect pattern 8RZ also have a period covered by the second movable accessory 15 due to the reciprocating movement of the second movable accessory 15 between the retracted position and the advanced position. does not occur at all.

After that, in the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, as shown in FIG. (underground image of the planet), the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is set as the center line, and the left effect pattern 8L temporarily stops at the number "7" having a bright red color on this center line. Appears again in the display mode, the middle production pattern 8C appears again in the display mode temporarily stopped at the number "7" having a bright red color, and the right production pattern 8R appears again in the display mode temporarily stopped at the number "7" having a bright red color. After that, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stop-displayed in line with the same number "7" having bright red color, and the win is confirmed. At the timing when the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left production pattern 8LZ is stopped and displayed with the number "7" having bright red, and the small medium production pattern 8CZ is bright red. , and the small right performance symbol 8RZ is stopped and displayed with the number "7" having a bright red color. In addition, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the number "7" having a bright red color, so that the gaming state after the big hit is a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state). becomes.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. Similarly, a large right-handed shot image BAG in which "Right-handed shot" is written in the right arrow image is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a large size.

The large right-handed image BAG is an enlarged version of the right-handed image MY, and has a figure similar to the right-handed image MY. Although the large right-handed image BAG is a stereoscopic image designed in full color, it is designed in a color different from the right-handed image MY (for example, if the right-handed image MY is mainly designed in red, , the small right-handed image SAG is mainly designed in white or light gray, and the large right-handed image BAG is mainly designed in blue). The large right-handed image BAG is also arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, like the right-handed image MY and the small right-handed image SAG. The large right-handed image SAG may be a planar image designed in full color.

In this way, as images suggesting the game state of "right-handed game", the right-handed image MY, the small right-handed image SAG, and the large right-handed image BAG are simultaneously displayed on the display screen 7a. The sizes of the images increase in the order of the small right-handed image SAG, the right-handed image MY, and the large right-handed image BAG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119(L), the background image switches from the time-saving background image HG3 (the underground image of the planet) to the jackpot opening background image AHG, and the jackpot opening is started. After that, the background image is switched from the background image of the opening of the jackpot to the background image of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game advantageous to the player is started. Along with this, the player starts operating the handle 60 again to play a right-handed game. After the jackpot game, it will shift to a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state).

In addition, in FIGS. 119C and 119D, since the ally character CRA with shining golden wings does not appear, the ally character CRA with shining golden wings will pass through the fourth cracked region CB4 and the fifth cracked region CB5. When a part of the character CRA cannot be visually recognized, there is no development to a battle performance, and development to a winning notification (notifying a shift to a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) after a jackpot game). The left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern, and the stop display is performed to confirm the loss (the number patterns in FIG. 119 (B) may be stopped and displayed. , may be stopped with other number symbols). At this time, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ and the small right production pattern 8RZ are also stop-displayed in the patterns respectively corresponding to the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R.

As described above, in the screen cracking effect D, the display screen 7a is cracked at the time when the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started in FIGS. However, after that, during the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern, the display screen 7a becomes a mode in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, and the screen crack image CLK appears on the display screen. 7a as a whole. As a result, the player may develop into a production with a high degree of expectation from now on, or a winning notification (notifying that it will shift to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) after a jackpot game). This feeling of anticipation can be imparted by the screen crack image CLK, which changes from a state in which no cracks are generated in the display screen 7a to a state in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, thereby creating a novel performance that has never existed before. can be provided.

119(C) to 119(D), only through the fourth crack area CB4 and the fifth crack area CB5 where the display screen 7a is split, is the screen split effect D. Since at least a part of the character can be visually recognized, the appearance of this friendly character CRA will create a sense of anticipation that it may develop into an effect with a high degree of expectation for winning or an announcement of winning in the future. can be given to a person.

119(C) to (D), the screen cracking effect D suggests that the friend character CRA, who has wings shining in gold, develops into a battle effect that is highly expected to win. there were. However, suggesting the development of the hit notification (notifying that the high-precision time-saving state (high-precision high base state) is shifted to after the jackpot game), after FIG. Develops into a transition to a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state)), and the fragment image HB of the screen image is forward (towards the player side) and scatters and falls in all directions. Then, the broken screen image CLK disappears, the friendly character CRA with shining golden wings disappears (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the bright red number "7" (number pattern) appears on the display screen 7a. 119(J) after that. As a result, the production pattern of the bright red number "7" (number pattern) suddenly appears, which is unprecedented, and this sudden appearance of the bright red number "7" (number pattern) In fact, it is possible to realize a novel performance that the production pattern of the pattern) notifies that it will shift to a high-probability short-time state (high-probability high base state) after the jackpot game.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the screen cracking effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of types of images are displayed on the display screen 7a (screen) of the image display device 7, one of the plurality of types of images is a right-handed hitting image MY that encourages right-handed hitting, One of the plurality of types of images is a cracked screen image CLK in which at least a portion of the display screen 7a (screen) is cracked, and the right-handed image MY is arranged in front of the cracked screen image CLK. (Figs. 117(B), (E) to (F) for screen cracking effect A, Figs. 118(C) to (D) for screen cracking effect B, Figs. (J), and FIG. 119 (C) to (D) for screen cracking effect D). According to this configuration, by arranging the right-handed image MY in front of the screen crack image CLK, for example, a crack runs in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a (screen), and at least a part of the display screen 7a (screen) Even if the screen image CLK is changed to a split screen image, the aspect of the right-handed image MY can be maintained, that is, a display aspect that does not change to the split aspect can be realized. As a result, the right-handed image MY is pulverized, and the feeling of uneasiness that the right-handed game state will end can be eliminated, and at least a part of the display screen 7a (screen) is changed to a broken state. Since the cracked screen image CLK has been created, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that it may develop into a performance with a high degree of expectation for winning or a notification of winning. performance can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

In addition, for example, a crack runs in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a (screen), and the display screen 7a (screen) changes to a state in which at least a part of the display screen 7a (screen) is cracked. It is also possible to suddenly provide an impact effect as if 7a were suddenly cracked, reduce the monotony of the game effect, and contribute to suppressing the decline in the desire to play.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one of the plurality of types of images in the screen split effect A of FIG. 117, the screen split effect B of FIG. 118, the screen split effect C, and the screen split effect D of FIG. Design 8L (production design), medium production design 8C (production design), right production design 8R (production design), left production design 8L (production design), medium production design 8C (production design), right production design 8R ( Effect pattern) is arranged behind the screen split image CLK. According to this configuration, the left effect pattern 8L (effect pattern), the middle effect pattern 8C (effect pattern), and the right effect pattern 8R (effect pattern) are arranged behind the screen split image CLK. , a display mode that is changed to a split mode by the screen split image CLK can be realized.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one of the plurality of types of images in the screen split effect A of FIG. 117, the screen split effect B of FIG. 118, the screen split effect C, and the screen split effect D of FIG. Small left direction pattern 8LZ (small direction pattern) corresponding to pattern 8L (direction pattern), small medium direction pattern 8CZ (small direction pattern) corresponding to medium direction pattern 8C (direction pattern), right direction pattern 8R (Production pattern) and corresponding small right production pattern 8RZ (small production pattern), left production pattern 8LZ (small production pattern), small medium production pattern 8CZ (small production pattern), small right production The symbol 8RZ (small effect symbol) is arranged in front of the split screen image CLK. According to this configuration, the left production pattern 8LZ (small production pattern), the small medium production pattern 8CZ (small production pattern), and the small right production pattern 8RZ (small production pattern) are in front of the screen split image CLK. Therefore, it is possible to realize a display mode that does not change to a cracked mode due to the cracked screen image CLK.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the screen split effect A of FIG. pattern), the left production pattern 8L (production pattern) and the right production pattern 8R (production pattern) in the ready state are arranged in front of the screen split image CLK. According to this configuration, when the ready-to-win state is reached, the left production pattern 8L (production pattern) and the right production pattern 8R (production pattern) in the ready-to-reach state are arranged in front of the screen split image CLK. Therefore, it is possible to realize a display mode that does not change to a split mode due to the screen split image CLK. In other words, before reaching the reach state, the left effect pattern 8L (effect pattern) and the right effect pattern 8R (effect pattern) are arranged behind the screen split image CLK, so the screen split. While it is possible to realize a display mode that changes to a divided mode by the image CLK, when it comes to the ready-to-win state, the left production pattern 8L (production pattern) in the ready-to-reach state and the right production pattern 8R (production Since the pattern) is arranged in front of the cracked screen image CLK, it is possible to realize a display mode that does not change to a cracked mode due to the cracked screen image CLK. be able to.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the screen cracking effect B of FIG. , at the timing when the cracked screen image CLK changes to the shattered screen image SSI, the effect pattern of the number "7" having a bright red color appears to notify the winning. According to this configuration, it is possible to realize a novel effect that has never existed in the past, in which the effect pattern suddenly appears at the timing when the screen crack image CLK changes to the crushed screen image SSI.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the screen split effect C of FIG. 118(I), one of the plurality of types of images is a sword image KG ( The screen split image CLK is displayed at the timing when the sword image KG (member image) is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to realize an effect as if the display screen 7a (screen) is divided by the sword image KG (member image), and it is possible to provide the player with an impactful effect.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the screen cracking effect D shown in FIGS. A friendly character CRA with shining wings (a specific image with a high chance of winning), and at least part of the friendly character CRA with golden shining wings (specific image) is arranged behind the cracked screen image CLK. , and can be visually recognized through a fourth split area CB4 (specific area) and a fifth split area CB5 (specific area) formed in the screen split image CLK. According to this configuration, at least a portion of the teammate character CRA having golden wings (specific image ) can be visually recognized, the appearance of this ally character CRA (specific image) creates a sense of expectation that it may develop into a performance with a high degree of expectation for winning or a winning notification. It can be given to a player.

[Modification]
A modification of the screen cracking effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the screen split effect A of FIG. 117, the screen split effect B, the screen split effect C of FIG. 118, the screen split effect D of FIG. was scattered. At this time, the display mode may be such that the image is reflected in the scattered fragment image HB. In this way, the aspect in which the split screen image CLK is pulverized can be expressed in a more realistic manner. Further, the image reflected in the scattered fragment image HB may be various images arranged behind the screen division image CLK, or may be a dedicated image reflected in the scattered fragment image HB.

[Modification 2]
117, screen break B, screen break C, and screen break D shown in FIG. 119 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a. A broken screen image CLK was displayed on the entire display screen 7a. However, instead of the entire display screen 7a, for example, a colorless and transparent crystal image having a predetermined shape is arranged on the display screen 7a, and the crystal image is not broken. You may make it perform the change production|presentation which changes to the aspect in which a crack runs and cracks. Even in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a performance with a high degree of expectation for winning or a sense of expectation that it may develop into a winning notification by the changing performance of the crystal image, which is unprecedented. We can provide innovative performances.

[Modification 3]
In the screen split effect A of FIG. 117, the screen split effect B of FIG. 118, the screen split effect C of FIG. 118, and the screen split effect D of FIG. The display mode is such that cracks run in all directions, and the variable icon 9C and the suspended icon 9B (suspended icon 9A) can be visually recognized through the cracked screen image CLK in which the cracks run. At this time, the screen crack image CLK has a display mode in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9B (suspended icon 9A) also have a display mode in which cracks actually run and crack (variation A display mode in which the icon 9C and the suspended icon 9B (the suspended icon 9A) are crushed may be used. In this way, when the screen crack image CLK is displayed in a display mode in which cracks run in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a, the change icon 9C and the suspension icon 9B (suspension icon 9A) are prefetched to cause suspension changes. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the degree of expectation for winning may increase.

[Modification 4]
In the screen cracking effect D of FIG. 119(H) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the battle effect is started, the character string "OARO" is formed on the surface, which is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position (the position of the second movable accessory 15 in FIG. 1) to the center position of the display screen 7a (a horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, and and the vertical line passing through the center of the lower side) and started to move downward to the advanced position. However, instead of the second movable role 15, or together with the second movable role 15, the first movable role 14 may appear on the display screen 7a and move in the horizontal direction, or the frame may be moved. The accessory 69 may be moved from the retracted position toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other. Similarly to the second movable role 15, the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role 69 are also operated during the variation effect (variation display) of the effect pattern, the first movable role 14 and the frame movable role The player has a higher expectation for winning after the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is completed (that is, after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed) compared to when the object 69 is not operated. It suggests to Therefore, the player is highly interested in the operation (movement) of the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 . As a result, the player's sense of expectation for winning increases due to the actuation (operation) of the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 in the same manner as the actuation (operation) of the second movable accessory 15 .

[Modification 5]
In the screen split effect A of FIG. 117, the screen split effect B, the screen split effect C of FIG. 118, the screen split effect D of FIG. 119, and the screen split effect D of FIG. Cracks appeared in all directions, and the entire display screen 7a was cracked. However, the cracked screen image CLK may be a state in which a crack is present in a part of the display screen 7a instead of the entire display screen 7a. The part of the display screen 7a may be the center of the display screen 7a, the periphery separated from the center of the display screen 7a by a certain distance (for example, 50 mm), or the upper left side of the display screen 7a. or lower left.

[Modification 6]
In the screen split effect D of FIG. 119 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a small right-handed image SAG is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen as an image suggesting a game state of "right-handed game". It was arranged above the medium production pattern 8CZ, and "right shot" was written in the right arrow image. However, as a small right-handed shot image SAG, the characters "Right-handed shot" may be removed from the right-handed arrow image, and a simple right-handed image may be used. In this case, the character "Right shot" is removed from the right arrow image, so that the small right shot image SAG, which is a simple right arrow image, is mainly designed in white or light gray.

[Modification 7]
In the screen split effect D of FIG. 119 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a right-handed image MY is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a as an image suggesting a game state of "right-handed game". The right-handed image SAG is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a and above the small medium effect symbol 8CZ. Various decorative members provided on the center decorative body 10 do not cover the front of the right-handed image MY, and include a small-sized right-handed image SAG, a small left-handed design 8LZ, a small medium-sized design 8CZ, and a small right-handed design 8RZ. may cover the front of the The decoration member covering the front of the small right-handed image SAG, the small left-handed design 8LZ, the small medium-sized design 8CZ, and the small right-handed design 8RZ is transparent or translucent, and is further designed. may be By doing this, the fronts of the small right-handed image SAG, the small left-handed design 8LZ, the small medium-sized design 8CZ, and the small right-handed design 8RZ are covered with various decorative members provided on the center decorative body 10. , the player's line of sight can be naturally attracted to the center and surroundings of the display screen 7a, and the visibility of the right-handed shot image MY which is not covered with various decorative members provided on the center decorative body 10 is improved. By being able to secure it, it is possible to continue suggesting to the player "playing with the right hand". In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 are the number of reservations (number ), the reserved number display area is placed to the left of the small left production pattern 8LZ, or a small right-handed image designed in full color It may be placed near the SAG (bottom left of the small right-handed image SAG). In this case, the reserved number display area is also the small right-handed image SAG, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ. It will be covered with various decorative members provided.

[Modification 8]
In the screen split effect A of FIG. 117, the screen split effect B, the screen split effect C of FIG. 118, the screen split effect D of FIG. 119, and the screen split effect D of FIG. A suspension icon 9B was displayed as an image on the display screen 7a as special figure suspension. However, the number of reservations (number ) may be provided having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The number of the first special figure reservation (the number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special figure reservations (the number of reservations (number)) are both numerical images and are the front side, the lower left side of the display screen 7a Or, it is arranged on the left side of the small left effect symbol 8LZ and never disappears from the display screen 7a.

The number of the first special figure reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special figure reservation (number of reservations (number)) are both numeric images and are on the front side, so the number of the first special figure reservation The number (holding number (number)) and the number of the second special figure holding (holding number (number)) can be arranged in front of the screen split image CLK. As a result, for example, even if a crack runs in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a (screen), and at least a portion of the display screen 7a (screen) changes to a cracked state, resulting in a cracked screen image CLK, the first It is possible to maintain the number of special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)) and the number of second special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)), that is, to realize a display form that does not change to a broken form. The number of 1 special figure reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)) are not crushed.

The number of the first special reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special reservation (number of reservations (number)) may be separated by a predetermined distance to the left and right, or may be separated by a predetermined distance up and down. may be separated. In addition, the number of the first special figure reservation (number of reservations (number)) is shown in blue, and the number of the second special figure reservation (number of reservations (number)) is shown in red. This is to make it easier to distinguish between the number of first special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)) and the number of second special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)) by using different colors. The number of the first special reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special reservation (number of reservations (number)) are placed in the vicinity of the right-handed image MY (to the left or below the right-handed image MY) You can place it. In addition, the number of the first special reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special reservation (number of reservations (number)) are set to the left of the small left production pattern 8LZ in the screen cracking production D of FIG. By arranging it toward the right side, it may be arranged near the small right-handed image SAG designed in full color (lower left of the small right-handed image SAG).

In addition, the number of the first special figure reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special figure reservations (number of reservations (number)) are shown in FIGS. As with the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ, the full color display state may be maintained without being converted to gray scale. In addition, the number of the first special reservation (number of reservations (number)) and the number of the second special reservation (number of reservations (number)) are converted to grayscale in FIGS. 117 (G) to (H) However, unlike the right-handed image MY, the small left production pattern 8LZ, the small medium production pattern 8CZ, and the small right production pattern 8RZ, which are still maintained in full color, they can be converted to gray scale. It may be converted.

[Modification 9]
In the screen split effect A of FIG. 117 (G) in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a), suggesting SP reach (super reach). A plurality of SP reach suggestion images SG marked with "battle effect" are arranged so as not to overlap each other. However, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R remain displayed, and the time saving background image HG1 (image in the spacecraft), the plurality of SP reach suggesting images SG, and the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are also displayed. It may be converted to grayscale (this conversion to grayscale is performed in real time). Then, in FIG. 117 (I), when the conversion process to grayscale is completed and the SP reach suggesting image SG returns to a full-color image mainly composed of blue, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are the original It may also be possible to return to color (when the SP reach suggesting image SG returns to a full-color image mainly composed of blue, the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R are hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a ). After that, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R may be hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) before the battle effect of FIG. 117(J) is started. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of effects in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are converted into gray scale.

[Modification 10]
117 in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the screen split effect B, the screen split effect C, and the screen split effect D shown in FIG. MY was displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. However, the right-handed shot image MY may be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. Even in this case, the second movable accessory 15 moves back and forth between the retracted position and the advanced position so that the right-handed shot image MY displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a is covered with the second movable accessory 15. A period of time will occur. Also, the right-handed shot image MY may be displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 moves back and forth between the retracted position and the advanced position so that the right-handed image MY displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a is covered with the second movable accessory 15. No period occurs at all. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second start port 21 are the number of reservations (number ), in the vicinity of the pending number display area (left, right, above, or below the pending number display area, for example, a position about mm away from ), the right-handed image MY may be arranged and displayed. Even with this configuration, since the right-handed image MY, which is a stereoscopic image designed in full color, is arranged in front of the screen crack image CLK, for example, the display screen 7a (screen) has cracks in all directions from the center. Even if at least a part of the display screen 7a (screen) changes to a cracked state and becomes a screen cracked image CLK, the state of the right-handed image MY is maintained, that is, the display state does not change to a cracked state. can be realized.

[Modification 11]
117, screen break B, screen break C, and screen break D shown in FIG. Alternatively, other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect H1-1]
A game machine that displays a plurality of types of images on a screen,
One of the plurality of types of images is a right-handed image that encourages right-handed hitting,
one of the plurality of types of images is a cracked screen image in which at least a portion of the screen is cracked;
The right shot image is arranged in front of the screen split image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-1,
One of the plurality of types of images is a production pattern,
The production pattern is arranged behind the screen split image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a small production design corresponding to the production design;
The small effect pattern is arranged in front of the screen split image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-3,
When the production pattern is in a ready-to-reach state with a predetermined pattern, the production pattern in the ready-to-reach state is arranged in front of the screen crack image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a pulverized screen image in which the screen is pulverized;
At the timing when the cracked screen image changes to the crushed screen image, the effect pattern for notifying the winning appears.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a member image imitating a member that divides the screen;
The screen split image is displayed at the timing when the member image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect H1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image with a high degree of expectation for winning;
At least part of the specific image is arranged behind the screen split image and is visible through a specific area formed in the screen split image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment includes the production button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68 as operation units to be operated by the player. , triggers, etc. may be used. Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses display devices (main display screen 7a, sub-display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined into one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-described rendering examples and/or modifications may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 includes a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a). The display effects performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 3... Game area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Reservation image (reservation icon)
9C... Relevant pending image (suspended icon)
14 First movable accessory 15 Second movable accessory 17 Large winning opening opening start opening 20 First start opening (first ball entrance)
21 … Second starting port (second entrance)
64 Sub-display screen 69 Frame movable accessory 66 Frame lamp 81 Game control microcomputer 91 Production control microcomputer 101 Image control microcomputer

Claims (3)

A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of production patterns capable of informing a win or a loss,
Before the set of performance symbols starts moving in the variable direction, a plurality of performance symbols out of the set of performance symbols move in directions different from each other and in directions different from the respective fluctuation directions, After that, it is possible to execute the first effect that moves in the fluctuation direction,
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first production,
One or more production patterns out of the plurality of production patterns may move in a direction opposite to the fluctuation direction,
One or more of the plurality of production patterns may move in a direction perpendicular to the fluctuation direction,
One or more of the plurality of production patterns may move in a direction oblique to the fluctuation direction,
A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
In the first production, the set of production patterns are separated from each other,
After the first production, a second production is executed in which the set of production patterns is returned to the state before being separated and the fluctuation is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images